NETGEAR ProSafe 7200 Cli Manual

ProSafe 7200 Managed

Switches CLI Manual,

Software Version 8.0

NETGEAR , Inc.

350 Plumeria Dr.

San Jose, CA 95124 USA

202-10530-01

July 2009

© 2009 by NETGEAR, Inc. All rights reserved. FullManual.

Trademarks

NETGEAR and the NETGEAR logo are registered trademarks, and ProSafe is a trademark of NETGEAR, Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders. Portions of this document are copyright Intoto, Inc.

July 2009

Statement of Conditions

In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, NETGEAR reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice.

NETGEAR does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein.

EN 55 022 Declaration of Conformance

This is to certify that the ProSafe 7200 Series Stackable Managed Switches is shielded against the generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of Council Directive 89/336/EEC, Article 4a. Conformity is declared by the application of EN 55 022 Class B (CISPR 22).

Certificate of the Manufacturer/Importer

It is hereby certified that the ProSafe 7200 Series Stackable Managed Switches has been suppressed in accordance with the conditions set out in the BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 and Vfg 46/1992. The operation of some equipment (for example, test transmitters) in accordance with the regulations may, however, be subject to certain restrictions. Please refer to the notes in the operating instructions.

The Federal Office for Telecommunications Approvals has been notified of the placing of this equipment on the market and has been granted the right to test the series for compliance with the regulations.

Bestätigung des Herstellers/Importeurs

Es wird hiermit bestätigt, daß dasProSafe 7200 Series Stackable Managed Switches gemäß der im BMPT-AmtsblVfg

243/1991 und Vfg 46/1992 aufgeführten Bestimmungen entstört ist. Das vorschriftsmäßige Betreiben einiger Geräte

(z.B. Testsender) kann jedoch gewissen Beschränkungen unterliegen. Lesen Sie dazu bitte die Anmerkungen in der

Betriebsanleitung.

Das Bundesamt für Zulassungen in der Telekommunikation wurde davon unterrichtet, daß dieses Gerät auf den Markt gebracht wurde und es ist berechtigt, die Serie auf die Erfüllung der Vorschriften hin zu überprüfen.

Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Statement

This equipment is in the Class B category (information equipment to be used in a residential area or an adjacent area thereto) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Data Processing

Equipment and Electronic Office Machines aimed at preventing radio interference in such residential areas. When used near a radio or TV receiver, it may become the cause of radio interference. Read instructions for correct handling.

ii v1.0, July 2009

Product and Publication Details

Model Number:

Publication Date:

FSM72xx/GSM72xx

July 2009

Product Family:

Product Name: managed switch

ProSafe 7200 Series Stackable Managed Switches

Home or Business Product: Business

Language: English

Publication Part Number: 202-10530-01

Publication Version Number 1.0

v1.0, July 2009 iii

iv v1.0, July 2009

Managed Switch CLI Manual, Release 8.0

Contents

About This Manual

Audience ........................................................................................................................... ix

About the Software ........................................................................................................... ix

Scope .......................................................................................................................... x

Product Concept ......................................................................................................... x

Chapter 1

Using the Command-Line Interface

Command Syntax ...........................................................................................................1-1

Command Conventions ..................................................................................................1-2

Common Parameter Values ...........................................................................................1-3

Unit/Slot/Port Naming Convention ..................................................................................1-3

Using the “No” Form of a Command ..............................................................................1-4

Managed Switch Modules ..............................................................................................1-5

Command Modes ...........................................................................................................1-5

Command Completion and Abbreviation ........................................................................1-9

CLI Error Messages ........................................................................................................1-9

CLI Line-Editing Conventions .......................................................................................1-10

Using CLI Help .............................................................................................................1-11

Accessing the CLI .........................................................................................................1-12

Chapter 2

Stacking Commands

Dedicated Port Stacking .................................................................................................2-1

Front Panel Stacking Commands .................................................................................2-10

Chapter 3

Switching Commands

Port Configuration Commands .......................................................................................3-2

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Commands ..................................................................3-10

VLAN Commands .........................................................................................................3-30

Double VLAN Commands ............................................................................................3-45 v v1.0, July 2009


Voice VLAN Commands ...............................................................................................3-47

Provisioning (IEEE 802.1p) Commands .......................................................................3-50

Protected Ports Commands .........................................................................................3-51

Private Group Commands ............................................................................................3-53

GARP Commands ........................................................................................................3-55

GVRP Commands ........................................................................................................3-58

GMRP Commands .......................................................................................................3-60

Port-Based Network Access Control Commands .........................................................3-63

Storm-Control Commands ............................................................................................3-77

Port-Channel/LAG (802.3ad) Commands ....................................................................3-89

Port Mirroring ..............................................................................................................3-112

Static MAC Filtering ....................................................................................................3-114

DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands ...............................................................3-119

Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands ........................................................................3-130

IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands ................................................................3-138

IGMP Snooping Querier Commands ..........................................................................3-147

Port Security Commands ............................................................................................3-153

LLDP (802.1AB) Commands ......................................................................................3-157

LLDP-MED Commands ..............................................................................................3-168

Denial of Service Commands .....................................................................................3-179

MAC Database Commands ........................................................................................3-191

ISDP Commands ........................................................................................................3-193

Chapter 4

Routing Commands

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands ............................................................4-1

IP Routing Commands ...................................................................................................4-8

Router Discovery Protocol Commands ........................................................................4-20

Virtual LAN Routing Commands................................................................................... 4-24

DHCP and BOOTP Relay Commands .........................................................................4-25

IP Helper Commands ...................................................................................................4-27

ICMP Throttling Commands .........................................................................................4-30

Chapter 5

Quality of Service (QoS) Commands

Class of Service (CoS) Commands ................................................................................5-2

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Commands ................................................................5-8 vi v1.0, July 2009


DiffServ Class Commands ...........................................................................................5-10

DiffServ Policy Commands ...........................................................................................5-19

DiffServ Service Commands ........................................................................................5-25

DiffServ Show Commands ...........................................................................................5-26

MAC Access Control List (ACL) Commands ................................................................5-32

IP Access Control List (ACL) Commands .....................................................................5-37

IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) Commands .................................................................5-44

Auto-Voice over IP Commands ....................................................................................5-48

Chapter 6

Utility Commands

Auto Install Commands ..................................................................................................6-2

Dual Image Commands ..................................................................................................6-4

System Information and Statistics Commands ...............................................................6-6

Logging Commands .....................................................................................................6-18

System Utility and Clear Commands ............................................................................6-24

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Commands .....................................................6-34

DHCP Server Commands ............................................................................................6-40

DNS Client Commands ................................................................................................6-55

Packet Capture Commands .........................................................................................6-61

Serviceability Packet Tracing Commands ....................................................................6-63

Cable Test Command ...................................................................................................6-83 sFlow Commands .................................................................................................. 6-84

Chapter 7

Management Commands

Configuring the Switch Management CPU .....................................................................7-2

Network Interface Commands ........................................................................................7-4

Console Port Access Commands ...................................................................................7-8

Telnet Commands ........................................................................................................7-11

Secure Shell (SSH) Commands ...................................................................................7-16

Management Security Commands ...............................................................................7-19

Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) Commands .........................................................7-20

Access Commands .......................................................................................................7-28

User Account Commands .............................................................................................7-29

SNMP Commands ........................................................................................................7-40

RADIUS Commands .....................................................................................................7-52 vii v1.0, July 2009


TACACS+ Commands ..................................................................................................7-67

Configuration Scripting Commands ..............................................................................7-71

Pre-login Banner and System Prompt Commands .......................................................7-73

Chapter 8

Log Messages

Core ................................................................................................................................8-1

Utilities ............................................................................................................................8-4

Management ...................................................................................................................8-6

Switching ......................................................................................................................8-10

QoS ..............................................................................................................................8-16

Routing/IPv6 Routing ....................................................................................................8-17

Multicast .......................................................................................................................8-21

Stacking ........................................................................................................................8-23

Technologies ................................................................................................................8-23

O/S Support ..................................................................................................................8-26

Chapter 9

Captive Portal Commands

Capitve Portal Global Commands ..................................................................................9-1

Captive Portal Configuration Commands .......................................................................9-5

Captive Portal Status Commands ................................................................................9-14

Captive Portal Client Connection Commands ..............................................................9-19

Captive Portal Interface Commands .............................................................................9-23

Captive Portal Local User Commands .........................................................................9-24

Captive Portal User Group Commands ........................................................................9-31

Chapter 10

Command List viii v1.0, July 2009

About This Manual

This document describes command-line interface (CLI) commands you use to view and configure

7200 Series Switch software. You can access the CLI by using a direct connection to the serial port or by using telnet or SSH over a remote network connection.

Note: This document contains both standalone and stacking commands.

Audience

This document is for system administrators who configure and operate systems using 7200 Series

Switch software. It provides an understanding of the configuration options of the software.

Software engineers who integrate software into their hardware platform can also benefit from a description of the configuration options.

This document assumes that the reader has an understanding of the software base and has read the appropriate specification for the relevant networking device platform. It also assumes that the reader has a basic knowledge of Ethernet and networking concepts.

Refer to the release notes for the application-level code. The release notes detail the platformspecific functionality of the Switching, Routing, SNMP, Configuration, Management, and other packages. The suite of features the packages support is not available on all the platforms to which software has been ported.

About the Software

The software has two purposes:

• Assist attached hardware in switching frames, based on Layer 2, 3, or 4 information contained in the frames.

• Provide a complete device management portfolio to the network administrator. ix v1.0, July 2009

x


Scope

The software encompasses both hardware and software support. The software is partitioned to run in the following processors:

• CPU – This code runs the networking device management portfolio and controls the overall networking device hardware. It also assists in frame forwarding, as needed and specified. This code is designed to run on multiple platforms with minimal changes from platform to platform.

• Networking device processor – This code does the majority of the packet switching, usually at wire speed. This code is platform dependent, and substantial changes might exist across products.

Product Concept

Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet switching continues to evolve from high-end backbone applications to desktop switching applications. The price of the technology continues to decline, while performance and feature sets continue to improve. Devices that are capable of switching

Layers 2, 3, and 4 are increasingly in demand. The software provides a flexible solution to these ever-increasing needs.

The exact functionality provided by each networking device on which the software base runs varies depending upon the platform and requirements of the NETGEAR0 software.

The software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for managing both the software and the network. You can manage the software by using one of the following three methods:

• Command-Line Interface (CLI)

• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

• Web-based

Each of the management methods enables you to configure, manage, and control the software locally or remotely using in-band or out-of-band mechanisms. Management is standards-based, with configuration parameters and a private MIB providing control for functions not completely specified in the MIBs.

Conventions, Formats, and Scope

The conventions, formats, and scope of this manual are described in the following paragraphs: v1.0, July 2009


• Typographical Conventions .

This manual uses the following typographical conventions::

Italic

Bold

Fixed italic

Emphasis, books, CDs, file and server names, extensions

User input, IP addresses, GUI screen text

Command prompt, CLI text, code

URL links

• Formats .

This manual uses the following formats to highlight special messages:

Note: This format is used to highlight information of importance or special interest.

Tip: This format is used to highlight a procedure that will save time or resources.

Warning: Ignoring this type of note may result in a malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Danger: This is a safety warning. Failure to take heed of this notice may result in personal injury or death.

• Scope .

This manual is written for the 7200 Series Switch.

Product Version

Manual Publication Date

ProSafe 7000 Series Managed Switch

July 2009

Note: Product updates are available on the NETGEAR, Inc. website at http://kbserver.netgear.com

xi v1.0, July 2009


How to Print This Manual

To print this manual, your computer must have the free Adobe Acrobat reader installed in order to view and print PDF files. The Acrobat reader is available on the Adobe Web site at http://www.adobe.com

.

Revision History

Part Number

Version

Number

Date

202-10530-01 1.0

Description

July 2009 Product update: New firmware and new user Interface xii v1.0, July 2009

Chapter 1

Using the Command-Line Interface

The command-line interface (CLI) is a text-based way to manage and monitor the system. You can access the CLI by using a direct serial connection or by using a remote logical connection with telnet or SSH.

This chapter describes the CLI syntax, conventions, and modes. It contains the following sections:

• “Command Syntax” on page 1-1

• “Command Conventions” on page 1-2

• “Common Parameter Values” on page 1-3

• “Unit/Slot/Port Naming Convention” on page 1-3

• “Using the “No” Form of a Command” on page 1-4

• “Managed Switch Modules” on page 1-5

• “Command Modes” on page 1-5

• “Command Completion and Abbreviation” on page 1-9

• “CLI Error Messages” on page 1-9

• “CLI Line-Editing Conventions” on page 1-10

• “Using CLI Help” on page 1-11

• “Accessing the CLI” on page 1-12

Command Syntax

A command is one or more words that might be followed by one or more parameters. Parameters can be required or optional values.

Some commands, such as show network or clear vlan, do not require parameters. Other commands, such as network parms , require that you supply a value after the command. You must type the parameter values in a specific order, and optional parameters follow required parameters. The following example describes the network parms command syntax:

Format network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [gateway]

1-1 v1.0, July 2009


• network parms is the command name.

• <ipaddr> and <netmask> are parameters and represent required values that you must enter after you type the command keywords.

• [gateway] is an optional parameter, so you are not required to enter a value in place of the parameter.

The CLI Command Reference lists each command by the command name and provides a brief description of the command. Each command reference also contains the following information:

• Format shows the command keywords and the required and optional parameters.

• Mode identifies the command mode you must be in to access the command.

• Default shows the default value, if any, of a configurable setting on the device.

The show commands also contain a description of the information that the command shows.

Command Conventions

In this document, the command name is in bold font. Parameters are in italic font . You must replace the parameter name with an appropriate value, which might be a name or number.

Parameters are order dependent.

The parameters for a command might include mandatory values, optional values, or keyword choices. Table 1 describes the conventions this document uses to distinguish between value types.

Table 1. Parameter Conventions

Symbol

<> angle brackets

[] square brackets

{} curly braces

| Vertical bars

[{}] Braces within square brackets

Example Description

<value>

[value]

Indicates that you must enter a value in place of the brackets and text inside them.

Indicates an optional parameter that you can enter in place of the brackets and text inside them.

{choice1 | choice2}

Indicates that you must select a parameter from the list of choices.

choice1 | choice2 Separates the mutually exclusive choices.

[{choice1 | choice2}]

Indicates a choice within an optional element.

Using the Command-Line Interface v1.0, July 2009

1-2


Common Parameter Values

Parameter values might be names (strings) or numbers.To use spaces as part of a name parameter, enclose the name value in double quotes. For example, the expression “System Name with

Spaces” forces the system to accept the spaces. Empty strings (““) are not valid user-defined strings. Table 2 describes common parameter values and value formatting.

Table 2. Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Description ipaddr ipv6-address

This parameter is a valid IP address. You can enter the IP address in the following formats: a (32 bits) a.b (8.24 bits) a.b.c (8.8.16 bits) a.b.c.d (8.8.8.8)

In addition to these formats, the CLI accepts decimal, hexadecimal and octal formats through the following input formats (where n is any valid hexadecimal, octal or decimal number):

0xn (CLI assumes hexadecimal format)

0n (CLI assumes octal format with leading zeros) n (CLI assumes decimal format)

FE80:0000:0000:0000:020F:24FF:FEBF:DBCB, or

FE80:0:0:0:20F:24FF:FEBF:DBCB, or

FE80::20F24FF:FEBF:DBCB, or

FE80:0:0:0:20F:24FF:128:141:49:32

For additional information, refer to RFC 3513.

Interface or unit/slot/port

Valid unit, slot, and port number separated by forward slashes. For example, 0/1 represents slot number 0 and port number 1.

Logical Interface Represents a logical slot and port number. This is applicable in the case of a portchannel (LAG). You can use the logical unit/slot/port to configure the port-channel.

Character strings Use double quotation marks to identify character strings, for example, “System Name with Spaces”. An empty string (“”) is not valid.

Unit/Slot/Port Naming Convention

Managed switch software references physical entities such as cards and ports by using a unit/slot/ port naming convention. The software also uses this convention to identify certain logical entities, such as Port-Channel interfaces.

Using the Command-Line Interface 1-3 v1.0, July 2009


The slot number has two uses. In the case of physical ports, it identifies the card containing the ports. In the case of logical and CPU ports it also identifies the type of interface or port.

Table 3. Type of Slots

Slot Type Description

Physical slot numbers Physical slot numbers begin with zero, and are allocated up to the maximum number of physical slots.

Logical slot numbers Logical slots immediately follow physical slots and identify port-channel (LAG) or router interfaces.

CPU slot numbers The CPU slots immediately follow the logical slots.

The port identifies the specific physical port or logical interface being managed on a given slot.

Table 4. Type of Ports

Port Type

Physical Ports

Logical Interfaces

CPU ports

Description

The physical ports for each slot are numbered sequentially starting from zero.

Port-channel or Link Aggregation Group (LAG) interfaces are logical interfaces that are only used for bridging functions.

VLAN routing interfaces are only used for routing functions.

Loopback interfaces are logical interfaces that are always up.

Tunnel interfaces are logical point-to-point links that carry encapsulated packets.

CPU ports are handled by the driver as one or more physical entities located on physical slots.

Note: In the CLI, loopback and tunnel interfaces do not use the unit/slot/port format. To specify a loopback interface, you use the loopback ID. To specify a tunnel interface, you use the tunnel ID.

Using the “No” Form of a Command

The no keyword is a specific form of an existing command and does not represent a new or distinct command. Almost every configuration command has a no form. In general, use the no form to reverse the action of a command or reset a value back to the default. For example, the no


1-4


shutdown configuration command reverses the shutdown of an interface. Use the command without the keyword no to re-enable a disabled feature or to enable a feature that is disabled by default. Only the configuration commands are available in the no form.

Managed Switch Modules

Managed switch software consists of flexible modules that can be applied in various combinations to develop advanced Layer 2/3/4+ products. The commands and command modes available on your switch depend on the installed modules. Additionally, for some show commands, the output fields might change based on the modules included in the software.

The software suite includes the following modules:

• Switching (Layer 2)

• Quality of Service

• Management (CLI, Web UI, and SNMP)

• IPv6 Management—Allows management of the device through an IPv6 through an IPv6 address without requiring the IPv6 Routing package in the system. The management address can be associated with the network port (front-panel switch ports), a routine interface (port or

VLAN) and the Service port.

• Stacking

Not all modules are available for all platforms or software releases.

Command Modes

The CLI groups commands into modes according to the command function. Each of the command modes supports specific software commands. The commands in one mode are not available until you switch to that particular mode, with the exception of the User EXEC mode commands. You can execute the User EXEC mode commands in the Privileged EXEC mode.

The command prompt changes in each command mode to help you identify the current mode.

Table 5 describes the command modes and the prompts visible in that mode.

Note: The command modes available on your switch depend on the software modules that are installed. For example, a switch that does not support BGPv4 does not have the Router BGPv4 Command Mode.



Table 5. CLI Command Modes

Command Mode

User EXEC

Privileged EXEC

Global Config

Policy Map

Config

Policy Class

Config

Class Map Config

Prompt

Switch>

Switch#

Switch (Config)#

VLAN Config Switch (Vlan)#

Interface Config Switch (Interface <unit/slot/port>)#

Line Config

Switch (Interface Loopback <id>)#

Switch (Interface Tunnel <id>)#

Switch (line)#

Switch (Config-policy-map)#

Switch (Config-policy-class-map)#

Switch (Config-class-map)#

Ipv6_Class-Map

Config

Router OSPF

Config

Switch (Config-class-map)#

Switch (Config-router)#

Router OSPFv3

Config

Switch (Config rtr)#

Router RIP Config Switch (Config-router)#

Router BGP

Config

Switch (Config-router)#

MAC Access-list

Config

Switch (Config-mac-access-list)#

Mode Description

Contains a limited set of commands to view basic system information.

Allows you to issue any EXEC command, enter the VLAN mode, or enter the Global

Configuration mode.

Groups general setup commands and permits you to make modifications to the running configuration.

Groups all the VLAN commands.

Manages the operation of an interface and provides access to the router interface configuration commands.

Use this mode to set up a physical port for a specific logical connection operation.

Contains commands to configure outbound telnet settings and console interface settings.

Contains the QoS Policy-Map configuration commands.

Consists of class creation, deletion, and matching commands. The class match commands specify Layer 2, Layer 3, and general match criteria.

Contains the QoS class map configuration commands for IPv4.

Contains the QoS class map configuration commands for IPv6.

Contains the OSPF configuration commands.

Contains the OSPFv3 configuration commands.

Contains the RIP configuration commands.

Contains the BGP4 configuration commands.

Allows you to create a MAC Access-List and to enter the mode containing MAC Access-List configuration commands.



Table 5. CLI Command Modes (continued)

Command Mode Prompt

TACACS Config Switch (Tacacs)#

DHCP Pool

Config

DHCPv6 Pool

Config

Switch (Config dhcp-pool)#

Switch (Config dhcp6-pool)#

Mode Description

Contains commands to configure properties for the TACACS servers.

Contains the DHCP server IP address pool configuration commands.

Contains the DHCPv6 server IPv6 address pool configuration commands.

Stack Global

Config Mode

ARP Access-List

Config Mode

Switch (Config stack)#

Switch (Config-arp-access-list)#

Table 6 explains how to enter or exit each mode.

Allows you to access the Stack Global Config

Mode.

Contains commands to add ARP ACL rules in an ARP Access List.

Table 6. CLI Mode Access and Exit

Command Mode Access Method Exit or Access Previous Mode

User EXEC This is the first level of access.

Privileged EXEC From the User EXEC mode, enter enable .

Global Config

VLAN Config exit ,

Interface Config From the Global Config mode, enter

interface <unit/slot/port> or interface loopback <id> or interface tunnel <id>

To exit to the Global Config mode, enter exit . To return to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter Ctrl-

Z .

Line Config

Policy-Map

Config

Policy-Class-Map

Config

From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter configure.

From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter vlan database.

From the Global Config mode, enter lineconfig .

From the Global Config mode, enter policy-map <name> in .

From the Policy Map mode enter class .

To exit, enter

To exit to the User EXEC mode, enter exit or press Ctrl-Z.

To exit to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter exit , or press Ctrl-Z .

To exit to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter or press

Z .

logout

Ctrl-Z .

.

To exit to the Global Config mode, enter exit return to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter


Z .

To exit to the Policy Map mode, enter return to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter

Z .

exit

. To

Ctrl-

. To

Ctrl-



Table 6. CLI Mode Access and Exit (continued)

Command Mode Access Method Exit or Access Previous Mode

Class-Map

Config

Ipv6-Class-Map

Config

Router OSPF

Config

Router OSPFv3

Config

Router RIP

Config

Router BGP

Config

MAC Access-list

Config

From the Global Config mode, enter class-map , and specify the optional keyword ipv4 to specify the Layer 3 protocol for this class.

See “class-map” on page 5-10 for more information.

From the Global Config mode, enter class-map and specify the optional keyword ipv6 to specify the Layer 3 protocol for this class.

See “class-map” on page 5-10 for more information.

From the Global Config mode, enter router ospf .

From the Global Config mode, enter ipv6 router ospf

From the Global Config mode, enter router rip .

.

From the Global Config mode, enter

router bgp <asnumber> .

From the Global Config mode, enter mac access-list extended

<name> .

To exit to the Global Config mode, enter


Z .

exit . To return to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter Ctrl-

Z .


Z .


Z .


Z .

To exit to the Global Config mode, enter return to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter

Z .


Z .

exit . To

Ctrl-

TACACS Config From the Global Config mode, enter tacacs-server host

<ip-addr> , where <ip-addr> is the IP address of the TACACS server on your network.


Z .

DHCP Pool

Config

From the Global Config mode, enter ip dhcp pool <pool-name> .


Z .


1-8


Table 6. CLI Mode Access and Exit (continued)

Command Mode Access Method

DHCPv6 Pool

Config

Stack Global

Config Mode

ARP Access-List

Config Mode

Exit or Access Previous Mode

From the Global Config mode, enter ip dhcpv6 pool <pool-name> .


Z .

From the Global Config mode, enter the stack command.

To exit to the Global Config mode, enter the exit command. To return to the Privileged EXEC mode, enter Ctrl-Z .

From the Global Config mode, enter the arp access-list command .

To exit to the Global Config mode, enter the exit command. To return to the Privileged

EXEC mode, enter Ctrl-Z .

Command Completion and Abbreviation

Command completion finishes spelling the command when you type enough letters of a command to uniquely identify the command keyword. Once you have entered enough letters, press the

SPACEBAR or TAB key to complete the word.

Command abbreviation allows you to execute a command when you have entered there are enough letters to uniquely identify the command. You must enter all of the required keywords and parameters before you enter the command.

CLI Error Messages

If you enter a command and the system is unable to execute it, an error message appears. Table 7 describes the most common CLI error messages.

Table 7. CLI Error Messages

Message Text

% Invalid input detected at '^' marker.

Description

Indicates that you entered an incorrect or unavailable command.

The carat (^) shows where the invalid text is detected. This message also appears if any of the parameters or values are not recognized.


1-9


Table 7. CLI Error Messages

Message Text

Command not found / Incomplete command. Use ? to list commands.

Ambiguous command

Description

Indicates that you did not enter the required keywords or values.

Indicates that you did not enter enough letters to uniquely identify the command.

CLI Line-Editing Conventions

Table 8 describes the key combinations you can use to edit commands or increase the speed of command entry. You can access this list from the CLI by entering help from the User or

Privileged EXEC modes.

Table 8. CLI Editing Conventions

Key Sequence

DEL or Backspace

Ctrl-A

Ctrl-E

Ctrl-F

Ctrl-B

Ctrl-D

Ctrl-U, X

Ctrl-K

Ctrl-W

Ctrl-T

Ctrl-P

Ctrl-R

Ctrl-N

Ctrl-Y

Ctrl-Q

Ctrl-S

Ctrl-Z

Tab, <SPACE>

Description

Delete previous character

Go to beginning of line

Go to end of line

Go forward one character

Go backward one character

Delete current character

Delete to beginning of line

Delete to end of line

Delete previous word

Transpose previous character

Go to previous line in history buffer

Rewrites or pastes the line

Go to next line in history buffer

Prints last deleted character

Enables serial flow

Disables serial flow

Return to root command prompt

Command-line completion



Table 8. CLI Editing Conventions (continued)

Key Sequence

Exit

?

Description

Go to next lower command prompt

List available commands, keywords, or parameters

Using CLI Help

Enter a question mark (?) at the command prompt to display the commands available in the current mode.

(switch) >?

enable Enter into user privilege mode.

help Display help for various special keys.

logout Exit this session. Any unsaved changes are lost.

ping Send ICMP echo packets to a specified IP address.

quit Exit this session. Any unsaved changes are lost.

show Display Switch Options and Settings.

telnet Telnet to a remote host.

Enter a question mark (?) after each word you enter to display available command keywords or parameters.

(switch) #network ?

javamode Enable/Disable.

mgmt_vlan Configure the Management VLAN ID of the switch.

parms Configure Network Parameters of the router.

protocol Select DHCP, BootP, or None as the network config

protocol.

If the help output shows a parameter in angle brackets, you must replace the parameter with a value.

(switch) #network parms ?

<ipaddr> Enter the IP address.

If there are no additional command keywords or parameters, or if additional parameters are optional, the following message appears in the output:

<cr> Press Enter to execute the command

You can also enter a question mark (?) after typing one or more characters of a word to list the available command or parameters that begin with the letters, as shown in the following example:



(switch) #show m?

mac-addr-table mac-address-table monitor

Accessing the CLI

You can access the CLI by using a direct console connection or by using a telnet or SSH connection from a remote management host.

For the initial connection, you must use a direct connection to the console port. You cannot access the system remotely until the system has an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. You can set the network configuration information manually, or you can configure the system to accept these settings from a BOOTP or DHCP server on your network. For more information, see

“Network Interface Commands” on page 7-4 .


1-12

Chapter 2

Stacking Commands

The Stacking Commands chapter includes the following sections:

• “Dedicated Port Stacking” on page 2-1

• “Front Panel Stacking Commands” on page 2-10

Note: The commands in this chapter are in one of two functional groups:

Note: Show commands display switch settings, statistics, and other information.

Note: Configuration commands configure features and options of the switch. For every configuration command, there is a show command that displays the configuration setting.

The Primary Management Unit is the unit that controls the stack.

Dedicated Port Stacking

This section describes the commands you use to configure dedicated port stacking.

stack

This command sets the mode to Stack Global Config.

Format

Mode stack

Global Config

2-1 v1.0, July 2009

member <unit> <switchindex>

Stack Global Config


member

This command configures a switch. The < unit > is the switch identifier of the switch to be added/removed from the stack. The < switchindex > is the index into the database of the supported switch types, indicating the type of the switch being preconfigured. The switch index is a 32-bit integer. This command is executed on the Primary Management Unit.

Format

Mode

Note: Switch index can be obtained by executing the show supported switchtype command in User EXEC mode.

no member

This command removes a switch from the stack. The <unit> is the switch identifier of the switch to be removed from the stack. This command is executed on the Primary Management Unit.

Format

Mode no member <unit>

Stack Global Config switch priority

This command configures the ability of a switch to become the Primary Management Unit. The

<unit> is the switch identifier. The <value> is the preference parameter that allows the user to specify, priority of one backup switch over another. The range for priority is 1 to 15. The switch with the highest priority value will be chosen to become the Primary Management Unit if the active Primary Management Unit fails. The switch priority defaults to the hardware management preference value 1. Switches that do not have the hardware capability to become the Primary

Management Unit are not eligible for management.

Default

Format

Mode enabled switch <unit> priority <value>

Global Config

Stacking Commands 2-2 v1.0, July 2009


switch renumber

This command changes the switch identifier for a switch in the stack. The < oldunit > is the current switch identifier on the switch whose identifier is to be changed. The < newunit > is the updated value of the switch identifier. Upon execution, the switch will be configured with the configuration information for the new switch, if any. The old switch configuration information will be retained, however the old switch will be operationally unplugged. This command is executed on the Primary Management Unit.

Note: If the management unit is renumbered, then the running configuration is no longer applied (i.e. the stack acts as if the configuration had been cleared)

Format

Mode switch <oldunit> renumber <newunit>

Global Config movemanagement

This command moves the Primary Management Unit functionality from one switch to another.

The < fromunit > is the switch identifier on the current Primary Management Unit. The

< tounit > is the switch identifier on the new Primary Management Unit. Upon execution, the entire stack (including all interfaces in the stack) is unconfigured and reconfigured with the configuration on the new Primary Management Unit. After the reload is complete, all stack management capability must be performed on the new Primary Management Unit. To preserve the current configuration across a stack move, execute the copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config (in Privileged EXEC) command before performing the stack move.

A stack move causes all routes and layer 2 addresses to be lost. This command is executed on the

Primary Management Unit. The system prompts you to confirm the management move.

Format

Mode movemanagement <fromunit> <tounit>

Stack Global Config

Stacking Commands v1.0, July 2009

2-3


slot

This command configures a slot in the system. The <unit/slot> is the slot identifier of the slot. The < cardindex > is the index into the database of the supported card types, indicating the type of the card being preconfigured in the specified slot. The card index is a 32-bit integer. If a card is currently present in the slot that is unconfigured, the configured information will be deleted and the slot will be re-configured with default information for the card.

Format

Mode slot <unit/slot> <cardindex>

Global Config

Note: Card index can be obtained by executing show supported cardtype command in

User EXEC mode.

no slot

This command removes configured information from an existing slot in the system.

Format

Mode no slot <unit/slot> <cardindex>

Global Config

Note: Card index can be obtained by executing show supported cardtype command in

User EXEC mode.

set slot disable

This command configures the administrative mode of the slot(s). If you specify [all] , the command is applied to all slots, otherwise the command is applied to the slot identified by

<unit/slot> .



If a card or other module is present in the slot, this administrative mode will effectively be applied to the contents of the slot. If the slot is empty, this administrative mode will be applied to any module that is inserted into the slot. If a card is disabled, all the ports on the device are operationally disabled and shown as “unplugged” on management screens.

Format

Mode set slot disable [<unit/slot> | all]

Global Config no set slot disable

This command unconfigures the administrative mode of the slot(s). If you specify [all] , the command removes the configuration from all slots, otherwise the configuration is removed from the slot identified by <unit/slot> .

If a card or other module is present in the slot, this administrative mode removes the configuration from the contents of the slot. If the slot is empty, this administrative mode removes the configuration from any module inserted into the slot. If a card is disabled, all the ports on the device are operationally disabled and shown as “unplugged” on management screens.

Format

Mode no set slot disable [<unit/slot> | all]

Global Config set slot power

This command configures the power mode of the slot(s) and allows power to be supplied to a card located in the slot. If you specify [all] , the command is applied to all slots, otherwise the command is applied to the slot identified by <unit/slot> .

Use this command when installing or removing cards. If a card or other module is present in this slot, the power mode is applied to the contents of the slot. If the slot is empty, the power mode is applied to any card inserted into the slot.

Format

Mode set slot power [<unit/slot> | all]

Global Config



no set slot power

This command unconfigures the power mode of the slot(s) and prohibits power from being supplied to a card located in the slot. If you specify [all] , the command prohibits power to all slots, otherwise the command prohibits power to the slot identified by <unit/slot> .

Use this command when installing or removing cards. If a card or other module is present in this slot, power is prohibited to the contents of the slot. If the slot is empty, power is prohibited to any card inserted into the slot.

Format

Mode no set slot power [<unit/slot> | all]

Global Config reload (Stack)

This command resets the entire stack or the identified <unit> .

The <unit> is the switch identifier. The system prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the switch.

Format

Mode reload [<unit>]

User EXEC show slot

This command displays information about all the slots in the system or for a specific slot.

Format

Mode

show slot [<unit/slot>]

User EXEC

Term

Slot

Slot Status

Admin State

Power State

Configured Card

Model Identifier

Definition

The slot identifier in a < unit/slot > format.

The slot is empty, full, or has encountered an error

The slot administrative mode is enabled or disabled.

The slot power mode is enabled or disabled.

The model identifier of the card preconfigured in the slot. Model Identifier is a 32character field used to identify a card.



Term

Pluggable

Definition

Cards are pluggable or non-pluggable in the slot.

Power Down Indicates whether the slot can be powered down.

If you supply a value for <unit/slot> , the following additional information appears:

Term

Inserted Card


Inserted Card

Description

Configured Card

Description

Definition

The model identifier of the card inserted in the slot. Model Identifier is a 32-character field used to identify a card. This field is displayed only if the slot is full.

The card description. This field is displayed only if the slot is full.

The card description of the card preconfigured in the slot.

show supported cardtype

This commands displays information about all card types or specific card types supported in the system.

Format

Mode

show supported cardtype [<cardindex>]

User EXEC

If you do not supply a value for <cardindex> , the following output appears:

Term Definition

Card Index (CID) The index into the database of the supported card types. This index is used when preconfiguring a slot.

Card Model

Identifier

The model identifier for the supported card type.

If you supply a value for <cardindex> , the following output appears:

Term Definition

Card Type


The 32-bit numeric card type for the supported card.

The model identifier for the supported card type.

Card Description The description for the supported card type.



show switch

This command displays information about all units in the stack or a single unit when you specify the unit value.

Format

Mode show switch [<unit>]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Switch

Definition

The unit identifier assigned to the switch.

When you do not specify a value for <unit> , the following information appears:

Term Definition

Management

Status

Preconfigured


Indicates whether the switch is the Primary Management Unit, a stack member, or the status is unassigned.

The model identifier of a preconfigured switch ready to join the stack. The Model

Identifier is a 32-character field assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device.

Plugged-In Model

Identifier

The model identifier of the switch in the stack. Model Identifier is a 32-character field assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device.

Switch Status

Code Version

The switch status. Possible values for this state are: OK, Unsup ported, Code

Mismatch, Config Mismatch, or Not Present.

The detected version of code on this switch.

When you specify a value for <unit> , the following information appears:

Term

Management

Status

Hardware

Management

Preference

Admin

Management

Preference

Switch Type


Definition

Indicates whether the switch is the Primary Management Unit, a stack member, or the status is unassigned.

The hardware management preference of the switch. The hardware management preference can be disabled or unassigned.

The administrative management preference value assigned to the switch. This preference value indicates how likely the switch is to be chosen as the Primary

Management Unit.

The 32-bit numeric switch type.

The model identifier for this switch. Model Identifier is a 32-character field assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device.



Term Definition

Switch Status The switch status. Possible values are OK, Unsupported, Code Mismatch, Config

Mismatch, or Not Present.

The switch description.

Switch

Description

Expected Code

Version

Detected Code

Version

Detected Code in

Flash

Up Time

The expected code version.

The version of code running on this switch. If the switch is not present and the data is from pre-configuration, then the code version is “None”.

The version of code that is currently stored in FLASH memory on the switch. This code executes after the switch is reset. If the switch is not present and the data is from preconfiguration, then the code version is “None”.

The system up time.

show supported switchtype

This commands displays information about all supported switch types or a specific switch type.

Format

Mode

show supported switchtype [<switchindex>]

User EXEC

Privileged EXEC

If you do not supply a value for <switchindex> , the following output appears:

Term Definition

Switch Index (SID) The index into the database of supported switch types. This index is used when preconfiguring a member to be added to the stack.


Management

Preference

Code Version

The model identifier for the supported switch type.

The management preference value of the switch type.

The code load target identifier of the switch type.

If you supply a value for <switchindex> , the following output appears:

Term

Switch Type

Definition

The 32-bit numeric switch type for the supported switch.



Term


Switch

Description

Definition

The model identifier for the supported switch type.

The description for the supported switch type.

Front Panel Stacking Commands

This section describes the commands you use to view and configure front panel stacking information.

stack-port

This command sets front panel stacking per port to either stack or ethernet mode. This command is not supported on the FSM7226RS or FSM7250RS.

Default

Format

Mode stack stack-port <unit/slot/port> [{ethernet | stack}]

Stack Global Config show stack-port

This command displays summary stack-port information for all interfaces.

Format

Mode show stack-port

Privileged EXEC

Term

QOS Mode

Definition

Front Panel Stacking QOS Mode for all Interfaces.



For Each Interface:

Term Definition

Unit

Interface

The unit number.

The slot and port numbers.

Configured Stack

Mode

Stack or Ethernet.

Stack or Ethernet.

Running Stack

Mode

Link Status

Link Speed

Status of the link.

Speed (Gbps) of the stack port link.

show stack-port counters

This command displays summary data counter information for all interfaces.

Format

Mode show stack-port counters

Privileged EXEC

Term

Unit

Interface

Tx Data Rate

Tx Error Rate

Tx Total Error

Rx Data Rate

Rx Error Rate

Rx Total Errors

Definition

The unit number.


Trashing data rate in megabits per second on the stacking port.

Platform-specific number of transmit errors per second.

Platform-specific number of total transmit errors since power-up.

Receive data rate in megabits per second on the stacking port.

Platform-specific number of receive errors per second.

Platform-specific number of total receive errors since power-up.


2-11


show stack-port diag

This command shows front panel stacking diagnostics for each port and is only intended for Field

Application Engineers (FAEs) and developers. An FAE will advise on the necessity to run this command and capture this information.

Format

Mode show stack-port diag

Privileged EXEC

Term

Unit

Interface

Diagnostic Entry1



Definition

The unit number.


80 character string used for diagnostics.




2-12

Chapter 3

Switching Commands

This chapter describes the switching commands available in the managed switch CLI.

The Switching Commands chapter includes the following sections:

• “Port Configuration Commands” on page 3-2

• “show port description” on page 3-9

• “VLAN Commands” on page 3-30

• “Double VLAN Commands” on page 3-45

• “Voice VLAN Commands” on page 3-47

• “Provisioning (IEEE 802.1p) Commands” on page 3-50

• “Protected Ports Commands” on page 3-51

• “Private Group Commands” on page 3-53

• “GVRP Commands” on page 3-58

• “GMRP Commands” on page 3-60

• “Port-Based Network Access Control Commands” on page 3-63

• “Storm-Control Commands” on page 3-77

• “Port-Channel/LAG (802.3ad) Commands” on page 3-89

• “Port Mirroring” on page 3-112

• “Static MAC Filtering” on page 3-114

• “DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands” on page 3-119

• “Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands” on page 3-130

• “IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands” on page 3-138

• “IGMP Snooping Querier Commands” on page 3-147

• “Port Security Commands” on page 3-153

• “LLDP (802.1AB) Commands” on page 3-157 v1.0, July 2009

3-1


• “LLDP-MED Commands” on page 3-168

• “Denial of Service Commands” on page 3-179

• “MAC Database Commands” on page 3-191

• “ISDP Commands” on page 3-193

Warning: The commands in this chapter are in one of three functional groups:

• Show commands display switch settings, statistics, and other information.

• Configuration commands configure features and options of the switch. For every configuration command, there is a show command that displays the configuration setting.

• Clear commands clear some or all of the settings to factory defaults.

Port Configuration Commands

This section describes the commands you use to view and configure port settings. interface

This command gives you access to the Interface Config mode, which allows you to enable or modify the operation of an interface (port).

Format

Mode interface <unit/slot/port>

Global Config interface range

This command gives you access to a range of port interfaces, allowing the same port configuration to be applied to a set of ports.

Format

Mode

interface range <unit/slot/port>-<unit/slot/port>

Global Config

Switching Commands 3-2 v1.0, July 2009


interface vlan

This command gives you access to to the vlan virtual interface mode, which allows certain port configurations (for example, the IP address) to be applied to the VLAN interface. Type a question mark (?) after entering the interface configuration mode to see the available options.

Format

Mode interface vlan <vlan id>

Global Config interface lag

This command gives you access to the LAG (link aggregation, or port channel) virtual interface, which allows certain port configurations to be applied to the LAG interface. Type a question mark

(?) after entering the interface configuration mode to see the available options.

Note: The IP address cannot be assigned to a LAG virtual interface. The interface must be put under a VLAN group and an IP address assigned to the VLAN group..

Format

Mode interface lag <lag id>

Global Config auto-negotiate

This command enables automatic negotiation on a port.

Default

Format

Mode enabled auto-negotiate

Interface Config

Switching Commands v1.0, July 2009

3-3

no auto-negotiate

This command disables automatic negotiation on a port.


Note: Automatic sensing is disabled when automatic negotiation is disabled.

auto-negotiate all

Format

Mode no auto-negotiate

Interface Config

This command enables automatic negotiation on all ports.

Default

Format

Mode enabled auto-negotiate all

Global Config no auto-negotiate all

This command disables automatic negotiation on all ports.

Format

Mode no auto-negotiate all

Global Config description

Use this command to create an alpha-numeric description of the port.

Format

Mode description <description>

Interface Config



mtu

Use the mtu command to set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, in bytes, for frames that ingress or egress the interface. You can use the mtu command to configure jumbo frame support for physical and port-channel (LAG) interfaces. For the standard 7000 seriesimplementation, the

MTU size is a valid integer between 1522 - 9216 for tagged packets and a valid integer between

1518 - 9216 for untagged packets.

Note: To receive and process packets, the Ethernet MTU must include any extra bytes that Layer-2 headers might require. To configure the IP MTU size, which is the maximum size of the IP packet (IP Header + IP payload), see “ip mtu” on page 4-

12 .

Default

Format

Mode

1518 (untagged) mtu <1518-9216>

Interface Config no mtu

This command sets the default MTU size (in bytes) for the interface.

Format

Mode no mtu

Interface Config shutdown

This command disables a port.

Note: You can use the shutdown command on physical and port-channel (LAG) interfaces, but not on VLAN routing interfaces.

Default enabled



Format

Mode shutdown

Interface Config no shutdown

This command enables a port.

Format

Mode no shutdown

Interface Config shutdown all

This command disables all ports.

Note: You can use the shutdown all command on physical and port-channel (LAG) interfaces, but not on VLAN routing interfaces.

Default

Format

Mode enabled shutdown all

Global Config no shutdown all

This command enables all ports.

Format

Mode no shutdown all

Global Config


3-6


speed

This command sets the speed and duplex setting for the interface.

Format

Mode speed {<100 | 10> <half-duplex | full-duplex>}

Interface Config

Acceptable

Values

100h

100f

10h

10f

Definition

100BASE-T half duplex

100BASE-T full duplex


10BASE-T full duplex speed all

This command sets the speed and duplex setting for all interfaces.

Format

Mode speed all {<100 | 10> <half-duplex | full-duplex>}

Global Config

Acceptable

Values

100h

100f

10h

10f

Definition


100BASE-T full duplex


10BASE-T full duplex show port

This command displays port information.

Format

Mode show port {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC



Term Definition

Interface

Type

Admin Mode

Physical Mode

Valid unit, slot, and port number separated by forward slashes.

If not blank, this field indicates that this port is a special type of port. The possible values are:

• Mirror - this port is a monitoring port. For more information, see “Port Mirroring” on page 3-112 .

• PC Mbr - this port is a member of a port-channel (LAG).

• Probe - this port is a probe port.

The Port control administration state. The port must be enabled in order for it to be allowed into the network. - May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled.

The desired port speed and duplex mode. If auto-negotiation support is selected, then the duplex mode and speed is set from the auto-negotiation process. Note that the maximum capability of the port (full duplex -100M) is advertised. Otherwise, this object determines the port's duplex mode and transmission rate. The factory default is Auto.

Physical Status The port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status The Link is up or down.

Link Trap

LACP Mode

This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status changes. The factory default is enabled.

LACP is enabled or disabled on this port.

show port protocol

This command displays the Protocol-Based VLAN information for either the entire system, or for the indicated group.

Format

Mode show port protocol {<groupid> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term

Group Name

Group ID

Protocol(s)

VLAN

Interface(s)

Switching Commands

Definition

The group name of an entry in the Protocol-based VLAN table.

The group identifier of the protocol group.

The type of protocol(s) for this group.

The VLAN associated with this Protocol Group.

Lists the unit/slot/port interface(s) that are associated with this Protocol Group.

v1.0, July 2009

3-8


show port description

This command displays the port description for every port.

Format

Mode

Term

Interface

Description show port description <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Definition

Valid slot and port number separated by forward slashes

Shows the port description configured via the “description” command show port status

This command displays the Protocol-Based VLAN information for either the entire system, or for the indicated group.

Format

Mode show port status {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term

Interface

Media Type

STP Mode

Physical Mode

Physical Status

Link Status

Loop Status

Partner Flow

Control

Definition

Valid slot and port number separated by forward slashes.

“Copper” or “Fiber” for combo port.

Indicate the spanning tree mode of the port.

Either “Auto” or fixed speed and duplex mode.

The actual speed and duplex mode.

Whether the link is Up or Down.

Whether the port is in loop state or not.

Whether the remote side is using flow control or not.



Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). STP helps prevent network loops, duplicate messages, and network instability.

spanning-tree

This command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to enabled.

Default

Format

Mode enabled spanning-tree

Global Config no spanning-tree

This command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to disabled. While disabled, the spanningtree configuration is retained and can be changed, but is not activated.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree

Global Config spanning-tree bpdufilter default

Use this command to enable BPDU Filter on all the edge port interfaces.

Default

Format

Mode disabled spanning-tree bpdufilter

Global Config no spanning-tree bpdufilter default

Use this command to disable BPDU Filter on all the edge port interfaces.



Default

Format

Mode enabled no spanning-tree bpdufilter default

Global Config spanning-tree bpduflood

Use this command to enable BPDU Flood on the interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled spanning-tree bpduflood

Interface Config no spanning-tree bpduflood

Use this command to disable BPDU Flood on the interface.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree bpduflood

Interface Config spanning-tree bpduguard

Use this command to enable BPDU Guard on the switch.

Default

Format

Mode disabled spanning-tree bpduguard

Global Config no spanning-tree bpduguard

Use this command to disable BPDU Guard on the switch.



Format

Mode no spanning-tree bpduguard

Global Config spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck

Use this command to force a transmission of rapid spanning tree (RSTP) and multiple spanning tree (MSTP) BPDUs. Use the <unit/slot/port> parameter to transmit a BPDU from a specified interface, or use the all keyword to transmit BPDUs from all interfaces. This command forces the BPDU transmission when you execute it, so the command does not change the system configuration or have a “no” version.

Format

Mode spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Global Config spanning-tree configuration name

This command sets the Configuration Identifier Name for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using. The <name> is a string of up to 32 characters.

Default

Format

Mode base MAC address in hexadecimal notation spanning-tree configuration name <name>

Global Config no spanning-tree configuration name

This command resets the Configuration Identifier Name to its default.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree configuration name

Global Config


3-12


spanning-tree configuration revision

This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using. The Configuration Identifier Revision Level is a number in the range of 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0 spanning-tree configuration revision <0-65535>

Global Config no spanning-tree configuration revision

This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using to the default value.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree configuration revision

Global Config spanning-tree edgeport

This command specifies that this port is an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree. This allows this port to transition to Forwarding State without delay.

Default

Format

Mode enabled spanning-tree edgeport

Interface Config no spanning-tree edgeport

This command specifies that this port is not an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree edgeport

Interface Config



spanning-tree forceversion

This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to a new value.

Default

Format

Mode

802.1s

spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1s | 802.1w>

Global Config

• Use 802.1d to specify that the switch transmits ST BPDUs rather than MST BPDUs (IEEE

802.1d functionality supported).

• Use 802.1s to specify that the switch transmits MST BPDUs (IEEE 802.1s functionality supported).

• Use 802.1w to specify that the switch transmits RST BPDUs rather than MST BPDUs (IEEE

802.1w functionality supported). no spanning-tree forceversion

This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to the default value.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree forceversion

Global Config spanning-tree forward-time

This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree. The forward-time value is in seconds within a range of 4 to 30, with the value being greater than or equal to “(Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1”.

Default

Format

Mode

15 spanning-tree forward-time <4-30>

Global Config



no spanning-tree forward-time

This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree forward-time

Global Config spanning-tree guard

This command selects whether loop guard or root guard is enabled on an interface. If neither is enabled, then the port operates in accordance with the multiple spanning tree protocol.

Default

Format

Mode none spanning-tree guard { none | root | loop }

Interface Config no spanning-tree guard

This command disables loop guard or root guard on the interface.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree guard

Interface Config spanning-tree max-age

This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree. The max-age value is in seconds within a range of 6 to 40, with the value being less than or equal to 2 x (Bridge Forward Delay - 1) .

Default

Format

Mode

20 spanning-tree max-age <6-40>

Global Config


no spanning-tree max-age

Global Config


no spanning-tree max-age

This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value.

Format

Mode spanning-tree max-hops

This command sets the MSTP Max Hops parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree. The max-hops value is a range from 6 to 40.

Default

Format

Mode

20 spanning-tree max-hops <1-127>

Global Config no spanning-tree max-hops

This command sets the Bridge Max Hops parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree max-hops

Global Config spanning-tree mst

This command sets the Path Cost or Port Priority for this port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree. If you specify an <mstid> parameter that corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance, the configurations are done for that multiple spanning tree instance. If you specify 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) as the

<mstid> , the configurations are done for the common and internal spanning tree instance.


Format

Mode


If you specify the cost option, the command sets the path cost for this port within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance, depending on the

<mstid> parameter. You can set the path cost as a number in the range of 1 to 200000000 or auto . If you select auto the path cost value is set based on Link Speed.

If you specify the external-cost option, this command sets the external-path cost for MST instance

‘0’ i.e. CIST instance. You can set the external cost as a number in the range of 1 to 200000000 or auto . If you specify auto, the external path cost value is set based on Link Speed.

If you specify the port-priority option, this command sets the priority for this port within a specific multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter. The port-priority value is a number in the range of 0 to 240 in increments of 16.

Default • cost—auto

• external-cost—auto

• port-priority—128 spanning-tree mst

< mstid> {{cost <1-200000000> | auto} | {externalcost <1-200000000> | auto} | port-priority <0-240>}

Interface Config no spanning-tree mst

This command sets the Path Cost or Port Priority for this port within the multiple spanning tree instance, or in the common and internal spanning tree to the respective default values. If you specify an <mstid> parameter that corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance, you are configuring that multiple spanning tree instance. If you specify 0 (defined as the default

CIST ID) as the <mstid> , you are configuring the common and internal spanning tree instance.

If the you specify cost , this command sets the path cost for this port within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter, to the default value, i.e. a path cost value based on the Link Speed.

If you specify external-cost , this command sets the external path cost for this port for mst ‘0’ instance, to the default value, i.e. a path cost value based on the Link Speed.

If you specify port-priority , this command sets the priority for this port within a specific multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance, depending on the

<mstid> parameter, to the default value.



Format

Mode no spanning-tree mst <mstid> <cost | external-cost | port-priority>

Interface Config spanning-tree mst instance

This command adds a multiple spanning tree instance to the switch. The parameter <mstid> is a number within a range of 1 to 4094, that corresponds to the new instance ID to be added. The maximum number of multiple instances supported by the switch is 4.

Default

Format

Mode none spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>

Global Config no spanning-tree mst instance

This command removes a multiple spanning tree instance from the switch and reallocates all

VLANs allocated to the deleted instance to the common and internal spanning tree. The parameter

<mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance to be removed.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>

Global Config spanning-tree mst priority

This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instance. The parameter <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance. The priority value is a number within a range of 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096.


3-18


If you specify 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) as the <mstid> , this command sets the Bridge

Priority parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree. The bridge priority value is a number within a range of 0 to 61440. The twelve least significant bits are masked according to the 802.1s specification. This causes the priority to be rounded down to the next lower valid priority.

Default

Format

Mode

32768 spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <0-61440>

Global Config no spanning-tree mst priority

This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instance to the default value. The parameter <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance.

If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid> , this command sets the Bridge

Priority parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to the default value.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree mst priority <mstid>

Global Config spanning-tree mst vlan

This command adds an association between a multiple spanning tree instance and one or more

VLANs so that the VLAN(s) are no longer associated with the common and internal spanning tree.

The parameter <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance. The vlan range can be specified as a list or as a range of values. To specify a list of

VLANs, enter a list of VLAN IDs, each separated by a comma with no spaces in between. To specify a range of VLANs, separate the beginning and ending VLAN ID with a dash ("-").

Format

Mode spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>

Global Config



no spanning-tree mst vlan

This command removes an association between a multiple spanning tree instance and one or more

VLANs so that the VLAN(s) are again associated with the common and internal spanning tree.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>

Global Config spanning-tree port mode

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for this port to enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled spanning-tree port mode

Interface Config no spanning-tree port mode

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for this port to disabled.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree port mode

Interface Config spanning-tree port mode all

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled spanning-tree port mode all

Global Config


3-20


no spanning-tree port mode all

This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to disabled.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree port mode all

Global Config spanning-tree edgeport all

This command specifies that every port is an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree. This allows all ports to transition to Forwarding State without delay.

Format

Mode spanning-tree edgeport all

Global Config no spanning-tree edgeport all

This command disables Edge Port mode for all ports within the common and internal spanning tree.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree edgeport all

Global Config spanning-tree bpduforwarding

Normally a switch will not forward Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) BPDU packets if STP is disabled. However, if in some network setup, the user wishes to forward BDPU packets received from other network devices, this command can be used to enable the forwarding.

Default

Format

Mode

2 spanning-tree bpduforwarding

Global Config


3-21


no spanning-tree bpduforwarding

This command will cause the STP BPDU packets received from the network to be dropped if STP is disabled.

Format

Mode no spanning-tree bpduforwarding

Global Config show spanning-tree

This command displays spanning tree settings for the common and internal spanning tree. The following details are displayed.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Bridge Priority Specifies the bridge priority for the Common and Internal Spanning tree (CST). The value lies between 0 and 61440. It is displayed in multiples of 4096.

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base

MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since

Topology

Change

Time in seconds.

Topology

Change Count

Topology

Change

Designated

Root

Number of times changed.

Boolean value of the Topology Change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the common and internal spanning tree.

The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base

MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and internal spanning tree.

Root Port

Identifier

Identifier of the port to access the Designated Root for the CST

Root Port Max

Age

Derived value.



Term Definition

Root Port

Bridge Forward

Delay

Derived value.

Hello Time

Bridge Hold

Time

Configured value of the parameter for the CST.

Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units

(BPDUs).

Bridge max-hops count for the device.

Bridge Max

Hops

CST Regional

Root

Regional Root

Path Cost

Associated

FIDs

Associated

VLANs

Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Path Cost to the CST Regional Root.

List of forwarding database identifiers currently associated with this instance.

List of VLAN IDs currently associated with this instance.

show spanning-tree brief

This command displays spanning tree settings for the bridge. The following information appears.

Format

Mode

Term

Bridge Priority

Bridge Identifier show spanning-tree brief

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Bridge Max Age

Bridge Max Hops

Bridge Hello Time

Bridge Forward Delay

Bridge Hold Time

Definition

Configured value.

The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Configured value.

Bridge max-hops count for the device.

Configured value.

Configured value.

Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol Data

Units (BPDUs).



show spanning-tree interface

This command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and internal spanning tree. The <unit/slot/port > is the desired switch port. The following details are displayed on execution of the command.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree interface <unit/slot/port>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Hello Time

Port Mode

BPDU Guard Effect

Root Guard

Loop Guard

TCN Guard

Admin hello time for this port.

Enabled or disabled.



BPDU Filter Mode

BPDU Flood Mode

Auto Edge


Enable or disable the propagation of received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports.



To enable or disable the feature that causes a port that has not seen a BPDU for

‘edge delay’ time, to become an edge port and transition to forwarding faster.

Time since port was reset, displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

Port Up Time Since

Counters Last Cleared

STP BPDUs

Transmitted

Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.

RSTP BPDUs

Transmitted

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

RSTP BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.

MSTP BPDUs

Transmitted

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.



show spanning-tree mst port detailed

This command displays the detailed settings and parameters for a specific switch port within a particular multiple spanning tree instance. The parameter <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance. The <unit/slot/port > is the desired switch port.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <unit/slot/port>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

MST Instance ID The ID of the existing MST instance.

Port Identifier The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Priority The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The port priority is displayed in multiples of 16.

Port Forwarding

State

Current spanning tree state of this port.

Port Role

Auto-Calculate

Port Path Cost

Each enabled MST Bridge Port receives a Port Role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup

Port, Master Port or Disabled Port

Indicates whether auto calculation for port path cost is enabled.

Port Path Cost Configured value of the Internal Port Path Cost parameter.

Designated

Root

The Identifier of the designated root for this port.

Root Path Cost The path cost to get to the root bridge for this instance. The root path cost is zero if the bridge is the root bridge for that instance.

Designated

Bridge

Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port.

Designated Port

Identifier

Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN.

Loop

Inconsistent

State

The current loop inconsistent state of this port in this MST instance. When in loop inconsistent state, the port has failed to receive BPDUs while configured with loop guard enabled. Loop inconsistent state maintains the port in a "blocking" state until a subsequent BPDU is received.



Term Definition

Transitions Into

Loop

Inconsistent

State

The number of times this interface has transitioned into loop inconsistent state.

Transitions Out of Loop

Inconsistent

State

The number of times this interface has transitioned out of loop inconsistent state.

If you specify 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) as the <mstid> , this command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and internal spanning tree.

The <unit/slot/port > is the desired switch port. In this case, the following are displayed.

Term Definition

Port Identifier The port identifier for this port within the CST.

Port Priority The priority of the port within the CST.

Port Forwarding

State

The forwarding state of the port within the CST.

Port Role

Auto-Calculate

Port Path Cost

The role of the specified interface within the CST.

Indicates whether auto calculation for port path cost is enabled or not (disabled).

Port Path Cost The configured path cost for the specified interface.

Auto-Calculate

External Port

Path Cost

Indicates whether auto calculation for external port path cost is enabled.

External Port

Path Cost

The cost to get to the root bridge of the CIST across the boundary of the region. This means that if the port is a boundary port for an MSTP region, then the external path cost is used.

Designated

Root

Identifier of the designated root for this port within the CST.

Root Path Cost The root path cost to the LAN by the port.

Designated

Bridge

The bridge containing the designated port.

Designated Port

Identifier

Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN.



Term Definition

Topology

Change

Acknowledgem ent

Hello Time

Edge Port

Edge Port

Status

Value of flag in next Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) transmission indicating if a topology change is in progress for this port.

The hello time in use for this port.

The configured value indicating if this port is an edge port.

The derived value of the edge port status. True if operating as an edge port; false otherwise.

Derived value indicating if this port is part of a point to point link.

Point To Point

MAC Status

CST Regional

Root

The regional root identifier in use for this port.

CST Internal

Root Path Cost

Loop

Inconsistent

State

The internal root path cost to the LAN by the designated external port.

The current loop inconsistent state of this port in this MST instance. When in loop inconsistent state, the port has failed to receive BPDUs while configured with loop guard enabled. Loop inconsistent state maintains the port in a "blocking" state until a subsequent BPDU is received.

Transitions Into

Loop

Inconsistent

State

The number of times this interface has transitioned into loop inconsistent state.

Transitions Out of Loop

Inconsistent

State

The number of times this interface has transitioned out of loop inconsistent state.

show spanning-tree mst port summary

This command displays the settings of one or all ports within the specified multiple spanning tree instance. The parameter <mstid> indicates a particular MST instance. The parameter { <unit/ slot/port > | all} indicates the desired switch port or all ports.

If you specify 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) as the <mstid> , the status summary displays for one or all ports within the common and internal spanning tree.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<unit/slot/port> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

MST Instance ID The MST instance associated with this port.

Interface Valid unit, slot, and port number separated by forward slashes.

STP Mode

Type

Indicates whether spanning tree is enabled or disabled on the port.

Currently not used.

STP State

Port Role

The forwarding state of the port in the specified spanning tree instance.

The role of the specified port within the spanning tree.

Desc Indicates whether the port is in loop inconsistent state or not. This field is blank if the loop guard feature is not available.

show spanning-tree mst summary

This command displays summary information about all multiple spanning tree instances in the switch. On execution, the following details are displayed.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree mst summary

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

MST Instance ID

List

List of multiple spanning trees IDs currently configured.

For each

MSTID:

• Associated

FIDs

• Associated

VLANs

• List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance.

• List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.


3-28


show spanning-tree summary

This command displays spanning tree settings and parameters for the switch. The following details are displayed on execution of the command.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree summary

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Spanning Tree

Adminmode

Spanning Tree

Version


Version of 802.1 currently supported (IEEE 802.1s, IEEE 802.1w, or IEEE 802.1d) based upon the Force Protocol Version parameter.


BPDU Guard

Mode

BPDU Filter

Mode

Configuration

Name

Configuration

Revision Level


Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

Configuration

Digest Key

A generated Key used in the exchange of the BPDUs.

Configuration

Format Selector

Specifies the version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of BPDUs.

The default value is zero.

MST Instances List of all multiple spanning tree instances configured on the switch.

show spanning-tree vlan

This command displays the association between a VLAN and a multiple spanning tree instance.

The <vlanid> corresponds to an existing VLAN ID.

Format

Mode show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

VLAN Identifier The VLANs associated with the selected MST instance.

Associated

Instance

Identifier for the associated multiple spanning tree instance or “CST” if associated with the common and internal spanning tree.

VLAN Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure VLAN settings.

vlan database

This command gives you access to the VLAN Config mode, which allows you to configure VLAN characteristics.

Format

Mode vlan database

Privileged EXEC network mgmt_vlan

This command configures the Management VLAN ID.

Default

Format

Mode

1 network mgmt_vlan <1-4093>

Privileged EXEC no network mgmt_vlan

This command sets the Management VLAN ID to the default.

Format

Mode no network mgmt_vlan

Privileged EXEC



vlan

This command creates a new VLAN and assigns it an ID. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number (ID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN). The vlan-list contains VlanId's in range <1-

4093>. Separate non-consecutive IDs with ',' and no spaces and no zeros in between the range; Use

'-' for range.

Format

Mode vlan <vlan-list>

VLAN Config no vlan

This command deletes an existing VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number (ID 1 is reserved for the default VLAN). The vlan-list contains VlanId's in range <1-4093>. Separate nonconsecutive IDs with ',' and no spaces and no zeros in between the range; Use '-' for range.

Format

Mode no vlan <vlan-list>

VLAN Config vlan acceptframe

This command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface. For VLAN Only mode, untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are discarded. For Admit All mode, untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.

Default

Format

Mode all vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all}

Interface Config


3-31


no vlan acceptframe

This command resets the frame acceptance mode for the interface to the default value.

Format

Mode no vlan acceptframe

Interface Config vlan ingressfilter

This command enables ingress filtering. If ingress filtering is disabled, frames received with

VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN.

Default

Format

Mode disabled vlan ingressfilter

Interface Config no vlan ingressfilter

This command disables ingress filtering. If ingress filtering is disabled, frames received with

VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN.

Format

Mode no vlan ingressfilter

Interface Config vlan makestatic

This command changes a dynamically created VLAN (one that is created by GVRP registration) to a static VLAN (one that is permanently configured and defined). The ID is a valid VLAN identification number. VLAN range is 2-4093.

Format

Mode vlan makestatic <2-4093>

VLAN Config



vlan name

This command changes the name of a VLAN. The name is an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters, and the ID is a valid VLAN identification number. ID range is 1-4093.

Default

Format

Mode

• VLAN ID 1 - default

• other VLANS - blank string vlan name <1-4093> <name>

VLAN Config no vlan name

This command sets the name of a VLAN to a blank string.

Format

Mode no vlan name <1-4093>

VLAN Config vlan participation

This command configures the degree of participation for a specific interface in a VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number, and the interface is a valid interface number .

Format

Mode vlan participation {exclude | include | auto} <1-4093>

Interface Config

Participation options are:

Participation

Options include exclude auto

Definition

The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration fixed.

The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration forbidden.

The interface is dynamically registered in this VLAN by GVRP. The interface will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this interface. This is equivalent to registration normal.



vlan participation all

This command configures the degree of participation for all interfaces in a VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.

Format

Mode vlan participation all {exclude | include | auto} <1-4093>

Global Config

You can use the following participation options:

Participation

Options include exclude auto

Definition

The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration fixed.

The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration forbidden.

The interface is dynamically registered in this VLAN by GVRP. The interface will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this interface. This is equivalent to registration normal.

vlan port acceptframe all

This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces.

Default

Format

Mode all vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all}

Global Config

The modes defined as follows:

Mode Definition

VLAN Only mode

Untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are discarded.

Admit All mode Untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port.

With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q

VLAN Specification.



no vlan port acceptframe all

This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces to Admit All. For Admit All mode, untagged frames or priority frames received on this interface are accepted and assigned the value of the interface VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.

Format

Mode no vlan port acceptframe all

Global Config vlan port ingressfilter all

This command enables ingress filtering for all ports. If ingress filtering is disabled, frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN.

Default

Format

Mode disabled vlan port ingressfilter all

Global Config no vlan port ingressfilter all

This command disables ingress filtering for all ports. If ingress filtering is disabled, frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN.

Format

Mode no vlan port ingressfilter all

Global Config vlan port pvid all

This command changes the VLAN ID for all interface.

Default

Format

Mode

1 vlan port pvid all <1-4093>

Global Config


3-35

no vlan port pvid all

This command sets the VLAN ID for all interfaces to 1.

Format

Mode no vlan port pvid all

Global Config


vlan port tagging all

This command configures the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN to enabled. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.

Format

Mode vlan port tagging all <1-4093>

Global Config no vlan port tagging all

This command configures the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN to disabled. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.

Format

Mode no vlan port tagging all

Global Config vlan protocol group

This command adds protocol-based VLAN groups to the system. The < groupName> is a character string of 1 to 16 characters. When it is created, the protocol group will be assigned a unique number that will be used to identify the group in subsequent commands.

Format

Mode vlan protocol group <groupname>

Global Config



vlan protocol group add protocol

This command adds the <protocol> to the protocol-based VLAN identified by <groupid> .

A group may have more than one protocol associated with it. Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group. If adding a protocol to a group causes any conflicts with interfaces currently associated with the group, this command fails and the protocol is not added to the group. The possible values for protocol are ip, arp, and ipx .

Default

Format

Mode none vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>

Global Config no vlan protocol group add protocol

This command removes the < protocol> from this protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this < groupid> . The possible values for protocol are ip, arp, and ipx .

Format

Mode no vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>

Global Config vlan protocol group remove

This command removes the protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid> .

Format

Mode vlan protocol group remove <groupid>

Global Config protocol group

This command attaches a <vlanid> to the protocol-based VLAN identified by <groupid> .

A group may only be associated with one VLAN at a time, however the VLAN association can be changed.



Default

Format

Mode none protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>

VLAN Config no protocol group

This command removes the <vlanid> from this protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid> .

Format

Mode no protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>

VLAN Config protocol vlan group

This command adds the physical interface to the protocol-based VLAN identified by

<groupid> . You can associate multiple interfaces with a group, but you can only associate each interface and protocol combination with one group. If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the group, this command fails and the interface(s) are not added to the group.

Default

Format

Mode none protocol vlan group <groupid>

Interface Config no protocol vlan group

This command removes the interface from this protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid> .

Format

Mode no protocol vlan group <groupid>

Interface Config



protocol vlan group all

This command adds all physical interfaces to the protocol-based VLAN identified by

<groupid> . You can associate multiple interfaces with a group, but you can only associate each interface and protocol combination with one group. If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the group, this command will fail and the interface(s) will not be added to the group.

Default

Format

Mode none protocol vlan group all <groupid>

Global Config no protocol vlan group all

This command removes all interfaces from this protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid> .

Format

Mode no protocol vlan group all <groupid>

Global Config vlan pvid

This command changes the VLAN ID per interface.

Default

Format

Mode

1 vlan pvid <1-4093>

Interface Config no vlan pvid

This command sets the VLAN ID per interface to 1.

Format

Mode no vlan pvid

Interface Config


3-39

vlan tagging <vlan-list>

Interface Config


vlan tagging

This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a VLAN to enabled. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames. The vlan-list contains VlanId's in range <1-4093>. Separate nonconsecutive IDs with ',' and no spaces and no zeros in between the range; Use '-' for range.

Format

Mode no vlan tagging

This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a VLAN to disabled. If tagging is disabled, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames. The vlan-list contains VlanId's in range <1-4093>. Separate non-consecutive IDs with ',' and no spaces and no zeros in between the range; Use '-' for range.

Format

Mode no vlan tagging <vlan-list>

Interface Config vlan association subnet

This command associates a VLAN to a specific IP-subnet.

Format

Mode vlan association subnet <ipaddr> <netmask> <1-4093>

VLAN Config no vlan association subnet

This command removes association of a specific IP-subnet to a VLAN.

Format

Mode no vlan association subnet <ipaddr> <netmask>

VLAN Config



vlan association mac

This command associates a MAC address to a VLAN.

Format

Mode vlan association mac <macaddr> <1-4093>

VLAN database no vlan association mac

This command removes the association of a MAC address to a VLAN.

Format

Mode no vlan association mac <macaddr>

VLAN database show vlan

This command displays a list of all configured VLAN

.

Format

Mode show vlan

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

VLAN ID

VLAN Name

VLAN Type

Definition

There is a VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with each VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

A string associated with this VLAN as a convenience. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always has a name of

“Default.” This field is optional.

Type of VLAN, which can be Default (VLAN ID = 1) or static (one that is configured and permanently defined), or Dynamic (one that is created by GVRP registration). show vlan <vlanid>

This command displays detailed information, including interface information, for a specific

VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.



Format

Mode

Term

VLAN ID

VLAN Name

VLAN Type

Interface

Current

Configured

Tagging show vlan <vlanid>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition

There is a VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with each VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 3965.



Type of VLAN, which can be Default (VLAN ID = 1) or static (one that is configured and permanently defined), or Dynamic (one that is created by GVRP registration).

Valid unit, slot, and port number separated by forward slashes. It is possible to set the parameters for all ports by using the selectors on the top line.

The degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The permissible values are:

• Include - This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration fixed in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Exclude - This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration forbidden in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Autodetect - To allow the port to be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP. The port will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this port. This is equivalent to registration normal in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

The configured degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The permissible values are:

• Include - This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration fixed in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Exclude - This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration forbidden in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Autodetect - To allow the port to be dynamically registered in this VLAN via GVRP. The port will not participate in this VLAN unless a join request is received on this port. This is equivalent to registration normal in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

The tagging behavior for this port in this VLAN.

• Tagged - Transmit traffic for this VLAN as tagged frames.

• Untagged - Transmit traffic for this VLAN as untagged frames.

show vlan brief

This command displays a list of all configured VLANs.


3-42


Format

Mode

Term

VLAN ID

VLAN Name

VLAN Type show vlan brief

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition

There is a VLAN Identifier (vlanid) associated with each VLAN. The range of the VLAN

ID is 1 to 3965.



Type of VLAN, which can be Default (VLAN ID = 1) or static (one that is configured and permanently defined), or a Dynamic (one that is created by GVRP registration). show vlan port

This command displays VLAN port information.

Format

Mode

Term

Interface

Port VLAN ID

Acceptable

Frame Types

Ingress

Filtering show vlan port {<unit/slot/port> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition

Valid unit, slot, and port number separated by forward slashes. It is possible to set the parameters for all ports by using the selectors on the top line.

The VLAN ID that this port will assign to untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port. The value must be for an existing VLAN. The factory default is 1.

The types of frames that may be received on this port. The options are 'VLAN only' and

'Admit All'. When set to 'VLAN only', untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are discarded. When set to 'Admit All', untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the Port VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the

802.1Q VLAN specification.

May be enabled or disabled. When enabled, the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame. When disabled, all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification. The factory default is disabled.



Term Definition

GVRP May be enabled or disabled.

Default Priority The 802.1p priority assigned to tagged packets arriving on the port.

show vlan association subnet

This command displays the VLAN associated with a specific configured IP-Address and net mask.

If no IP address and net mask are specified, the VLAN associations of all the configured IPsubnets are displayed.

Format

Mode

Term

IP Subnet

IP Mask

VLAN ID show vlan association subnet [<ipaddr> <netmask>]

Privileged EXEC

Definition

The IP address assigned to each interface.

The subnet mask.

There is a VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with each VLAN.

show vlan association mac

This command displays the VLAN associated with a specific configured MAC address. If no

MAC address is specified, the VLAN associations of all the configured MAC addresses are displayed.

Format

Mode show vlan association mac [<macaddr>]

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address A MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example

01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes.

VLAN ID There is a VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with each VLAN.



Double VLAN Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure double VLAN (DVLAN). Double

VLAN tagging is a way to pass VLAN traffic from one customer domain to another through a

Metro Core in a simple and cost effective manner. The additional tag on the traffic helps differentiate between customers in the MAN while preserving the VLAN identification of the individual customers when they enter their own 802.1Q domain.

dvlan-tunnel ethertype

This command configures the ether-type for all interfaces. The ether-type may have the values of

802.1Q

, vMAN , or custom . If the ether-type has a value of custom , the optional value of the custom ether type must be set to a value from 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode vman dvlan-tunnel ethertype {802.1Q | vman | custom} [0-65535]

Global Config mode dot1q-tunnel

This command is used to enable Double VLAN Tunneling on the specified interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled mode dot1q-tunnel

Interface Config no mode dot1q-tunnel

This command is used to disable Double VLAN Tunneling on the specified interface. By default,

Double VLAN Tunneling is disabled.

Format

Mode no mode dot1q-tunnel

Interface Config


3-45


mode dvlan-tunnel

Use this command to enable Double VLAN Tunneling on the specified interface.

Default

Format

Mode

Note: When you use the mode dvlan-tunnel command on an interface, it becomes a service provider port. Ports that do not have double VLAN tunneling enabled are customer ports.

disabled mode dvlan-tunnel

Interface Config no mode dvlan-tunnel

This command is used to disable Double VLAN Tunneling on the specified interface. By default,

Double VLAN Tunneling is disabled.

Format

Mode no mode dvlan-tunnel

Interface Config show dot1q-tunnel

Use this command without the optional parameters to display all interfaces enabled for Double

VLAN Tunneling. Use the optional parameters to display detailed information about Double

VLAN Tunneling for the specified interface or all interfaces.

Format

Mode

Term

Interface

Mode show dot1q-tunnel [interface {<unit/slot/port> | all}]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition


The administrative mode through which Double VLAN Tunneling can be enabled or disabled. The default value for this field is disabled.



Term

EtherType

Definition

A 2-byte hex EtherType to be used as the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tunnel. There are three different EtherType tags. The first is 802.1Q, which represents the commonly used value of 0x8100. The second is vMAN, which represents the commonly used value of

0x88A8. If EtherType is not one of these two values, then it is a custom tunnel value, representing any value in the range of 0 to 65535.

show dvlan-tunnel

Use this command without the optional parameters to display all interfaces enabled for Double

VLAN Tunneling. Use the optional parameters to display detailed information about Double

VLAN Tunneling for the specified interface or all interfaces.

Format

Mode

Term

Interface

Mode

EtherType show dvlan-tunnel [interface {<unit/slot/port> | all}]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition


The administrative mode through which Double VLAN Tunneling can be enabled or disabled. The default value for this field is disabled.

A 2-byte hex EtherType to be used as the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tunnel. There are three different EtherType tags. The first is 802.1Q, which represents the commonly used value of 0x8100. The second is vMAN, which represents the commonly used value of

0x88A8. If EtherType is not one of these two values, then it is a custom tunnel value, representing any value in the range of 0 to 65535.

Voice VLAN Commands

This section describes the commands you use for Voice VLAN. Voice VLAN enables switch ports to carry voice traffic with defined priority so as to enable separation of voice and data traffic coming onto the port. The benefits of using Voice VLAN is to ensure that the sound quality of an

IP phone could be safeguarded from deteriorating when the data traffic on the port is high.



Also the inherent isolation provided by VLANs ensures that inter-VLAN traffic is under management control and that network- attached clients cannot initiate a direct attack on voice components. QoS-based on IEEE 802.1P class of service (CoS) uses classification and scheduling to sent network traffic from the switch in a predictable manner. The system uses the source MAC of the traffic traveling through the port to identify the IP phone data flow.

voice vlan (Global Config)

Use this command to enable the Voice VLAN capability on the switch.

Default

Format

Mode disabled voice vlan

Global Config no voice vlan (Global Config)

Use this command to disable the Voice VLAN capability on the switch.

Format

Mode no voice vlan

Global Config voice vlan (Interface Config)

Use this command to enable the Voice VLAN capability on the interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled voice vlan { <id> | dot1p <priority> | none | untagged}

Interface Config

You can configure Voice VLAN in one of three different ways:

Parameter dot1p

Description

Configure the IP phone to use 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic and to use the default native VLAN (VLAN 0) to carry all traffic. Valid <priority> range is 0 to 7.



Parameter none untagged

Description

Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

no voice vlan (Interface Config)

Use this command to disable the Voice VLAN capability on the interface.

Format

Mode no voice vlan

Interface Config voice vlan data priority

Use this command to either trust or untrust the data traffic arriving on the Voice VLAN port.

Default

Format

Mode trust voice vlan data priority {untrust | trust}

Interface Config show voice vlan

Format

Mode show voice vlan [interface {<unit/slot/port> | all}]

Privileged EXEC

When the interface parameter is not specified, only the global mode of the Voice VLAN is displayed.

Term

Administrative

Mode

Definition

The Global Voice VLAN mode.

When the interface is specified:



.

Term Definition

Voice VLAN Interface Mode The admin mode of the Voice VLAN on the interface.

Voice VLAN ID The Voice VLAN ID

Voice VLAN Priority

Voice VLAN Untagged

The do1p priority for the Voice VLAN on the port.

The tagging option for the Voice VLAN traffic.

Voice VLAN CoS Override The Override option for the voice traffic arriving on the port.

Voice VLAN Status The operational status of Voice VLAN on the port.

Provisioning (IEEE 802.1p) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure provisioning, which allows you to prioritize ports.

vlan port priority all

This command configures the port priority assigned for untagged packets for all ports presently plugged into the device. The range for the priority is 0-7. Any subsequent per port configuration will override this configuration setting.

Format

Mode vlan port priority all <priority>

Global Config vlan priority

This command configures the default 802.1p port priority assigned for untagged packets for a specific interface. The range for the priority is 0–7.

Default

Format

Mode

0 vlan priority <priority>

Interface Config



Protected Ports Commands

This section describes commands you use to configure and view protected ports on a switch.

Protected ports do not forward traffic to each other, even if they are on the same VLAN. However, protected ports can forward traffic to all unprotected ports in their group. Unprotected ports can forward traffic to both protected and unprotected ports. Ports are unprotected by default.

If an interface is configured as a protected port, and you add that interface to a Port Channel or

Link Aggregation Group (LAG), the protected port status becomes operationally disabled on the interface, and the interface follows the configuration of the LAG port. However, the protected port configuration for the interface remains unchanged. Once the interface is no longer a member of a

LAG, the current configuration for that interface automatically becomes effective.

switchport protected (Global Config)

Use this command to create a protected port group. The <groupid> parameter identifies the set of protected ports. Use the name <name> pair to assign a name to the protected port group. The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank.

Note: Port protection occurs within a single switch. Protected port configuration does not affect traffic between ports on two different switches. No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports.

Format

Mode switchport protected <groupid> name <name>

Global Config no switchport protected (Global Config)

Use this command to remove a protected port group. The groupid parameter identifies the set of protected ports. Use the name keyword to remove the name from the group.

Format

Mode

NO switchport protected <groupid> name

Global Config



switchport protected (Interface Config)

Use this command to add an interface to a protected port group. The <groupid> parameter identifies the set of protected ports to which this interface is assigned. You can only configure an interface as protected in one group.

Note: Port protection occurs within a single switch. Protected port configuration does not affect traffic between ports on two different switches. No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports.

Default

Format

Mode unprotected switchport protected <groupid>

Interface Config no switchport protected (Interface Config)

Use this command to configure a port as unprotected. The groupid parameter identifies the set of protected ports to which this interface is assigned.

Format

Mode no switchport protected <groupid>

Interface Config show switchport protected

This command displays the status of all the interfaces, including protected and unprotected interfaces.

Format

Mode

Term

Group ID show switchport protected <groupid>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition

The number that identifies the protected port group.



Term Definition

Name An optional name of the protected port group. The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank.

List of Physical

Ports

List of ports, which are configured as protected for the group identified with <groupid>. If no port is configured as protected for this group, this field is blank.

show interfaces switchport

This command displays the status of the interface (protected/unprotected) under the groupid.

Format

Mode show interfaces switchport <unit/slot/port> <groupid>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Name A string associated with this group as a convenience. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank. This field is optional.

Protected port Indicates whether the interface is protected or not. It shows TRUE or FALSE. If the group is a multiple groups then it shows TRUE in Group <groupid>.

Private Group Commands

This section describes commands used to configure private group and view private group configuration information.

Private group can be used to create a group of ports that can or can not share traffic to each others in the same VLAN group. The main application is to isolate a group of users from another without using VLAN.

switchport private-group

This command is used to assign one port or a range of ports to private group <privategroup-name>

(or <private-group-id>).

The ingress traffic from a port in private group can be forwarded to other ports either in the same private group or anyone in the same VLAN that are not in a private group.



By default, a port does not belong to any private group. A port cannot be in more than one private group. An error message should return when that occurred. To change a port’s private group, first the port must be removed from its private group.

Default

Format

Mode port not associated with any group.

switchport private-group [<privategroup-name>|<privategroup-id>]

Interface Config no switchport private group

This command is used to remove the specified port from the given private group.

Format

Mode no switchport private-group [<privategroup-name>|<privategroup-id>]

Interface Config private-group name

This command is used to create a private group with name <private-group-name>. The name string can be up to 24 bytes of non-blank characters. The total number of private groups is 192 such that the valid range for the ID is <1-192>.

The <private-group-id> field is optional. If not specified, a group id not used will be assigned automatically.

The mode can be either “isolated” or “community”. When in “isolated” mode, the member port in the group cannot forward its egress traffic to any other members in the same group. By default, the mode is “community” mode that each member port can forward traffic to other members in the same group, but not to members in other groups.

Format

Mode

{<privategroup-name> mode [community|isolated]|<groupid>}

Global Config


3-54


no private-group name

This command is used to remove the specified private group.

Format

Mode private-group name <privategroup-name>

Global Config show private-group

This command displays the private groups’ information.

Format

Mode show private-groupname [<private-group-name>|<private-groupid>|port <unit/slot/port>]

Priviledged EXEC

Term Definition

Interface

Port VLANID

Private Group

ID

Valid slot and port number separated by forward slashes.

The VLAN ID associated with the port .

Total number of private groups is 192.

Private Group

Name

The name string can be up to 24 bytes of non-blank characters

Private Group The mode can be either “isolated” or “community”.

GARP Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure Generic Attribute Registration Protocol

(GARP) and view GARP status. The commands in this section affect both GARP VLAN

Registration Protocol (GVRP) and Garp Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP). GARP is a protocol that allows client stations to register with the switch for membership in VLANS (by using

GVMP) or multicast groups (by using GVMP).



set garp timer join

This command sets the GVRP join time for one port (Interface Config mode) or all (Global Config mode) and per GARP. Join time is the interval between the transmission of GARP Protocol Data

Units (PDUs) registering (or re-registering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group. This command has an effect only when GVRP is enabled. The time is from 10 to 100 (centiseconds).

The value 20 centiseconds is 0.2 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

20 set garp timer join <10-100>

• Interface Config

• Global Config no set garp timer join

This command sets the GVRP join time (for one or all ports and per GARP) to the default and only has an effect when GVRP is enabled.

Format

Mode no set garp timer join


• Global Config set garp timer leave

This command sets the GVRP leave time for one port (Interface Config mode) or all ports (Global

Config mode) and only has an effect when GVRP is enabled. Leave time is the time to wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or a multicast group before deleting the VLAN entry.

This can be considered a buffer time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service. The leave time is 20 to 600 (centiseconds). The value

60 centiseconds is 0.6 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

60 set garp timer leave <20-600>


• Global Config


no set garp timer leave


• Global Config


no set garp timer leave

This command sets the GVRP leave time on all ports or a single port to the default and only has an effect when GVRP is enabled.

Format

Mode set garp timer leaveall

This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated. A Leave All PDU indicates that all registrations will be unregistered. Participants would need to rejoin in order to maintain registration. The value applies per port and per GARP participation. The time may range from 200 to 6000 (centiseconds). The value 1000 centiseconds is 10 seconds. You can use this command on all ports (Global Config mode) or a single port (Interface Config mode), and it only has an effect only when GVRP is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode

1000 set garp timer leaveall <200-6000>


• Global Config no set garp timer leaveall

This command sets how frequently Leave All PDUs are generated the default and only has an effect when GVRP is enabled.

Format

Mode no set garp timer leaveall


• Global Config show garp

This command displays GARP information.



Format

Mode show garp

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

GMRP Admin Mode The administrative mode of GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) for the system.

GVRP Admin Mode The administrative mode of GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) for the system.

GVRP Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure and view GARP VLAN Registration

Protocol (GVRP) information. GVRP-enabled switches exchange VLAN configuration information, which allows GVRP to provide dynamic VLAN creation on trunk ports and automatic VLAN pruning.

Note: If GVRP is disabled, the system does not forward GVRP messages.

set gvrp adminmode

This command enables GVRP on the system.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set gvrp adminmode

Privileged EXEC no set gvrp adminmode

This command disables GVRP.


3-58


Format

Mode no set gvrp adminmode

Privileged EXEC set gvrp interfacemode

This command enables GVRP on a single port (Interface Config mode) or all ports (Global Config mode).

Default

Format

Mode disabled set gvrp interfacemode


• Global Config no set gvrp interfacemode

This command disables GVRP on a single port (Interface Config mode) or all ports (Global Config mode). If GVRP is disabled, Join Time, Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect.

Format

Mode no set gvrp interfacemode


• Global Config show gvrp configuration

This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol (GARP) information for one or all interfaces.

Format

Mode

Term

Interface show gvrp configuration {<unit/slot/port> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Definition




Term Definition

Join Timer

Leave Timer

The interval between the transmission of GARP PDUs registering (or re-registering) membership for an attribute. Current attributes are a VLAN or multicast group. There is an instance of this timer on a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. Permissible values are 10 to 100 centiseconds (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The factory default is 20 centiseconds

(0.2 seconds). The finest granularity of specification is one centisecond (0.01 seconds).

The period of time to wait after receiving an unregister request for an attribute before deleting the attribute. Current attributes are a VLAN or multicast group. This may be considered a buffer time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service. There is an instance of this timer on a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. Permissible values are 20 to 600 centiseconds (0.2 to 6.0 seconds). The factory default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds).

LeaveAll Timer This Leave All Time controls how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated. A LeaveAll

PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be deregistered. Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain registration. There is an instance of this timer on a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5*LeaveAllTime. Permissible values are 200 to 6000 centiseconds (2 to 60 seconds). The factory default is 1000 centiseconds (10 seconds).

Port GVMRP

Mode

The GVRP administrative mode for the port, which is enabled or disabled (default). If this parameter is disabled, Join Time, Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect.

GMRP Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure and view GARP Multicast Registration

Protocol (GMRP) information. Like IGMP snooping, GMRP helps control the flooding of multicast packets.GMRP-enabled switches dynamically register and de-register group membership information with the MAC networking devices attached to the same segment. GMRP also allows group membership information to propagate across all networking devices in the bridged LAN that support Extended Filtering Services.

Note: If GMRP is disabled, the system does not forward GMRP messages.

set gmrp adminmode

This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) on the system.


3-60


Default

Format

Mode disabled set gmrp adminmode

Privileged EXEC no set gmrp adminmode

This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) on the system.

Format

Mode no set gmrp adminmode

Privileged EXEC set gmrp interfacemode

This command enables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a single interface (Interface

Config mode) or all interfaces (Global Config mode). If an interface which has GARP enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port-channel (LAG), GARP functionality is disabled on that interface. GARP functionality is subsequently re-enabled if routing is disabled and port-channel (LAG) membership is removed from an interface that has GARP enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set gmrp interfacemode


• Global Config no set gmrp interfacemode

This command disables GARP Multicast Registration Protocol on a single interface or all interfaces. If an interface which has GARP enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port-channel (LAG), GARP functionality is disabled. GARP functionality is subsequently re-enabled if routing is disabled and port-channel (LAG) membership is removed from an interface that has GARP enabled.



Format

Mode no set gmrp interfacemode


• Global Config show gmrp configuration

This command displays Generic Attributes Registration Protocol (GARP) information for one or all interfaces.

Format

Mode show gmrp configuration {<unit/slot/port> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Interface

Join Timer

Leave Timer

The unit/slot/port of the interface that this row in the table describes.

The interval between the transmission of GARP PDUs registering (or re-registering) membership for an attribute. Current attributes are a VLAN or multicast group. There is an instance of this timer on a per-port, per-GARP participant basis. Permissible values are 10 to 100 centiseconds (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The factory default is 20 centiseconds

(0.2 seconds). The finest granularity of specification is 1 centisecond (0.01 seconds).

The period of time to wait after receiving an unregister request for an attribute before deleting the attribute. Current attributes are a VLAN or multicast group. This may be considered a buffer time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute in order to maintain uninterrupted service. There is an instance of this timer on a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. Permissible values are 20 to 600 centiseconds (0.2 to 6.0 seconds). The factory default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds).

LeaveAll Timer This Leave All Time controls how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated. A LeaveAll

PDU indicates that all registrations will shortly be deregistered. Participants will need to rejoin in order to maintain registration. There is an instance of this timer on a per-Port, per-GARP participant basis. The Leave All Period Timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5*LeaveAllTime. Permissible values are 200 to 6000 centiseconds (2 to 60 seconds). The factory default is 1000 centiseconds (10 seconds).

Port GMRP

Mode

The GMRP administrative mode for the port. It may be enabled or disabled. If this parameter is disabled, Join Time, Leave Time and Leave All Time have no effect.



show mac-address-table gmrp

This command displays the GMRP entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) table.

Format

Mode show mac-address-table gmrp

Privileged EXEC

Term

Mac Address

Type

Description

Interfaces

Definition

A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.

The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address is displayed as 8 bytes.

The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user.

Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

The text description of this multicast table entry.

The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:).

Port-Based Network Access Control Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure port-based network access control

(802.1x). Port-based network access control allows you to permit access to network services only to and devices that are authorized and authenticated.

clear dot1x statistics

This command resets the 802.1x statistics for the specified port or for all ports.

Format

Mode clear dot1x statistics {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC clear radius statistics

This command is used to clear all RADIUS statistics.



Format

Mode clear radius statistics

Privileged EXEC dot1x guest-vlan

This command configures VLAN as guest vlan on a per port basis. The command specifies an active VLAN as an IEEE 802.1x guest VLAN. The range is 1 to the maximumVLAN ID supported by the platform.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dot1x guest-vlan <vlan-id>

Interface Config no dot1x guest-vlan

This command disables Guest VLAN on the interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled no dot1x guest-vlan

Interface Config dot1x initialize

This command begins the initialization sequence on the specified port. This command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is “auto” or “mac-based”. If the control mode is not 'auto' or “mac-based”, an error will be returned.

Format

Mode dot1x initialize <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC



dot1x max-req

This command sets the maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will transmit an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame before timing out the supplicant. The <count> value must be in the range 1 - 10.

Default

Format

Mode

2 dot1x max-req <count>

Interface Config no dot1x max-req

This command sets the maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will transmit an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame before timing out the supplicant.

Format

Mode no dot1x max-req

Interface Config dot1x max-users

Use this command to set the maximum number of clients supported on the port when MAC-based dot1x authentication is enabled on the port. The maximum users supported per port is dependent on the product. The <count> value is in the range 1 - 16.

Default

Format

Mode

16 dot1x max-users <count>

Interface Config no dot1x max-users

This command resets the maximum number of clients allowed per port to its default value.

Format

Mode no dot1x max-req

Interface Config


3-65


dot1x port-control

This command sets the authentication mode to use on the specified port. Select forceunauthorized to specify that the authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized. Select force-authorized to specify that the authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized. Select auto to specify that the authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant, authenticator and the authentication server. If the mac-based option is specified, then

MAC-based dot1x authentication is enabled on the port.

Default

Format

Mode auto dot1x port-control {force-unauthorized | force-authorized | auto | mac-based}

Interface Config no dot1x port-control

This command sets the 802.1x port control mode on the specified port to the default value.

Format

Mode no dot1x port-control

Interface Config dot1x port-control all

This command sets the authentication mode to use on all ports. Select force-unauthorized to specify that the authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to unauthorized.

Select force-authorized to specify that the authenticator PAE unconditionally sets the controlled port to authorized. Select auto to specify that the authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode to reflect the outcome of the authentication exchanges between the supplicant, authenticator and the authentication server. If the mac-based option is specified, then MACbased dot1x authentication is enabled on the port.

Default

Format auto dot1x port-control all {force-unauthorized | force-authorized | auto

| mac-based}

Global Config Mode


no dot1x port-control all

Global Config


no dot1x port-control all

This command sets the authentication mode on all ports to the default value.

Format

Mode dot1x re-authenticate

This command begins the re-authentication sequence on the specified port. This command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is “auto” or “mac-based”. If the control mode is not

“auto” or “mac-based”, an error will be returned.

Format

Mode dot1x re-authenticate <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC dot1x re-authentication

This command enables re-authentication of the supplicant for the specified port.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dot1x re-authentication

Interface Config no dot1x re-authentication

This command disables re-authentication of the supplicant for the specified port.

Format

Mode no dot1x re-authentication

Interface Config



dot1x system-auth-control

Use this command to enable the dot1x authentication support on the switch. While disabled, the dot1x configuration is retained and can be changed, but is not activated.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dot1x system-auth-control

Global Config no dot1x system-auth-control

This command is used to disable the dot1x authentication support on the switch.

Format

Mode no dot1x system-auth-control

Global Config dot1x timeout

This command sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port. Depending on the token used and the value (in seconds) passed, various timeout configurable parameters are set. The following tokens are supported:

Tokens Definition guest-vlanperiod

The time, in seconds, for which the authenticator waits to see if any EAPOL packets are received on a port before authorizing the port and placing the port in the guest vlan (if configured). The guest vlan timer is only relevant when guest vlan has been configured on that specific port.

reauth-period The value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when re-authentication of the supplicant takes place. The reauth-period must be a value in the range 1 - 65535.

quiet-period tx-period

The value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant. The quietperiod must be a value in the range 0 - 65535.

The value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame to the supplicant. The quiet-period must be a value in the range 1 - 65535.



Tokens Definition supp-timeout The value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the supplicant. The supp-timeout must be a value in the range 1 - 65535.

server-timeout The value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the authentication server. The supp-timeout must be a value in the range 1 -

65535.

Default

Format

Mode

• guest-vlan-period: 90 seconds

• reauth-period: 3600 seconds

• quiet-period: 60 seconds

• tx-period: 30 seconds

• supp-timeout: 30 seconds

• server-timeout: 30 seconds dot1x timeout {{guest-vlan-period <seconds>} |{reauth-period

<seconds>} | {quiet-period <seconds>} | {tx-period <seconds>} |

{supp-timeout <seconds>} | {server-timeout <seconds>}}

Interface Config no dot1x timeout

This command sets the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to the default values. Depending on the token used, the corresponding default values are set.

Format

Mode no dot1x timeout {guest-vlan-period | reauth-period | quiet-period | tx-period | supp-timeout | server-timeout}

Interface Config dot1x unauthenticated-vlan

Use this command to configure the unauthenticated VLAN associated with that port. The unauthenticated VLAN ID can be a valid VLAN ID from 0-Maximum supported VLAN ID (4093 for 7000 series). The unauthenticated VLAN must be statically configured in the VLAN database to be operational. By default, the unauthenticated VLAN is 0, i.e. invalid and not operational.



Default

Format

Mode

0 dot1x unauthenticated-vlan <vlan id>

Interface Config no dot1x unauthenticated-vlan

This command resets the unauthenticated-vlan associated with the port to its default value.

Format

Mode no dot1x unauthenticated-vlan

Interface Config dot1x user

This command adds the specified user to the list of users with access to the specified port or all ports. The <user> parameter must be a configured user.

Format

Mode dot1x user <user> {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Global Config no dot1x user

This command removes the user from the list of users with access to the specified port or all ports.

Format

Mode no dot1x user <user> {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Global Config


3-70


show authentication methods

This command displays information about the authentication methods.

Format

Mode show authentication methods

Privileged EXEC

The following is an example of this command:

Login Authentication Method Lists

________________________________

Console_Default: None

Network_Default:Local

Enable Authentication Lists

_____________________

Console_Default: Enable None

Network_Default:Enable

Line Login Method List Enable Method Lists

_____________________

Console Console_Default Console_Default

Telnet Network_Default Network_Default

SSH Network_Default Network_Default http : Local https : Local dot1x : show dot1x

This command is used to show a summary of the global dot1x configuration, summary information of the dot1x configuration for a specified port or all ports, the detailed dot1x configuration for a specified port and the dot1x statistics for a specified port - depending on the tokens used.

Format show dot1x [{summary {<unit/slot/port> | all} | detail <unit/slot/ port> | statistics <unit/slot/port>]

Privileged EXEC Mode

If you do not use the optional parameters <unit/slot/port> or <vlanid> , the command displays the global dot1x mode and the VLAN Assignment mode.



Term

Administrative

Mode

VLAN

Assignment

Mode

Definition

Indicates whether authentication control on the switch is enabled or disabled.

Indicates whether assignment of an authorized port to a RADIUS assigned VLAN is allowed (enabled) or not (disabled).

If you use the optional parameter summary {<unit/slot/port> | all} , the dot1x configuration for the specified port or all ports are displayed.

Term Definition

Interface

Operating

Control Mode

The interface whose configuration is displayed.

Control Mode The configured control mode for this port. Possible values are force-unauthorized | forceauthorized | auto | mac-based | authorized | unauthorized.

The control mode under which this port is operating. Possible values are authorized | unauthorized.

Reauthenticatio n Enabled

Port Status

Indicates whether re-authentication is enabled on this port.

Indicates whether the port is authorized or unauthorized. Possible values are authorized

| unauthorized.

If you use the optional parameter ' detail <unit/slot/port >', the detailed dot1x configuration for the specified port is displayed.

Term Definition

Port

Protocol

Version

PAE

Capabilities

The interface whose configuration is displayed.

The protocol version associated with this port. The only possible value is 1, corresponding to the first version of the dot1x specification.

The port access entity (PAE) functionality of this port. Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant.

Control Mode The configured control mode for this port. Possible values are force-unauthorized | forceauthorized | auto | mac-based.

Authenticator

PAE State

Current state of the authenticator PAE state machine. Possible values are Initialize,

Disconnected, Connecting, Authenticating, Authenticated, Aborting, Held,

ForceAuthorized, and ForceUnauthorized. When MAC-based authentication is enabled on the port, this parameter is deprecated.



Term Definition

Backend

Authentication

State

Quiet Period

Current state of the backend authentication state machine. Possible values are Request,

Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle, and Initialize. When MAC-based authentication is enabled on the port, this parameter is deprecated.

The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to define periods of time in which it will not attempt to acquire a supplicant. The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range 0 and 65535.

Transmit Period The timer used by the authenticator state machine on the specified port to determine when to send an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity frame to the supplicant. The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535.

Guest-VLAN ID The guest VLAN identifier configured on the interface.

Guest VLAN

Period

The time in seconds for which the authenticator waits before authorizing and placing the port in the Guest VLAN, if no EAPOL packets are detected on that port.

Supplicant

Timeout

The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to timeout the supplicant.

The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535.

Server Timeout The timer used by the authenticator on this port to timeout the authentication server. The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535.

Maximum

Requests

VLAN Id

The maximum number of times the authenticator state machine on this port will retransmit an EAPOL EAP Request/Identity before timing out the supplicant. The value will be in the range of 1 and 10.

The VLAN assigned to the port by the radius server. This is only valid when the port control mode is not Mac-based.

VLAN Assigned

Reason

The reason the VLAN identified in the VLAN Idfield has been assigned to the port.

Possible values are RADIUS, Unauthenticated VLAN, Guest VLAN, default, and Not

Assigned. When the VLAN Assigned Reason is ‘Not Assigned’t, it means that the port has not been assigned to any VLAN by dot1x. This only valid when the port control mode is not MAC-based.

Reauthenticatio n Period

The timer used by the authenticator state machine on this port to determine when reauthentication of the supplicant takes place. The value is expressed in seconds and will be in the range of 1 and 65535.

Reauthenticatio n Enabled

Indicates if reauthentication is enabled on this port. Possible values are ‘True” or “False”.

Key

Transmission

Enabled

Control

Direction

Indicates if the key is transmitted to the supplicant for the specified port. Possible values are True or False.

The control direction for the specified port or ports. Possible values are both or in.



Term Definition

Maximum Users The maximum number of clients that can get authenticated on the port in the MAC-based dot1x authentication mode. This value is used only when the port control mode is not

MAC-based.

Unauthenticate d VLAN ID

Indicates the unauthenticated VLAN configured for this port. This value is valid for the port only when the port control mode is not MAC-based.

Session

Timeout

Session

Termination

Action

Indicates the time for which the given session is valid. The time period in seconds is returned by the RADIUS server on authentication of the port. This value is valid for the port only when the port control mode is not MAC-based.

This value indicates the action to be taken once the session timeout expires. Possible values are Default, Radius-Request. If the value is Default, the session is terminated the port goes into unauthorized state. If the value is Radius-Request, then a reauthentication of the client authenticated on the port is performed. This value is valid for the port only when the port control mode is not MAC-based.

The show dot1x detail <unit/slot/port> command will display the following MACbased dot1x fields if the port-control mode for that specific port is MAC-based. For each client authenticated on the port, the show dot1x detail <unit/slot/port> command will display the following MAC-based dot1x parameters if the port-control mode for that specific port is MACbased.

Term Definition

Supplicant

MAC-Address

Authenticator

PAE State

The MAC-address of the supplicant.

Current state of the authenticator PAE state machine. Possible values are Initialize,

Disconnected, Connecting, Authenticating, Authenticated, Aborting, Held,

ForceAuthorized, and ForceUnauthorized.

Backend

Authentication

State

Current state of the backend authentication state machine. Possible values are Request,

Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle, and Initialize.

VLAN-Assigned The VLAN assigned to the client by the radius server.

Logical Port The logical port number associated with the client.

If you use the optional parameter statistics <unit/slot/port> , the following dot1x statistics for the specified port appear.



Term Definition

Port The interface whose statistics are displayed.

EAPOL Frames

Received

The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator.

EAPOL Frames

Transmitted

The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator.

The number of EAPOL start frames that have been received by this authenticator.

EAPOL Start

Frames

Received

EAPOL Logoff

Frames

Received

The number of EAPOL logoff frames that have been received by this authenticator.

The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

Last EAPOL

Frame Version

Last EAPOL

Frame Source

EAP Response/

Id Frames

Received

EAP Response

Frames

Received

The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

The number of EAP response/identity frames that have been received by this authenticator.

The number of valid EAP response frames (other than resp/id frames) that have been received by this authenticator.

EAP Request/Id

Frames

Transmitted

The number of EAP request/identity frames that have been transmitted by this authenticator.

EAP Request

Frames

Transmitted

Invalid EAPOL

Frames

Received

The number of EAP request frames (other than request/identity frames) that have been transmitted by this authenticator.

The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.

EAP Length

Error Frames

Received

The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.

show dot1x clients

This command displays 802.1x client information.



Format

Mode show dot1x clients { <unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Logical

Interface

The logical port number associated with a client.

Interface

User Name

The physical port to which the supplicant is associated.

The user name used by the client to authenticate to the server.

Supplicant MAC

Address

The supplicant device MAC address.

Session Time The time since the supplicant is logged on.

Filter ID Identifies the Filter ID returned by the RADIUS server when the client was authenticated.

This is a configured DiffServ policy name on the switch.

VLAN ID

Session

Timeout

The VLAN assigned to the port.

VLAN Assigned The reason the VLAN identified in the VLAN ID field has been assigned to the port.

Possible values are RADIUS, Unauthenticated VLAN, or Default. When the VLAN

Assigned reason is Default, it means that the VLAN was assigned to the port because the PVID of the port was that VLAN ID.

This value indicates the time for which the given session is valid. The time period in seconds is returned by the RADIUS server on authentication of the port. This value is valid for the port only when the port-control mode is not MAC-based.

Session

Termination

Action

This value indicates the action to be taken once the session timeout expires. Possible values are Default and Radius-Request. If the value is Default, the session is terminated and client details are cleared. If the value is Radius-Request, then a reauthentication of the client is performed.

show dot1x users

This command displays 802.1x port security user information for locally configured users.

Format

Mode show dot1x users

Privileged EXEC

<unit/slot/port>

Term

Users

Definition

Users configured locally to have access to the specified port.


3-76


Storm-Control Commands

This section describes commands you use to configure storm-control and view storm-control configuration information. A traffic storm is a condition that occurs when incoming packets flood the LAN, which creates performance degredation in the network. The Storm-Control feature protects against this condition.

The 7000 series provides broadcast, multicast, and unicast story recovery for individual interfaces.

Unicast Storm-Control protects against traffic whose MAC addresses are not known by the system. For broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm-control, if the rate of traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold for that type, the traffic is dropped.

To configure storm-control, you will enable the feature for all interfaces or for individual interfaces, and you will set the threshold (storm-control level) beyond which the broadcast, multicast, or unicast traffic will be dropped. The Storm-Control feature allows you to limit the rate of specific types of packets through the switch on a per-port, per-type, basis.

Configuring a storm-control level also enables that form of storm-control. Disabling a stormcontrol level (using the “no” version of the command) sets the storm-control level back to the default value and disables that form of storm-control. Using the “no” version of the “stormcontrol” command (not stating a “level”) disables that form of storm-control but maintains the configured “level” (to be active the next time that form of storm-control is enabled.)

Note: The actual rate of ingress traffic required to activate storm-control is based on the size of incoming packets and the hard-coded average packet size of 512 bytes - used to calculate a packet-per-second (pps) rate - as the forwarding-plane requires pps versus an absolute rate kbps. For example, if the configured limit is 10%, this is converted to ~25000 pps, and this pps limit is set in forwarding plane

(hardware). You get the approximate desired output when 512bytes packets are used.

storm-control broadcast

Use this command to enable broadcast storm recovery mode for a specific interface. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active and, if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.



Default

Format

Mode enabled storm-control broadcast

Interface Config no storm-control broadcast

Use this command to disable broadcast storm recovery mode for a specific interface.

Format

Mode no storm-control broadcast

Interface Config storm-control broadcast level

Use this command to configure the broadcast storm recovery threshold for an interface as a percentage of link speed and enable broadcast storm recovery. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

5 storm-control broadcast level <0-100>

Interface Config no storm-control broadcast level

This command sets the broadcast storm recovery threshold to the default value for an interface and disables broadcast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control broadcast level

Interface Config



storm-control broadcast rate

Use this command to configure the broadcast storm recovery threshold for an interface in packets per second. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

0 storm-control broadcast rate <0-14880000>

Interface Config no storm-control broadcast rate

This command sets the broadcast storm recovery threshold to the default value for an interface and disables broadcast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control broadcast rate

Interface Config storm-control broadcast (Global)

This command enables broadcast storm recovery mode for all interfaces. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode disabled storm-control broadcast

Global Config no storm-control broadcast

This command disables broadcast storm recovery mode for all interfaces.



Format

Mode no storm-control broadcast

Global Config storm-control broadcast level (Global)

This command configures the broadcast storm recovery threshold for all interfaces as a percentage of link speed and enables broadcast storm recovery. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.This command also enables broadcast storm recovery mode for all interfaces.

Default

Format

Mode

5 storm-control broadcast level <0-100>

Global Config no storm-control broadcast level

This command sets the broadcast storm recovery threshold to the default value for all interfaces and disables broadcast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control broadcast level

Global Config storm-control broadcast rate (Global)

Use this command to configure the broadcast storm recovery threshold for all interfaces in packets per second. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped. Therefore, the rate of broadcast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default 0


Format

Mode


storm-control broadcast rate <0-14880000>

Global Config no storm-control broadcast rate


Format


Global Config storm-control multicast

This command enables multicast storm recovery mode for an interface. If the mode is enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 multicast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode disabled storm-control multicast

Interface Config no storm-control multicast

This command disables multicast storm recovery mode for an interface.

Format

Mode no storm-control multicast

Interface Config


3-81


storm-control multicast level

This command configures the multicast storm recovery threshold for an interface as a perecentage of link speed and enables multicast storm recovery mode. If the mode is enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 multicast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

5 storm-control multicast level <0-100>

Interface Config no storm-control multicast level

This command sets the multicast storm recovery threshold to the default value for an interface and disables multicast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control multicast level <0-100>

Interface Config storm-control multicast rate

Use this command to configure the multicast storm recovery threshold for an interface in packets per second. If the mode is enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

0 storm-control multicast rate <0-14880000>

Interface Config no storm-control multicast rate




Format

Mode no storm-control multicast rate

Interface Config storm-control multicast (Global)

This command enables multicast storm recovery mode for all interfaces. If the mode is enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 multicast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode disabled storm-control multicast

Global Config no storm-control multicast

This command disables multicast storm recovery mode for all interfaces.

Format

Mode no storm-control multicast

Global Config storm-control multicast level (Global)

This command configures the multicast storm recovery threshold for all interfaces as a percentage of link speed and enables multicast storm recovery mode. If the mode is enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 multicast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

5 storm-control multicast level <0-100>

Global Config



no storm-control multicast level

This command sets the multicast storm recovery threshold to the default value for all interfaces and disables multicast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control multicast level

Global Config storm-control multicast rate (Global)

Use this command to configure the multicast storm recovery threshold for all interfaces in packets per second. If the mode is enabled, multicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped. Therefore, the rate of multicast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

0 storm-control multicast rate <0-14880000>

Global Config no storm-control broadcast rate


Format


Global Config storm-control unicast

This command enables unicast storm recovery mode for an interface. If the mode is enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of unknown L2 unicast (destination lookup failure) traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of unknown unicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.



Default

Format

Mode disabled storm-control unicast

Interface Config no storm-control unicast

This command disables unicast storm recovery mode for an interface.

Format

Mode no storm-control unicast

Interface Config storm-control unicast level

This command configures the unicast storm recovery threshold for an interface as a percentage of link speed, and enables unicast storm recovery. If the mode is enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of unknown L2 unicast (destination lookup failure) traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of unknown unicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.This command also enables unicast storm recovery mode for an interface.

Default

Format

Mode

5 storm-control unicast level <0-100>

Interface Config no storm-control unicast level

This command sets the unicast storm recovery threshold to the default value for an interface and disables unicast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control unicast level

Interface Config



storm-control unicast rate

Use this command to configure the unicast storm recovery threshold for an interface in packets per second. If the mode is enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped.

Therefore, the rate of unicast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

0 storm-control unicast rate <0-14880000>

Interface Config no storm-control unicast rate

This command sets the unicast storm recovery threshold to the default value for an interface and disables unicast storm recovery.

Format

Mode no storm-control unicast rate

Interface Config storm-control unicast (Global)

This command enables unicast storm recovery mode for all interfaces. If the mode is enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of unknown L2 unicast (destination lookup failure) traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of unknown unicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode disabled storm-control unicast

Global Config no storm-control unicast

This command disables unicast storm recovery mode for all interfaces.



Format

Mode no storm-control unicast

Global Config storm-control unicast level (Global)

This command configures the unicast storm recovery threshold for all interfaces as a percentage of link speed, and enables unicast storm recovery. If the mode is enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of unknown L2 unicast (destination lookup failure) traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped. Therefore, the rate of unknown unicast traffic will be limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

5 storm-control unicast level <0-100>

Global Config no storm-control unicast level

This command sets the unicast storm recovery threshold to the default value and disables unicast storm recovery for all interfaces.

Format

Mode no storm-control unicast level

Global Config storm-control unicast rate (Global)

Use this command to configure the unicast storm recovery threshold for all interfaces in packets per second. If the mode is enabled, unicast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic is dropped.

Therefore, the rate of unicast traffic is limited to the configured threshold.

Default

Format

Mode

0 storm-control unicast rate <0-14880000>

Global Config


no storm-control unicast rate

Global Config


no storm-control unicast rate


Format

Mode storm-control flowcontrol

This command enables 802.3x flow control for the switch and only applies to full-duplex mode ports.

Note: 802.3x flow control works by pausing a port when the port becomes oversubscribed and dropping all traffic for small bursts of time during the congestion condition. This can lead to high-priority and/or network control traffic loss.

Default

Format

Mode disabled storm-control flowcontrol

Global Config no storm-control flowcontrol

This command disables 802.3x flow control for the switch.

Note: This command only applies to full-duplex mode ports.

Format

Mode no storm-control flowcontrol

Global Config


3-88


show storm-control

This command displays switch configuration information. If you do not use any of the optional parameters, this command displays global storm control configuration parameters:

• Broadcast Storm Control Mode may be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

• 802.3x Flow Control Mode may be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

• Broadcast Storm Control Level The broadcast storm control level. The factory default is 5%.

• Multicast Storm Control Mode may be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

• Multicast Storm Control Level The multicast storm control level. The factory default is 5%.

• Unicast Storm Control Mode may be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

• Unicast Storm Control Level The unicast storm control level. The factory default is 5%.

Use the all keyword to display the per-port configuration parameters for all interfaces, or specify the unit/slot/port to display information about a specific interface.

Format

Mode show storm-control [all | <unit/slot/port>]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Bcast Mode

Bcast Level

Mcast Mode

Mcast Level

Ucast Mode

Ucast Level

Definition

Shows whether the broadcast storm control mode is enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

The broadcast storm control level.

Shows whether the multicast storm control mode is enabled or disabled.

The multicast storm control level.

Shows whether the Unknown Unicast or DLF (Destination Lookup Failure) storm control mode is enabled or disabled.

The Unknown Unicast or DLF (Destination Lookup Failure) storm control level.

Port-Channel/LAG (802.3ad) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure port-channels, which are also known as link aggregation groups (LAGs). Link aggregation allows you to combine multiple full-duplex

Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load sharing. The LAG feature initially load



shares traffic based upon the source and destination MAC address.Assign the port-channel (LAG)

VLAN membership after you create a port-channel. If you do not assign VLAN membership, the port-channel might become a member of the management VLAN which can result in learning and switching issues.

A port-channel (LAG) interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a port channel must participate in the same protocols.) A static port-channel interface does not require a partner system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

Note: If you configure the maximum number of dynamic port-channels (LAGs) that your platform supports, additional port-channels that you configure are automatically static.

port-channel

This command configures a new port-channel (LAG) and generates a logical unit/slot/port number for the port-channel. The <name> field is a character string which allows the dash “-” character as well as alphanumeric characters. Use the show port channel command to display the unit/ slot/port number for the logical interface.

Note: Before you include a port in a port-channel, set the port physical mode. For more information, see “speed” on page 3-7 .

Format

Mode port-channel <name>

Global Config no port-channel

This command deletes a port-channel (LAG).

Format

Mode no port-channel {<logical unit/slot/port> | all}

Global Config



addport

This command adds one port to the port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical unit/slot/port number or a group ID of a configured port-channel.

Note: Before adding a port to a port-channel, set the physical mode of the port. For more information, see “speed” on page 3-7

Format

Mode addport {<logical unit/slot/port>|<lag-group-id>}

Interface Config deleteport (Interface Config)

This command deletes the port from the port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical unit/slot/ port number or a group ID of a configured port-channel.

Format

Mode deleteport {<logical unit/slot/port>|<lag-group-id>}

Interface Config deleteport (Global Config)

This command deletes all configured ports from the port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical unit/slot/port number of a configured port-channel. To clear the port channels, see “clear portchannel” on page 6-27

.

Format

Mode deleteport <logical unit/slot/port> all

Global Config


3-91


lacp admin key

Use this command to configure the administrative value of the key for the port-channel. The value range of < key > is 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0x8000 lacp admin key < key >

Interface Config

Note: This command is only applicable to port-channel interfaces.

no lacp admin key

Use this command to configure the default administrative value of the key for the port-channel.

Format

Mode no lacp admin key

Interface Config lacp collector max-delay

Use this command to configure the port-channel collector max delay. The valid range of < delay > is 0-65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0x8000 lacp collector max-delay < delay >

Interface Config

Note: This command is only applicable to port-channel interfaces.



no lacp collector max delay

Use this command to configure the default port-channel collector max delay.

Format

Mode no lacp collector max-delay

Interface Config lacp actor admin

Use this command to configure the LACP actor admin parameters.

lacp actor admin key

Use this command to configure the administrative value of the LACP actor admin key. The valid range for < key > is 0-65535.

Default

Format

Mode

Internal Interface Number of this Physical Port lacp actor admin key < key >

Interface Config

Note: This command is only applicable to physical interfaces.

no lacp actor admin key

Use this command to configure the default administrative value of the key.

Format

Mode no lacp actor admin key

Interface Config



lacp actor admin state individual

Use this command to set LACP actor admin state to individual.

Format

Mode lacp actor admin state individual

Interface Config


no lacp actor admin state individual

Use this command to set the LACP actor admin state to aggregation.

Format

Mode no lacp actor admin state individual

Interface Config lacp actor admin state longtimeout

Use this command to set LACP actor admin state to longtimeout.

Format

Mode lacp actor admin state longtimeout

Interface Config



3-94


no lacp actor admin state longtimeout

Use this command to set the LACP actor admin state to short timeout.

Format

Mode no lacp actor admin state longtimeout

Interface Config


lacp actor admin state passive

Use this command to set the LACP actor admin state to passive.

Format

Mode lacp actor admin state passive

Interface Config


no lacp actor admin state passive

Use this command to set the LACP actor admin state to active.

Format

Mode no lacp actor admin state passive

Interface Config


3-95


lacp actor port priority

Use this command to configure the priority value assigned to the Aggregation Port. The valid range for < priority > is 0 to 255.

Default

Format

Mode

0x80 lacp actor port priority <priority>

Interface Config


no lacp actor port priority

Use this command to configure the default priority value assigned to the Aggregation Port.

Format

Mode no lacp actor port priority

Interface Config lacp actor system priority

Use this command to configure the priority value associated with the LACP Actor’s SystemID.

The range for < priority > is 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

32768 lacp actor system priority < priority >

Interface Config




no lacp actor system priority

Use this command to configure the priority value associated with the Actor’s SystemID.

Format

Mode no lacp actor system priority

Interface Config lacp partner admin key

Use this command to configure the administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner. The valid range for < key > is 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0x0 lacp partner admin key

Interface Config


no lacp partner admin key

Use this command to configure the administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Format

Mode no lacp partner admin key < key >

Interface Config lacp partner admin state individual

Use this command to set LACP partner admin state to individual.

Format

Mode lacp partner admin state individual

Interface Config




no lacp partner admin state individual

Use this command to set the LACP partner admin state to aggregation.

Format

Mode no lacp partner admin state individual

Interface Config lacp partner admin state longtimeout

Use this command to set LACP partner admin state to longtimeout.

Format

Mode lacp partner admin state longtimeout

Interface Config


no lacp partner admin state longtimeout

Use this command to set the LACP partner admin state to short timeout.

Format

Mode no lacp partner admin state longtimeout

Interface Config



3-98


lacp partner admin state passive

Use this command to set the LACP partner admin state to passive.

Format

Mode lacp partner admin state passive

Interface Config


no lacp partner admin state passive

Use this command to set the LACP partner admin state to active.

Format

Mode no lacp partner admin state passive

Interface Config lacp partner port id

Use this command to configure the LACP partner port id. The valid range for < port-id > is 0 to

65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0x80 lacp partner portid < port-id >

Interface Config




no lacp partner port id

Use this command to set the LACP partner port id to the default.

Format

Mode no lacp partner portid

Interface Config lacp partner port priority

Use this command to configure the LACP partner port priority. The valid range for < priority > is 0 to 255.

Default

Format

Mode

0x0 lacp partner port priority < priority >

Interface Config


no lacp partner port priority

Use this command to configure the default LACP partner port priority.

Format

Mode no lacp partner port priority

Interface Config


3-100


lacp partner system id

Use this command to configure the 6-octet MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner’s System ID. The valid range of < system-id > is 00:00:00:00:00:00 - FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.

Default

Format

Mode

00:00:00:00:00:00 lacp partner system id < system-id >

Interface Config


no lacp partner system id

Use this command to configure the default value representing the administrative value of the

Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner’s System ID.

Format

Mode no lacp partner system id

Interface Config lacp partner system priority

Use this command to configure the administrative value of the priority associated with the

Partner’s System ID. The valid range for < priority > is 0 to 255.

Default

Format

Mode

0x0 lacp partner system priority < priority >

Interface Config




no lacp partner system priority

Use this command to configure the default administrative value of priority associated with the

Partner’s System ID.

Format

Mode no lacp partner system priority

Interface Config port-channel static

This command enables the static mode on a port-channel (LAG) interface. By default the static mode for a new port-channel is disabled, which means the port-channel is dynamic. However if the maximum number of allowable dynamic port-channels are already present in the system, the static mode for a new port-channel enabled, which means the port-channel is static.You can only use this command on port-channel interfaces.

Default

Format

Mode disabled port-channel static

Interface Config no port-channel static

This command sets the static mode on a particular port-channel (LAG) interface to the default value. This command will be executed only for interfaces of type port-channel (LAG).

Format

Mode no port-channel static

Interface Config



port lacpmode

This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a port.

Default

Format

Mode enabled port lacpmode

Interface Config no port lacpmode

This command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a port.

Format

Mode no port lacpmode

Interface Config port lacpmode enable all

This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on all ports.

Format

Mode port lacpmode enable all

Global Config no port lacpmode enable all

This command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on all ports.

Format

Mode no port lacpmode enable all

Global Config


3-103


port lacptimeout (Interface Config)

This command sets the timeout on a physical interface of a particular device type ( actor or partner ) to either long or short timeout.

Default

Format

Mode long port lacptimeout {actor | partner} {long | short}

Interface Config no port lacptimeout

This command sets the timeout back to its default value on a physical interface of a particular device type ( actor or partner ).

Format

Mode no port lacptimeout {actor | partner}

Interface Config port lacptimeout (Global Config)

This command sets the timeout for all interfaces of a particular device type ( actor or partner ) to either long or short timeout.

Default

Format

Mode long port lacptimeout {actor | partner} {long | short}

Global Config no port lacptimeout

This command sets the timeout for all physical interfaces of a particular device type ( actor or partner ) back to their default values.

Format

Mode no port lacptimeout {actor | partner}

Global Config



port-channel adminmode

This command enables a port-channel (LAG). This command sets every configured port-channel with the same administrative mode setting.

Format

Mode port-channel adminmode all

Global Config no port-channel adminmode

This command disables a port-channel (LAG). This command clears every configured portchannel with the same administrative mode setting.

Format

Mode no port-channel adminmode [all]

Global Config port-channel linktrap

This command enables link trap notifications for the port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical unit/slot/port for a configured port-channel. The option all

enables link trap notifications for all the

configured port-channels.

Default

Format

Mode enabled port-channel linktrap {<logical unit/slot/port> | all}

Global Config no port-channel linktrap

This command disables link trap notifications for the port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port-channel. The option all disables link trap notifications for all the configured port-channels.

Format

Mode no port-channel linktrap {<logical unit/slot/port> | all}

Global Config



hashing-mode

This command sets the hashing algorithm on Trunk ports. The command is available in the interface configuration mode for a port-channel. The mode range is in the range 1-6 as follows:

1. Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and port ID

2. Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and port ID

3. Source IP and source TCP/UDP port

4. Destination IP and destination TCP/UDP port

5. Source/Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType and port

6. Source/Destination IP and source/destination TCP/UDP port

Default

Format

Mode

3 hashing-mode <mode>

Interface Config no hashing-mode

This command sets the hashing algorithm on Trunk ports to default (3). The command is available in the interface configuration mode for a port-channel.

Format

Mode no hashing-mode

Interface Config port-channel load-balance

This command selects the load-balancing option used on a port-channel (LAG). Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets. The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet, and associating that pattern with a particular link.


3-106


Load-balancing is not supported on every device. The range of options for load-balancing may vary per device.

Default

Format

Mode

3 port-channel load-balance { 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 } { <unit/slot/ port> |< all >}

Interface Config

Global Config

Term

3

4

1

2

5

6

<unit/slot/ port>| all

Definition

Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet

Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet

Source/Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet

Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the packet

Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet

Source/Destination IP and source/destination TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet

Global Config Mode only: The interface is a logical unit/slot/port number of a configured portchannel. "All" applies the command to all currently configured port-channels.

no port-channel load-balance

This command reverts to the default load balancing configuration.

Format

Mode no port-channel load-balance {< unit/slot/port > | < all >}

Interface Config

Global Config

Term

<unit/slot/ port>| all

Definition

Global Config Mode only: The interface is a logical unit/slot/port number of a configured portchannel. "All" applies the command to all currently configured port-channels.


3-107


port-channel name

This command defines a name for the port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical unit/slot/port for a configured port-channel, and <name> is an alphanumeric string up to 15 characters.

Format

Mode port-channel name {<logical unit/slot/port> | all | <name>}

Global Config port-channel system priority

Use this command to configure port-channel system priority. The valid range of <priority> is 0-

65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0x8000 port-channel system priority < priority >

Global Config no port-channel system priority

Use this command to configure the default port-channel system priority value.

Format

Mode no port-channel system priority

Global Config show lacp actor

Use this command to display LACP actor attributes.

Format

Mode show lacp actor {< unit/slot/port >|all}

Global Config

The following output parameters are displayed.

Parameter Description

System Priority The system priority assigned to the Aggregation Port.



Parameter

Admin Key

Port Priority

Admin State

Description

The administrative value of the Key.

The priority value assigned to the Aggregation Port.

The administrative values of the actor state as transmitted by the Actor in LACPDUs.

show lacp partner

Use this command to display LACP partner attributes.

Format

Mode show lacp actor {< unit/slot/port >|all}

Privileged EXEC

The following output parameters are displayed.


System Priority The administrative value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID.

System ID The value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol

Partner’s System ID.

Admin Key

Port Priority

The administrative value of the Key for the protocol Partner.

The administrative value of the port priority for the protocol Partner.

Port-ID

Admin State

The administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.

The administrative values of the actor state for the protocol Partner.

show port-channel brief

This command displays the static capability of all port-channel (LAG) interfaces on the device as well as a summary of individual port-channel interfaces.

Format

Mode show port-channel brief

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



For each port-channel the following information is displayed:

Term

Logical

Interface

Port-channel

Name

Link-State

Trap Flag

Type

Mbr Ports

Active Ports

Definition

The unit/slot/port of the logical interface.

The name of port-channel (LAG) interface.

Shows whether the link is up or down.

Shows whether trap flags are enabled or disabled.

Shows whether the port-channel is statically or dynamically maintained.

The members of this port-channel.

The ports that are actively participating in the port-channel.

show port-channel

This command displays the static capability of all port-channels (LAGs) on the device as well as a summary of individual port-channels.

Format

Mode show port-channel

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Static

Capability

Definition

This field displays whether or not the device has static capability enabled.

For each port-channel the following information is displayed:

Term

Name

Link-State

Mbr Ports

Active Ports

Definition

This field displays the name of the port-channel.


This field lists the ports that are members of this port-channel, in <unit/slot/port> notation.

The ports that are actively participating in the port-channel.



show port-channel

This command displays an overview of all port-channels (LAGs) on the switch.

Format

Mode show port-channel {<logical unit/slot/port> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Logical

Interface

Port-Channel

Name

Link State

Admin Mode

Type

Mbr Ports


The name of this port-channel (LAG). You may enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.

Indicates whether the Link is up or down.

May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled.

The status designating whether a particular port-channel (LAG) is statically or dynamically maintained.

• Static - The port-channel is statically maintained.

• Dynamic - The port-channel is dynamically maintained.

A listing of the ports that are members of this port-channel (LAG), in unit/slot/port notation. There can be a maximum of eight ports assigned to a given port-channel

(LAG).

Device Timeout For each port, lists the timeout ( long or short ) for Device Type ( actor or partner ).

Port Speed Speed of the port-channel port.

Ports Active This field lists ports that are actively participating in the port-channel (LAG).

Load Balance

Option

The load balance option associated with this LAG. See “port-channel load-balance” on page 3-106 .

show port-channel system priority

Use this command to display the port-channel system priority.

Format

Mode show port-channel system priority

Privileged EXEC



Port Mirroring

Port mirroring, which is also known as port monitoring, selects network traffic that you can analyze with a network analyzer, such as a SwitchProbe device or other Remote Monitoring

(RMON) probe.

monitor session

This command configures a probe port and a monitored port for monitor session (port monitoring).

Use the source interface <unit/slot/port> parameter to specify the interface to monitor. Use rx to monitor only ingress packets, or use tx to monitor only egress packets. If you do not specify an {rx | tx} option, the destination port monitors both ingress and egress packets. Use the destination interface <unit/slot/port> to specify the interface to receive the monitored traffic. Use the mode parameter to enabled the administrative mode of the session. If enabled, the probe port monitors all the traffic received and transmitted on the physical monitored port.

Format

Mode monitor session <session-id> {source interface <unit/slot/port> [{rx

| tx}] | destination interface <unit/slot/port> | mode}

Global Config no monitor session

.

Use this command without optional parameters to remove the monitor session (port monitoring) designation from the source probe port, the destination monitored port and all VLANs. Once the port is removed from the VLAN, you must manually add the port to any desired VLANs. Use the source interface <unit/slot/port> parameter or destination interface

<unit/slot/port> to remove the specified interface from the port monitoring session. Use the mode parameter to disable the administrative mode of the session

Note: Since the current version of 7000 series software only supports one session, if you do not supply optional parameters, the behavior of this command is similar to the behavior of the no monitor command.


Format

Mode


no monitor session <session-id> [{source interface <unit/slot/port>

| destination interface <unit/slot/port> | mode}]

Global Config no monitor

This command removes all the source ports and a destination port for the and restores the default value for mirroring session mode for all the configured sessions.

Default

Format

Mode

Note: This is a stand-alone “no” command. This command does not have a “normal” form.

enabled no monitor

Global Config show monitor session

This command displays the Port monitoring information for a particular mirroring session.

Note: The <session-id> parameter is an integer value used to identify the session.

In the current version of the software, the <session-id> parameter is always one (1)

Format

Mode

Term

Session ID show monitor session <session-id>

Privileged EXEC

Definition

An integer value used to identify the session. Its value can be anything between 1 and the maximum number of mirroring sessions allowed on the platform.



Term

Admin Mode

Probe Port

Mirrored Port

Type

Definition

Indicates whether the Port Mirroring feature is enabled or disabled for the session identified with <session-id> . The possible values are Enabled and Disabled.

Probe port (destination port) for the session identified with <session-id> . If probe port is not set then this field is blank.

The port, which is configured as mirrored port (source port) for the session identified with

<session-id>

. If no source port is configured for the session then this field is blank.

Direction in which source port configured for port mirroring.Types are tx for transmitted packets and rx for receiving packets.

Static MAC Filtering

The commands in this section describe how to configure static MAC filtering. Static MAC filtering allows you to configure destination ports for a static multicast MAC filter irrespective of the platform. macfilter

This command adds a static MAC filter entry for the MAC address < macaddr > on the VLAN

< vlanid > . The value of the < macaddr > parameter is a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6. The restricted MAC Addresses are: 00:00:00:00:00:00,

01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:0F, 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21, and

FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF. The < vlanid > parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

The number of static mac filters supported on the system is different for MAC filters where source ports are configured and MAC filters where destination ports are configured.

• For unicast MAC address filters and multicast MAC address filters with source port lists, the maximum number of static MAC filters supported is 20.

• For multicast MAC address filters with destination ports configured, the maximum number of static filters supported is 256.

i.e. For current platforms, you can configure the following combinations:

• Unicast MAC and source port (max = 20)

• Multicast MAC and source port (max=20)

• Multicast MAC and destination port (only) (max=256)



• Multicast MAC and source ports and destination ports (max=20)

Format

Mode macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>

Global Config no macfilter

This command removes all filtering restrictions and the static MAC filter entry for the MAC address <macaddr> on the VLAN <vlanid> . The <macaddr> parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.

The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

Format

Mode no macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>

Global Config macfilter adddest

Use this command to add the interface to the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given

<macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid> . The <macaddr> parameter must be specified as a 6byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6. The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

Note: Configuring a destination port list is only valid for multicast MAC addresses.

Format

Mode macfilter adddest < macaddr > <vlanid>

Interface Config


3-115


no macfilter adddest

This command removes a port from the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given


Format

Mode no macfilter adddest < macaddr > <vlanid>

Interface Config macfilter adddest all

This command adds all interfaces to the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given


Note: Configuring a destination port list is only valid for multicast MAC addresses.

Format

Mode macfilter adddest all < macaddr > <vlanid>

Global Config no macfilter adddest all

This command removes all ports from the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given


Format

Mode no macfilter adddest all < macaddr > <vlanid>

Global Config



macfilter addsrc

This command adds the interface to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of < macaddr > and VLAN of < vlanid > . The < macaddr > parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6. The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

Format

Mode macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>

Interface Config no macfilter addsrc

This command removes a port from the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid> . The < macaddr > parameter must be specified as a 6byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6. The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

Format

Mode no macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>

Interface Config macfilter addsrc all

This command adds all interfaces to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and <vlanid> . You must specify the <macaddr> parameter as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6. The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

Format

Mode macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>

Global Config no macfilter addsrc all

This command removes all interfaces to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid> . You must specify the <macaddr> parameter as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of b1:b2:b3:b4:b5:b6.



The <vlanid> parameter must identify a valid VLAN.

Format

Mode no macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>

Global Config show mac-address-table static

This command displays the Static MAC Filtering information for all Static MAC Filters. If you select <all> , all the Static MAC Filters in the system are displayed. If you supply a value for

<macaddr>, you must also enter a value for <vlanid> , and the system displays Static MAC

Filter information only for that MAC address and VLAN.

Format

Mode show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address The MAC Address of the static MAC filter entry.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the static MAC filter entry.

Source Port(s) The source port filter set's slot and port(s).

Note: Only multicast address filters will have destination port lists.

show mac-address-table staticfiltering

This command displays the Static Filtering entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) table.

Format

Mode show mac-address-table staticfiltering

Privileged EXEC



Term

Mac Address

Type

Description

Interfaces

Definition


As the data is gleaned from the MFDB, the address will be a multicast address. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example

01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes.





DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands

This section describes commands you use to configure DHCP Snooping.

ip dhcp snooping

Use this command to enable DHCP Snooping globally.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip dhcp snooping

Global Config no ip dhcp snooping

Use this command to disable DHCP Snooping globally.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping

Global Config ip dhcp snooping vlan

Use this command to enable DHCP Snooping on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges.



Default

Format

Mode disabled ip dhcp snooping vlan < vlan-list >

Global Config no ip dhcp snooping vlan

Use this command to disable DHCP Snooping on VLANs.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping vlan < vlan-list >

Global Config ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Use this command to enable verification of the source MAC address with the client hardware address in the received DCHP message.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Global Config no ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Use this command to disable verification of the source MAC address with the client hardware address.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Global Config ip dhcp snooping database

Use this command to configure the persistent location of the DHCP Snooping database. This can be local or a remote file on a given IP machine.



Default

Format

Mode local ip dhcp snooping database {local|tftp://hostIP/filename}

Global Config ip dhcp snooping database write-delay

Use this command to configure the interval in seconds at which the DHCP Snooping database will be persisted. The interval value ranges from 15 to 86400 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

300 seconds ip dhcp snooping database write-delay < in seconds >

Global Config no ip dhcp snooping database write-delay

Use this command to set the write delay value to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping database write-delay

Global Config ip dhcp snooping binding

Use this command to configure static DHCP Snooping binding.

Format

Mode ip dhcp snooping binding < mac-address > vlan < vlan id > < ip address > interface < interface id >

Global Config no ip dhcp snooping binding <mac-address>

Use this command to remove the DHCP static entry from the DHCP Snooping database.



Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping binding < mac-address >

Global Config ip verify binding

Use this command to configure static IP source guard (IPSG) entries.

Format

Mode ip verify binding < mac-address > vlan < vlan id > < ip address > interface

< interface id >

Global Config no ip verify binding

Use this command to remove the IPSG static entry from the IPSG database.

Format

Mode no ip verify binding < mac-address > vlan < vlan id > < ip address > interface < interface id >

Global Config ip dhcp snooping limit

Use this command to control the rate at which the DHCP Snooping messages come. The default rate is 15 pps with a range from 0 to 30 pps. The default burst level is 1 second with a range of 1 to

15 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

15 pps for rate limiting and 1 sec for burst interval ip dhcp snooping limit {rate pps [burst interval seconds]}

Interface Config no ip dhcp snooping limit

Use this command to set the rate at which the DHCP Snooping messages come, and the burst level, to the defaults.



Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping limit

Interface Config ip dhcp snooping log-invalid

Use this command to control the logging DHCP messages filtration by the DHCP Snooping application.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip dhcp snooping log-invalid

Interface Config no ip dhcp snooping log-invalid

Use this command to disable the logging DHCP messages filtration by the DHCP Snooping application.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping log-invalid

Interface Config ip dhcp snooping trust

Use this command to configure the port as trusted.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip dhcp snooping trust

Interface Config no ip dhcp snooping trust

Use this command to configure the port as untrusted.



Format

Mode no ip dhcp snooping trust

Interface Config ip verify source

Use this command to configure the IPSG source ID attribute to filter the data traffic in the hardware. Source ID is the combination of IP address and MAC address. Normal command allows data traffic filtration based on the IP address. With the “port-security” option, the data traffic will be filtered based on the IP and MAC addresses.

Default

Format

Mode the source ID is the IP address ip verify source {port-security}

Interface Config no ip verify source

Use this command to disable the IPSG configuration in the hardware. You cannot disable portsecurity alone if it is configured.

Format

Mode no ip verify source

Interface Config show ip dhcp snooping

Use this command to display the DHCP Snooping global configurations and per port configurations.

Format

Mode show ip dhcp snooping

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

Interface

Trusted

The interface for which data is displayed.

If it is enabled, DHCP snooping considers the port as trusted. The factory default is disabled.

Log Invalid Pkts If it is enabled, DHCP snooping application logs invalid packets on the specified interface.

Example: The following shows example CLI display output for the command.

(switch) #show ip dhcp snooping

DHCP snooping is Disabled

DHCP snooping source MAC verification is enabled

DHCP snooping is enabled on the following VLANs:

11 - 30, 40

Interface Trusted Log Invalid Pkts

--------- -------- ----------------

0/1 Yes No

0/2 No Yes

0/3 No Yes

0/4 No No

0/6 No No show ip dhcp snooping binding

Use this command to display the DHCP Snooping binding entries. To restrict the output, use the following options:

• Dynamic: Restrict the output based on DCHP snooping.

• Interface: Restrict the output based on a specific interface.

• Static: Restrict the output based on static entries.

• VLAN: Restrict the output based on VLAN.

Format

Mode show ip dhcp snooping binding [{static/dynamic}] [interface unit/ slot/port ] [ vlan id ]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the binding that was added. The MAC address is the key to the binding database.

IP Address

VLAN

Displays the valid IP address for the binding rule.

The VLAN for the binding rule.

Interface

Type

Lease (sec)

The interface to add a binding into the DHCP snooping interface.

Binding type; statically configured from the CLI or dynamically learned.

The remaining lease time for the entry.


(switch) #show ip dhcp snooping binding

Total number of bindings: 2

MAC Address IP Address VLAN Interface Type Lease (Secs)

------------------ ------------ ---- --------- ---- -------------

00:02:B3:06:60:80 210.1.1.3 10 0/1 86400

00:0F:FE:00:13:04 210.1.1.4 10 0/1 86400 show ip dhcp snooping database

Use this command to display the DHCP Snooping configuration related to the database persistency.

Format

Mode show ip dhcp snooping database

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Agent URL

Write Delay

Definition

Bindings database agent URL.

The maximum write time to wrte the database into local or remote.


(switch) #show ip dhcp snooping database


3-126


agent url: /10.131.13.79:/sai1.txt

write-delay: 5000 show ip dhcp snooping statistics

Use this command to list statistics for DHCP Snooping security violations on untrusted ports.

Format

Mode show ip dhcp snooping statistics

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Interface

MAC Verify

Failures

Client Ifc

Mismatch

DHCP Server

Msgs Rec’d

Definition

The IP address of the interface in unit/slot/port format.

Represents the number of DHCP messages that were filtered on an untrusted interface because of source MAC address and client HW address mismatch.

Represents the number of DHCP release and Deny messages received on the different ports than learned previously.

Represents the number of DHCP server messages received on Untrusted ports.


(switch) #show ip dhcp snooping statistics

Interface MAC Verify Client Ifc DHCP Server

Failures Mismatch Msgs Rec'd

----------- ---------- ---------- -----------

1/0/2 0 0 0

1/0/3 0 0 0

1/0/4 0 0 0

1/0/5 0 0 0

1/0/6 0 0 0

1/0/7 0 0 0

1/0/8 0 0 0

1/0/9 0 0 0

1/0/10 0 0 0

1/0/11 0 0 0

1/0/12 0 0 0

1/0/13 0 0 0


3-127


1/0/14 0 0 0

1/0/15 0 0 0

1/0/16 0 0 0

1/0/17 0 0 0

1/0/18 0 0 0

1/0/19 0 0 0

1/0/20 0 0 0 clear ip dhcp snooping binding

Use this command to clear all DHCP Snooping bindings on all interfaces or on a specific interface.

Format

Mode clear ip dhcp snooping binding [interface < unit/slot/port >]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC clear ip dhcp snooping statistics

Use this command to clear all DHCP Snooping statistics.

Format

Mode clear ip dhcp snooping statistics

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC show ip verify source

Use this command to display the IPSG configurations on all ports.

Format

Mode show ip verify source

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Interface

Definition

Interface address in unit/slot/port format.



Term

Filter Type

Definition

Is one of two values:

• ip-mac: User has configured MAC address filtering on this interface.

• ip: Only IP address filtering on this interface.

IP Address IP address of the interface

MAC Address If MAC address filtering is not configured on the interface, the MAC Address field is empty. If port security is disabled on the interface, then the MAC Address field displays

“permit-all.”

VLAN The VLAN for the binding rule.


(switch) #show ip verify source

Interface Filter Type IP Address MAC Address Vlan

--------- ----------- --------------- ----------------- -----

0/1 ip-mac 210.1.1.3 00:02:B3:06:60:80 10

0/1 ip-mac 210.1.1.4 00:0F:FE:00:13:04 10 show ip source binding

Use this command to display the IPSG bindings.

Format

Mode show ip source binding [{static/dynamic}] [interface unit/slot/port ]

[ vlan id ]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address The MAC address for the entry that is added.

IP Address The IP address of the entry that is added.

Type

VLAN

Interface

Entry type; statically configured from CLI or dynamically learned from DHCP Snooping.

VLAN for the entry.

IP address of the interface in unit/slot/port format.




(switch) #show ip source binding

MAC Address IP Address Type Vlan Interface

----------------- --------------- ------------- ----- -------------

00:00:00:00:00:08 1.2.3.4 dhcp-snooping 2 1/0/1

00:00:00:00:00:09 1.2.3.4 dhcp-snooping 3 1/0/1

00:00:00:00:00:0A 1.2.3.4 dhcp-snooping 4 1/0/1

Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands

Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a security feature that rejects invalid and malicious ARP packets. DAI prevents a class of man-in-the-middle attacks, where an unfriendly station intercepts traffic for other stations by poisoning the ARP caches of its unsuspecting neighbors. The miscreant sends ARP requests or responses mapping another station’s IP address to its own MAC address.

DAI relies on DHCP snooping. DHCP snooping listens to DHCP message exchanges and builds a binding database of valid {MAC address, IP address, VLAN, and interface} tuples.

When DAI is enabled, the switch drops ARP packets whose sender MAC address and sender IP address do not match an entry in the DHCP snooping bindings database. You can optionally configure additional ARP packet validation.

ip arp inspection vlan

Use this command to enable Dynamic ARP Inspection on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list

Global Config no ip arp inspection vlan

Use this command to disable Dynamic ARP Inspection on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges.



Format

Mode no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list

Global Config ip arp inspection validate

Use this command to enable additional validation checks like source-mac validation, destinationmac validation, and ip address validation on the received ARP packets. Each command overrides the configuration of the previous command. For example, if a command enables src-mac and dstmac validations, and a second command enables IP validation only, the src-mac and dst-mac validations are disabled as a result of the second command.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip arp inspection validate {[src-mac ] [ dst-mac] [ip]}

Global Config no ip arp inspection validate

Use this command to disable the additional validation checks on the received ARP packets.

Format

Mode no ip arp inspection validate {[src-mac ] [ dst-mac] [ip]}

Global Config ip arp inspection vlan logging

Use this command to enable logging of invalid ARP packets on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list logging

Global Config


Format

Mode


no ip arp inspection vlan logging

Use this command to disable logging of invalid ARP packets on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges.

no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list logging

Global Config ip arp inspection trust

Use this command to configure an interface as trusted for Dynamic ARP Inspection.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip arp inspection trust

Interface Config no ip arp inspection trust

Use this command to configure an interface as untrusted for Dynamic ARP Inspection.

Format

Mode no ip arp inspection trust

Interface Config ip arp inspection limit

Use this command to configure the rate limit and burst interval values for an interface.

Configuring none for the limit means the interface is not rate limited for Dynamic ARP

Inspections.

Note: The user interface will accept a rate limit for a trusted interface, but the limit will not be enforced unless the interface is configured to be untrusted.



Default

Format

Mode

15 pps for rate and 1 second for burst-interval ip arp inspection limit {rate pps [burst interval seconds ] | none}

Interface Config no ip arp inspection limit

Use this command to set the rate limit and burst interval values for an interface to the default values of 15 pps and 1 second, respectively.

Format

Mode no ip arp inspection limit

Interface Config ip arp inspection filter

Use this command to configure the ARP ACL used to filter invalid ARP packets on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges. If the static keyword is given, packets that do not match a permit statement are dropped without consulting the DHCP snooping bindings.

Default

Format

Mode

No ARP ACL is configured on a VLAN ip arp inspection filter acl-name vlan vlan-list [static]

Global Config no ip arp inspection filter

Use this command to unconfigure the ARP ACL used to filter invalid ARP packets on a list of comma-separated VLAN ranges.

Format

Mode no ip arp inspection filter acl-name vlan vlan-list [static]

Global Config



arp access-list

Use this command to create an ARP ACL.

Format

Mode arp access-list acl-name

Global Config no arp access-list

Use this command to delete a configured ARP ACL.

Format

Mode no arp access-list acl-name

Global Config permit ip host mac host

Use this command to configure a rule for a valid IP address and MAC address combination used in

ARP packet validation.

Format

Mode permit ip host sender-ip mac host sender-mac

ARP Access-list Config no permit ip host mac host

Use this command to delete a rule for a valid IP and MAC combination.

Format

Mode no permit ip host sender-ip mac host sender-mac

ARP Access-list Config


3-134

Format

Mode


show ip arp inspection

Use this command to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection global configuration and configuration on all the VLANs. With the vlan-list argument (i.e. comma separated VLAN ranges), the command displays the global configuration and configuration on all the VLANs in the given

VLAN list. The global configuration includes the source mac validation , destination mac validation and invalid IP validation information.

show ip arp inspection [vlan < vlan-list> ]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Source MAC

Validation

Displays whether Source MAC Validation of ARP frame is enabled or disabled.

Destination

MAC Validation

IP Address

Validation

Displays whether Destination MAC Validation is enabled or disabled.

Displays whether IP Address Validation is enabled or disabled.

VLAN The VLAN ID for each displayed row.

Configuration Displays whether DAI is enabled or disabled on the VLAN.

Log Invalid

ACL Name

Static Flag

Displays whether logging of invalid ARP packets is enabled on the VLAN.

The ARP ACL Name, if configured on the VLAN.

If the ARP ACL is configured static on the VLAN.


(Switch) #show ip arp inspection vlan 10-12

Source Mac Validation : Disabled

Destination Mac Validation : Disabled

IP Address Validation : Disabled

Vlan Configuration Log Invalid ACL Name Static flag

---- ------------- ----------- --------- ----------

10 Enabled Enabled H2 Enabled

11 Disabled Enabled

12 Enabled Disabled


Format

Mode


show ip arp inspection statistics

Use this command to display the statitstics of the ARP packets processed by Dynamic ARP

Inspection. Give the vlan-list argument and the command displays the statistics on all DAI-enabled

VLANs in that list. Give the single vlan argument and the command displays the statistics on that

VLAN. If no argument is included, the command lists a summary of the forwarded and dropped

ARP packets.

show ip arp inspection statistics [vlan vlan-list ]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

VLAN

Forwarded

Dropped

DHCP Drops

The VLAN ID for each displayed row.

The total number of valid ARP packets forwarded in this VLAN.

The total number of not valid ARP packets dropped in this VLAN.

The number of packets dropped due to DHCP snooping binding database match failure.

ACL Drops The number of packets dropped due to ARP ACL rule match failure.

DHCP Permits The number of packets permitted due to DHCP snooping binding database match.

ACL Permits

Bad Src MAC

The number of packets permitted due to ARP ACL rule match.

The number of packets dropped due to Source MAC validation failure.

Bad Dest MAC The number of packets dropped due to Destination MAC validation failure.

Invalid IP The number of packets dropped due to invalid IP checks.

Example: The following shows example CLI display output for the command show ip arp inspection statistics which lists the summary of forwarded and dropped ARP packets on all DAI-enabled VLANs.

VLAN Forwarded Dropped

---- --------- -------

10 90 14

20 10 3

Example: The following shows example CLI display output for the command show ip arp inspection statistics vlan <vlan-list> .

VLAN DHCP ACL DHCP ACL Bad Src Bad Dest Invalid

Drops Drops Permits Permits MAC MAC IP

----- -------- --------- ----------- --------- ---------- ----------- ---------


10

20

11

1

1

0

65 25

8 2


1

0

1 0

1 1 clear ip arp inspection statistics

Use this command to reset the statistics for Dynamic ARP Inspection on all VLANs.

Default

Format

Mode none clear ip arp inspection statistics

Privileged EXEC show ip arp inspection interfaces

Use this command to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection configuration on all the DAI-enabled interfaces. An interface is said to be enabled for DAI if at least one VLAN, that the interface is a member of, is enabled for DAI. Given a unit/slot/port interface argument, the command displays the values for that interface whether the interface is enabled for DAI or not.

Format

Mode show ip arp inspection interfaces [unit/slot/port]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Interface

Trust State

The interface ID for each displayed row.

Whether the interface is trusted or untrusted for DAI.

Rate Limit The configured rate limit value in packets per second.

Burst Interval The configured burst interval value in seconds.


(Switch) #show ip arp inspection interfaces

(pps) (seconds)

--------------- ----------- ---------- ---------------

0/1 Untrusted 15 1


3-137


0/2 Untrusted 10 10 show arp access-list

Use this command to display the configured ARP ACLs with the rules. Giving an ARP ACL name as the argument will display on ly the rules in that ARP ACL.

Format

Mode show arp access-list [ acl-name ]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC


(Switch) #show arp access-list

ARP access list H2

permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 00:01:02:03:04:05


ARP access list H3

ARP access list H4


IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure IGMP snooping. The software supports

IGMP Versions 1, 2, and 3. The IGMP snooping feature can help conserve bandwidth because it allows the switch to forward IP multicast traffic only to connected hosts that request multicast traffic. IGMPv3 adds source filtering capabilities to IGMP versions 1 and 2.

set igmp

This command enables IGMP Snooping on the system (Global Config Mode) or an interface

(Interface Config Mode). This command also enables IGMP snooping on a particular VLAN

(VLAN Config Mode) and can enable IGMP snooping on all interfaces participating in a VLAN.



If an interface has IGMP Snooping enabled and you enable this interface for routing or enlist it as a member of a port-channel (LAG), IGMP Snooping functionality is disabled on that interface.

IGMP Snooping functionality is re-enabled if you disable routing or remove port-channel (LAG) membership from an interface that has IGMP Snooping enabled.

The IGMP application supports the following activities:

• Validation of the IP header checksum (as well as the IGMP header checksum) and discarding of the frame upon checksum error.

• Maintenance of the forwarding table entries based on the MAC address versus the IP address.

• Flooding of unregistered multicast data packets to all ports in the VLAN.

Default

Format

Mode

Format

Mode disabled set igmp

• Global Config

• Interface Config set igmp <vlanid>

VLAN Config no set igmp

This command disables IGMP Snooping on the system, an interface or a VLAN.

Format

Mode no set igmp

• Global Config


Format

Mode no set igmp <vlanid>

VLAN Config


3-139


set igmp interfacemode

This command enables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces. If an interface has IGMP Snooping enabled and you enable this interface for routing or enlist it as a member of a port-channel (LAG),

IGMP Snooping functionality is disabled on that interface. IGMP Snooping functionality is reenabled if you disable routing or remove port-channel (LAG) membership from an interface that has IGMP Snooping enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set igmp interfacemode

Global Config no set igmp interfacemode

This command disables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces.

Format

Mode no set igmp interfacemode

Global Config set igmp fast-leave

This command enables or disables IGMP Snooping fast-leave admin mode on a selected interface or VLAN. Enabling fast-leave allows the switch to immediately remove the layer 2 LAN interface from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an IGMP leave message for that multicast group without first sending out MAC-based general queries to the interface.

You should enable fast-leave admin mode only on VLANs where only one host is connected to each layer 2 LAN port. This prevents the inadvertent dropping of the other hosts that were connected to the same layer 2 LAN port but were still interested in receiving multicast traffic directed to that group. Also, fast-leave processing is supported only with IGMP version 2 hosts.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set igmp fast-leave

Interface Config

Format

Mode set igmp fast-leave <vlan_id>

VLAN Config



no set igmp fast-leave

This command disables IGMP Snooping fast-leave admin mode on a selected interface.

Format

Mode no set igmp fast-leave

Interface Config

Format

Mode no set igmp fast-leave <vlan_id>

VLAN Config set igmp groupmembership-interval

This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on a VLAN, one interface or all interfaces. The Group Membership Interval time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch waits for a report from a particular group on a particular interface before deleting the interface from the entry. This value must be greater than the IGMPv3 Maximum Response time value. The range is 2 to 3600 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

260 seconds set igmp groupmembership-interval <2-3600>


• Global Config

Format

Mode set igmp groupmembership-interval <vlan_id> <2-3600>

VLAN Config no set igmp groupmembership-interval

This command sets the IGMPv3 Group Membership Interval time to the default value.

Format

Mode no set igmp groupmembership-interval


• Global Config

Format

Mode no set igmp groupmembership-interval <vlan_id>

VLAN Config



set igmp maxresponse

This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time for the system, or on a particular interface or VLAN. The Maximum Response time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group in that interface. This value must be less than the IGMP Query Interval time value. The range is 1 to

25 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

10 seconds set igmp maxresponse <1-25>

• Global Config


Format

Mode set igmp maxresponse <vlan_id> <1-25>

VLAN Config no set igmp maxresponse

This command sets the max response time (on the interface or VLAN) to the default value.

Format

Mode no set igmp maxresponse

• Global Config


Format

Mode no set igmp maxresponse <vlan_id>

VLAN Config set igmp mcrtrexpiretime

This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time. The time is set for the system, on a particular interface or VLAN. This is the amount of time in seconds that a switch waits for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The range is 0 to 3600 seconds. A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout, i.e. no expiration.

Default 0


Format

Mode


set igmp mcrtrexpiretime <0-3600>

• Global Config

• Interface Config set igmp mcrtrexpiretime <vlan_id> <0-3600>

VLAN Config

Format

Mode no set igmp mcrtrexpiretime

This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time to 0. The time is set for the system, on a particular interface or a VLAN.

Format

Mode no set igmp mcrtrexpiretime

• Global Config


Format

Mode no set igmp mcrtrexpiretime <vlan_id>

VLAN Config set igmp mrouter

This command configures the VLAN ID ( < vlanId > ) that has the multicast router mode enabled.

Format

Mode set igmp mrouter < vlan_id >

Interface Config no set igmp mrouter

This command disables multicast router mode for a particular VLAN ID ( < vlan_id > ).

Format

Mode no set igmp mrouter < vlan_id >

Interface Config



set igmp mrouter interface

This command configures the interface as a multicast router interface. When configured as a multicast router interface, the interface is treated as a multicast router interface in all VLANs.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set igmp mrouter interface

Interface Config no set igmp mrouter interface

This command disables the status of the interface as a statically configured multicast router interface.

Format

Mode no set igmp mrouter interface

Interface Config ip igmpsnooping unknown-multicast

This command enables the filtering of unknown multicast packets to the VLAN. Packets with an unknown mulicast address in the destination field will be dropped. This command is mainly used when IGMP snooping is enabled, to prevent flooding of unwanted multicast packets to every port.

Format

Mode ip igmpsnooping unknown-multicast

Global Config no ip igmpsnooping unknown-multicast

This command disables the filtering of unknown multicast packets. Unknown multicast packets will be flooded to all ports in the same VLAN.

Format

Mode no ip igmpsnooping unknown-multicast

Global Config



show igmpsnooping

This command displays IGMP Snooping information. Configured information is displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping is enabled.

Format

Mode show igmpsnooping [<unit/slot/port> | <vlan_id>]

Privileged EXEC

When the optional arguments <unit/slot/port> or <vlan_id> are not used, the command displays the following information:

Term Definition

Admin Mode

Multicast

Control Frame

Count

Indicates whether or not IGMP Snooping is active on the switch.

The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

Interface

Enabled for

IGMP Snooping

The list of interfaces on which IGMP Snooping is enabled.

VLANS Enabled for IGMP

Snooping

The list of VLANS on which IGMP Snooping is enabled.

When you specify the <unit/slot/port > values, the following information appears:

Term Definition

IGMP Snooping

Admin Mode

Indicates whether IGMP Snooping is active on the interface.

Indicates whether IGMP Snooping Fast-leave is active on the interface.

Fast Leave

Mode

Group

Membership

Interval

Maximum

Response Time

The amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait for a report from a particular group on a particular interface before deleting the interface from the entry.This value may be configured.

The amount of time the switch waits after it sends a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface. This value may be configured.

Multicast

Router Expiry

Time

The amount of time to wait before removing an interface from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The interface is removed if a query is not received. This value may be configured.



When you specify a value for <vlan_id> , the following information appears:

Term Definition

VLAN ID

Fast Leave

Mode

The VLAN ID.

IGMP Snooping

Admin Mode

Indicates whether IGMP Snooping is active on the VLAN.

Indicates whether IGMP Snooping Fast-leave is active on the VLAN.

Group

Membership

Interval

Maximum

Response Time

Multicast

Router Expiry

Time

The amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait for a report from a particular group on a particular interface, which is participating in the VLAN, before deleting the interface from the entry.This value may be configured.

The amount of time the switch waits after it sends a query on an interface, participating in the VLAN, because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface. This value may be configured.

The amount of time to wait before removing an interface that is participating in the VLAN from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The interface is removed if a query is not received. This value may be configured.

show igmpsnooping mrouter interface

This command displays information about statically configured ports.

Format

Mode

Term

Interface

Multicast

Router

Attached

VLAN ID show igmpsnooping mrouter interface <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Definition

The port on which multicast router information is being displayed.

Indicates whether multicast router is statically enabled on the interface.

The list of VLANs of which the interface is a member.

show igmpsnooping mrouter vlan

This command displays information about statically configured ports.



Format

Mode

Term

Interface

VLAN ID show igmpsnooping mrouter vlan <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Definition

The port on which multicast router information is being displayed.

The list of VLANs of which the interface is a member.

show mac-address-table igmpsnooping

This command displays the IGMP Snooping entries in the MFDB table.

Format

Mode show mac-address-table igmpsnooping

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding or filtering information. The format is two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example

01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address is displayed as a MAC address and VLAN ID combination of 8 bytes.

Type The type of the entry, which is either static (added by the user) or dynamic (added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol).

Description

Interfaces



IGMP Snooping Querier Commands

IGMP Snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the “IGMP Querier”. The

IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it will stop forwarding multicasts to the port where the end device is located.



This section describes commands used to configure and display information on IGMP Snooping

Queriers on the network and, separately, on VLANs. set igmp querier

Use this command to enable IGMP Snooping Querier on the system, using Global Config mode, or on a VLAN. Using this command, you can specify the IP Address that the Snooping Querier switch should use as the source address while generating periodic queries.

If a VLAN has IGMP Snooping Querier enabled and IGMP Snooping is operationally disabled on it, IGMP Snooping Querier functionality is disabled on that VLAN. IGMP Snooping functionality is re-enabled if IGMP Snooping is operational on the VLAN.

Note: The Querier IP Address assigned for a VLAN takes preference over global configuration.

The IGMP Snooping Querier application supports sending periodic general queries on the VLAN to solicit membership reports.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set igmp querier [< vlan-id >] [address ipv4_address ]

• Global Config

• VLAN Mode no set igmp querier

Use this command to disable IGMP Snooping Querier on the system. Use the optional address parameter to reset the querier address to 0.0.0.0.

Format

Mode no set igmp querier [< vlan-id >] [address]

• Global Config

• VLAN Mode



set igmp querier query-interval

Use this command to set the IGMP Querier Query Interval time. It is the amount of time in seconds that the switch waits before sending another general query.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set igmp querier query-interval < 1-18000 >

Global Config no set igmp querier query-interval

Use this command to set the IGMP Querier Query Interval time to its default value.

Format

Mode no set igmp querier query-interval

Global Config set igmp querier timer expiry

Use this command to set the IGMP Querier timer expiration period. It is the time period that the switch remains in Non-Querier mode once it has discovered that there is a Multicast Querier in the network.

Default

Format

Mode

60 seconds set igmp querier timer expiry <60-300>

Global Config no set igmp querier timer expiry

Use this command to set the IGMP Querier timer expiration period to its default value.

Format

Mode no set igmp querier timer expiry

Global Config



set igmp querier version

Use this command to set the IGMP version of the query that the snooping switch is going to send periodically.

Default

Format

Mode

1 set igmp querier version <1-2>

Global Config no set igmp querier version

Use this command to set the IGMP Querier version to its default value.

Format

Mode no set igmp querier version

Global Config set igmp querier election participate

Use this command to enable the Snooping Querier to participate in the Querier Election process when it discovers the presence of another Querier in the VLAN. When this mode is enabled, if the

Snooping Querier finds that the other Querier’s source address is better (less) than the Snooping

Querier’s address, it stops sending periodic queries. If the Snooping Querier wins the election, then it will continue sending periodic queries.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set igmp querier election participate

VLAN Config no set igmp querier election participate

Use this command to set the Snooping Querier not to participate in querier election but go into non-querier mode as soon as it discovers the presence of another querier in the same VLAN.

Format

Mode no set igmp querier election participate

VLAN Config



show igmpsnooping querier

Use this command to display IGMP Snooping Querier information. Configured information is displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping Querier is enabled.

Format

Mode show igmpsnooping querier [{detail | vlan < vlanid >}]

Privileged EXEC

When the optional argument < vlanid > is not used, the command displays the following information.

Field Description

Admin Mode Indicates whether or not IGMP Snooping Querier is active on the switch.

Admin Version The version of IGMP that will be used while sending out the queries.

Querier

Address

The IP Address which will be used in the IPv4 header while sending out IGMP queries. It can be configured using the appropriate command.

Query Interval The amount of time in seconds that a Snooping Querier waits before sending out the periodic general query.

Querier Timeout The amount of time to wait in the Non-Querier operational state before moving to a

Querier state.

When you specify a value for < vlanid >, the following additional information appears.


VLAN Admin

Mode

Indicates whether iGMP Snooping Querier is active on the VLAN.

VLAN

Operational

State

VLAN

Operational

Max Response

Time

Indicates whether IGMP Snooping Querier is in “Querier” or “Non-Querier” state. When the switch is in Querier state, it will send out periodic general queries. When in Non-

Querier state, it will wait for moving to Querier state and does not send out any queries.

Indicates the time to wait before removing a Leave from a host upon receiving a Leave request. This value is calculated dynamically from the Queries received from the network. If the Snooping Switch is in Querier state, then it is equal to the configured value.

Querier Election

Participation

Indicates whether the IGMP Snooping Querier participates in querier election if it discovers the presence of a querier in the VLAN.

Querier VLAN

Address

The IP address will be used in the IPv4 header while sending out IGMP queries on this

VLAN. It can be configured using the appropriate command.

Operational

Version

The version of IPv4 will be used while sending out IGMP queries on this VLAN.



Field

Last Querier

Address

Last Querier

Version

Description

Indicates the IP address of the most recent Querier from which a Query was received.

Indicates the IGMP version of the most recent Querier from which a Query was received on this VLAN.

When the optional argument detail is used, the command shows the global information and the information for all Querier-enabled VLANs.

Default

Format

Mode disabled set mld

Global Config

Interface Config

Format

Mode

Default

Format

Mode

Format

Mode

Default

Format

Mode no set mld <vlanid>

VLAN Mode disabled set mld fast-leave <vlanid>

• VLAN Mode no set mld fast-leave <vlanid>

• VLAN Mode

260 seconds set mld groupmembership-interval <2-3600>


• Global Config no set mld groupmembership-interval <vlanid>

• VLAN Mode

Format

Mode

Default

Format

Mode

10 seconds set mld maxresponse <1-65>

• Global Config



3-152


Format

Mode

Default

Format

Mode

Format

Mode

Default

Format

Mode

Format

Mode no set mld maxresponse

• Global Config


0 set mld mcrtexpiretime <0-3600>

• Global Config

• Interface Config no set mld mcrtexpiretime

• Global Config

• Interface Config disabled set mld querier <address ipv6_address >

• Global Config no set mld querier address

• Global Config

Port Security Commands

This section describes the command you use to configure Port Security on the switch. Port security, which is also known as port MAC locking, allows you to secure the network by locking allowable MAC addresses on a port. Packets with a matching source MAC address are forwarded normally, and all other packets are discarded.

Note: To enable the SNMP trap specific to port security, see “snmp-server enable traps violation” on page 7-44 .


3-153


port-security

This command enables port locking at the system level (Global Config) or port level (Interface

Config)

.

Default

Format

Mode disabled port-security

• Global Config

• Interface Config no port-security

This command disables port locking for one (Interface Config) or all (Global Config) ports.

Format

Mode no port-security

• Global Config

• Interface Config port-security max-dynamic

This command sets the maximum number of dynamically locked MAC addresses allowed on a specific port.

Default

Format

Mode

600 port-security max-dynamic <maxvalue>

Interface Config no port-security max-dynamic

This command resets the maximum number of dynamically locked MAC addresses allowed on a specific port to its default value.

Format

Mode no port-security max-dynamic

Interface Config



port-security max-static

This command sets the maximum number of statically locked MAC addresses allowed on a port.

Default

Format

Mode

20 port-security max-static <maxvalue>

Interface Config no port-security max-static

This command sets maximum number of statically locked MAC addresses to the default value.

Format

Mode no port-security max-static

Interface Config port-security mac-address

This command adds a MAC address to the list of statically locked MAC addresses. The <vid> is the VLAN ID.

Format

Mode port-security mac-address <mac-address> <vid>

Interface Config no port-security mac-address

This command removes a MAC address from the list of statically locked MAC addresses.

Format

Mode no port-security mac-address <mac-address> <vid>

Interface Config


3-155


port-security mac-address move

This command converts dynamically locked MAC addresses to statically locked addresses.

Format

Mode port-security mac-address move

Interface Config show port-security

This command displays the port-security settings. If you do not use a parameter, the command displays the settings for the entire system. Use the optional parameters to display the settings on a specific interface or on all interfaces.

Format

Mode show port-security [{<unit/slot/port> | all}]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Admin Mode

Definition

Port Locking mode for the entire system. This field displays if you do not supply any parameters.

For each interface, or for the interface you specify, the following information appears:

Term Definition

Admin Mode Port Locking mode for the Interface.

Dynamic Limit Maximum dynamically allocated MAC Addresses.

Static Limit

Violation Trap

Mode

Maximum statically allocated MAC Addresses.

Whether violation traps are enabled.

show port-security dynamic

This command displays the dynamically locked MAC addresses for the port.

Format

Mode show port-security dynamic <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC



Term Definition

MAC Address MAC Address of dynamically locked MAC.

show port-security static

This command displays the statically locked MAC addresses for port.

Format

Mode show port-security static <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address MAC Address of statically locked MAC.

show port-security violation

This command displays the source MAC address of the last packet discarded on a locked port.

Format

Mode show port-security violation <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address MAC Address of discarded packet on locked port.

LLDP (802.1AB) Commands

This section describes the command you use to configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), which is defined in the IEEE 802.1AB specification. LLDP allows stations on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. The advertisements allow a network management system (NMS) to access and display this information.



lldp transmit

Use this command to enable the LLDP advertise capability.

Default

Format

Mode enabled lldp transmit

Interface Config no lldp transmit

Use this command to return the local data transmission capability to the default.

Format

Mode no lldp transmit

Interface Config lldp receive

Use this command to enable the LLDP receive capability.

Default

Format

Mode enabled lldp receive

Interface Config no lldp receive

Use this command to return the reception of LLDPDUs to the default value.

Format

Mode no lldp receive

Interface Config lldp timers

Use this command to set the timing parameters for local data transmission on ports enabled for

LLDP. The <interval-seconds> determines the number of seconds to wait between transmitting local data LLDPDUs. The range is 1-32768 seconds. The <hold-value> is the



multiplier on the transmit interval that sets the TTL in local data LLDPDUs. The multiplier range is 2-10. The <reinit-seconds> is the delay before re-initialization, and the range is 1-0 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

• interval—30 seconds

• hold—4

• reinit—2 seconds lldp timers [interval <interval-seconds>] [hold <hold-value>] [reinit

<reinit-seconds>

]

Global Config no lldp timers

Use this command to return any or all timing parameters for local data transmission on ports enabled for LLDP to the default values.

Format

Mode no lldp timers [interval] [hold] [reinit]

Global Config lldp transmit-tlv

Use this command to specify which optional type length values (TLVs) in the 802.1AB basic management set are transmitted in the LLDPDUs. Use sys-name to transmit the system name

TLV. To configure the system name, see “snmp-server” on page 7-41 . Use sys-desc to transmit the system description TLV. Use sys-cap to transmit the system capabilities TLV. Use portdesc to transmit the port description TLV. To configure the port description, see See

“description” on page 3-4.

Default

Format

Mode all optional TLVs are included lldp transmit-tlv [sys-desc] [sys-name] [sys-cap] [port-desc]

Interface Config


3-159


no lldp transmit-tlv

Use this command to remove an optional TLV from the LLDPDUs. Use the command without parameters to remove all optional TLVs from the LLDPDU.

Format

Mode no lldp transmit-tlv [sys-desc] [sys-name] [sys-cap] [port-desc]

Interface Config lldp transmit-mgmt

Use this command to include transmission of the local system management address information in the LLDPDUs.

Default

Format

Mode enabled lldp transmit-mgmt

Interface Config no lldp transmit-mgmt

Use this command to include transmission of the local system management address information in the LLDPDUs. Use this command to cancel inclusion of the management information in

LLDPDUs.

Format

Mode no lldp transmit-mgmt

Interface Config lldp notification

Use this command to enable remote data change notifications.

Default

Format

Mode disabled lldp notification

Interface Config



no lldp notification

Use this command to disable notifications.

Default

Format

Mode disabled no lldp notification

Interface Config lldp notification-interval

Use this command to configure how frequently the system sends remote data change notifications.

The <interval> parameter is the number of seconds to wait between sending notifications. The valid interval range is 5-3600 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

5 lldp notification-interval <interval>

Global Config no lldp notification-interval

Use this command to return the notification interval to the default value.

Format

Mode no lldp notification-interval

Global Config clear lldp statistics

Use this command to reset all LLDP statistics, including MED-related information.

Format

Mode clear lldp statistics

Privileged Exec



clear lldp remote-data

Use this command to delete all information from the LLDP remote data table, including MEDrelated information.

Format

Mode clear lldp remote-data

Global Config show lldp

Use this command to display a summary of the current LLDP configuration.

Format

Mode show lldp

Privileged Exec

Term Definition

Transmit

Interval

Transmit Hold

Multiplier

How frequently the system transmits local data LLDPDUs, in seconds.

The multiplier on the transmit interval that sets the TTL in local data LLDPDUs.

Re-initialization

Delay

The delay before re-initialization, in seconds.

Notification

Interval

How frequently the system sends remote data change notifications, in seconds.

show lldp interface

Use this command to display a summary of the current LLDP configuration for a specific interface or for all interfaces.

Format

Mode show lldp interface {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged Exec

Term

Interface

Link

Definition

The interface in a unit/slot/port format.




Term

Transmit

Receive

Notify

TLVs

Mgmt

Definition

Shows whether the interface transmits LLDPDUs.

Shows whether the interface receives LLDPDUs.

Shows whether the interface sends remote data change notifications.

Shows whether the interface sends optional TLVs in the LLDPDUs. The TLV codes can be 0 (Port Description), 1 (System Name), 2 (System Description), or 3 (System

Capability).

Shows whether the interface transmits system management address information in the

LLDPDUs.

show lldp statistics

Use this command to display the current LLDP traffic and remote table statistics for a specific interface or for all interfaces.

Format

Mode show lldp statistics {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged Exec

Term Definition

Last Update

Total Inserts

Total Deletes

The amount of time since the last update to the remote table in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

Total number of inserts to the remote data table.

Total number of deletes from the remote data table.

Total Drops Total number of times the complete remote data received was not inserted due to insufficient resources.

Total Ageouts Total number of times a complete remote data entry was deleted because the Time to

Live interval expired.

The table contains the following column headings:

Term Definition

Interface The interface in unit/slot/port format.

Transmit Total Total number of LLDP packets transmitted on the port.

Receive Total Total number of LLDP packets received on the port.

Discards Total number of LLDP frames discarded on the port for any reason.



Term Definition

Errors

Ageouts

The number of invalid LLDP frames received on the port.

Total number of times a complete remote data entry was deleted for the port because the

Time to Live interval expired.

TLV Discards The number of TLVs discarded.

TLV Unknowns Total number of LLDP TLVs received on the port where the type value is in the reserved range, and not recognized.

TLV MED Total number of LLDP MED TLVs received on the local ports.

TVL802.1

TVL802.3

Total number of 802.1 LLDP TLVs received on the local ports.

Total number of 802.3 LLDP TLVs received on the local ports.

show lldp remote-device

Use this command to display summary information about remote devices that transmit current

LLDP data to the system. You can show information about LLDP remote data received on all ports or on a specific port.

Format

Mode show lldp remote-device {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Local Interface The interface that received the LLDPDU from the remote device.

RemID An internal identifier to the switch to mark each remote device to the system.

Chassis ID The ID that is sent by a remote device as part of the LLDP message, it is usually a MAC address of the device.

Port ID The port number that transmitted the LLDPDU.

System Name The system name of the remote device.



3-164


(switch) #show lldp remote-device all

LLDP Remote Device Summary

Local

Interface RemID Chassis ID Port ID System Name

------- ------- -------------------- ------------------ ------------------

0/1

0/2

0/3

0/4

0/5

0/6

0/7 2 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F 00:FC:E3:90:01:11

0/7 3 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F 00:FC:E3:90:01:12

0/7 4 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F 00:FC:E3:90:01:13

0/7 5 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F 00:FC:E3:90:01:14

0/7 1 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F 00:FC:E3:90:03:11

0/7 6 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F 00:FC:E3:90:04:11

0/8

0/9

0/10

0/11

0/12

--More-- or (q)uit show lldp remote-device detail

Use this command to display detailed information about remote devices that transmit current

LLDP data to an interface on the system.

Format

Mode show lldp remote-device detail <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Local Interface The interface that received the LLDPDU from the remote device.

Remote

Identifier

An internal identifier to the switch to mark each remote device to the system.

Chassis ID

Subtype

The type of identification used in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The chassis of the remote device.

Port ID Subtype The type of port on the remote device.


3-165


Term Definition


System Name The system name of the remote device.

System

Description

Describes the remote system by identifying the system name and versions of hardware, operating system, and networking software supported in the device.

Describes the port in an alpha-numeric format. The port description is configurable.

Port

Description

System

Capabilities

Supported

Indicates the primary function(s) of the device.

System

Capabilities

Enabled

Management

Address

Time To Live

Shows which of the supported system capabilities are enabled.

For each interface on the remote device with an LLDP agent, lists the type of address the remote LLDP agent uses and specifies the address used to obtain information related to the device.

The amount of time (in seconds) the remote device's information received in the

LLDPDU should be treated as valid information.


(Switch) #show lldp remote-device detail 0/7

LLDP Remote Device Detail

Local Interface: 0/7

Remote Identifier: 2

Chassis ID Subtype: MAC Address

Chassis ID: 00:FC:E3:90:01:0F

Port ID Subtype: MAC Address

Port ID: 00:FC:E3:90:01:11

System Name:

System Description:

Port Description:

System Capabilities Supported:

System Capabilities Enabled:

Time to Live: 24 seconds



show lldp local-device

Use this command to display summary information about the advertised LLDP local data. This command can display summary information or detail for each interface.

Format

Mode show lldp local-device {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term

Interface

Port ID

Port

Description

Definition


The port ID associated with this interface.

The port description associated with the interface.

show lldp local-device detail

Use this command to display detailed information about the LLDP data a specific interface transmits.

Format

Mode show lldp local-device detail <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Interface

Chassis ID

Subtype

The interface that sends the LLDPDU.

The type of identification used in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The chassis of the local device.

Port ID Subtype The type of port on the local device.


System Name The system name of the local device.

System

Description

Describes the local system by identifying the system name and versions of hardware, operating system, and networking software supported in the device.

Port

Description

System

Capabilities

Supported

Describes the port in an alpha-numeric format.

Indicates the primary function(s) of the device.



Term

System

Capabilities

Enabled

Management

Address

Definition

Shows which of the supported system capabilities are enabled.

The type of address and the specific address the local LLDP agent uses to send and receive information.

LLDP-MED Commands

Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) (ANSI-TIA-1057) provides an extension to the LLDP standard. Specifically, LLDP-MED provides extensions for network configuration and policy, device location, Power over Ethernet (PoE) management and inventory management.

lldp med

Use this command to enable MED. By enabling MED, you will be effectively enabling the transmit and receive function of LLDP.

Default

Format

Mode enabled lldp med

Interface Config no lldp med

Use this command to disable MED.

Format

Mode no lldp med

Interface Config


3-168


lldp med confignotification

Use this command to configure all the ports to send the topology change notification.

Default

Format

Mode enabled lldp med confignotification

Interface Config no ldp med confignotification

Use this command to disable notifications.

Format

Mode no lldp med confignotification

Interface Config lldp med transmit-tlv

Use this command to specify which optional Type Length Values (TLVs) in the LLDP MED set will be transmitted in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDUs).

Default

Format

Mode

By default, the capabilities and network policy TLVs are included.

lldp med transmit-tlv [capabilities] [ex-pd] [ex-pse] [inventory]

[location] [network-policy]

Interface Config

Term Definition capabilities ex-pd ex-pse

Transmit the LLDP capabilities TLV.

Transmit the LLDP extended PD TLV.

Transmit the LLDP extended PSE TLV.

inventory location

Transmit the LLDP inventory TLV.

Transmit the LLDP location TLV.

network-policy Transmit the LLDP network policy TLV.



no lldp med transmit-tlv

Use this command to remove a TLV.

Format

Mode no lldp med transmit-tlv [capabilities] [network-policy] [ex-pse]

[ex-pd] [location] [inventory]

Interface Config lldp med all

Use this command to configure LLDP-MED on all the ports

Format

Mode lldp med all

Global Config no lldp med all

Use this command to remove LLDP-MD on all ports.

Format

Mode no lldp med all

Global Config lldp med confignotification all

Use this command to configure all the ports to send the topology change notification.

Format

Mode lldp med confignotification all

Global Config no lldp med confignotification all

Use this command to disable all the ports to send the topology change notification.

Format

Mode no lldp med confignotification all

Global Config


3-170


lldp med faststartrepeatcount

Use this command to set the value of the fast start repeat count. [count] is the number of LLDP

PDUs that will be transmitted when the product is enabled. The range is 1 to 10.

Default

Format

Mode

3 lldp med faststartrepeatcount [count]

Global Config no lldp med faststartrepeatcount

Use this command to return to the factory default value.

Format

Mode no lldp med faststartrepeatcount

Global Config lldp med transmit-tlv all

Use this command to specify which optional Type Length Values (TLVs) in the LLDP MED set will be transmitted in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDUs).

Default

Format

Mode

By default, the capabilities and network policy TLVs are included.

lldp med transmit-tlv all [capabilities] [ex-pd] [ex-pse] [inventory]

[location] [network-policy]

Global Config

Term Definition capabilities ex-pd ex-pse

Transmit the LLDP capabilities TLV.

Transmit the LLDP extended PD TLV.

Transmit the LLDP extended PSE TLV.

inventory location

Transmit the LLDP inventory TLV.

Transmit the LLDP location TLV.

network-policy Transmit the LLDP network policy TLV.



no lldp med transmit-tlv

Use this command to remove a TLV.

Format

Mode no lldp med transmit-tlv all [capabilities] [network-policy] [ex-pse]

[ex-pd] [location] [inventory]

Global Config show lldp med

Use this command to display a summary of the current LLDP MED configuration.

Format

Mode show lldp med

Privileged Exec

Term

Fast Start

Repeat Count

Device Class

Definition

The number of LLDP PDUs that will be transmitted when the protocl is enabled.

The local device’s MED Classification. There are four different kinds of devices, three of them represent the actual end points (classified as Class I Generic[IP Communication

Controller etc.], Class II Media Conference Bridge etc.], Class III Communication [IP

Telephone etc.]. Class IV Network Connectivity Device, which is typically a LAN Switch,

Router, IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point, etc.


(switch) #show lldp med

LLDP MED Global Configuration

Fast Start Repeat Count: 3

Device Class: Network Connectivity

(switch) #



show lldp med interface

Use this command to display a summary of the current LLDP MED configuration for a specific interface.

<unit/slot/port> indicates a specific physical interface. all indicates all valid

LLDP interfaces.

Format

Mode show lldp med interface {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged Exec

Term

Interface

Link

ConfigMED

OperMED

ConfigNotify

TLVsTx

Definition



Shows if the LLPD-MED mode is enabled or disabled on this interface

Shows if the LLPD-MED TLVs are transmitted or not on this interface.

Shows if the LLPD-MED topology notification mode of this interface.

Shows whether the interface sends optional TLVs in the LLDPDUs. The TLV codes can be 0 (Capabilities), 1 (Network Policy), 2 (Location), 3 (Extended PSE), 4

(Extended Pd), or 5 (Inventory).


(Switch) #show lldp med interface all

Interface Link configMED operMED ConfigNotify TLVsTx

--------- ------ --------- -------- ------------ -----------

1/0/1 Down Disabled Disabled Disabled 0,1

1/0/2 Up Disabled Disabled Disabled 0,1















TLV Codes: 0- Capabilities, 1- Network Policy

2- Location, 3- Extended PSE

4- Extended Pd, 5- Inventory

--More-- or (q)uit

(Switch) #show lldp med interface 1/0/2

Interface Link configMED operMED ConfigNotify TLVsTx

--------- ------ --------- -------- ------------ -----------

1/0/2 Up Disabled Disabled Disabled 0,1

TLV Codes: 0- Capabilities, 1- Network Policy

2- Location, 3- Extended PSE

4- Extended Pd, 5- Inventory

(Routing) # show lldp med local-device detail

This command displays detailed information about the LLDP data a specific interface transmits.

Format

Mode show lldp med local-device detail <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Term

Media Application

Type

Vlan ID

Priority

DSCP

Unknown

Tagged

Hardware Rev

Firmware Rev

Software Rev

Serial Num

Mfg Name

Model Name

Definition

Shows the application type. Types are unknown, voice, voicesignaling, guestvoice, guestvoicesignaling, sfotphonevoice, videoconferencing, streamingvideo, videosignaling.

Shows the VLAN id associated with a particular policy type

Shows the priority associated with a particular policy type.

Shows the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Indicates if the policy type is unknown. In this case, the VLAN ID, Priority and DSCP are ignored.

Indicates if the policy type is using tagged or untagged VLAN.

Shows the local hardware version.

Shows the local firmware version.

Shows the local software version.

Shows the local serial number.

Shows the manufacture name.

Shows the model name.




(Switch) #show lldp med local-device detail 1/0/8

LLDP MED Local Device Detail

Interface: 1/0/8

Network Policies

Media Policy Application Type : voice

Vlan ID: 10

Priority: 5

DSCP: 1

Unknown: False

Tagged: True

Media Policy Application Type : streamingvideo

Vlan ID: 20

Priority: 1

DSCP: 2

Unknown: False

Tagged: True

Inventory

Hardware Rev: xxx xxx xxx

Firmware Rev: xxx xxx xxx

Software Rev: xxx xxx xxx

Serial Num: xxx xxx xxx

Mfg Name: xxx xxx xxx

Model Name: xxx xxx xxx

Asset ID: xxx xxx xxx

Location

Subtype: elin

Info: xxx xxx xxx

Extended POE

Device Type: pseDevice

Extended POE PSE

Available: 0.3 Watts

Source: primary

Priority: critical

Extended POE PD

Required: 0.2 Watts



Source: local

Priority: low show lldp med remote-device

This command displays summary information about remote devices that transmit current LLDP

MED data to the system. You can show information about LLDP remote data received on all ports or on a specific port.

Format

Mode show lldp med remote-device {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Term

Interface

Device Class

Definition


The Remote device’s MED Classification. There are four different kinds of devices, three of them represent the actual end points (classified as Class I Generic [IP Communication

Controller etc.], Class II Media [Conference Bridge etc.], Class III Communication [IP

Telephone etc]). The fourth device is Network Connectivity Device, which is typically a

LAN Switch/Router, IEEE 802.1 Bridge, IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point etc.


(Switch) #show lldp med remote-device all

LLDP MED Remote Device Summary

Local

Interface Remote ID Device Class

--------- --------- ------------

1/0/8

1/0/9

1

2

1/0/10 3

Class I

Not Defined

1/0/11 4

1/0/12 5 Network Con



show lldp med remote-device detail

Use this command to display detailed information about remote devices that transmit current

LLDP MED data to an interface on the system.

Format

Mode show lldp med remote-device detail <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Supported

Capabilities

DSCP

Unknown

Tagged

Hardware

Revision

Shows the suppoted capabilities that were received in MED TLV on this port.

Enabled capabilities

Device Class

Network Policy

Information

Media

Application

Type

VLAN Id

Priority

Shows the enabled capabilities that were enabled in MED TLV on this port.

Shows the device class as advertized by the device remotely connected to the port.

Shows if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this port.

Shows the application type. Types of applications are unknown, voice, voicesignaling, guestvoice, guestvoicesignaling, sfotphonevoice, videoconferencing, streamingvideo, videosignaling.

Shows the VLAN id associated with a particular policy type.

Shows the priority associated with a particular policy type.

Shows the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Indicates if the policy type is unknown. In this case, the VLAN id, Priority and DSCP are ignored.

Indicates if the policy type is using tagged or untagged VLAN.

Shows the hardware version of the remote device.

Firmware

Revision

Software

Revision

Shows the firmware version of the remote device.

Shows the software version of the remote device.

Serial Number Shows the serial number of the remote device.

Manufacturer

Name

Shows the manufacture name of the remote device.

Model Name

Asset ID

Shows the model name of the remote device.

Shows the asset id of the remote device.



Term

Sub Type

Location

Information

Device Type

Available

Source

Priority

Required

Source

Priority

Definition

Shows the type of location information.

Shows the location information as a string for a given type of location id

Shows the remote device’s PoE device type connected to this port.

Shows the romote port’s PSE power value in tenths of a watt.

Shows the remote port’s PSE power source.

Shows the remote port’s PSE priority.

Shows the remote port’s PD power requirement.

Shows the remote port’s PD power source.

Shows the remote port’s PD power priority.


(Switch) #show lldp med remote-device detail 1/0/8

LLDP MED Remote Device Detail

Local Interface: 1/0/8

Remote Identifier: 18

Capabilities

MED Capabilities Supported: capabilities, networkpolicy, location, extendedpse

MED Capabilities Enabled: capabilities, networkpolicy

Device Class: Endpoint Class I

Network Policies

Media Policy Application Type : voice

Vlan ID: 10

Priority: 5

DSCP: 1

Unknown: False

Tagged: True

Media Policy Application Type : streamingvideo

Vlan ID: 20

Priority: 1

DSCP: 2

Unknown: False

Tagged: True

Inventory

Hardware Rev: xxx xxx xxx

Firmware Rev: xxx xxx xxx



Software Rev: xxx xxx xxx

Serial Num: xxx xxx xxx

Mfg Name: xxx xxx xxx

Model Name: xxx xxx xxx

Asset ID: xxx xxx xxx

Location

Subtype: elin

Info: xxx xxx xxx

Extended POE

Device Type: pseDevice

Extended POE PSE

Available: 0.3 Watts

Source: primary

Priority: critical

Extended POE PD

Required: 0.2 Watts

Source: local

Priority: low

Denial of Service Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure Denial of Service (DoS) Control. The software provides support for classifying and blocking specific types of Denial of Service attacks.

You can configure your system to monitor and block these types of attacks:

• SIP=DIP: Source IP address = Destination IP address.

• First Fragment: TCP Header size smaller then configured value.

• TCP Fragment: IP Fragment Offset = 1.

• TCP Flag: TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port < 1024 or TCP Control Flags = 0 and TCP

Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set.

• L4 Port: Source TCP/UDP Port = Destination TCP/UDP Port.

• ICMP: Limiting the size of ICMP Ping packets.



dos-control all

This command enables Denial of Service protection checks globally.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control all

Global Config no dos-control all

This command disables Denial of Service prevention checks globally.

Format

Mode no dos-control all

Global Config dos-control sipdip

This command enables Source IP address = Destination IP address (SIP=DIP) Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress with SIP=DIP, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control sipdip

Global Config no dos-control sipdip

This command disables Source IP address = Destination IP address (SIP=DIP) Denial of Service prevention.

Format

Mode no dos-control sipdip

Global Config



dos-control firstfrag

This command enables Minimum TCP Header Size Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having a

TCP Header Size smaller then the configured value, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled.The default is disabled.

If you enable dos-control firstfrag, but do not provide a

Minimum TCP Header Size, the system sets that value to 20 .

Default

Format

Mode disabled <20> dos-control firstfrag

[<0-255>]

Global Config no dos-control firstfrag

This command sets Minimum TCP Header Size Denial of Service protection to the default value of disabled .

Format

Mode no dos-control firstfrag

Global Config dos-control tcpfrag

This command enables TCP Fragment Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having IP Fragment Offset equal to one (1), the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpfrag

Global Config no dos-control tcpfrag

This command disabled TCP Fragment Denial of Service protection.

Format

Mode no dos-control tcpfrag

Global Config


3-181


dos-control tcpflag

This command enables TCP Flag Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of

Service prevention is active for this type of attacks. If packets ingress having TCP Flag SYN set and a source port less than 1024 or having TCP Control Flags set to 0 and TCP Sequence Number set to 0 or having TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number set to 0 or having TCP Flags SYN and FIN both set, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpflag

Global Config no dos-control tcpflag

This command sets disables TCP Flag Denial of Service protections.

Format

Mode no dos-control tcpflag

Global Config dos-control l4port

This command enables L4 Port Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of

Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having Source TCP/UDP Port

Number equal to Destination TCP/UDP Port Number, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode

Note: Some applications mirror source and destination L4 ports - RIP for example uses

520 for both. If you enable dos-control l4port, applications such as RIP may experience packet loss which would render the application inoperable.

disabled dos-control l4port

Global Config



no dos-control l4port

This command disables L4 Port Denial of Service protections.

Format

Mode no dos-control l4port

Global Config dos-control icmp

This command enables Maximum ICMP Packet Size Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If ICMP Echo Request

(PING) packets ingress having a size greater than the configured value, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode disabled <512> dos-control icmp [ <0-1023>]

Global Config no dos-control icmp

This command disables Maximum ICMP Packet Size Denial of Service protections.

Format

Mode no dos-control icmp

Global Config dos-control smacdmac

This command enables Source MAC address = Destination MAC address (SMAC=DMAC)

Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress with SMAC=DMAC, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control smacdmac

Global Config


3-183

no dos-control smacdmac

Global Config


no dos-control smacdmac

This command disables Source MAC address = Destination MAC address (SMAC=DMAC)

Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode dos-control tcpport

This command enables TCP L4 source = destination port number (Source TCP Port =Destination

TCP Port) Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress with Source TCP Port =Destination TCP Port, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpport

Global Config no dos-control tcpport

This command disables TCP L4 source = destination port number (Source TCP Port =Destination

TCP Port) Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control smacdmac

Global Config dos-control udpport

This command enables UDP L4 source = destination port number (Source UDP Port =Destination

UDP Port) Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress with Source UDP Port =Destination UDP Port, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.



Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control udppport

Global Config no dos-control udpport

This command disables UDP L4 source = destination port number (Source UDP Port =Destination

UDP Port) Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control udppport

Global Config dos-control tcpflagseq

This command enables TCP Flag and Sequence Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having

TCP Flag SYN set and a source port less than 1024 or having TCP Control Flags set to 0 and TCP

Sequence Number set to 0 or having TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and TCP Sequence

Number set to 0 or having TCP Flags SYN and FIN both set, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpflagseq

Global Config no dos-control tcpflagseq

This command sets disables TCP Flag and Sequence Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control tcpflagseq

Global Config


3-185


dos-control tcpoffset

This command enables TCP Offset Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of

Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having TCP Header Offset equal to one (1), the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpoffset

Global Config no dos-control tcpoffset

This command disabled TCP Offset Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control tcpoffset

Global Config dos-control tcpsyn

This command enables TCP SYN and L4 source = 0-1023 Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having TCP flag SYN set and an L4 source port from 0 to 1023, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpsyn

Global Config no dos-control tcpsyn

This command sets disables TCP SYN and L4 source = 0-1023 Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.



Format

Mode no dos-control tcpsyn

Global Config dos-control tcpsynfin

This command enables TCP SYN and FIN Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled,

Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having TCP flags

SYN and FIN set, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control tcpsynfin

Global Config no dos-control tcpsynfin

This command sets disables TCP SYN & FIN Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control tcpsynfin

Global Config dos-control tcpfinurgpsh

This command enables TCP FIN and URG and PSH and SEQ=0 checking Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having TCP FIN, URG, and PSH all set and TCP Sequence Number set to 0, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default disabled



Format

Mode dos-control tcpfinurgpsh

Global Config no dos-control tcpfinurgpsh

This command sets disables TCP FIN and URG and PSH and SEQ=0 checking Denial of Service protections. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

dos-control icmpv4

Format

Mode no dos-control tcpfinurgpsh

Global Config dos-control icmpv4

This command enables Maximum ICMPv4 Packet Size Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If ICMPv4 Echo Request

(PING) packets ingress having a size greater than the configured value, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled <512> dos-control icmpv4 <0-16384>

Global Config no dos-control icmpv4

This command disables Maximum ICMP Packet Size Denial of Service protections. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control icmpv4

Global Config



dos-control icmpv6

This command enables Maximum ICMPv6 Packet Size Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If ICMPv6 Echo Request

(PING) packets ingress having a size greater than the configured value, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled <512> dos-control icmpv6 <0-16384>

Global Config no dos-control icmpv6

This command disables Maximum ICMP Packet Size Denial of Service protections. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Format

Mode no dos-control icmpv6

Global Config dos-control icmpfrag

This command enables ICMP Fragment Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled,

Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having fragmented

ICMP packets, the packets will be dropped if the mode is enabled. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.

Default

Format

Mode disabled dos-control icmpfrag

Global Config no dos-control icmpfrag

This command disabled ICMP Fragment Denial of Service protection. This command is only available on FSM72xxRS switches.



Format

Mode no dos-control icmpfrag

Global Config show dos-control

This command displays Denial of Service configuration information.

Format

Mode show dos-control

Privileged EXEC

Note: Not all messages below are available in all 7000series managed switches.

Term Definition

First Fragment

Mode

Min TCP Hdr

Size <0-255>

ICMP Mode

May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

The factory default is 20.


Max ICMPv4 Pkt

Size

The range is 0-1023. The factory default is 512.

Max ICMPv6 Pkt

Size

The range is 0-16384. The factory default is 512.

ICMP Fragment

Mode


L4 Port Mode May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

TCP Port Mode May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

UDP Port Mode May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

SIPDIP Mode May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

SMACDMAC

Mode


TCP Flag Mode May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.


3-190


Term Definition

TCP FIN&URG&

PSH Mode


TCP Flag &

Sequence Mode


TCP SYN Mode May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled.

TCP SYN & FIN

Mode



TCP Fragment

Mode

TCP Offset

Mode


MAC Database Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure and view information about the MAC databases.

bridge aging-time

This command configures the forwarding database address aging timeout in seconds. The

<seconds> parameter must be within the range of 10 to 1,000,000 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

300 bridge aging-time <10-1,000,000>

Global Config no bridge aging-time

This command sets the forwarding database address aging timeout to the default value.

Format

Mode no bridge aging-time

Global Config



show forwardingdb agetime

This command displays the timeout for address aging.

Default

Format

Mode all show forwardingdb agetime

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Address Aging

Timeout

• This parameter displays the address aging timeout for the associated forwarding database.

show mac-address-table multicast

This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) information. If you enter the command with no parameter, the entire table is displayed. You can display the table entry for one

MAC Address by specifying the MAC address as an optional parameter.

Format

Mode show mac-address-table multicast <macaddr>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.

The format is two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as a MAC address and VLAN ID combination of 8 bytes.

Type

Component



The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.

Possible values are IGMP Snooping, GMRP, and Static Filtering.

Description

Interfaces

Forwarding

Interfaces



The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the component’s forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.



show mac-address-table stats

This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) statistics.

Format

Mode show mac-address-table stats

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Max MFDB

Table Entries

The total number of entries that can possibly be in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

Most MFDB

Entries Since

Last Reset

The largest number of entries that have been present in the Multicast Forwarding

Database table. This value is also known as the MFDB high-water mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the MFDB.

ISDP Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure the industry standard Discovery

Protocol (ISDP).

isdp run

This command enables ISDP on the switch.

Default

Format

Mode

Enabled isdp run

Global Config no isdp run

This command disables ISDP on the switch.

Format

Mode no isdp run

Global Config



isdp holdtime

This command configures the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits. The hold time specifies how long a receiving device should store information sent in the ISDP packet before discarding it. The range is given in seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

180 seconds isdp holdtime <10-255>

Global Config isdp timer

This command sets the period of time between sending new ISDP packets. The range is given in seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

30 seconds isdp timer <5-254>

Global Config isdp advertise-v2

This command enables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device.

Default

Format

Mode

Enabled isdp advertise-v2

Global Config no isdp advertise-v2

This command disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device.

Format

Mode no isdp advertise-v2

Global Config



isdp enable

This command enables ISDP on the interface.

Default

Format

Mode

Enabled isdp enable

Interface Config no isdp enable

This command disables ISDP on the interface.

Format

Mode no isdp enable

Interface Config clear isdp counters

This command clears ISDP counters.

Format

Mode clear isdp counters

Privileged EXEC clear isdp table

This command clears entries in the ISDP table.

Format

Mode clear isdp table

Privileged EXEC show isdp

This command displays global ISDP settings.

Format

Mode show isdp

Privileged EXEC


3-195


Term Definition

Timer

Hold Time

The frequency with which this device sends ISDP packets. This value is given in seconds.

The length of time the receiving device should save information sent by this device. This value is given in seconds.

Version 2

Advertisements

Device ID

The setting for sending ISDPv2 packets. If disabled, version 1 packets are transmitted.

The Device ID advertised by this device. The format of this Device ID is characterized by the value of the Device ID Format object.

Device ID

Format

Capability

Device ID

Format

Indicates the Device ID format capability of the device.

• serialNumber indicates that the device uses a serial number as the format for its

Device ID.

• macAddress indicates that the device uses a Layer 2 MAC address as the format for its Device ID.

• other indicates that the device uses its platform-specific format as the format for its

Device ID.

Indicates the Device ID format of the device.

• serialNumber indicates that the value is in the form of an ASCII string containing the device serial number.

• macAddress indicates that the value is in the form of a Layer 2 MAC address.

• other indicates that the value is in the form of a platform specific ASCII string containing info that identifies the device. For example, ASCII string contains serialNumber appended/prepended with system name.

show isdp interface

This command displays ISDP settings for the specified interface.

Format

Mode show isdp interface {all | <unit/slot/port>}

Privileged EXEC

Term

Mode

Definition

ISDP mode enabled/disabled status for the interface(s).



show isdp entry

This command displays ISDP entries. If the device id is specified, then only entries for that device are shown.

Format

Mode show isdp entry {all | deviceid}

Privileged EXEC

Term

Device ID

IP Addresses

Platform

Interface

Port ID

Hold Time

Version

Advertisement

Version

Capability

Definition

The device ID associated with the neighbor which advertised the information.

The IP address(es) associated with the neighbor.

The hardware platform advertised by the neighbor.

The interface (slot/port) on which the neighbor's advertisement was received.

The port ID of the interface from which the neighbor sent the advertisement.

The hold time advertised by the neighbor.

The software version that the neighbor is running.

The version of the advertisement packet received from the neighbor.

ISDP Functional Capabilities advertised by the neighbor.

show isdp neighbors

This command displays the list of neighboring devices.

Format

Mode show isdp neighbors [ {<unit/slot/port> | detail} ]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Device ID

IP Addresses

Capability

Platform

Interface

Definition

The device ID associated with the neighbor which advertised the information.

The IP addresses associated with the neighbor.

ISDP functional capabilities advertised by the neighbor.

The hardware platform advertised by the neighbor.

The interface (unit/slot/port) on which the neighbor's advertisement was received.



Term

Port ID

Hold Time

Advertisement

Version

Entry Last

Changed Time

Version

Definition

The port ID of the interface from which the neighbor sent the advertisement.

The hold time advertised by the neighbor.

The version of the advertisement packet received from the neighbor.

Displays when the entry was last modified.

The software version that the neighbor is running.


(Switch) #show isdp neighbors detail

Device ID

Address(es):

IP Address:

Capability

0001f45f1bc0

10.27.7.57

Router Trans Bridge Switch IGMP

Interface 0/48

Port ID ge.3.14

Holdtime 131

Advertisement Version

Entry last changed time

Version :

2

0 days 00:01:59

05.00.56

show isdp traffic

This command displays ISDP statistics.

Format

Mode show isdp traffic

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

ISDP Packets Received Total number of ISDP packets received

ISDP Packets Transmitted Total number of ISDP packets transmitted

ISDPv1 Packets Received Total number of ISDPv1 packets received

ISDPv1 Packets

Transmitted

Total number of ISDPv1 packets transmtted

ISDPv2 Packets Received Total number of ISDPv2 packets received


3-198


Term Definition

ISDPv2 Packets

Transmitted

ISDP Bad Header

ISDP Checksum Error

Total number of ISDPv2 packets transmitted

Number of packets received with a bad header

Number of packets received with a checksum error

ISDP Transmission Failure Number of packets which failed to transmit

ISDP Invalid Format Number of invalid packets received

ISDP Table Full Number of times a neighbor entry was not added to the table due to a full database

ISDP IP Address Table Full Displays the number of times a neighbor entry was added to the table without an IP address.

debug isdp packet

This command enables tracing of ISDP packets processed by the switch. ISDP must be enabled on both the device and the interface in order to monitor packets for a particular interface.

Format

Mode debug isdp packet [{receive | transmit}]

Privileged EXEC no debug isdp packet

This command disables tracing of ISDP packets on the receive or the transmit sides or on both sides.

Format

Mode no debug isdp packet [{receive | transmit}]

Privileged EXEC


3-199

Chapter 4

Routing Commands

This chapter describes the routing commands available in the 7000 series CLI.

The Routing Commands chapter contains the following sections:

• “Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands” on page 4-1

• “IP Routing Commands” on page 4-8

• “Router Discovery Protocol Commands” on page 4-20

• “Virtual LAN Routing Commands” on page 4-24

• “DHCP and BOOTP Relay Commands” on page 4-25

• “IP Helper Commands” on page 4-27

• “ICMP Throttling Commands” on page 4-30





Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure ARP and to view ARP information on the switch. ARP associates IP addresses with MAC addresses and stores the information as ARP entries in the ARP cache.

4-1 v1.0, July 2009


arp

This command creates an ARP entry. The value for <ipaddress> is the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface. <macaddr> is a unicast MAC address for that device.

The format of the MAC address is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Format

Mode

arp <ipaddress> <macaddr>

Global Config no arp

This command deletes an ARP entry. The value for <arpentry> is the IP address of the interface. The value for <ipaddress> is the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface. <macaddr> is a unicast MAC address for that device.

Format

Mode

no arp <ipaddress> <macaddr>

Global Config ip proxy-arp

This command enables proxy ARP on a router interface. Without proxy ARP, a device only responds to an ARP request if the target IP address is an address configured on the interface where the ARP request arrived. With proxy ARP, the device may also respond if the target IP address is reachable. The device only responds if all next hops in its route to the destination are through interfaces other than the interface that received the ARP request.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip proxy-arp

Interface Config

Routing Commands v1.0, July 2009

4-2


no ip proxy-arp

This command disables proxy ARP on a router interface.

Format

Mode no ip proxy-arp

Interface Config arp cachesize

This command configures the ARP cache size. The ARP cache size value is a platform specific integer value. The default size also varies depending on the platform.

Format

Mode

arp cachesize <platform specific integer value>

Global Config no arp cachesize

This command configures the default ARP cache size.

Format

Mode no arp cachesize

Global Config arp dynamicrenew

This command enables the ARP component to automatically renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.

Default

Format

Mode enabled arp dynamicrenew

Privileged EXEC no arp dynamicrenew

This command prevents dynamic ARP entries from renewing when they age out.

Format

Mode no arp dynamicrenew

Privileged EXEC


4-3


arp purge

This command causes the specified IP address to be removed from the ARP cache. Only entries of type dynamic or gateway are affected by this command.

Format

Mode

arp purge <ipaddr>

Privileged EXEC arp resptime

This command configures the ARP request response timeout.

The value for <seconds> is a valid positive integer, which represents the IP ARP entry response timeout time in seconds. The range for <seconds> is between 1-10 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

1

arp resptime <1-10>

Global Config no arp resptime

This command configures the default ARP request response timeout.

Format

Mode no arp resptime

Global Config arp retries

This command configures the ARP count of maximum request for retries.

The value for <retries> is an integer, which represents the maximum number of request for retries. The range for <retries> is an integer between 0-10 retries.

Default

Format

Mode

4

arp retries <0-10>

Global Config

Routing Commands 4-4 v1.0, July 2009


no arp retries

This command configures the default ARP count of maximum request for retries.

Format

Mode no arp retries

Global Config arp timeout

This command configures the ARP entry ageout time.

The value for <seconds> is a valid positive integer, which represents the IP ARP entry ageout time in seconds. The range for <seconds> is between 15-21600 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

1200

arp timeout <15-21600>

Global Config no arp timeout

This command configures the default ARP entry ageout time.

Format

Mode no arp timeout

Global Config clear arp-cache

This command causes all ARP entries of type dynamic to be removed from the ARP cache. If the gateway keyword is specified, the dynamic entries of type gateway are purged as well.

Format

Mode

clear arp-cache [gateway]

Privileged EXEC


4-5


clear arp-switch

Use this command to clear the contents of the switch’s Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table that contains entries learned through the Management port. To observe whether this command is successful, ping from the remote system to the DUT. Issue the show arp switch command to see the ARP entries. Then issue the clear arp-switch command and check the show arp switch entries. There will be no more arp entries.

Format

Mode clear arp-switch

Privileged EXEC show arp

This command displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache. The displayed results are not the total ARP entries. To view the total ARP entries, the operator should view the show arp results in conjunction with the show arp switch results.

Format

Mode show arp

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Age Time

(seconds)

Response Time

(seconds)

Retries

Cache Size

The time it takes for an ARP entry to age out. This is configurable. Age time is measured in seconds.

The time it takes for an ARP request timeout. This value is configurable. Response time is measured in seconds.

The maximum number of times an ARP request is retried. This value is configurable.

The maximum number of entries in the ARP table. This value is configurable.

Dynamic Renew

Mode

Displays whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.

Total Entry Count

Current / Peak

The total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry count in the ARP table.

Static Entry Count The static entry count in the ARP table, the active entry count in the ARP table, the

Configured/Active active entry count in the ARP table, and maximum static entry count in the ARP table.

/ Max

The following are displayed for each ARP entry:

Term

IP Address

Definition

The IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface.



Term Definition

MAC Address The hardware MAC address of that device.

Interface

Type

Age

The routing unit/slot/port associated with the device ARP entry.

The type that is configurable. The possible values are Local, Gateway, Dynamic and

Static.

The current age of the ARP entry since last refresh (in hh:mm:ss format ) show arp brief

This command displays the brief Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table information.

Format

Mode show arp brief

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Age Time

(seconds)

The time it takes for an ARP entry to age out. This value is configurable. Age time is measured in seconds.

Response Time

(seconds)

The time it takes for an ARP request timeout. This value is configurable. Response time is measured in seconds.

Retries The maximum number of times an ARP request is retried. This value is configurable.

Cache Size The maximum number of entries in the ARP table. This value is configurable.

Dynamic Renew

Mode

Displays whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.

Total Entry

Count Current /

Peak

The total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry count in the ARP table.

Static Entry

Count Current /

Max

The static entry count in the ARP table and maximum static entry count in the ARP table. show arp switch

This command displays the contents of the switch’s Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table.

Format

Mode show arp switch

Privileged EXEC



Term Definition

IP Address The IP address of a device on a subnet attached to the switch.

MAC Address The hardware MAC address of that device.

Interface The routing unit/slot/port associated with the device’s ARP entry.

IP Routing Commands

This section describes the commands you use to enable and configure IP routing on the switch. routing

This command enables IPv4 and IPv6 routing for an interface. You can view the current value for this function with the show ip brief command. The value is labeled as “Routing Mode.”

Default

Format

Mode disabled routing

Interface Config no routing

This command disables routing for an interface.

You can view the current value for this function with the show ip brief command. The value is labeled as “Routing Mode.”

Format

Mode no routing

Interface Config ip routing

This command enables the IP Router Admin Mode for the master switch.

Format

Mode ip routing

Global Config



no ip routing

This command disables the IP Router Admin Mode for the master switch.

Format

Mode no ip routing

Global Config ip address

This command configures an IP address on an interface. You can also use this command to configure one or more secondary IP addresses on the interface.The value for <ipaddr> is the IP address of the interface. The value for <subnetmask> is a 4-digit dotted-decimal number which represents the subnet mask of the interface. The subnet mask must have contiguous ones and be no longer than 30 bits, for example 255.255.255.0. This command adds the label IP address in show ip interface .

Format

Mode

ip address <ipaddr> <subnetmask> [secondary]

Interface Config no ip address

This command deletes an IP address from an interface. The value for <ipaddr> is the IP address of the interface in a.b.c.d format where the range for a, b, c, and d is 1-255. The value for

<subnetmask> is a 4-digit dotted-decimal number which represents the Subnet Mask of the interface. To remove all of the IP addresses (primary and secondary) configured on the interface, enter the command no ip address .

Format

Mode

no ip address [{<ipaddr> <subnetmask> [secondary]}]

Interface Config ip route

This command configures a static route. The <ipaddr> parameter is a valid IP address, and

<subnetmask> is a valid subnet mask. The <nexthopip> parameter is a valid IP address of the next hop router. Specifying Null0 as nexthop parameter adds a static reject route. The optional <preference> parameter is an integer (value from 1 to 255) that allows you to specify the preference value (sometimes called “administrative distance”) of an individual static route.

Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route



entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, you control whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination. A route with a preference of 255 cannot be used to forward traffic.

For the static routes to be visible, you must perform the following steps:

• Enable ip routing globally.

• Enable ip routing for the interface.

• Confirm that the associated link is also up.

Default

Format

Mode preference—1

ip route <ipaddr> <subnetmask> [<nexthopip> | Null0 ] [<preference>]

Global Config no ip route

This command deletes a single next hop to a destination static route. If you use the

<nexthopip> parameter, the next hop is deleted. If you use the <preference> value, the preference value of the static route is reset to its default.

Format

Mode

no ip route <ipaddr> <subnetmask> [{<nexthopip> [<preference>] |

Null0 }]

Global Config ip route default

This command configures the default route. The value for <nexthopip> is a valid IP address of the next hop router. The <preference> is an integer value from 1 to 255. A route with a preference of 255 cannot be used to forward traffic.

Default

Format

Mode preference—1

ip route default <nexthopip> [<preference>]

Global Config



no ip route default

This command deletes all configured default routes. If the optional <nexthopip> parameter is designated, the specific next hop is deleted from the configured default route and if the optional preference value is designated, the preference of the configured default route is reset to its default.

Format

Mode

no ip route default [{<nexthopip> | <preference>}]

Global Config ip route distance

This command sets the default distance (preference) for static routes. Lower route distance values are preferred when determining the best route. The ip route and ip route default commands allow you to optionally set the distance (preference) of an individual static route. The default distance is used when no distance is specified in these commands. Changing the default distance does not update the distance of existing static routes, even if they were assigned the original default distance. The new default distance will only be applied to static routes created after invoking the ip route distance command.

Default

Format

Mode

1

ip route distance <1-255>

Global Config no ip route distance

This command sets the default static route preference value in the router. Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route.

Format

Mode no ip route distance

Global Config ip netdirbcast

This command enables the forwarding of network-directed broadcasts. When enabled, network directed broadcasts are forwarded. When disabled they are dropped.

Default disabled



Format

Mode ip netdirbcast

Interface Config no ip netdirbcast

This command disables the forwarding of network-directed broadcasts. When disabled, network directed broadcasts are dropped.

Format

Mode no ip netdirbcast

Interface Config ip mtu

This command sets the IP Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) on a routing interface. The IP

MTU is the size of the largest IP packet that can be transmitted on the interface without fragmentation. The software currently does not fragment IP packets.

• Packets forwarded in hardware ignore the IP MTU.

• Packets forwarded in software are dropped if they exceed the IP MTU of the outgoing interface.

Packets originated on the router, such as OSPF packets, may be fragmented by the IP stack. The IP stack uses its default IP MTU and ignores the value set using the ip mtu command.

OSPF advertises the IP MTU in the Database Description packets it sends to its neighbors during database exchange. If two OSPF neighbors advertise different IP MTUs, they will not form an adjacency. (unless OSPF has been instructed to ignore differences in IP MTU with the ip ospf mtu-ignore command.)

Note: The IP MTU size refers to the maximum size of the IP packet (IP Header + IP payload). It does not include any extra bytes that may be required for Layer-2 headers. To receive and process packets, the Ethernet MTU (see “mtu” on page 3-

5 ) must take into account the size of the Ethernet header.

Default

Format

Mode

1500 bytes

ip mtu <68-1500>

Interface Config



no ip mtu

This command resets the ip mtu to the default value.

Format

Mode

no ip mtu <mtu>

Interface Config encapsulation

This command configures the link layer encapsulation type for the packet. The encapsulation type can be ethernet or snap .

Default

Format

Mode ethernet

encapsulation {ethernet | snap}

Interface Config

Note: Routed frames are always ethernet encapsulated when a frame is routed to a

VLAN.

clear ip route all

This command removes all the route entries learned over the network.

Format clear ip route all

Mode

Protocol

Privileged EXEC

Tells which protocol added the specified route. The possibilities are: local, static, OSPF, or

RIP.

Total Number of Routes

The total number of routes.

show ip brief

This command displays all the summary information of the IP, including the ICMP rate limit configuration and the global ICMP Redirect configuration.



Format

Modes show ip brief

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Default Time to Live The computed TTL (Time to Live) of forwarding a packet from the local router to the final destination.

Routing Mode Shows whether the routing mode is enabled or disabled.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of next hops the packet can travel.

Maximum Routes

ICMP Rate Limit

Interval

The maximum number of routes the packet can travel.

Shows how often the token bucket is initialized with burst-size tokens. Burst-interval is from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds. The default burst-interval is 1000 msec.

ICMP Rate Limit Burst

Size

Shows the number of ICMPv4 error messages that can be sent during one burstinterval . The range is from 1 to 200 messages. The default value is 100 messages.

ICMP Echo Replies Shows whether ICMP Echo Replies are enabled or disabled.

ICMP Redirects Shows whether ICMP Redirects are enabled or disabled.

The following shows example CLI display output for the command.

(Switch) #show ip brief

Default Time to Live........................... 64

Routing Mode................................... Disabled

Maximum Next Hops.............................. 4

Maximum Routes................................. 6000

ICMP Rate Limit Interval....................... 1000 msec

ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size..................... 100 messages

ICMP Echo Replies.............................. Enabled

ICMP Redirects................................. Enabled show ip interface

This command displays all pertinent information about the IP interface.

Format

Modes

show ip interface {<unit/slot/port> | vlan <1-4093> | loopback <0-7>}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

Routing

Interface Status

Primary IP

Address

Secondary IP

Address

Determine the operational status of IPv4 routing Interface. The possible values are Up or

Down.

The primary IP address and subnet masks for the interface. This value appears only if you configure it.

One or more secondary IP addresses and subnet masks for the interface. This value appears only if you configure it.

The helper IP addresses configured by the “ip helper-address (Global Config) command.

Helper IP

Address

Routing Mode The administrative mode of router interface participation. The possible values are enable or disable. This value is configurable.

Administrative

Mode

The administrative mode of the specified interface. The possible values of this field are enable or disable. This value is configurable.

Forward Net

Directed

Broadcasts

Proxy ARP

Displays whether forwarding of network-directed broadcasts is enabled or disabled. This value is configurable.

Displays whether Proxy ARP is enabled or disabled on the system.

Local Proxy ARP Displays whether Local Proxy ARP is enabled or disabled on the interface.

Active State Displays whether the interface is active or inactive. An interface is considered active if its link is up and it is in forwarding state.

Link Speed Data

Rate

An integer representing the physical link data rate of the specified interface. This is measured in Megabits per second (Mbps).

MAC Address The burned in physical address of the specified interface. The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons.

Encapsulation

Type

The encapsulation type for the specified interface. The types are: Ethernet or SNAP.

IP MTU

Bandwidth

The maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of a frame, in bytes.

Shows the bandwidth of the interface.

Destination

Unreachables

Displays whether ICMP Destination Unreachables may be sent (enabled or disabled).

ICMP Redirects Displays whether ICMP Redirects may be sent (enabled or disabled).


(switch)#show ip interface 1/0/2

Routing Interface Status....................... Down

Primary IP Address............................. 1.2.3.4/255.255.255.0

Secondary IP Address(es)....................... 21.2.3.4/255.255.255.0

............................................... 22.2.3.4/255.255.255.0

Helper IP Address.............................. 1.2.3.4

............................................... 1.2.3.5



Routing Mode................................... Disable

Administrative Mode............................ Enable

Forward Net Directed Broadcasts................ Disable

Proxy ARP...................................... Enable

Local Proxy ARP................................ Disable

Active State................................... Inactive

Link Speed Data Rate........................... Inactive

MAC Address.................................... 00:10:18:82:0C:68

Encapsulation Type............................. Ethernet

IP MTU......................................... 1500

Bandwidth...................................... 100000 kbps

Destination Unreachables....................... Enabled

ICMP Redirects................................. Enabled show ip interface brief

This command displays summary information about IP configuration settings for all ports in the router.

Format

Modes show ip interface brief

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Interface

State

IP Address


Routing operational state of the interface.

The IP address of the routing interface in 32-bit dotted decimal format.

IP Mask

Netdir Bcast

The IP mask of the routing interface in 32-bit dotted decimal format.

Indicates if IP forwards net-directed broadcasts on this interface. Possible values are

Enable or Disable.

MultiCast Fwd The multicast forwarding administrative mode on the interface. Possible values are

Enable or Disable. show ip route

This command displays the routing table. The <ip-address> specifies the network for which the route is to be displayed and displays the best matching best-route for the address. The <mask> specifies the subnet mask for the given <ip-address> . When you use the longer-



prefixes keyword, the <ip-address> and <mask> pair becomes the prefix, and the command displays the routes to the addresses that match that prefix. Use the <protocol> parameter to specify the protocol that installed the routes. The value for <protocol> can be connected , ospf , rip , or static . Use the all parameter to display all routes including best and non-best routes. If you do not use the all parameter, the command only displays the best route.

Note: If you use the connected keyword for <protocol> , the all option is not available because there are no best or non-best connected routes.

Format

Modes show ip route [{<ip-address> [<protocol>] | {<ip-address> <mask>

[longer-prefixes] [<protocol>] | <protocol>} [all] | all}]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Route Codes

Definition

The key for the routing protocol codes that might appear in the routing table output.

The show ip route command displays the routing tables in the following format:

Code IP-Address/Mask [Preference/Metric] via Next-Hop, Route-Timestamp,

Interface

The columns for the routing table display the following information:

Term Definition

Code The codes for the routing protocols that created the routes.

IP-Address/Mask The IP-Address and mask of the destination network corresponding to this route.

Preference The administrative distance associated with this route. Routes with low values are preferred over routes with higher values.

Metric via Next-Hop

The cost associated with this route.

The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

Route-Timestamp The last updated time for dynamic routes. The format of Route-Timestamp will be

• Days:Hours:Minutes if days > = 1

• Hours:Minutes:Seconds if days < 1

Interface The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the next destination. For reject routes, the next hop interface would be Null0 interface.



To administratively control the traffic destined to a particular network and prevent it from being forwarded through the router, you can configure a static reject route on the router. Such traffic would be discarded and the ICMP destination unreachable message is sent back to the source. This is typically used for preventing routing loops. The reject route added in the RTO is of the type

OSPF Inter-Area . Reject routes (routes of REJECT type installed by any protocol) are not redistributed by OSPF/RIP. Reject routes are supported in both OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.


(Switch) #show ip route

Route Codes: R - RIP Derived, O - OSPF Derived, C - Connected, S - Static

B - BGP Derived, IA - OSPF Inter Area

E1 - OSPF External Type 1, E2 - OSPF External Type 2

N1 - OSPF NSSA External Type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA External Type 2

C 1.1.1.0/24 [0/1] directly connected, 0/11



S 7.0.0.0/8 [1/0] directly connected, Null0

OIA 10.10.10.0/24 [110/6] via 5.5.5.2, 00h:00m:01s, 0/5


S 12.0.0.0/8 [5/0] directly connected, Null0

S 23.0.0.0/8 [3/0] directly connected, Null0 show ip route summary

Use this command to display the routing table summary. Use the optional all parameter to show the number of all routes, including best and non-best routes. To include only the number of best routes, do not use the optional parameter.

Format

Modes

show ip route summary [all]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Connected

Routes

Static Routes

RIP Routes

OSPF Routes

Definition

The total number of connected routes in the routing table.

Total number of static routes in the routing table.

Total number of routes installed by RIP protocol.

Total number of routes installed by OSPF protocol.


4-18


Term Definition

Reject Routes Total number of reject routes installed by all protocols.

Total Routes Total number of routes in the routing table.


(Switch) #show ip route summary

Connected Routes..............................1

Static Routes.................................7

RIP Routes....................................0

BGP Routes....................................0

OSPF Routes...................................0

Intra Area Routes...........................0

Inter Area Routes...........................0

External Type-1 Routes......................0

External Type-2 Routes......................0

Reject Routes.................................2

Total routes..................................8

show ip route preferences

This command displays detailed information about the route preferences. Route preferences are used in determining the best route. Lower router preference values are preferred over higher router preference values. A route with a preference of 255 cannot be used to forward traffic.

Format

Modes show ip route preferences

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Local

Static

OSPF Intra

The local route preference value.

The static route preference value.

The OSPF Intra route preference value.

OSPF Inter The OSPF Inter route preference value.

OSPF External The OSPF External route preference value.

RIP The RIP route preference value.



show ip stats

This command displays IP statistical information. Refer to RFC 1213 for more information about the fields that are displayed.

Format

Modes show ip stats

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Router Discovery Protocol Commands

This section describes the commands you use to view and configure Router Discovery Protocol settings on the switch. The Router Discovery Protocol enables a host to discover the IP address of routers on the subnet.

ip irdp

This command enables Router Discovery on an interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip irdp

Interface Config no ip irdp

This command disables Router Discovery on an interface.

Format

Mode no ip irdp

Interface Config


4-20


ip irdp address

This command configures the address that the interface uses to send the router discovery advertisements. The valid values for <ipaddr> are 224.0.0.1, which is the all-hosts IP multicast address, and 255.255.255.255, which is the limited broadcast address.

Default

Format

Mode

224.0.0.1

ip irdp address <ipaddr>

Interface Config no ip irdp address

This command configures the default address used to advertise the router for the interface.

Format

Mode no ip irdp address

Interface Config ip irdp holdtime

This command configures the value, in seconds, of the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface. The holdtime range is the value of <maxadvertinterval> to 9000 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

3 * maxinterval

ip irdp holdtime <maxadvertinterval-9000>

Interface Config no ip irdp holdtime

This command configures the default value, in seconds, of the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface.

Format

Mode no ip irdp holdtime

Interface Config



ip irdp maxadvertinterval

This command configures the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface. The range for maxadvertinterval is 4 to 1800 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

600

ip irdp maxadvertinterval <4-1800>

Interface Config no ip irdp maxadvertinterval

This command configures the default maximum time, in seconds.

Format

Mode no ip irdp maxadvertinterval

Interface Config ip irdp minadvertinterval

This command configures the minimum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface. The range for minadvertinterval is three to the value of maxadvertinterval.

Default

Format

Mode

0.75 * maxadvertinterval

ip irdp minadvertinterval <3-maxadvertinterval>

Interface Config no ip irdp minadvertinterval

This command sets the default minimum time to the default.

Format

Mode no ip irdp minadvertinterval

Interface Config



ip irdp preference

This command configures the preferability of the address as a default router address, relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.

Default

Format

Mode

0

ip irdp preference <-2147483648 to 2147483647>

Interface Config no ip irdp preference

This command configures the default preferability of the address as a default router address, relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.

Format

Mode no ip irdp preference

Interface Config show ip irdp

This command displays the router discovery information for all interfaces, or a specified interface.

Format

Modes

show ip irdp {<unit/slot/port> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term

Interface

Ad Mode

Advertise

Address

Max Int

Min Int

Hold Time

Definition

The < unit/slot/port> that matches the rest of the information in the row.

The advertise mode, which indicates whether router discovery is enabled or disabled on this interface.

The IP address to which the interface sends the advertisement.

The maximum advertise interval, which is the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.

The minimum advertise interval, which is the minimum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.

The amount of time, in seconds, that a system should keep the router advertisement before discarding it.



Term

Preference

Definition

The preference of the address as a default router address, relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.

Virtual LAN Routing Commands

This section describes the commands you use to view and configure VLAN routing and to view

VLAN routing status information.

vlan routing

This command creates routing on a VLAN. The <vlanid> value has a range from 1 to 4093.

Format

Mode

vlan routing <vlanid>

VLAN Config no vlan routing

This command deletes routing on a VLAN. The <vlanid> value has a range from 1 to 4093.

Format

Mode

no vlan routing <vlanid>

VLAN Config show ip vlan

This command displays the VLAN routing information for all VLANs with routing enabled.

Format

Modes show ip vlan

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

MAC Address used by Routing

VLANs

The MAC Address associated with the internal bridge-router interface (IBRI). The same

MAC Address is used by all VLAN routing interfaces. It will be displayed above the per-

VLAN information.



Term Definition

VLAN ID The identifier of the VLAN.

Logical Interface The logical unit/slot/port associated with the VLAN routing interface.

IP Address The IP address associated with this VLAN.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask that is associated with this VLAN.

DHCP and BOOTP Relay Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure BootP/DHCP Relay on the switch. A

DHCP relay agent operates at Layer 3 and forwards DHCP requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the same physical subnet. bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

This command enables the circuit ID option mode for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system.

Default

Format

Mode disabled bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

Global Config no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

This command disables the circuit ID option mode for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system.

Format

Mode no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

Global Config bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount

This command configures the maximum allowable relay agent hops for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system. The <hops> parameter has a range of 1 to 16.

Default

Format

Mode

4

bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <1-16>

Global Config



no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount

This command configures the default maximum allowable relay agent hops for BootP/DHCP

Relay on the system.

Format

Mode no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount

Global Config bootpdhcprelay minwaittime

This command configures the minimum wait time in seconds for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system. When the BOOTP relay agent receives a BOOTREQUEST message, it MAY use the seconds-since-client-began-booting field of the request as a factor in deciding whether to relay the request or not. The parameter has a range of 0 to 100 seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

0

bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <0-100>

Global Config no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime

This command configures the default minimum wait time in seconds for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system.

Format

Mode no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime

Global Config show bootpdhcprelay

This command displays the BootP/DHCP Relay information.

Format

Modes show bootpdhcprelay

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

Maximum Hop

Count

Minimum Wait

Time (Seconds)

Admin Mode

The maximum allowable relay agent hops.

The minimum wait time.

Indicates whether relaying of requests is enabled or disabled.

Server IP

Address

The IP address for the BootP/DHCP Relay server.

Circuit Id Option

Mode

The DHCP circuit Id option which may be enabled or disabled.

The number or requests received.

Requests

Received

Requests

Relayed

Packets

Discarded

The number of requests relayed.

The number of packets discarded.

IP Helper Commands

This section describes the commands to configure a DHCP relay agent with multiple DHCP server addresses per routing interface, and to use different server addresses for client packets arriving on different interfaces on the relay agent.

ip helper-address (Global Config)

Use the Global Configuration ip helper-address command to have the switch forward User

Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts received on an interface. To disable the forwarding of broadcast packets to specific addresses, use the no form of this command.

The ip helper-address command forwards specific UDP broadcast from one interface to another.

You can define many helper addresses but the total number of address-port pairs is limited to 128 for the whole device. The setting of a helper address for a specific interface has precedence over a setting of a helper address for all interfaces. You cannot enable forwarding of BOOTP/DHCP packets (ports 67,68) with this command. If you want to relay BOOTP/DHCP packets, use the

DHCP relay commands.



Ip-address: Destination broadcast or host address to be used when forwarding UDP broadcasts.

You can specify 0.0.0.0 to indicate not to forward the UDP packet to any host and use

"255.255.255.255" to broadcast the UDP packets to all hosts on the target subnet.

udp-port-list: The broadcast packet destination UDP port number to forward. If not specified, packets for the default services are forwarded to the helper address. Valid range, 0-65535.

Default

Format

Mode

Disabled ip helper-address <ip-address>

{<1-65535>|dhcp|domain|isakmp|mobile-ip|nameserver| netbios-dgm|netbios-ns|ntp|pim-auto-rip|rip|tacacs|tftp|time}

Global Config no ip helper-address (Global Config)

Use this command to remove the IP address from the previously configured list. The no command without an < ip-address > argument removes the entire list of helper addresses on that interface.

Format

Mode no ip helper-address {<ip-address>}


GlobalConfig ip helper-address

Use this command to add a unicast helper address to the list of helper addresses on an interface.

This is the address of a DHCP server. This command can be applied multiple times on the routing interface to form the helper addresses list until the list reaches the maximum supported helper addresses.

Format

Mode ip helper-address <ip-address>


Interface Config



no ip helper-address

Use this command to remove the IP address from the previously configured list. The no command without an < ip-address > argument removes the entire list of helper addresses on that interface.

Format

Mode no ip helper-address {< ip-address >}


Interface Config ip helper-address discard

Use this command to drop matching packets.

Format

Mode ip helper-address discard


Interface Config no ip helper-address discard

Use this command to permit the matching packets.

Format

Mode no ip helper-address discard


Interface Config show ip helper-address

Use this command to display the configured helper addresses on the given interface.

Format

Mode show ip helper-address < interface >

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



4-29


(switch) #show ip helper-address 1/0/1

Helper IP Address.............................. 1.2.3.4

............................................... 1.2.3.5

ICMP Throttling Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure options for the transmission of various types of ICMP messages. ip unreachables

Use this command to enable the generation of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages. By default, the generation of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode enable ip unreachables

Interface Config no ip unreachables

Use this command to prevent the generation of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages.

Format

Mode no ip unreachables

Interface Config ip redirects

Use this command to enable the generation of ICMP Redirect messages by the router. By default, the generation of ICMP Redirect messages is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode enable ip redirects

• Global Config




no ip redirects

Use this command to prevent the generation of ICMP Redirect messages by the router.

Format

Mode no ip redirects

• Global Config

• Interface Config ip icmp echo-reply

Use this command to enable the generation of ICMP Echo Reply messages by the router. By default, the generation of ICMP Echo Reply messages is enabled.

Default

Format

Mode enable ip icmp echo-reply

Global Config no ip icmp echo-reply

Use this command to prevent the generation of ICMP Echo Reply messages by the router.

Format

Mode no ip icmp echo-reply

Global Config ip icmp error-interval

Use this command to limit the rate at which IPv4 ICMP error messages are sent. The rate limit is configured as a token bucket, with two configurable parameters, burst-size and burst-interval .

The burst-interval specifies how often the token bucket is initialized with burst-size tokens. burstinterval is from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds (msec).

The burst-size is the number of ICMP error messages that can be sent during one burst-interval .

The range is from 1 to 200 messages.

To disable ICMP rate limiting, set burst-interval to zero (0).



Default

Format

Mode

• burst-interval of 1000 msec.

• burst-size of 100 messages ip icmp error-interval < burst-interval> [<burst-size>]

Global Config no ip icmp error-interval

Use the no form of the command to return burst-interval and burst-size to their default values.

Format

Mode no ip icmp error-interval

Global Config


4-32

Chapter 5

Quality of Service (QoS) Commands

This chapter describes the Quality of Service (QoS) commands available in the managed switch

CLI.

The QoS Commands chapter contains the following sections:

• “Class of Service (CoS) Commands” on page 5-2

• “Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Commands” on page 5-8

• “DiffServ Class Commands” on page 5-10

• “DiffServ Policy Commands” on page 5-19

• “DiffServ Service Commands” on page 5-25

• “DiffServ Show Commands” on page 5-26

• “MAC Access Control List (ACL) Commands” on page 5-32

• “IP Access Control List (ACL) Commands” on page 5-37

• “IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) Commands” on page 5-44

• “Auto-Voice over IP Commands” on page 5-48

Note: The commands in this chapter are in one of two functional groups:



5-1 v1.0, July 2009

Class of Service (CoS) Commands


This section describes the commands you use to configure and view Class of Service (CoS) settings for the switch. The commands in this section allow you to control the priority and transmission rate of traffic.

Note: Commands you issue in the Interface Config mode only affect a single interface.

Commands you issue in the Global Config mode affect all interfaces.

classofservice dot1p-mapping

This command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class. The <userpriority> values can range from 0-7. The <trafficclass> values range from 0-6, although the actual number of available traffic classes depends on the platform. For more information about 802.1p priority, see “Voice VLAN Commands” on page 3-47

.

Format

Modes

classofservice dot1p-mapping <userpriority> <trafficclass>

• Global Config

• Interface Config no classofservice dot1p-mapping

This command maps each 802.1p priority to its default internal traffic class value.

Format

Modes no classofservice dot1p-mapping

• Global Config

• Interface Config classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

This command maps an IP DSCP value to an internal traffic class. The <ipdscp> value is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63, or symbolically through one of the following keywords: af11, af12, af13, af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7, ef.

Quality of Service (QoS) Commands v1.0, July 2009

5-2


The <trafficclass> values can range from 0-6, although the actual number of available traffic classes depends on the platform.

Format

Mode

classofservice ip-dscp-mapping <ipdscp> <trafficclass>

Global Config no classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

This command maps each IP DSCP value to its default internal traffic class value.

Format

Mode no classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

Global Config classofservice trust

This command sets the class of service trust mode of an interface. You can set the mode to trust one of the Dot1p (802.1p), IP DSCP, or IP Precedence packet markings. You can also set the interface mode to untrusted. If you configure an interface to use Dot1p, the mode does not appear in the output of the show running config command because Dot1p is the default.

Note: The classofservice trust dot1p command will not be supported in future releases of the software because Dot1p is the default value. Use the no classofservice trust command to set the mode to the default value.

Default

Format

Modes dot1p

classofservice trust {dot1p | ip-dscp | ip-precedence | untrusted}

• Global Config

• Interface Config no classofservice trust

This command sets the interface mode to the default value.

Format

Modes no classofservice trust

• Global Config



5-3


cos-queue min-bandwidth

This command specifies the minimum transmission bandwidth guarantee for each interface queue.

The total number of queues supported per interface is platform specific. A value from 0-100

(percentage of link rate) must be specified for each supported queue, with 0 indicating no guaranteed minimum bandwidth. The sum of all values entered must not exceed 100.

Format

Modes

cos-queue min-bandwidth <bw-0> <bw-1> … <bw-n>

• Global Config

• Interface Config no cos-queue min-bandwidth

This command restores the default for each queue's minimum bandwidth value.

Format

Modes no cos-queue min-bandwidth

• Global Config

• Interface Config cos-queue strict

This command activates the strict priority scheduler mode for each specified queue.

Format

Modes

cos-queue strict <queue-id-1> [<queue-id-2> … <queue-id-n>]

• Global Config

• Interface Config no cos-queue strict

This command restores the default weighted scheduler mode for each specified queue.

Format

Modes

no cos-queue strict <queue-id-1> [<queue-id-2> … <queue-id-n>]

• Global Config



5-4


traffic-shape

This command specifies the maximum transmission bandwidth limit for the interface as a whole.

Also known as rate shaping, traffic shaping has the effect of smoothing temporary traffic bursts over time so that the transmitted traffic rate is bounded.

Format

Modes

traffic-shape <bw>

• Global Config

• Interface Config no traffic-shape

This command restores the interface shaping rate to the default value.

Format

Modes no traffic-shape

• Global Config

• Interface Config show classofservice dot1p-mapping

This command displays the current Dot1p (802.1p) priority mapping to internal traffic classes for a specific interface. The <unit/slot/port> parameter is optional and is only valid on platforms that support independent per-port class of service mappings. If specified, the 802.1p mapping table of the interface is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are displayed. For more information, see “Voice VLAN Commands” on page 3-47

.

Format

Mode

show classofservice dot1p-mapping [<unit/slot/port>]

Privileged EXEC

The following information is repeated for each user priority.

Term

User Priority

Traffic Class

Definition

The 802.1p user priority value.

The traffic class internal queue identifier to which the user priority value is mapped.


5-5


show classofservice ip-precedence-mapping

This command displays the current IP Precedence mapping to internal traffic classes for a specific interface. The unit/slot/port parameter is optional and is only valid on platforms that support independent per-port class of service mappings. If specified, the IP Precedence mapping table of the interface is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are displayed.

Format

Mode

show classofservice ip-precedence-mapping [<unit/slot/port>]

Privileged EXEC


Term Definition

IP Precedence The IP Precedence value.

Traffic Class The traffic class internal queue identifier to which the IP Precedence value is mapped.

show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

This command displays the current IP DSCP mapping to internal traffic classes for the global configuration settings.

Format

Mode show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping

Privileged EXEC


Term

IP DSCP

Traffic Class

Definition

The IP DSCP value.

The traffic class internal queue identifier to which the IP DSCP value is mapped.


5-6


show classofservice trust

This command displays the current trust mode setting for a specific interface. The <unit/slot/ port> parameter is optional and is only valid on platforms that support independent per-port class of service mappings. If you specify an interface, the command displays the port trust mode of the interface. If you do not specify an interface, the command displays the most recent global configuration settings.

Format

Mode

show classofservice trust [<unit/slot/port>]

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Non-IP Traffic

Class

The traffic class used for non-IP traffic. This is only displayed when the COS trust mode is set to trust IP Precedence or IP DSCP (on platforms that support IP DSCP).

Untrusted Traffic

Class

The traffic class used for all untrusted traffic. This is only displayed when the COS trust mode is set to 'untrusted'.

show interfaces cos-queue

This command displays the class-of-service queue configuration for the specified interface. The unit/slot/port parameter is optional and is only valid on platforms that support independent perport class of service mappings. If specified, the class-of-service queue configuration of the interface is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are displayed.

Format

Mode

show interfaces cos-queue [<unit/slot/port>]

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Queue Id

Minimum

Bandwidth

An interface supports n queues numbered 0 to (n-1). The specific n value is platform dependent.

The minimum transmission bandwidth guarantee for the queue, expressed as a percentage. A value of 0 means bandwidth is not guaranteed and the queue operates using best-effort. This is a configured value.

Scheduler Type Indicates whether this queue is scheduled for transmission using a strict priority or a weighted scheme. This is a configured value.

Queue

Management

Type

The queue depth management technique used for this queue (tail drop).

Quality of Service (QoS) Commands 5-7 v1.0, July 2009


If you specify the interface, the command also displays the following information.

Term

Interface

Interface

Shaping Rate

Definition

The unit/slot/port of the interface. If displaying the global configuration, this output line is replaced with a Global Config indication.

The maximum transmission bandwidth limit for the interface as a whole. It is independent of any per-queue maximum bandwidth value(s) in effect for the interface. This is a configured value.

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure QOS Differentiated Services

(DiffServ).

You configure DiffServ in several stages by specifying three DiffServ components:

1.

Class a.

Creating and deleting classes.

b.

Defining match criteria for a class.

2.

Policy a.

Creating and deleting policies b.

Associating classes with a policy c.

Defining policy statements for a policy/class combination

3.

Service a.

Adding and removing a policy to/from an inbound interface

The DiffServ class defines the packet filtering criteria. The attributes of a DiffServ policy define the way the switch processes packets. You can define policy attributes on a per-class instance basis. The switch applies these attributes when a match occurs.

Packet processing begins when the switch tests the match criteria for a packet. The switch applies a policy to a packet when it finds a class match within that policy.

The following rules apply when you create a DiffServ class:

• Each class can contain a maximum of one referenced (nested) class

• Class definitions do not support hierarchical service policies



A given class definition can contain a maximum of one reference to another class. You can combine the reference with other match criteria. The referenced class is truly a reference and not a copy since additions to a referenced class affect all classes that reference it. Changes to any class definition currently referenced by any other class must result in valid class definitions for all derived classes, otherwise the switch rejects the change. You can remove a class reference from a class definition.

The only way to remove an individual match criterion from an existing class definition is to delete the class and re-create it.

Note: The mark possibilities for policing include CoS, IP DSCP, and IP Precedence.

While the latter two are only meaningful for IP packet types, CoS marking is allowed for both IP and non-IP packets, since it updates the 802.1p user priority field contained in the VLAN tag of the layer 2 packet header.

diffserv

This command sets the DiffServ operational mode to active. While disabled, the DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed, but it is not activated. When enabled, DiffServ services are activated.

Format

Mode diffserv

Global Config no diffserv

This command sets the DiffServ operational mode to inactive. While disabled, the DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed, but it is not activated. When enabled, DiffServ services are activated.

Format

Mode no diffserv

Global Config


5-9


DiffServ Class Commands

Use the DiffServ class commands to define traffic classification. To classify traffic, you specify

Behavior Aggregate (BA), based on DSCP and Multi-Field (MF) classes of traffic (name, match criteria)

This set of commands consists of class creation/deletion and matching, with the class match commands specifying Layer 3, Layer 2, and general match criteria. The class match criteria are also known as class rules, with a class definition consisting of one or more rules to identify the traffic that belongs to the class.

Note: Once you create a class match criterion for a class, you cannot change or delete the criterion. To change or delete a class match criterion, you must delete and re-create the entire class.

The CLI command root is class-map .

class-map

This command defines a DiffServ class of type match-all. When used without any match condition, this command enters the class-map mode. The <class-map-name> is a case sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying an existing DiffServ class.

Note: The class-map-name 'default' is reserved and must not be used.

The class type of match-all indicates all of the individual match conditions must be true for a packet to be considered a member of the class.This command may be used without specifying a class type to enter the Class-Map Config mode for an existing DiffServ class.

Note: The optional keywords [{ipv4 | ipv6}] specify the Layer 3 protocol for this class. If not specified, this parameter defaults to ‘ipv4’ . This maintains backward compatibility for configurations defined on systems before IPv6 match items were supported.


5-10


Format

Mode

Note: The CLI mode is changed to Class-Map Config or Ipv6-Class-Map Config when this command is successfully executed depending on the [{ipv4 | ipv6}] keyword specified.

class-map match-all <class-map-name> [{ipv4 | ipv6}]

Global Config no class-map

This command eliminates an existing DiffServ class. The <class-map-name> is the name of an existing DiffServ class. (The class name ‘default’ is reserved and is not allowed here.) This command may be issued at any time; if the class is currently referenced by one or more policies or by any other class, the delete action fails.

Format

Mode

no class-map <class-map-name>

Global Config class-map rename

This command changes the name of a DiffServ class. The <class-map-name> is the name of an existing DiffServ class. The <new-class-map-name> parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the class.

Default

Format

Mode none

class-map rename <class-map-name> <new-class-map-name>

Global Config


5-11


match ethertype

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the ethertype. The <ethertype> value is specified as one of the following keywords: appletalk , arp , ibmsna , ipv4 , ipv6 , ipx , mplsmcast , mplsucast , netbios , novell , pppoe , rarp or as a custom ethertype value in the range of 0x0600-0xFFFF.

Format

Mode

match ethertype {<keyword> | custom <0x0600-0xFFFF>}

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match any

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class.

Default

Format

Mode none match any

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match class-map

This command adds to the specified class definition the set of match conditions defined for another class. The <refclassname> is the name of an existing DiffServ class whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition.

Default

Format

Mode none

match class-map <refclassname>

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config


5-12


Note:

• The parameters <refclassname> and <class-map-name> can not be the same.

• Only one other class may be referenced by a class.

• Any attempts to delete the <refclassname> class while the class is still referenced by any <classmap-name> fails.

• The combined match criteria of <class-map-name> and <refclassname> must be an allowed combination based on the class type.

• Any subsequent changes to the <refclassname> class match criteria must maintain this validity, or the change attempt fails.

• The total number of class rules formed by the complete reference class chain (including both predecessor and successor classes) must not exceed a platform-specific maximum. In some cases, each removal of a refclass rule reduces the maximum number of available rules in the class definition by one.

no match class-map

This command removes from the specified class definition the set of match conditions defined for another class. The <refclassname> is the name of an existing DiffServ class whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition.

Format

Mode

no match class-map <refclassname>

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match cos

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition for the Class of Service value (the only tag in a single tagged packet or the first or outer 802.1Q tag of a double VLAN tagged packet). The value may be from 0 to 7.

Default

Format

Mode none

match cos <0-7>

Class-Map Config



5-13


match ip6flowlbl

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the IP6flowlbl of a packet. The label is the value to match in the Flow Label field of the IPv6 header (range 0-

1048575).

Format

Mode match ip6flowlbl < label >

Ipv6-Class-Map Configuration mode match destination-address mac

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination

MAC address of a packet. The <macaddr> parameter is any layer 2 MAC address formatted as six, two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons (e.g., 00:11:22:dd:ee:ff). The

<macmask > parameter is a layer 2 MAC address bit mask, which need not be contiguous, and is formatted as six, two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons (e.g., ff:07:23:ff:fe:dc).

Note: This command is not available on the GSM73xxSv1 platform.

Default

Format

Mode none

match destination-address mac <macaddr> <macmask>

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match dstip

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination IP address of a packet. The <ipaddr> parameter specifies an IP address. The <ipmask> parameter specifies an IP address bit mask and must consist of a contiguous set of leading 1 bits.

Default

Format

Mode none

match dstip <ipaddr> <ipmask>

Class-Map Config


5-14


match dstip6

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination

IPv6 address of a packet.

Default

Format

Mode none

match dstip6 <destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length>

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match dstl4port

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword or numeric notation. To specify the match condition as a single keyword, the value for <portkey> is one of the supported port name keywords. The currently supported <portkey> values are: domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, http, smtp, snmp, telnet, tftp, www. Each of these translates into its equivalent port number. To specify the match condition using a numeric notation, one layer 4 port number is required. The port number is an integer from 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode none

match dstl4port {<portkey> | <0-65535>}

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match ip dscp

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the IP

DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field in a packet, which is defined as the high-order six bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header (the low-order two bits are not checked).

The <dscpval> value is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63, or symbolically through one of the following keywords: af11, af12, af13, af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7, ef.

Note: The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header, but with a slightly different user notation.


5-15


Default

Format

Mode none

match ip dscp <dscpval>

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match ip precedence


Precedence field in a packet, which is defined as the high-order three bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header (the low-order five bits are not checked). The precedence value is an integer from

0 to 7.

Note: The IP DSCP, IP Precedence, and IP ToS match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header, but with a slightly different user notation.

Default

Format

Mode none

match ip precedence <0-7>

Class-Map Config match ip tos


TOS field in a packet, which is defined as all eight bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

The value of <tosbits> is a two-digit hexadecimal number from 00 to ff. The value of

<tosmask> is a two-digit hexadecimal number from 00 to ff. The <tosmask> denotes the bit positions in <tosbits> that are used for comparison against the IP TOS field in a packet. For example, to check for an IP TOS value having bits 7 and 5 set and bit 1 clear, where bit 7 is most significant, use a <tosbits> value of a0 (hex) and a <tosmask> of a2 (hex).

Note: The IP DSCP, IP Precedence, and IP ToS match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header, but with a slightly different user notation.


5-16


Default

Format

Mode

Note: This “free form” version of the IP DSCP/Precedence/TOS match specification gives the user complete control when specifying which bits of the IP Service Type field are checked. none

match ip tos <tosbits> <tosmask>

Class-Map Config match protocol


Protocol field in a packet using a single keyword notation or a numeric value notation.

To specify the match condition using a single keyword notation, the value for <protocolname > is one of the supported protocol name keywords. The currently supported values are: icmp , igmp , ip , tcp , udp . A value of ip matches all protocol number values.

To specify the match condition using a numeric value notation, the protocol number is a standard value assigned by IANA and is interpreted as an integer from 0 to 255.

Note: This command does not validate the protocol number value against the current list defined by IANA.

Default

Format

Mode none

match protocol {<protocol-name> | <0-255>}

Class-Map Config



5-17


match source-address mac

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source MAC address of a packet. The <address > parameter is any layer 2 MAC address formatted as six, two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons (e.g., 00:11:22:dd:ee:ff). The <macmask > parameter is a layer 2 MAC address bit mask, which may not be contiguous, and is formatted as six, two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons (e.g., ff:07:23:ff:fe:dc).

Default

Format

Mode none

match source-address mac <address> <macmask>

Class-Map Config

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match srcip

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source IP address of a packet. The <ipaddr> parameter specifies an IP address. The <ipmask> parameter specifies an IP address bit mask and must consist of a contiguous set of leading 1 bits.

Default

Format

Mode none

match srcip <ipaddr> <ipmask>

Class-Map Config match srcip6

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source IP address of a packet.

Default

Format

Mode none match srci p6 <source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length>

Ipv6-Class-Map Config match srcl4port

This command adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword or numeric notation. To specify the match condition as a single keyword notation, the value for <portkey> is one of the supported port name keywords



(listed below). The currently supported <portkey> values are: domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, http, smtp, snmp, telnet, tftp, www. Each of these translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of a port range.

To specify the match condition as a numeric value, one layer 4 port number is required. The port number is an integer from 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode none

match srcl4port {<portkey> | <0-65535>}

Class-Map Config


DiffServ Policy Commands

Use the DiffServ policy commands to specify traffic conditioning actions, such as policing and marking, to apply to traffic classes

Use the policy commands to associate a traffic class that you define by using the class command set with one or more QoS policy attributes. Assign the class/policy association to an interface to form a service. Specify the policy name when you create the policy.

Each traffic class defines a particular treatment for packets that match the class definition. You can associate multiple traffic classes with a single policy. When a packet satisfies the conditions of more than one class, preference is based on the order in which you add the classes to the policy.

The first class you add has the highest precedence.

This set of commands consists of policy creation/deletion, class addition/removal, and individual policy attributes.

Note: The only way to remove an individual policy attribute from a class instance within a policy is to remove the class instance and re-add it to the policy. The values associated with an existing policy attribute can be changed without removing the class instance.

The CLI command root is policy-map .


5-19


assign-queue

This command modifies the queue id to which the associated traffic stream is assigned. The queueid is an integer from 0 to n -1, where n is the number of egress queues supported by the device.

Format

Mode

assign-queue <queueid>

Policy-Class-Map Config

Incompatibilities Drop drop

This command specifies that all packets for the associated traffic stream are to be dropped at ingress.

Format

Mode drop


Incompatibilities Assign Queue, Mark (all forms), Mirror, Police, Redirect mirror

This command specifies that all incoming packets for the associated traffic stream are copied to a specific egress interface (physical port or LAG).

Note: This command is not available on the GSM7328Sv1or GSM7352Sv1 platforms.

Format

Mode

mirror <unit/slot/port>


Incompatibilities Drop, Redirect


5-20


redirect

This command specifies that all incoming packets for the associated traffic stream are redirected to a specific egress interface (physical port or port-channel).

Note: This command is not available on the GSM7328Sv1 or GSM7352Sv1 platforms.

Format

Mode redirect <unit/slot/port>


Incompatibilities Drop, Mirror conform-color

Use this command to enable color-aware traffic policing and define the conform-color class map.

Used in conjunction with the police command where the fields for the conform level are specified.

The <class-map-name> parameter is the name of an existing DiffServ class map.

Note: This command may only be used after specifying a police command for the policyclass instance.

Format

Mode

conform-color <class-map-name>

Policy-Class-Map Config class

This command creates an instance of a class definition within the specified policy for the purpose of defining treatment of the traffic class through subsequent policy attribute statements. The

<classname> is the name of an existing DiffServ class.

Note: This command causes the specified policy to create a reference to the class definition.


5-21


Note: The CLI mode is changed to Policy-Class-Map Config when this command is successfully executed.

Format

Mode

class <classname>

Policy-Map Config no class

This command deletes the instance of a particular class and its defined treatment from the specified policy. <classname> is the names of an existing DiffServ class.

Note: This command removes the reference to the class definition for the specified policy.

Format

Mode

no class <classname>

Policy-Map Config mark cos

This command marks all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified class of service value in the priority field of the 802.1p header (the only tag in a single tagged packet or the first or outer 802.1Q tag of a double VLAN tagged packet). If the packet does not already contain this header, one is inserted. The CoS value is an integer from 0 to 7.mark ip-dscp

Default

Format

Mode

1

mark-cos <0-7>


Incompatibilities Drop, Mark IP DSCP, IP Precedence, Police mark ip-dscp

This command marks all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP DSCP value.


5-22


The <dscpval> value is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63, or symbolically through one of the following keywords: af11, af12, af13, af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7, ef .

Format

Mode

mark ip-dscp <dscpval>


Incompatibilities Drop, Mark CoS, Mark IP Precedence, Police mark ip-precedence

This command marks all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP Precedence value. The IP Precedence value is an integer from 0 to 7.

Note: This command may not be used on IPv6 classes. IPv6 does not have a precedence field.

Format mark ip-precedence <0-7>

Mode Policy-Class-Map Config

Incompatibilities Drop, Mark CoS, Mark IP Precedence, Police

Policy Type In police-simple

This command is used to establish the traffic policing style for the specified class. The simple form of the police command uses a single data rate and burst size, resulting in two outcomes: conform and violate. The conforming data rate is specified in kilobits-per-second (Kbps) and is an integer from 1 to 4294967295. The conforming burst size is specified in kilobytes (KB) and is an integer from 1 to 128.

For each outcome, the only possible actions are drop, set-cos-transmit, set-dscp-transmit, set-prectransmit, or transmit. In this simple form of the police command, the conform action defaults to transmit and the violate action defaults to drop.

For set-dscp-transmit, a <dscpval> value is required and is specified as either an integer from 0 to 63, or symbolically through one of the following keywords: af11, af12, af13, af21, af22, af23, af31, af32, af33, af41, af42, af43, be, cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7, ef.

For set-prec-transmit, an IP Precedence value is required and is specified as an integer from 0-7.



For set-cos-transmit an 802.1p priority value is required and is specified as an integer from 0-7.

Format police-simple {<1-4294967295> <1-128> conform-action {drop | set- prec-transmit <0-7> | set-dscp-transmit <0-63> | set-cos-transmit

<0-7> | transmit} [violate-action {drop | set-prec-transmit <0-7>

| set-dscp-transmit <0-63> | set-cos-transmit <0-7> | transmit}]}

Mode Policy-Class-Map Config

Incompatibilities Drop, Mark (all forms) policy-map

This command establishes a new DiffServ policy. The <policyname> parameter is a casesensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the policy. The type of policy is specific to the inbound traffic direction as indicated by the in parameter.

Note: The CLI mode is changed to Policy-Map Config when this command is successfully executed..

Format

Mode

policy-map <policyname> in

Global Config no policy-map

This command eliminates an existing DiffServ policy. The <policyname> parameter is the name of an existing DiffServ policy. This command may be issued at any time. If the policy is currently referenced by one or more interface service attachments, this delete attempt fails.

Format

Mode

no policy-map <policyname>

Global Config


5-24


policy-map rename

This command changes the name of a DiffServ policy. The <policyname> i s the name of an existing DiffServ class. The <newpolicyname> parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the policy.

Format

Mode

policy-map rename <policyname> <newpolicyname>

Global Config

DiffServ Service Commands

Use the DiffServ service commands to assign a DiffServ traffic conditioning policy, which you specified by using the policy commands, to an interface in the incoming direction

The service commands attach a defined policy to a directional interface. You can assign only one policy at any one time to an interface in the inbound direction. DiffServ is not used in the outbound direction.

This set of commands consists of service addition/removal.

The CLI command root is service-policy .

service-policy

This command attaches a policy to an interface in the inbound direction. The <policyname> parameter is the name of an existing DiffServ policy. This command causes a service to create a reference to the policy.

Note: This command effectively enables DiffServ on an interface in the inbound direction. There is no separate interface administrative 'mode' command for

DiffServ.

Note: This command fails if any attributes within the policy definition exceed the capabilities of the interface. Once a policy is successfully attached to an interface, any attempt to change the policy definition, that would result in a violation of the interface capabilities, causes the policy change attempt to fail.


5-25

Format

Modes

service-policy in <policymapname>

• Global Config



Note: Each interface can have one policy attached.

no service-policy

This command detaches a policy from an interface in the inbound direction. The <policyname> parameter is the name of an existing DiffServ policy.

Note: This command causes a service to remove its reference to the policy. This command effectively disables DiffServ on an interface in the inbound direction.

There is no separate interface administrative 'mode' command for DiffServ.

Format

Modes

no service-policy in <policymapname>

• Global Config


DiffServ Show Commands

Use the DiffServ show commands to display configuration and status information for classes, policies, and services. You can display DiffServ information in summary or detailed formats. The status information is only shown when the DiffServ administrative mode is enabled.

show class-map

This command displays all configuration information for the specified class. The <classname> is the name of an existing DiffServ class.

Format

Modes

show class-map <class-name>

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



If the class-name is specified the following fields are displayed:

Term Definition

Class Name

Class Type

The name of this class.

A class type of ‘all’ means every match criterion defined for the class is evaluated simultaneously and must all be true to indicate a class match.

The Layer 3 protocol for this class. Possible values are IPv4 and IPv6.

Class Layer3

Protocol

Match Criteria The Match Criteria fields are only displayed if they have been configured. Not all platforms support all match criteria values. They are displayed in the order entered by the user. The fields are evaluated in accordance with the class type. The possible Match Criteria fields are: Destination IP Address, Destination Layer 4 Port, Destination MAC Address,

Ethertype, Source MAC Address, VLAN, Class of Service, Every, IP DSCP, IP

Precedence, IP TOS, Protocol Keyword, Reference Class, Source IP Address, and

Source Layer 4 Port.

Values The values of the Match Criteria.

If you do not specify the Class Name, this command displays a list of all defined DiffServ classes.

The following fields are displayed:

Term

Class Name

Class Type

Definition

The name of this class. (Note that the order in which classes are displayed is not necessarily the same order in which they were created.)

A class type of ‘all’ means every match criterion defined for the class is evaluated simultaneously and must all be true to indicate a class match.

Reference Class

Name

The name of an existing DiffServ class whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition.

show diffserv

This command displays the DiffServ General Status Group information, which includes the current administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of rows in each of the main DiffServ private MIB tables. This command takes no options.

Format

Mode show diffserv

Privileged EXEC


5-27


Term Definition

DiffServ Admin mode The current value of the DiffServ administrative mode.

Class Table Size

Current /Max

The current number of entries (rows) and the maximum allowed entries (rows) in the Class Table.

Class Rule Table Size

Current /Max

The current number of entries (rows) and the maximum allowed entries(rows) in the Class Rule Table.

Policy Table Size

Current /Max

Policy Instance Table

Size Current /Max

Policy Attribute Table

Size Current /Max

Service Table Size

Current /Max

The current number of entries (rows) and the maximum allowed entries(rows) in the Policy Table.

Current number of entries (rows) and the maximum allowed entries(rows) in the Policy Instance Table.

Current number of entries (rows) and the maximum allowed entries(rows) in the

Policy Attribute Table.

The current number of entries (rows) i and the maximum allowed entries(rows) in the Service Table.

show policy-map

This command displays all configuration information for the specified policy. The

<policyname> is the name of an existing DiffServ policy.

Format

Mode

show policy-map [policyname]

Privileged EXEC

If the Policy Name is specified the following fields are displayed:

Term

Policy Name

Policy Type

Definition

The name of this policy.

The policy type (Only inbound policy definitions are supported for this platform.)

The following information is repeated for each class associated with this policy (only those policy attributes actually configured are displayed):

Term Definition

Assign Queue Directs traffic stream to the specified QoS queue. This allows a traffic classifier to specify which one of the supported hardware queues are used for handling packets belonging to the class.

Class Name The name of this class.


5-28


Term Definition

Committed Burst

Size (KB)

The committed burst size, used in simple policing.

Committed Rate

(Kbps)

The committed rate, used in simple policing,

Conform Action The current setting for the action taken on a packet considered to conform to the policing parameters. This is not displayed if policing is not in use for the class under this policy.

Conform COS The CoS mark value if the conform action is set-cos-transmit.

Conform DSCP

Value

The DSCP mark value if the conform action is set-dscp-transmit.

Conform IP

Precedence

Value

Drop

The IP Precedence mark value if the conform action is set-prec-transmit.

Mark CoS

Drop a packet upon arrival. This is useful for emulating access control list operation using

DiffServ, especially when DiffServ and ACL cannot co-exist on the same interface.

The class of service value that is set in the 802.1p header of inbound packets. This is not displayed if the mark cos was not specified.

Mark IP DSCP The mark/re-mark value used as the DSCP for traffic matching this class. This is not displayed if mark ip description is not specified.

Mark IP

Precedence

The mark/re-mark value used as the IP Precedence for traffic matching this class. This is not displayed if mark ip precedence is not specified.

Mirror

Non-Conform

Action

Copies a classified traffic stream to a specified egress port (physical port or LAG). This can occur in addition to any marking or policing action. It may also be specified along with a QoS queue assignment. This field does not display on GSM7328S and GSM7352S platforms.

The current setting for the action taken on a packet considered to not conform to the policing parameters. This is not displayed if policing not in use for the class under this policy.

Non-Conform

COS

Non-Conform

DSCP Value

The CoS mark value if the non-conform action is set-cos-transmit.

The DSCP mark value if the non-conform action is set-dscp-transmit.

Non-Conform IP

Precedence

Value

The IP Precedence mark value if the non-conform action is set-prec-transmit.

Policing Style The style of policing, if any, used (simple).

Redirect Forces a classified traffic stream to a specified egress port (physical port or LAG). This can occur in addition to any marking or policing action. It may also be specified along with a QoS queue assignment. This field does not display on GSM7328v1 and GSM7352Sv2 platforms.


5-29


If the Policy Name is not specified this command displays a list of all defined DiffServ policies.

The following fields are displayed:

Term

Definition

Policy Name The name of this policy. (The order in which the policies are displayed is not necessarily the same order in which they were created.)

Policy Type The policy type (Only inbound is supported).

Class Members List of all class names associated with this policy.

show diffserv service

This command displays policy service information for the specified interface and direction. The

<unit/slot/port> parameter specifies a valid unit/slot/port number for the system.

Format

Mode

show diffserv service <unit/slot/port> in

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

DiffServ Admin

Mode

Interface

Direction

The current setting of the DiffServ administrative mode. An attached policy is only in effect on an interface while DiffServ is in an enabled mode.


The traffic direction of this interface service.

Operational

Status

Policy Name

The current operational status of this DiffServ service interface.

The name of the policy attached to the interface in the indicated direction.

Policy Details Attached policy details, whose content is identical to that described for the show policymap <policymapname> command (content not repeated here for brevity). show diffserv service brief

This command displays all interfaces in the system to which a DiffServ policy has been attached.

The inbound direction parameter is optional.

Format

Mode

show diffserv service brief [in]

Privileged EXEC


5-30


Term Definition

DiffServ Admin

Mode

The current setting of the DiffServ administrative mode. An attached policy is only active on an interface while DiffServ is in an enabled mode.

The following information is repeated for interface and direction (only those interfaces configured with an attached policy are shown):

Term

Interface

Direction

OperStatus

Policy Name

Definition





show policy-map interface

This command displays policy-oriented statistics information for the specified interface and direction. The <unit/slot/port> parameter specifies a valid interface for the system.

Note: This command is only allowed while the DiffServ administrative mode is enabled.

Format

Mode

show policy-map interface <unit/slot/port> [in]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Interface

Direction

Operational

Status

Policy Name

Definition





The following information is repeated for each class instance within this policy:

Term

Class Name

Definition

The name of this class instance.


5-31


Term

In Discarded

Packets

Definition

A count of the packets discarded for this class instance for any reason due to DiffServ treatment of the traffic class. show service-policy

This command displays a summary of policy-oriented statistics information for all interfaces in the specified direction.

Format

Mode show service-policy in

Privileged EXEC

The following information is repeated for each interface and direction (only those interfaces configured with an attached policy are shown):

Term

Interface

Operational

Status

Policy Name

Definition



The name of the policy attached to the interface.

MAC Access Control List (ACL) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure MAC ACL settings. MAC ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources and block any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources.

The following rules apply to MAC ACLs:

• The maximum number of ACLs you can create is hardware dependent. The limit applies to all

ACLs, regardless of type.

• The system supports only Ethernet II frame types.

• The maximum number of rules per MAC ACL is hardware dependent.

• For the GSM7328Sv1, GSM7352Sv1, and GSM7328FS, if you configure an IP ACL on an interface, you cannot configure a MAC ACL on the same interface.


5-32


mac access-list extended

This command creates a MAC Access Control List (ACL) identified by <name> , consisting of classification fields defined for the Layer 2 header of an Ethernet frame. The <name> parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the MAC access list.

If a MAC ACL by this name already exists, this command enters Mac-Access-List config mode to allow updating the existing MAC ACL.

Note: The CLI mode changes to Mac-Access-List Config mode when you successfully execute this command.

Format

Mode

mac access-list extended <name>

Global Config no mac access-list extended

This command deletes a MAC ACL identified by <name> from the system.

Format

Mode

no mac access-list extended <name>

Global Config mac access-list extended rename

This command changes the name of a MAC Access Control List (ACL). The <name> parameter is the name of an existing MAC ACL. The <newname> parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the MAC access list.

This command fails if a MAC ACL by the name <newname> already exists.

Format

Mode

mac access-list extended rename <name> <newname>

Global Config


5-33


{deny | permit} (MAC ACL)

This command creates a new rule for the current MAC access list. Each rule is appended to the list of configured rules for the list.

Note: The 'no' form of this command is not supported, since the rules within a MAC ACL cannot be deleted individually. Rather, the entire MAC ACL must be deleted and re-specified.

Note: An implicit 'deny all' MAC rule always terminates the access list.

A rule may either deny or permit traffic according to the specified classification fields. At a minimum, the source and destination MAC value must be specified, each of which may be substituted using the keyword any to indicate a match on any value in that field. The remaining command parameters are all optional, but the most frequently used parameters appear in the same relative order as shown in the command format.

The Ethertype may be specified as either a keyword or a four-digit hexadecimal value from

0x0600-0xFFFF. The currently supported <ethertypekey> values are: appletalk, arp, ibmsna, ipv4, ipv6, ipx, mplsmcast, mplsucast, netbios, novell, pppoe, rarp. Each of these translates into its equivalent Ethertype value(s).

Ethertype Keyword appletalk arp ibmsna ipv4 ipv6 ipx mplsmcast mplsucast netbios novell pppoe rarp

Corresponding Value

0x809B

0x0806

0x80D5

0x0800

0x86DD

0x8037

0x8848

0x8847

0x8191

0x8137, 0x8138

0x8863, 0x8864

0x8035


5-34


The vlan and cos parameters refer to the VLAN identifier and 802.1p user priority fields, respectively, of the VLAN tag. For packets containing a double VLAN tag, this is the first (or outer) tag.

The assign-queue parameter allows specification of a particular hardware queue for handling traffic that matches this rule. The allowed <queue-id> value is 0-(n-1), where n is the number of user configurable queues available for the hardware platform. The assign-queue parameter is valid only for a permit rule.

Note: The special command form {deny | permit} any any is used to match all Ethernet layer 2 packets, and is the equivalent of the IP access list “match every” rule.

Format

Mode

{deny|permit} {<srcmac> | any} {<dstmac> | any} [<ethertypekey> |

<0x0600-0xFFFF>] [vlan {eq <0-4095>}] [cos <0-7>] [[log] [assign-queue

<queue-id>]] [{mirror | redirect} <unit/slot/port>]

Mac-Access-List Config mac access-group

This command either attaches a specific MAC Access Control List (ACL) identified by <name> to an interface, or associates it with a VLAN ID, in a given direction. The <name> parameter must be the name of an existing MAC ACL.

An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this mac access list relative to other mac access lists already assigned to this interface and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction, the specified mac access list replaces the currently attached mac access list using that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified for this command, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction is used.

This command specified in 'Interface Config' mode only affects a single interface, whereas the

'Global Config' mode setting is applied to all interfaces. The VLAN keyword is only valid in the

'Global Config' mode. The 'Interface Config' mode command is only available on platforms that support independent per-port class of service queue configuration.

Note: You should be aware that the < out > option may or may not be available, depending on the platform.


5-35


Format

Modes

mac access-group <name> [vlan <vlan-id>] [in|out] [sequence <1-

4294967295>]

• Global Config

• Interface Config no mac access-group

This command removes a MAC ACL identified by <name> from the interface in a given direction.

Format

Modes

no mac access-group <name> [vlan <vlan-id>] in

• Global Config

• Interface Config show mac access-lists

This command displays a MAC access list and all of the rules that are defined for the MAC ACL.

Use the [name] parameter to identify a specific MAC ACL to display.

Format

Mode

show mac access-lists [name]

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Rule Number The ordered rule number identifier defined within the MAC ACL.

Action

Source MAC

Address

The action associated with each rule. The possible values are Permit or Deny.

The source MAC address for this rule.

Destination MAC

Address

The destination MAC address for this rule.

Ethertype

VLAN ID

COS

Log

The Ethertype keyword or custom value for this rule.

The VLAN identifier value or range for this rule.

The COS (802.1p) value for this rule.

Displays when you enable logging for the rule.

Assign Queue The queue identifier to which packets matching this rule are assigned.

Mirror Interface The unit/slot/port to which packets matching this rule are copied.


5-36


Term

Redirect

Interface

Definition

The unit/slot/port to which packets matching this rule are forwarded.

IP Access Control List (ACL) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure IP ACL settings. IP ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources and block any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources.

The following rules apply to IP ACLs:

• Managed switch software does not support IP ACL configuration for IP packet fragments.

• The maximum number of ACLs you can create is hardware dependent. The limit applies to all

ACLs, regardless of type.

• The maximum number of rules per IP ACL is hardware dependent.

• On GSM7328S v1 and GSM7352S v1 platforms, if you configure a MAC ACL on an interface, you cannot configure an IP ACL on the same interface.

• Wildcard masking for ACLs operates differently from a subnet mask. A wildcard mask is in essence the inverse of a subnet mask. With a subnet mask, the mask has ones (1's) in the bit positions that are used for the network address, and has zeros (0's) for the bit positions that are not used. In contrast, a wildcard mask has (0’s) in a bit position that must be checked. A ‘1’ in a bit position of the ACL mask indicates the corresponding bit can be ignored. access-list

This command creates an IP Access Control List (ACL) that is identified by the access list number, which is 1-99 for standard ACLs or 100-199 for extended ACLs .

IP Standard ACL:

Format

Mode access-list <1-99> {deny | permit} {every | <srcip> <srcmask>} [log]

[assign-queue <queue-id>] [{mirror | redirect} <unit/slot/port>]

Global Config


5-37


IP Extended ACL:

Format

Mode

access-list <100-199> {deny | permit} {every | {{icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <number>} <srcip> <srcmask>[{eq {<portkey> | <0-65535>}

<dstip> <dstmask> [{eq {<portkey>| <0-65535>}] [precedence

<precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>] [log] [assign-queue

<queue-id>] [{mirror | redirect} <unit/slot/port>]

Global Config


<1-99> or <100-199>

{deny | permit}

Range 1 to 99 is the access list number for an IP standard ACL.

Range 100 to 199 is the access list number for an IP extended ACL.

Specifies whether the IP ACL rule permits or denies an action. every Match every packet

{icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp Specifies the protocol to filter for an extended IP ACL rule.

| <number>}

<srcip> <srcmask>

[{eq {<portkey> |

<0-65535>}]

<dstip> <dstmask>

[precedence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp

<dscp>]

[log]

[assign-queue <queue-id>]

[{mirror | redirect} <unit/ slot/port>]

Specifies a source IP address and source netmask for match condition of the IP ACL rule.

Specifies the source layer 4 port match condition for the IP ACL rule.

You can use the port number, which ranges from 0-65535, or you specify the <portkey> , which can be one of the following keywords: domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, http, smtp, snmp, telnet, tftp , and www . Each of these keywords translates into its equivalent port number, which is used as both the start and end of a port range.

Specifies a destination IP address and netmask for match condition of the IP ACL rule.

Specifies the TOS for an IP ACL rule depending on a match of precedence or DSCP values using the parameters dscp , precedence , tos/tosmask .

Specifies that this rule is to be logged.

Specifies the assign-queue, which is the queue identifier to which packets matching this rule are assigned.

Specifies the mirror or redirect interface which is the unit/slot/port to which packets matching this rule are copied or forwarded, respectively. The mirror and redirect parameters are not available on the GSM7328Sv1 and GSM7352Sv1 platforms.


5-38


no access-list

This command deletes an IP ACL that is identified by the parameter < accesslistnumber> from the system. The range for < accesslistnumber> 1-99 for standard access lists and 100-

199 for extended access lists.

Format

Mode

no access-list <accesslistnumber>

Global Config ip access-list

This command creates an extended IP Access Control List (ACL) identified by < name >, consisting of classification fields defined for the IP header of an IPv4 frame. The < name > parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the

IP access list.

If an IP ACL by this name already exists, this command enters IPv4-Access_List config mode to allow updating the existing IP ACL.

Note: The CLI mode changes to IPv4-Access-List Config mode when you successfully execute this command.

Format

Mode

ip access-list <name>

Global Config no ip access-list

This command deletes the IP ACL identified by <name> from the system.

Format

Mode

no ip access-list <name>

Global Config


5-39


ip access-list rename

This command changes the name of an IP Access Control List (ACL). The < name > parameter is the names of an existing IP ACL. The <new name > parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the IP access list.

This command fails is an IP ACL by the name <new name > already exists.

Format

Mode

ip access-list rename <name> <newname>

Global Config

{deny | permit} (IP ACL)

This command creates a new rule for the current IP access list. Each rule is appended to the list of configured rules for the list.

Note: The 'no' form of this command is not supported, since the rules within an IP ACL cannot be deleted individually. Rather, the entire IP ACL must be deleted and respecified.

Note: An implicit 'deny all' IP rule always terminates the access list.

Note: For the GSM7328Sv1 and GSM7352Sv1, the mirror and redirect parameters are not available.

Note: For the GSM7328Sv2 and GSM7352Sv2-based systems, the mirror parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be copied to the specified <unit/slot/ port> , while the redirect parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be forwarded to the specified <unit/slot/port> . The assign-queue and redirect parameters are only valid for a permit rule.

A rule may either deny or permit traffic according to the specified classification fields. At a minimum, either the every keyword or the protocol, source address, and destination address values must be specified. The source and destination IP address fields may be specified using the


5-40


keyword ‘ any ’ to indicate a match on any value in that field. The remaining command parameters are all optional, but the most frequently used parameters appear in the same relative order as shown in the command format.


Format

Mode

{deny | permit} {every | {{icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <number>}

<srcip> <srcmask>[{eq {<portkey> | <0-65535>} <dstip> <dstmask> [{eq

{<portkey>| <0-65535>}] [precedence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask>

| dscp <dscp>] [log] [assign-queue <queue-id>] [{mirror | redirect}

<unit/slot/port>]

Ipv4-Access-List Config ip access-group

This command either attaches a specific IP ACL identified by <accesslistnumber> to an interface or associates with a VLAN ID in a given direction. The parameter <name> is the name of the Access Control List.

An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this IP access list relative to other IP access lists already assigned to this interface and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached IP access list using that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified for this command, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction is used.


Default

Format

Modes none

ip access-group <accesslistnumber> <name> [vlan <vlan-id>] <in |

out>[sequence <1-4294967295>]


• Global Config


5-41


no ip access-group

This command removes a specified IP ACL from an interface.

Default

Format

Mode none

no ip access-group <accesslistnumber> [vlan <vlan-id>] in


• Global Config acl-trapflags

This command enables the ACL trap mode.

Default

Format

Mode disabled acl-trapflags

Global Config no acl-trapflags

This command disables the ACL trap mode.

Format

Mode no acl-trapflags

Global Config show ip access-lists

This command displays an IP ACL <accesslistnumber> is the number used to identify the

IP ACL.

Format

Mode

show ip access-lists <accesslistnumber>

Privileged EXEC

Note: Only the access list fields that you configure are displayed.


5-42


Term Definition

Rule Number

Action

Match All

The number identifier for each rule that is defined for the IP ACL.


Indicates whether this access list applies to every packet. Possible values are True or

False.

The protocol to filter for this rule.

Protocol

Source IP

Address

The source IP address for this rule.

Source IP Mask The source IP Mask for this rule.

Source L4 Port

Keyword

The source port for this rule.

Destination IP

Address

Destination IP

Mask

The destination IP address for this rule.

The destination IP Mask for this rule.

Destination L4

Port Keyword

The destination port for this rule.

IP DSCP The value specified for IP DSCP.

IP Precedence The value specified IP Precedence.

IP TOS

Log

The value specified for IP TOS.




Redirect

Interface


show access-lists

This command displays IP ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC access control lists information for a designated interface and direction.

Format

Mode

show access-lists interface <unit/slot/port> in

Privileged EXEC

Term

ACL Type

Definition

Type of access list (IP, IPv6, or MAC).


5-43


Term

ACL ID

Sequence

Number

Definition

Access List name for a MAC or IPv6 access list or the numeric identifier for an IP access list.

An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this access list relative to other access lists already assigned to this interface and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified by the user, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction is used. Valid range is (1 to 4294967295).

IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure IPv6 ACL settings. IPv6 ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources and block any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources.

The following rules apply to IPv6 ACLs:

• The maximum number of ACLs you create is 100, regardless of type.

• The system supports only Ethernet II frame types.

• The maximum number of rules per IPv6 ACL is hardware dependent.

Note: The IPv6 ACL commands are not available on the GSM7224Sv2 or GSM7248v2.

ipv6 access-list

This command creates an IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) identified by <name> , consisting of classification fields defined for the IP header of an IPv6 frame. The <name> parameter is a casesensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the IPv6 access list.


5-44


If an IPv6 ACL by this name already exists, this command enters IPv6-Access-List config mode to allow updating the existing IPv6 ACL.

Note: The CLI mode changes to IPv6-Access-List Config mode when you successfully execute this command.

Format

Mode

ipv6 access-list <name>

Global Config no ipv6 access-list

This command deletes the IPv6 ACL identified by <name> from the system.

Format

Mode no ipv6 access-list <name>

Global Config ipv6 access-list rename

This command changes the name of an IPv6 ACL. The <name> parameter is the name of an existing IPv6 ACL. The <newname> parameter is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to

31 characters uniquely identifying the IPv6 access list.

This command fails is an IPv6 ACL by the name <newname> already exists.

Format

Mode

ipv6 access-list rename <name> <newname>

Global Config

{deny | permit} (IPv6)

This command creates a new rule for the current IPv6 access list. Each rule is appended to the list of configured rules for the list.

Note: The ‘no’ form of this command is not supported, since the rules within an IPv6

ACL cannot be deleted individually. Rather, the entire IPv6 ACL must be deleted and respecified.


5-45


Note: An implicit ‘deny all’ IPv6 rule always terminates the access list.

A rule may either deny or permit traffic according to the specified classification fields. At a minimum, either the ‘every’ keyword or the protocol, source address, and destination address values must be specified. The source and destination IPv6 address fields may be specified using the keyword ‘any’ to indicate a match on any value in that field. The remaining command parameters are all optional, but the most frequently used parameters appear in the same relative order as shown in the command format.


The mirror parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be copied to the specified <unit/ slot/port> , while the redirect parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be forwarded to the specified <unit/slot/port> . The assign-queue and redirect parameters are only valid for a permit rule.

Format

Mode

{deny | permit} {every | {{icmp | igmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp |

<number>}[log] [assign-queue <queue-id>] [{mirror | redirect} <unit/ slot/port>]

IPv6-Access-List Config ipv6 traffic-filter

This command either attaches a specific IPv6 ACL identified by <name> to an interface or associates with a VLAN ID in a given direction. The <name> parameter must be the name of an existing IPv6 ACL.

An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this mac access list relative to other IPv6 access lists already assigned to this interface and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use for this interface and direction, the specifiedIPv6 access list replaces the currently attached IPv6 access list using that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified for this command, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently in use for this interface and direction is used.


5-46


This command specified in Interface Config mode only affects a single interface, whereas the

Global Config mode setting is applied to all interfaces. The vlan keyword is only valid in the

Global Config mode. The Interface Config mode command is only available on platforms that support independent per-port class of service queue configuration.


Format

Modes

ipv6 traffic-filter <name> [vlan <vlan-id>] <in | out>[sequence <1-

4294967295>]

• Global Config

• Interface Config no ipv6 traffic-filter

This command removes an IPv6 ACL identified by <name> from the interface(s) in a given direction.

Format

Modes

no ipv6 traffic-filter <name> [vlan <vlan-id>] in [sequence <1-

4294967295>]

• Global Config

• Interface Config show ipv6 access-lists

This command displays an IPv6 access list and all of the rules that are defined for the IPv6 ACL.

Use the [name] parameter to identify a specific IPv6 ACL to display.

Format

Mode

show ipv6 access-lists [name]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Rule Number

Action

Definition

The ordered rule number identifier defined within the IPv6 ACL.



5-47


Term Definition

Match All

Protocol

Source IP

Address

Source L4 Port

Keyword

Destination IP

Address

Indicates whether this access list applies to every packet. Possible values are True or

False.

The protocol to filter for this rule.

The source IP address for this rule.

The source port for this rule.

The destination IP address for this rule.

Destination L4

Port Keyword

IP DSCP

Flow Label

Log

The destination port for this rule.

The value specified for IP DSCP.

The value specified for IPv6 Flow Label.




Redirect

Interface


Auto-Voice over IP Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure Auto-Voice over IP (VoIP) commands.

The Auto-VoIP feature explicitly matches VoIP streams in Ethernet switches and provides them with a better class-of-service than ordinary traffic. When you enable the Auto-VoIP feature on an interface, the interface scans incoming traffic for the following call-control protocols:

• Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

• H.323

• Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP)

When a call-control protocol is detected, the switch assigns the traffic in that session to the highest

CoS queue, which is generally used for time-sensitive traffic.

auto-voip all

Use this command to enable VoIP Profile on the interfaces of the switch.


5-48


Default

Format

Mode disabled auto-voip all

Global Config no auto-voip all

Use this command to disable VoIP Profile on the interfaces of the switch.

Format

Mode no auto-voip all

Global Config auto-voip

Use this command to enable VoIP Profile on the interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled auto-voip

Interface Config no auto-voip

Use this command to disable VoIP Profile on the interface.

Format

Mode no auto-voip all

Interface Config show auto-voip

Use this command to display the VoIP Profile settings on the interface or interfaces of the switch.

Format

Mode show auto-voip interface {<unit/slot/port>|all}

Privileged EXEC


5-49



AutoVoIP Mode The Auto VoIP mode on the interface.

Traffic Class The CoS Queue or Traffic Class to which all VoIP traffic is mapped to. This is not configurable and defaults to the highest CoS queue available in the system for data traffic.


5-50

Chapter 6

Utility Commands

This chapter describes the utility commands available in the CLI.

The Utility Commands chapter includes the following sections:

• “Auto Install Commands” on page 6-2

• “Dual Image Commands” on page 6-4

• “System Information and Statistics Commands” on page 6-6

• “Logging Commands” on page 6-18

• “System Utility and Clear Commands” on page 6-23

• “Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Commands” on page 6-33

• “DHCP Server Commands” on page 6-39

• “DNS Client Commands” on page 6-54

• “Packet Capture Commands” on page 6-60

• “Cable Test Command” on page 6-82

• “sFlow Commands” on page 6-83

Note: The commands in this chapter are in one of four functional groups:



• Copy commands transfer or save configuration and informational files to and from the switch.


6-1 v1.0, July 2009


Auto Install Commands

This section describes the Auto Install Commands. Auto Install is a software feature which provides for the configuration of a switch automatically when the device is initialized and no configuration file is found on the switch. The Auto Install process requires DHCP to be enabled by default in order for it to be completed. The downloaded config file is not automatically saved to startup-config. An administrator must explicitly issue a save request in order to save the configuration. The Auto Install process depends upon the configuration of other devices in the network, including a DHCP or BOOTP server, a TFTP server and, if necessary, a DNS server.

There are three stepss to Auto Install:

1.

Configuration or assignment of an IP address for the device.

2.

Assignment of a TFTP server.

3.

Obtain a configuration file for the device from the TFTP server.

show autoinstall

This command displays the current status of the Auto Config process.

Format

Mode show autoinstall

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

AutoInstall Mode The administrator mode is enabled or disabled.

AutoSave Modet If this option is enabled, the downloaded config file will be saved. Otherwise, administrator must explicitly issue a "copy running-config startup-config" command in order to save the configuration.

AutoInstall Retry

Count the number of attempts to download a configuration.

AutoInstall State The status of the AutoInstall.

Example

(switch) #show autoinstall

AutoInstall Mode............................... Stopped

AutoSave Mode.................................. Disabled

AutoInstall Retry Count........................ 3

AutoInstall State.............................. Waiting for boot options

Utility Commands 6-2 v1.0, July 2009


boot autoinstall auto-save

This command is used to enable automatically saving the downloaded configuration on the switch.

.

Default

Format

Mode

Disabled boot autoinstall auto-save

Privileged EXEC no boot autoinstall auto-save

This command is used to disable automatically saving the downloaded configuration on the switch..

Format

Mode no boot autoinstall auto-save

Privileged EXEC boot autoinstall start

The command is used to start Auto Install on the switch. Auto Install tries to download a config file from a TFTP server..

Format

Mode boot autoinstall start

Privileged EXEC boot autoinstall stop

The command is used to A user may terminate the Auto Install process at any time prior to the downloading of the config file. This is most optimally done when the switch is disconnected from the network, or if the requisite configuration files have not been configured on TFTP servers.

Termination of the Auto Install process ends further periodic requests for a host-specific file.

Format

Mode boot autoinstall stop

Privileged EXEC



boot autoinstall retry-count

This command is used to set the number of attempts to download a configuration. The valid range is from 1 to 6.

Default

Format

Mode

3 boot autoinstall retry-count

Privileged EXEC no boot autoinstall retry-count

This command is used to reset the number to the default. The default number is 3.

Format

Mode no boot autoinstall retry-count

Privileged EXEC

Dual Image Commands

The software supports a dual image feature that allows the switch to have two software images in the permanent storage. You can specify which image is the active image to be loaded in subsequent reboots. This feature allows reduced down-time when you upgrade or downgrade the software. delete

This command deletes the supplied image file from the permanent storage. The image to be deleted must be a backup image. If this image is the active image, or if this image is activated, an error message displays. The optional <unit> parameter is valid only on Stacks. Error will be returned, if this parameter is provided, on Standalone systems. In a stack, the <unit> parameter identifies the node on which this command must be executed. When this parameter is not supplied, the command is executed on all nodes in a Stack.

Format

Mode

delete [<unit>] {image1 | image2}

Privileged EXEC



boot system

This command activates the specified image. It will be the active-image for subsequent reboots and will be loaded by the boot loader. The current active-image is marked as the backup-image for subsequent reboots. The optional <unit> parameter is valid only in Stacking, where the unit parameter identifies the node on which this command must be executed. When this parameter is not supplied, the command is executed on all nodes in a Stack.

Format

Mode boot system [<unit>] <image-file-name>

Privileged EXEC show bootvar

This command displays the version information and the activation status for the current active and backup images on the supplied unit (node) of the Stack. If you do not specify a unit number, the command displays image details for all nodes on the Stack. The command also displays any text description associated with an image. This command, when used on a Standalone system, displays the switch activation status. For a standalone system, the unit parameter is not valid.

Format

Mode

show bootvar [<unit>]

Privileged EXEC filedescr

This command associates a given text description with an image. Any existing description will be replaced. For stacking, the [<unit>] parameter identifies the node on which this command must be executed. When this parameter is not supplied, the command is executed on all nodes in a

Stack.

Format

Mode filedescr [<unit>] {image1 | image2} <text-description>

Privileged EXEC

Utility Commands v1.0, July 2009

6-5


update bootcode

This command updates the bootcode (boot loader) on the switch. The bootcode is read from the active-image for subsequent reboots.The optional <unit> parameter is valid only on Stacks.

Error will be returned, if this parameter is provided, on Standalone systems. For Stacking, the

<unit> parameter identifies the node on which this command must be executed. When this parameter is not supplied, the command is executed on all nodes in a Stack.

Format

Mode

update bootcode [<unit>]

Privileged EXEC

System Information and Statistics Commands

This section describes the commands you use to view information about system features, components, and configurations. show arp switch

This command displays the contents of the IP stack’s Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table.

The IP stack only learns ARP entries associated with the management interfaces - network or service ports. ARP entries associated with routing interfaces are not listed.

Format

Mode show arp switch

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

IP Address IP address of the management interface or another device on the management network.

MAC Address Hardware MAC address of that device.

Interface For a service port the output is Management slot/port of the physical interface.

. For a network port, the output is the unit/


6-6


show eventlog

This command displays the event log, which contains error messages from the system. The event log is not cleared on a system reset. The <unit> is the switch identifier.

Format

Mode

show eventlog [<unit>]

Privileged EXEC

Term

File

Line

Task Id

Code

Time

Unit

Definition

The file in which the event originated.

The line number of the event.

The task ID of the event.

The event code.

The time this event occurred.

The unit for the event.

Note: Event log information is retained across a switch reset.

show hardware

This command displays inventory information for the switch.

Note: The show version command and the show hardware command display the same information. In future releases of the software, the show hardware command will not be available. For a description of the command output, see the command “show version” on page 6-8 .

Format

Mode show hardware

Privileged EXEC



show version

This command displays inventory information for the switch.

Note: The show version command will replace the show hardware command in future releases of the software.

Format

Mode show version

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Switch

Description

Text used to identify the product name of this switch.

Machine Type The machine model as defined by the Vital Product Data.

Machine Model The machine model as defined by the Vital Product Data

Serial Number The unique box serial number for this switch.

FRU Number

Manufacturer

The field replaceable unit number.

Manufacturer descriptor field.

Burned in MAC

Address

Universally assigned network address.

Software Version The release.version.revision number of the code currently running on the switch.

Additional

Packages

The additional packages incorporated into this system.

show interface

This command displays a summary of statistics for a specific interface or a count of all CPU traffic based upon the argument.

Format

Mode

show interface {<unit/slot/port> | switchport}

Privileged EXEC



The display parameters, when the argument is <unit/slot/port> , are as follows:

Parameters

Packets

Received

Without Error

Packets

Received With

Error

Broadcast

Packets

Received

Packets

Transmitted

Without Error

Transmit

Packets Errors

Collisions

Frames

Time Since

Counters Last

Cleared

Definition

The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast packets) received by the processor.

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared.

The display parameters, when the argument is “switchport” are as follows:

Term Definition

Packets

Received

Without Error

Broadcast

Packets

Received

Packets

Received With

Error

Packets

Transmitted

Without Error



The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.


Broadcast

Packets

Transmitted

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted to the

Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit Packet

Errors

The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.



Term Definition

Address Entries

Currently In Use

The total number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries now active on the switch, including learned and static entries.

VLAN Entries

Currently In Use

The number of VLAN entries presently occupying the VLAN table.

Time Since

Counters Last

Cleared

The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.

show interface ethernet

This command displays detailed statistics for a specific interface or for all CPU traffic based upon the argument.

Format

Mode show interface ethernet {<unit/slot/port> | switchport}

Privileged EXEC

When you specify a value for <unit/slot/port> , the command displays the following information.

Term Definition

Total Packets

Received

(Octets)

The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets

Received

Without Error


Unicast Packets

Received

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Multicast

Packets

Received

Broadcast

Packets

Received

The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.


Receive Packets

Discarded

The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.



Term Definition

Octets

Transmitted

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

Packets

Transmitted without Errors

Unicast Packets

Transmitted

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Multicast

Packets

Transmitted

Broadcast

Packets

Transmitted


The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a

Multicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to the

Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit

Packets

Discarded

Most Address

Entries Ever

Used

The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.

The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries that have been learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.

Address Entries

Currently in Use

The number of Learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch.

Maximum VLAN

Entries

The maximum number of Virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed on this switch.

Most VLAN

Entries Ever

Used

The largest number of VLANs that have been active on this switch since the last reboot.

Static VLAN

Entries

Dynamic VLAN

Entries

The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created statically.

The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created by

GVRP registration.

VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that have been created and then deleted since the last reboot.

Time Since

Counters Last

Cleared

The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the statistics for this switch were last cleared. show mac-addr-table

This command displays the forwarding database entries. These entries are used by the transparent bridging function to determine how to forward a received frame.



Enter all or no parameter to display the entire table. Enter a MAC Address and VLAN ID to display the table entry for the requested MAC address on the specified VLAN. Enter the count parameter to view summary information about the forwarding database table. Use the interface <unit/slot/port> parameter to view MAC addresses on a specific interface.

Use the vlan <vlan_id> parameter to display information about MAC addresses on a specified VLAN.

Format

Mode

show mac-addr-table [{<macaddr> <vlan_id> | all | count | interface

<unit/slot/port> | vlan <vlan_id>}]

Privileged EXEC

The following information displays if you do not enter a parameter, the keyword all, or the MAC address and VLAN ID. If you enter vlan <vlan_id> , only the Mac Address, Interface, and

Status fields appear.

Term Definition

Mac Address

Interface The port through which this address was learned.

Interface Index This object indicates the ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Status


The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB . In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as

8 bytes.

The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are:

• Static —The value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user when a static MAC filter was defined. It cannot be relearned.

• Learned —The value of the corresponding instance was learned by observing the source

MAC addresses of incoming traffic, and is currently in use.

• Management —The value of the corresponding instance (system MAC address) is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress. It is identified with interface 0/

1. and is currently used when enabling VLANs for routing.

• Self —The value of the corresponding instance is the address of one of the switch’s physical interfaces (the system’s own MAC address).

• GMRP Learned —The value of the corresponding was learned via GMRP and applies to

Multicast.

• Other —The value of the corresponding instance does not fall into one of the other categories.



If you enter the interface <unit/slot/port> parameter, in addition to the MAC

Address and Status fields, the following field appears:

Term

VLAN ID

Definition

The VLAN on which the MAC address was learned.

The following information displays if you enter the count parameter:

Term

Dynamic

Address count

Static Address

(User-defined) count

Total MAC

Addresses in use

Total MAC

Addresses available

Definition

Number of MAC addresses in the forwarding database that were automatically learned.

Number of MAC addresses in the forwarding database that were manually entered by a user.

Number of MAC addresses currently in the forwarding database.

Number of MAC addresses the forwarding database can handle.

show process cpu

This command provides the percentage utilization of the CPU by different tasks.

Note: It is not necessarily the traffic to the CPU, but different tasks that keep the CPU busy.

Format

Mode show process cpu

Privileged EXEC

The following shows example CLI display output.

(Switch) #show process cpu

Memory Utilization Report status bytes



------ ----------

free 192980480 alloc 53409968

Task Utilization Report

Task Utilization

----------------------- ----------- bcmL2X.0 0.75% bcmCNTR.0 0.20% bcmLINK.0 0.35%

DHCP snoop 0.10%

Dynamic ARP Inspection 0.10% dot1s_timer_task 0.10% dhcpsPingTask 0.20% show mbuf total

This command shows the total system buffer pools status.

Format

Mode show rmbuf total

Privileged EXEC

The following shows an example of CLI display output for the command.

(switch) #show mbuf total mbufSize 9284 (0x2444)

Current Time 0x1897fa

MbufsFree 150

MbufsRxUsed 0

Total Rx Norm Alloc Attempts 26212

Total Rx Mid2 Alloc Attempts 4087

Total Rx Mid1 Alloc Attempts 188943

Total Rx High Alloc Attempts 384555

Total Tx Alloc Attempts 2478536

Total Rx Norm Alloc Failures 0

Total Rx Mid2 Alloc Failures 0

Total Rx Mid1 Alloc Failures 0

Total Rx High Alloc Failures 0

Total Tx Alloc Failures 0



show running-config

Use this command to display or capture the current setting of different protocol packages supported on the switch. This command displays or captures commands with settings and configurations that differ from the default value. To display or capture the commands with settings and configurations that are equal to the default value, include the [all] option.

Note: Show running-config does not display the User Password, even if you set one different from the default.

The output is displayed in script format, which can be used to configure another switch with the same configuration. If the optional <scriptname> is provided with a file name extension of

“.scr”, the output is redirected to a script file.

Note: If you issue the show running-config command from a serial connection, access to the switch through remote connections (such as Telnet) is suspended while the output is being generated and displayed.

Note: If you use a text-based configuration file, the show running-config command will only display configured physical interfaces, i.e. if any interface only contains the default configuration, that interface will be skipped from the show running-config command output. This is true for any configuration mode that contains nothing but default configuration. That is, the command to enter a particular config mode, followed immediately by its ‘exit’ command, are both omitted from the show running-config command output (and hence from the startup-config file when the system configuration is saved.)

If option < changed > is used, this command displays/capture commands with settings/ configurations that differ from the defaul value.

• If all the flags in a particular group are enabled, then the command displays trapflags

<group name> all .

• If some, but not all, of the flags in that group are enabled, the command displays trapflags

<groupname> <flag-name>.

Format

Mode

show running-config [all | <scriptname> | changed]

Privileged EXEC



show running-config interface

This command shows the current configuration on a particular interface. The interface could be a physical port or a virtual port—like a LAG or VLAN. The output captures how the configuration differs from the factory default value.

Format

Mode

show running-config interface {<unit/slot/port>} | VLAN <id> | LAG <id>}

Interface Config show sysinfo

This command displays switch information.

Format

Mode show sysinfo

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Switch

Description

Text used to identify this switch.

System Name Name used to identify the switch.The factory default is blank. To configure the system name, see “snmp-server” on page 7-41 .

System Location Text used to identify the location of the switch. The factory default is blank. To configure the system location, see “snmp-server” on page 7-41 .

System Contact Text used to identify a contact person for this switch. The factory default is blank. To configure the system location, see “snmp-server” on page 7-41 .

System Object ID The base object ID for the switch’s enterprise MIB.

System Up Time The time in days, hours and minutes since the last switch reboot.

MIBs Supported A list of MIBs supported by this agent.

show tech-support

Use the show tech-support command to display system and configuration information when you contact technical support. The output of the show tech-support command combines the output of the following commands:

• show version

• show sysinfo



• show port all

• show isdp neighbors

• show logging

• show event log

• show logging buffered

• show trap log

Format

Mode show tech-support

Privileged EXEC terminal length

Use this command to set the number of lines of output to be displayed on the screen, i.e. pagination, for the show running-config and show running-config all commands.

The terminal length size is either zero or a number in the range of 5 to 48. After the userconfigured number of lines is displayed in one page, the system prompts the user “ --More-- or

(q)uit.” Press q or Q to quit, or press any key to display the next set of < 5-48 > lines. The command terminal length 0 disables pagination and, as a result, the output of the show running-config command is displayed immediately.

Default

Format

Mode

24 lines per page terminal length < 0 |5-48>

Privileged EXEC no terminal length

Use this command to set the terminal length to the default value.

Format

Mode no terminal length

Privileged EXEC



show terminal length

Use this command to display the value of the user-configured terminal length size.

Format

Mode show terminal length

Privileged EXEC

Logging Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure system logging, and to view logs and the logging settings.

logging buffered

This command enables logging to an in-memory log that keeps up to 128 logs.

Default

Format

Mode disabled; critical when enabled logging buffered

Global Config no logging buffered

This command disables logging to in-memory log.

Format

Mode no logging buffered

Global Config logging buffered wrap

This command enables wrapping of in-memory logging when the log file reaches full capacity.

Otherwise when the log file reaches full capacity, logging stops.

Default

Format

Mode enabled logging buffered wrap

Privileged EXEC



no logging buffered wrap

This command disables wrapping of in-memory logging and configures logging to stop when the log file capacity is full.

Format

Mode no logging buffered wrap

Privileged EXEC logging cli-command

This command enables the CLI command logging feature, which enables the 7000 series software to log all CLI commands issued on the system.

Default

Format

Mode enabled logging cli-command

Global Config no logging cli-command

This command disables the CLI command Logging feature.

Format

Mode no logging cli-command

Global Config logging console

This command enables logging to the console. You can specify the <severitylevel> value as either an integer from 0 to 7 or symbolically through one of the following keywords: emergency

(0), alert (1), critical (2), error (3), warning (4), notice (5), info (6), or debug

(7).

Default

Format

Mode disabled; critical when enabled

logging console [severitylevel]

Global Config



no logging console

This command disables logging to the console.

Format

Mode no logging console

Global Config logging host

This command enables logging to a host. You can configure up to eight hosts. The

<ipaddr|hostname> is the IP address of the logging host. The <addresstype> indicates the type of address ipv4 or ipv6 or dns being passed. The <port> value is a port number from 1 to 65535. You can specify the <severitylevel> value as either an integer from 0 to 7 or symbolically through one of the following keywords: emergency (0), alert (1), critical

(2), error (3), warning (4), notice (5), info (6), or debug (7).

Default

Format

Mode

• port—514

• level—critical (2)

logging host <ipaddr|hostname> <addresstype>

[<port>][<severitylevel>]

Global Config logging host remove

This command disables logging to host. See “show logging hosts” on page 6-22 for a list of host indexes.

Format

Mode

logging host remove <hostindex>

Global Config logging syslog

This command enables syslog logging. The <portid> parameter is an integer with a range of 1-

65535.

Default

Format

Mode disabled

logging syslog [port <portid>]

Global Config



no logging syslog

This command disables syslog logging.

Format

Mode no logging syslog

Global Config show logging

This command displays logging configuration information.

Format

Mode show logging

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Logging Client

Local Port

CLI Command

Logging

Port on the collector/relay to which syslog messages are sent.

Shows whether CLI Command logging is enabled.

Console Logging Shows whether console logging is enabled.

Console Logging

Severity Filter

The minimum severity to log to the console log. Messages with an equal or lower numerical severity are logged.

Buffered

Logging

Shows whether buffered logging is enabled.

Syslog Logging Shows whether syslog logging is enabled.

Log Messages

Received

Number of messages received by the log process. This includes messages that are dropped or ignored.

Number of messages that could not be processed due to error or lack of resources.

Log Messages

Dropped

Log Messages

Relayed

Number of messages sent to the collector/relay.

show logging buffered

This command displays buffered logging (system startup and system operation logs).

Format

Mode show logging buffered

Privileged EXEC


6-21


Term

Buffered (In-

Memory)

Logging

Buffered

Logging

Wrapping

Behavior

Buffered Log

Count

Definition

Shows whether the In-Memory log is enabled or disabled.

The behavior of the In Memory log when faced with a log full situation.

The count of valid entries in the buffered log. show logging hosts

This command displays all configured logging hosts. The <unit> is the switch identifier and has a range of 1-8.

Format

Mode

show logging hosts <unit>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Host Index

IP Address /

Hostname

(Used for deleting hosts.)

IP address or hostname of the logging host.

Severity Level The minimum severity to log to the specified address. The possible values are emergency

(0), alert (1), critical (2), error (3), warning (4), notice (5), info (6), or debug (7).

Port The server port number, which is the port on the local host from which syslog messages are sent.

Host Status The state of logging to configured syslog hosts. If the status is disable, no logging occurs.

show logging traplogs

This command displays SNMP trap events and statistics.

Format

Mode show logging traplogs

Privileged EXEC



Term Definition

Number of Traps

Since Last Reset

The number of traps since the last boot.

Trap Log

Capacity

The number of traps the system can retain.

Number of Traps

Since Log Last

Viewed

The number of new traps since the command was last executed.

Log The log number.

System Time Up How long the system had been running at the time the trap was sent.

Trap The text of the trap message.

logging persistent

Use this command to configure the Persistent logging for the switch. The severity level of logging messages is specified at severity level. Possible values for severity level are (emergency|0, alert|1, critical|2, error|3, warning|4, notice|5, info|6, debug|7) .

Default

Format

Mode

Disable

logging persistent <severity level>

Global Config no logging persistent

Use this command to disable the persistent logging in the switch.

Format

Mode no logging persistent

Global Config

System Utility and Clear Commands

This section describes the commands you use to help troubleshoot connectivity issues and to restore various configurations to their factory defaults.



traceroute

Use the traceroute command to discover the routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destination through the network on a hop-by-hop basis. Traceroute continues to provide a synchronous response when initiated from the CLI.

Default

Format

Mode

• count: 3 probes

• interval: 3 seconds

• size: 0 bytes

• port: 33434

• maxTtl: 30 hops

• maxFail: 5 probes

•

• initTtl: 1 hop traceroute < ipaddr|hostname > [ initTtl < initTtl >] [ maxTtl < maxTtl >]

[ maxFail < maxFail >] [ interval < interval >] [ count < count >]

[ port < port >] [ size < size >]

Privileged EXEC

Using the options described below, you can specify the initial and maximum time-to-live (TTL) in probe packets, the maximum number of failures before termination, the number of probes sent for each TTL, and the size of each probe.

Parameter Description ipaddr|hostname The ipaddr value should be a valid IP address. The hostname value should be a valid hostname.

initTtl maxTtl maxFail

Use initTtl to specify the initial time-to-live (TTL), the maximum number of router hops between the local and remote system. Range is 0 to 255.

Use maxTtle to specify the maximum TTL. Range is 1 to 255.

interval

Use maxFail to terminate the traceroute after failing to receive a response for this number of consecutive probes. Range is 0 to 255.

Use interval to specify the time between probes, in seconds. Range is 1 to 60 seconds.

count port

Use the optional count parameter to specify the number of probes to send for each

TTL value. Range is 1 to 10 probes.

Use the optional port parameter to specify destination UDP port of the probe. This should be an unused port on the remote destination system. Range is 1 to 65535.

size Use the optional size parameter to specify the size, in bytes, of the payload of the

Echo Requests sent. Range is 0 to 65507 bytes.



Example: The following are examples of the CLI command.

traceroute Success:

(Switch) # traceroute 10.240.10.115 initTtl 1 maxTtl 4 maxFail 0 interval 1 count

3 port 33434 size 43

Traceroute to 10.240.10.115 ,4 hops max 43 byte packets:

1 10.240.4.1 708 msec 41 msec 11 msec

2 10.240.10.115 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec

Hop Count = 1 Last TTL = 2 Test attempt = 6 Test Success = 6 traceroute Failure:

(Switch) # traceroute 10.40.1.1 initTtl 1 maxFail 0 interval 1 count 3 port 33434 size 43

Traceroute to 10.40.1.1 ,30 hops max 43 byte packets:

1 10.240.4.1 19 msec 18 msec 9 msec

2 10.240.1.252 0 msec 0 msec 1 msec

3 172.31.0.9 277 msec 276 msec 277 msec

4 10.254.1.1 289 msec 327 msec 282 msec

5 10.254.21.2 287 msec 293 msec 296 msec

6 192.168.76.2 290 msec 291 msec 289 msec

7 0.0.0.0 0 msec *

Hop Count = 6 Last TTL = 7 Test attempt = 19 Test Success = 18 traceroute ipv6

Use the traceroute command to discover the routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destination through the network on a hop-by-hop basis. The < ipv6address|hostname > parameter must be a valid IPv6 address or hostname. The optional

< port > parameter is the UDP port used as the destination of packets sent as part of the traceroute. This port should be an unused port on the destination system. The range for < port > is zero (0) to 65535. The default value is 33434.

Default

Format

Mode port: 33434 traceroute ipv6 < ipv6-address|hostname > [ port < port >]

Privileged EXEC



clear config

This command resets the configuration to the factory defaults without powering off the switch.

When you issue this command, a prompt appears to confirm that the reset should proceed. When you enter y , you automatically reset the current configuration on the switch to the default values. It does not reset the switch.

Format

Mode clear config

Privileged EXEC clear mac-addr-table

This command clears the dynamically learned MAC addresses of the switch.

Format

Mode clear mac-addr-table

Privileged EXEC clear logging buffered

This command clears the messages maintained in the system log.

Format

Mode clear logging buffered

Privileged EXEC clear counters

This command clears the statistics for a specified <unit/slot/port>, for all the ports, or for the entire switch based upon the argument.

Format

Mode

clear counters {<unit/slot/port> | all}

Privileged EXEC


6-26


clear igmpsnooping

This command clears the tables managed by the IGMP Snooping function and attempts to delete these entries from the Multicast Forwarding Database.

Format

Mode clear igmpsnooping

Privileged EXEC clear pass

This command resets all user passwords to the factory defaults without powering off the switch.

You are prompted to confirm that the password reset should proceed.

Format

Mode clear pass

Privileged EXEC clear port-channel

This command clears all port-channels (LAGs).

Format

Mode clear port-channel

Privileged EXEC clear traplog

This command clears the trap log.

Format

Mode clear traplog

Privileged EXEC clear vlan

This command resets VLAN configuration parameters to the factory defaults.

Format

Mode clear vlan

Privileged EXEC



enable password

This command prompts you to change the Privileged EXEC password. Passwords are a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters. The password is case sensitive. The option [encrypted] allows the administrator to transfer the enable password between devices without having to know the password. In this case, the <password> parameter must be exactly 128 hexadecimal characters..

Format

Mode enable password <passwor> [encrypted]

Privileged EXEC logout

This command closes the current telnet connection or resets the current serial connection.

Note: Save configuration changes before logging out.

Format

Modes logout

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC ping

Use this command to determine whether another computer is on the network. Ping provides a synchronous response when initiated from the CLI and Web interfaces.

Default

Format

Modes

• The default count is 1.

• The default interval is 3 seconds.

• The default size is 0 bytes.

ping <ipaddress|hostname> [count <count>] [interval <interval>] [size

<size>]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Using the options described below, you can specify the number and size of Echo Requests and the interval between Echo Requests.

Parameter count interval size

Description

Use the count parameter to specify the number of ping packets (ICMP Echo requests) that are sent to the destination address specified by the <ip-address> field. The range for <count> is 1 to 15 requests.

Use the interval parameter to specify the time between Echo Requests, in seconds.

Range is 1 to 60 seconds.

Use the size parameter to specify the size, in bytes, of the payload of the Echo

Requests sent. Range is 0 to 65507 bytes.

The following are examples of the CLI command.

ping success:

(Switch) #ping 10.254.2.160 count 3 interval 1 size 255

Pinging 10.254.2.160 with 255 bytes of data:

Received response for icmp_seq = 0. time= 275268 usec



----10.254.2.160 PING statistics----

3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (msec) min/avg/max = 274/279/276 ping failure:

In Case of Unreachable Destination:

(Switch) # ping 192.168.254.222 count 3 interval 1 size 255


Received Response: Unreachable Destination

Received Response :Unreachable Destination

Received Response :Unreachable Destination

----192.168.254.222 PING statistics----

3 packets transmitted,3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (msec) min/avg/max = 0/0/0

In Case Of Request TimedOut:

(Switch) # ping 1.1.1.1 count 1 interval 3


----1.1.1.1 PING statistics----



1 packets transmitted,0 packets received, 100% packet loss round-trip (msec) min/avg/max = 0/0/0 quit

This command closes the current telnet connection or resets the current serial connection. The system asks you whether to save configuration changes before quitting.

Format

Modes quit

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC reload

This command resets the switch without powering it off. Reset means that all network connections are terminated and the boot code executes. The switch uses the stored configuration to initialize the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed. The LEDs on the switch indicate a successful reset.

Format

Mode reload

Privileged EXEC save

This command makes the current configuration changes permanent by writing the configuration changes to system NVRAM.

Format

Mode save

Privileged EXEC


6-30


copy

The copy command uploads and downloads files to and from the switch. You can also use the copy command to manage the dual images ( image1 and image2 ) on the file system. Upload and download files from a server by using TFTP or Xmodem. SFTP and SCP are available as additional transfer methods if the software package supports secure management.

Format

Mode copy <source> <destination>

Privileged EXEC

Replace the <source> and <destination> parameters with the options in table below. For the <url> source or destination, use one of the following values:

{xmodem | tftp://<ipaddr|hostname>|<ip6address|hostname>/<filepath>/<filename>

[noval]

| sftp|scp://<username>@<ipaddr>|<ipv6address>|<filepath>|<filename>}

For TFTP, SFTP and SCP, the <ipaddr|hostname> parameter is the IP address or host name of the server, <filepath> is the path to the file, and <filename> is the name of the file you want to upload or download. For SFTP and SCP, the <username> parameter is the username for logging into the remote server via SSH.

Note: < ip6address > is also a valid parameter for routing packages that support IPv6.

For platforms that support a USB device, the

copy

command can be used to transfer files from and to the USB device. The syntax for the USB file is:

usb://<filename>

. The

USB device can be either a source or destination in the copy command. It cannot be used as both source and destination in a given

copy

command.

Warning: Remember to upload the existing Switch CLI.cfg file off the switch prior to loading a new release image in order to make a backup.

Parameters for the copy command are listed int the following table:

Source nvram:backup-config nvram:clibanner

Destination nvram:startup-config

<url>

Description

Copies the backup configuration to the startup configuration.

Copies the CLI banner to a server.


6-31


Source Destination Description nvram:errorlog nvram:Switch CLI.cfg

nvram:log nvram:script

<scriptname> nvram:startup-config

<url>

<url>

<url>

<url>

Copies the error log file to a server.

Uploads the binary config file to a server.

Copies the log file to a server.

Copies a specified configuration script file to a server.

nvram:startup-config nvram:traplog system:running-config

<url>

<url>

<url>

<url> nvram:backup-config

<url>

<url> nvram:startup-config nvram:clibanner nvram:Switch CLI.cfg

nvram:script

<destfilename> nvram:script

<destfilename> noval

Copies the startup configuration to the backup configuration.

Copies the startup configuration to a server.

Copies the trap log file to a server.

Saves the running configuration to nvram.

Downloads the CLI banner to the system.

Downloads the binary config file to the system.

Downloads a configuration script file to the system.

During the download of a configuration script, the copy command validates the script. In case of any error, the command lists all the lines at the end of the validation process and prompts you to confirm before copying the script file.

When you use this option, the copy command will not validate the downloaded script file. An example of the

CLI command follows:

(NETGEAR Switch CLI Routing) #copy tftp://1.1.1.1/file.scr nvram:script file.scr noval

<url> nvram:sshkey-dsa

<url> nvram:sshkey-rsa1

Downloads an SSH key file. For more information, see

“Secure Shell (SSH) Commands” on page 7-16 .

Downloads an SSH key file.

<url>

<url>

<url>

<url> nvram:sshkey-rsa2 nvram:sslpem-dhweak nvram:sslpem-dhstrong nvram:sslpem-root

Downloads an SSH key file.

Downloads an HTTP secure-server certificate.


Downloads an HTTP secure-server certificate. For more information, see “Hypertext Transfer Protocol

(HTTP) Commands” on page 7-20 .

<url>

<url>

<url> nvram:sslpem-server nvram:startup-config nvram:system-image


Downloads the startup configuration file to the system.

Downloads a code image to the system.



Source

<url>

{image1 | image2} image1 image2

{image1 | image2}

{image1 | image2}

Destination Description

{image1 | image2}

<url> image2

Download an image from the remote server to either image. In a stacking environment, the downloaded image is distributed to the stack nodes.

Upload either image to the remote server.

Copy image1 to image2 .

image1 unit://<unit>/{image1 | image2}

Copy image2 to image1 .

Copy an image from the management node to a given node in a Stack. Use the unit parameter to specify the node to which the image should be copied. unit://*/{image1 | image2} Copy an image from the management node to all of the nodes in a Stack.

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to automatically configure the system time and date by using SNTP.

sntp broadcast client poll-interval

This command sets the poll interval for SNTP broadcast clients in seconds as a power of two where <poll-interval> can be a value from 6 to 10.

Default

Format

Mode

6

sntp broadcast client poll-interval <poll-interval>

Global Config no sntp broadcast client poll-interval

This command resets the poll interval for SNTP broadcast client back to the default value.

Format

Mode no sntp broadcast client poll-interval

Global Config



sntp client mode

This command enables Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client mode and may set the mode to either broadcast or unicast.

Default

Format

Mode disabled

sntp client mode [broadcast | unicast]

Global Config no sntp client mode

This command disables Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client mode.

Format

Mode no sntp client mode

Global Config sntp client port

This command sets the SNTP client port id to a value from 1-65535.

Default

Format

Mode

123

sntp client port <portid>

Global Config no sntp client port

This command resets the SNTP client port back to its default value.

Format

Mode no sntp client port

Global Config


6-34


sntp unicast client poll-interval

This command sets the poll interval for SNTP unicast clients in seconds as a power of two where

<poll-interval> can be a value from 6 to 10.

Default

Format

Mode

6

sntp unicast client poll-interval <poll-interval>

Global Config no sntp unicast client poll-interval

This command resets the poll interval for SNTP unicast clients to its default value.

Format

Mode no sntp unicast client poll-interval

Global Config sntp unicast client poll-timeout

This command will set the poll timeout for SNTP unicast clients in seconds to a value from 1-30.

Default

Format

Mode

5

sntp unicast client poll-timeout <poll-timeout>

Global Config no sntp unicast client poll-timeout

This command will reset the poll timeout for SNTP unicast clients to its default value.

Format

Mode no sntp unicast client poll-timeout

Global Config sntp unicast client poll-retry

This command will set the poll retry for SNTP unicast clients to a value from 0 to 10.

Default 1


Format

Mode


sntp unicast client poll-retry <poll-retry>

Global Config no sntp unicast client poll-retry

This command will reset the poll retry for SNTP unicast clients to its default value.

Format

Mode no sntp unicast client poll-retry

Global Config sntp server

This command configures an SNTP server (a maximum of three). The optional priority can be a value of 1-3, the version a value of 1-4, and the port id a value of 1-65535.

Format

Mode

sntp server <ipaddress|hostname> [<priority> [<version> [<portid>]]]

Global Config no sntp server

This command deletes an server from the configured SNTP servers.

Format

Mode

no sntp server remove <ipaddress|hostname>

Global Config clock timezone

When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the time data received from the server is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) which is the same as Greenwich Mean

Time (GMT). This may not be the time zone in which the switch is located. Use the clock timezone command to configure a time zone specifying the number of hours and optionally the number of minutes difference from UTC. To set the switch clock to UTC, use the no form of the command.

Format

Mode

Default clock timezone zone-name +/-hours-offset [+/-minutes-offset]

Global Config no clock timezone



Zone name: A name to associate with the time zone

Hours-offset: Number of hours difference with UTC

Minutes-offset: Number of minutes difference with UTC no clock timezone

This command sets the switch to UTC time.

Format

Mode no clock timezone

Global Config show sntp

This command is used to display SNTP settings and status.

Format

Mode show sntp

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Last Update

Time

Time of last clock update.

Last Unicast

Attempt Time

Last Attempt

Status

Time of last transmit query (in unicast mode).

Status of the last SNTP request (in unicast mode) or unsolicited message (in broadcast mode).

Broadcast Count Current number of unsolicited broadcast messages that have been received and processed by the SNTP client since last reboot.

Multicast Count Current number of unsolicited multicast messages that have been received and processed by the SNTP client since last reboot.

show sntp client

This command is used to display SNTP client settings.

Format

Mode show sntp client

Privileged EXEC


6-37


Term Definition

Client Supported

Modes

Supported SNTP Modes (Broadcast, Unicast, or Multicast).

SNTP Version The highest SNTP version the client supports.

Port SNTP Client Port.

Client Mode Configured SNTP Client Mode.

show sntp server

This command is used to display SNTP server settings and configured servers.

Format

Mode show sntp server

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Server Host

Address

IP address or hostname of configured SNTP Server.

Server Type Address Type of Server.

Server Stratum Claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server

Reference ID

Server Mode

Reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

SNTP Server mode.

Server Maximum

Entries

Total number of SNTP Servers allowed.

Server Current

Entries

Total number of SNTP configured.

For each configured server:

Term Definition

Host Address IP address or hostname of configured SNTP Server.

Address Type Address Type of configured SNTP server.

Priority IP priority type of the configured server.

Version

Port

SNTP Version number of the server. The protocol version used to query the server in unicast mode.

Server Port Number.



Term

Last Attempt

Time

Last Update

Status

Total Unicast

Requests

Failed Unicast

Requests

Definition

Last server attempt time for the specified server.

Last server attempt status for the server.

Number of requests to the server.

Number of failed requests from server.

show clock

This command is used to display the time information.

Format

Mode show clock [detail]

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Time The time provided by the time source.

Time Source The time source type.

If option detail is specified, these terms are displayed

Time Zone The time zone configured.

Summer Time Indicate if the summer time is enabled.

DHCP Server Commands

This section describes the commands you to configure the DHCP server settings for the switch.

DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol and supports a number of features that facilitate in administration address allocations.



ip dhcp pool

This command configures a DHCP address pool name on a DHCP server and enters DHCP pool configuration mode.

Default

Format

Mode none

ip dhcp pool <name>

Global Config no ip dhcp pool

This command removes the DHCP address pool. The name should be previously configured pool name.

Format

Mode

no ip dhcp pool <name>

Global Config client-identifier

This command specifies the unique identifier for a DHCP client. Unique-identifier is a valid notation in hexadecimal format. In some systems, such as Microsoft DHCP clients, the client identifier is required instead of hardware addresses. The unique-identifier is a concatenation of the media type and the MAC address. For example, the Microsoft client identifier for Ethernet address c819.2488.f177 is 01c8.1924.88f1.77 where 01 represents the Ethernet media type. For more information, refer to the “Address Resolution Protocol Parameters” section of RFC 1700,

Assigned Numbers for a list of media type codes.

Default

Format

Mode none

client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>

DHCP Pool Config no client-identifier

This command deletes the client identifier.

Format

Mode no client-identifier

DHCP Pool Config



client-name

This command specifies the name for a DHCP client. Name is a string consisting of standard

ASCII characters.

Default

Format

Mode none

client-name <name>

DHCP Pool Config no client-name

This command removes the client name.

Format

Mode no client-name

DHCP Pool Config default-router

This command specifies the default router list for a DHCP client. { address1, address2… address8 } are valid IP addresses, each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255. IP address 0.0.0.0 is invalid.

Default

Format

Mode none

default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]

DHCP Pool Config no default-router

This command removes the default router list.

Format

Mode no default-router

DHCP Pool Config



dns-server

This command specifies the IP servers available to a DHCP client. Address parameters are valid IP addresses; each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255. IP address 0.0.0.0 is invalid.

Default

Format

Mode none

dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]

DHCP Pool Config no dns-server

This command removes the DNS Server list.

Format

Mode no dns-server

DHCP Pool Config hardware-address

This command specifies the hardware address of a DHCP client. Hardware-address is the MAC address of the hardware platform of the client consisting of 6 bytes in dotted hexadecimal format.

Type indicates the protocol of the hardware platform. It is 1 for 10 MB Ethernet and 6 for IEEE

802.

Default

Format

Mode ethernet

hardware-address <hardwareaddress> <type>

DHCP Pool Config no hardware-address

This command removes the hardware address of the DHCP client.

Format

Mode no hardware-address

DHCP Pool Config



host

This command specifies the IP address and network mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client.

Address and Mask are valid IP addresses; each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to

255. IP address 0.0.0.0 is invalid. The prefix-length is an integer from 0 to 32.

Default

Format

Mode none

host <address> [{<mask> | <prefix-length>}]

DHCP Pool Config no host

This command removes the IP address of the DHCP client.

Format

Mode no host

DHCP Pool Config lease

This command configures the duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP server to a DHCP client. The overall lease time should be between 1-86400 minutes. If you specify infinite , the lease is set for 60 days. You can also specify a lease duration. Days is an integer from 0 to 59. Hours is an integer from 0 to 23. Minutes is an integer from 0 to 59.

Default

Format

Mode

1 (day)

lease [{<days> [<hours>] [<minutes>] | infinite}]

DHCP Pool Config no lease

This command restores the default value of the lease time for DHCP Server.

Format

Mode no lease

DHCP Pool Config



network (DHCP Pool Config)

Use this command to configure the subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool on the server. Network-number is a valid IP address, made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to

255. IP address 0.0.0.0 is invalid. Mask is the IP subnet mask for the specified address pool. The prefix-length is an integer from 0 to 32.

Default

Format

Mode none

network <networknumber> [{<mask> | <prefixlength>}]

DHCP Pool Config no network

This command removes the subnet number and mask.

Format

Mode no network

DHCP Pool Config bootfile

The command specifies the name of the default boot image for a DHCP client. The <filename> specifies the boot image file.

Format

Mode

bootfile <filename>

DHCP Pool Config no bootfile

This command deletes the boot image name.

Format

Mode no bootfile

DHCP Pool Config



domain-name

This command specifies the domain name for a DHCP client. The <domain> specifies the domain name string of the client.

Default

Format

Mode none

domain-name <domain>

DHCP Pool Config no domain-name

This command removes the domain name.

Format

Mode no domain-name

DHCP Pool Config netbios-name-server

This command configures NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) name servers that are available to DHCP clients.

One IP address is required, although one can specify up to eight addresses in one command line.

Servers are listed in order of preference (address1 is the most preferred server, address2 is the next most preferred server, and so on).

Default

Format

Mode none

netbios-name-server <address> [<address2>...<address8>]

DHCP Pool Config no netbios-name-server

This command removes the NetBIOS name server list.

Format

Mode no netbios-name-server

DHCP Pool Config



netbios-node-type

The command configures the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol (DHCP) clients.type Specifies the NetBIOS node type. Valid types are:

• b-node—Broadcast

• p-node—Peer-to-peer

• m-node—Mixed

• h-node—Hybrid (recommended)

Default

Format

Mode none

netbios-node-type <type>

DHCP Pool Config no netbios-node-type

This command removes the NetBIOS node Type.

Format

Mode no netbios-node-type

DHCP Pool Config next-server

This command configures the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client.The <address> parameter is the IP address of the next server in the boot process, which is typically a TFTP server.

Default

Format

Mode inbound interface helper addresses

next-server <address>

DHCP Pool Config no next-server

This command removes the boot server list.

Format

Mode no next-server

DHCP Pool Config



option

The option command configures DHCP Server options. The < code > parameter specifies the

DHCP option code and ranges from 1-254. The <ascii string> parameter specifies an NVT

ASCII character string. ASCII character strings that contain white space must be delimited by quotation marks. The hex <string> parameter specifies hexadecimal data. In hexadecimal, character strings are two hexadecimal digits. You can separate each byte by a period (for example, a3.4f.22.0c

), colon (for example, a3:4f:22:0c ), or white space (for example, a3 4f 22

0c ).

Default

Format

Mode none

option <code> {ascii string | hex <string1> [<string2>...<string8>] | ip <address1> [<address2>...<address8>]}

DHCP Pool Config no option

This command removes the DHCP Server options. The < code > parameter specifies the DHCP option code.

Format

Mode

no option <code>

DHCP Pool Config ip dhcp excluded-address

This command specifies the IP addresses that a DHCP server should not assign to DHCP clients.

Low-address and high-address are valid IP addresses; each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255. IP address 0.0.0.0

is invalid.

Default

Format

Mode none

ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]

Global Config



no ip dhcp excluded-address

This command removes the excluded IP addresses for a DHCP client. Low-address and highaddress are valid IP addresses; each made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255. IP address 0.0.0.0 is invalid.

Format

Mode

no ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]

Global Config ip dhcp ping packets

Use this command to specify the number, in a range from 2-10, of packets a DHCP server sends to a pool address as part of a ping operation. By default the number of packets sent to a pool address is 2, which is the smallest allowed number when sending packets. Setting the number of packets to

0 disables this command.

Default

Format

Mode

2

ip dhcp ping packets <0,2-10>

Global Config no ip dhcp ping packets

This command prevents the server from pinging pool addresses and sets the number of packets to

0.

Default

Format

Mode

0 no ip dhcp ping packets

Global Config service dhcp

This command enables the DHCP server.

Default

Format

Mode disabled service dhcp

Global Config



no service dhcp

This command disables the DHCP server.

Format

Mode no service dhcp

Global Config ip dhcp bootp automatic

This command enables the allocation of the addresses to the bootp client. The addresses are from the automatic address pool.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip dhcp bootp automatic

Global Config no ip dhcp bootp automatic

This command disables the allocation of the addresses to the bootp client. The address are from the automatic address pool.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp bootp automatic

Global Config ip dhcp conflict logging

This command enables conflict logging on DHCP server.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip dhcp conflict logging

Global Config



no ip dhcp conflict logging

This command disables conflict logging on DHCP server.

Format

Mode no ip dhcp conflict logging

Global Config clear ip dhcp binding

This command deletes an automatic address binding from the DHCP server database. If “*” is specified, the bindings corresponding to all the addresses are deleted. <address> is a valid IP address made up of four decimal bytes ranging from 0 to 255. IP address 0.0.0.0

is invalid.

Format

Mode

clear ip dhcp binding {<address> | *}

Privileged EXEC clear ip dhcp server statistics

This command clears DHCP server statistics counters.

Format

Mode clear ip dhcp server statistics

Privileged EXEC clear ip dhcp conflict

The command is used to clear an address conflict from the DHCP Server database. The server detects conflicts using a ping. DHCP server clears all conflicts If the asterisk (*) character is used as the address parameter.

Default

Format

Mode none

clear ip dhcp conflict {<address> | *}

Privileged EXEC



show ip dhcp binding

This command displays address bindings for the specific IP address on the DHCP server. If no IP address is specified, the bindings corresponding to all the addresses are displayed.

Format

Modes

show ip dhcp binding [<address>]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

IP address The IP address of the client.

Hardware

Address

The MAC Address or the client identifier.

Lease expiration The lease expiration time of the IP address assigned to the client.

Type The manner in which IP address was assigned to the client. show ip dhcp global configuration

This command displays address bindings for the specific IP address on the DHCP server. If no IP address is specified, the bindings corresponding to all the addresses are displayed.

Format

Modes show ip dhcp global configuration

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Service DHCP The field to display the status of dhcp protocol.

Number of Ping

Packets

The maximum number of Ping Packets that will be sent to verify that an ip address id not already assigned.

Conflict Logging Shows whether conflict logging is enabled or disabled.

BootP Automatic Shows whether BootP for dynamic pools is enabled or disabled.



show ip dhcp pool configuration

This command displays pool configuration. If all is specified, configuration for all the pools is displayed.

Format

Modes

show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | all}

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Field Definition

Pool Name

Pool Type

Lease Time

DNS Servers

The name of the configured pool.

The pool type.

The lease expiration time of the IP address assigned to the client.

The list of DNS servers available to the DHCP client .

Default Routers The list of the default routers available to the DHCP client

The following additional field is displayed for Dynamic pool type:

Field

Network

Definition

The network number and the mask for the DHCP address pool.

The following additional fields are displayed for Manual pool type:

Field Definition

Client Name The name of a DHCP client.

Client Identifier The unique identifier of a DHCP client.

The hardware address of a DHCP client. Hardware

Address

Hardware

Address Type

The protocol of the hardware platform.

Host The IP address and the mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client.


6-52


show ip dhcp server statistics

This command displays DHCP server statistics.

Format

Modes show ip dhcp server statistics

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Field

Automatic

Bindings

Expired

Bindings

Malformed

Bindings

Definition

The number of IP addresses that have been automatically mapped to the MAC addresses of hosts that are found in the DHCP database.

The number of expired leases.

The number of truncated or corrupted messages that were received by the DHCP server.

Message Received:

Message Definition

DHCP

DISCOVER

The number of DHCPDISCOVER messages the server has received.

DHCP REQUEST The number of DHCPREQUEST messages the server has received.

DHCP DECLINE The number of DHCPDECLINE messages the server has received.

DHCP RELEASE The number of DHCPRELEASE messages the server has received.

DHCP INFORM The number of DHCPINFORM messages the server has received.

Message Sent:

Message Definition

DHCP OFFER The number of DHCPOFFER messages the server sent.

DHCP ACK

DHCP NACK

The number of DHCPACK messages the server sent.

The number of DHCPNACK messages the server sent.



show ip dhcp conflict

This command displays address conflicts logged by the DHCP Server. If no IP address is specified, all the conflicting addresses are displayed.

Format

Modes

show ip dhcp conflict [<ip-address>]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

IP address

Detection

Method

The IP address of the host as recorded on the DHCP server.

The manner in which the IP address of the hosts were found on the DHCP

Server .

Detection time The time when the conflict was found.

DNS Client Commands

These commands are used in the Domain Name System (DNS), an Internet directory service. DNS is how domain names are translated into IP addresses. When enabled, the DNS client provides a hostname lookup service to other components.

ip domain lookup

Use this command to enable the DNS client.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip domain lookup

Global Config no ip domain lookup

Use this command to disable the DNS client.

Format

Mode no ip domain lookup

Global Config



ip domain name

Use this command to define a default domain name that the software uses to complete unqualified host names (names with a domain name).

By default, no default domain name is configured in the system. < name > may not be longer than 255 characters and should not include an initial period.

This < name > should be used only when the default domain name list, configured using the ip domain list command, is empty.

Default

Format

Mode none

ip domain name <name>

Global Config

Example: The CLI command ip domain name yahoo.com

will configure yahoo.com as a default domain name. For an unqualified hostname xxx, a DNS query is made to find the IP address corresponding to xxx.yahoo.com.

no ip domain name

Use this command to remove the default domain name configured using the ip domain name command.

Format

Mode no ip domain name

Global Config ip domain list

Use this command to define a list of default domain names to complete unqualified names. By default, the list is empty. Each name must be no more than 256 characters, and should not include an initial period. The default domain name, configured using the ip domain name command, is used only when the default domain name list is empty. A maximum of 32 names can be entered in to this list.

Default

Format

Mode none

ip domain list <name>

Global Config



no ip domain list

Use this command to delete a name from a list.

Format

Mode

no ip domain list <name>

Global Config ip name server

Use this command to configure the available name servers. Up to eight servers can be defined in one command or by using multiple commands. The parameter <server-address> is a valid

IPv4 or IPv6 address of the server. The preference of the servers is determined by the order they were entered.

Format

Mode

ip name-server <server-address1> [server-address2...server-address8]

Global Config no ip name server

Use this command to remove a name server.

Format

Mode

no ip name-server [server-address1...server-address8]

Global Config ip host

Use this command to define static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache. < name > is host name. <i p address > is the IP address of the host.

Default

Format

Mode none

ip host <name> <ipaddress>

Global Config



no ip host

Use this command to remove the name-to-address mapping.

Format

Mode

no ip host <name>

Global Config ipv6 host

Use this command to define static host name-to-IPv6 address mapping in the host cache. < name > is host name. <v6 address > is the IPv6 address of the host.

Default

Format

Mode none

ipv6 host <name> <v6 address>

Global Config no ipv6 host

Use this command to remove the static host name-to-IPv6 address mapping in the host cache.

Format

Mode

no ipv6 host <name>

Global Config ip domain retry

Use this command to specify the number of times to retry sending Domain Name System (DNS) queries. The parameter < number > indicates the number of times to retry sending a DNS query to the DNS server. This number ranges from 0 to 100.

Default

Format

Mode

2

ip domain retry <number>

Global Config



no ip domain retry

Use this command to return to the default.

Format

Mode

no ip domain retry <number>

Global Config ip domain timeout

Use this command to specify the amount of time to wait for a response to a DNS query. The parameter < seconds > specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for a response to a DNS query.

< seconds > ranges from 0 to 3600.

Default

Format

Mode

3

ip domain timeout <seconds>

Global Config no ip domain timeout

Use this command to return to the default setting.

Format

Mode

no ip domain timeout <seconds>

Global Config clear host

Use this command to delete entries from the host name-to-address cache. This command clears the entries from the DNS cache maintained by the software. This command clears both IPv4 and IPv6 entries.

Format

Mode

clear host {<name> | all}

Privileged EXEC

Field name all

Utility Commands

Description

A particular host entry to remove. < name > ranges from 1-255 characters.

Removes all entries.

v1.0, July 2009

6-58


show hosts

Use this command to display the default domain name, a list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses < ame > ranges from 1-255 characters. This command displays both IPv4 and IPv6 entries.

..

Format

Mode

show hosts [name]

User EXEC


Host Name Domain host name.

Default Domain Default domain name.

Default Domain

List

Default domain list.

Domain Name

Lookup

Number of

Retries

DNS client enabled/disabled.

Number of time to retry sending Domain Name System (DNS) queries.

Retry Timeout

Period

Amount of time to wait for a response to a DNS query.

Name Servers Configured name servers.


<Switch> show hosts

Host name......................... Device

Default domain.................... gm.com

Default domain list............... yahoo.com, Stanford.edu, rediff.com

Domain Name lookup................ Enabled

Number of retries................. 5

Retry timeout period.............. 1500

Name servers (Preference order)... 176.16.1.18 176.16.1.19

Configured host name-to-address mapping:

Host Addresses

------------------------------ -----------------------------accounting.gm.com 176.16.8.8

Host Total Elapsed Type Addresses

--------------- -------- ------ -------- --------------


6-59

www.stanford.edu 72 3 IP

Packet Capture Commands


171.64.14.203

Packet capture commands assist in troubleshooting protocol-related problems with the management CPU. The packets to and from the management CPU can be captured in an internally allocated buffer area for export to a PC host for protocol analysis. Public domain packet analysis tools like Ethereal can be used to decode and review the packets in detail. Capturing can be performed in a variety of modes, either transmit-side only, receive-side only, or both. The number of packets captured will depend on the size of the captured packets.

capture transmit packet

This command enables the capturing of transmit packets.

Format

Mode capture transmit packet

Global Config no capture transmit packet

This command disables the capturing of transmit packets.

Format

Mode no capture transmit packet

Global Config capture receive packet

This command enables the capturing of receive packets.

Format

Mode capture receive packet

Global Config



no capture receive packet

This command disables the capturing of receive packets.

Format

Mode no capture receive packet

Global Config capture all packets

This command enables the capturing of receive packets.

Format

Mode capture all packet

Global Config no capture all packets

This command disables the capturing of all packets.

Format

Mode no capture all packets

Global Config capture wrap

This command enables the Buffer Wrapping configuration. Once the capture buffer is full, writes to the buffer will wrap around to allow continuous packet caputure.

Format

Mode

Default capture wrap

Global Config

Enabled show capture packets

This command displays packets being captured from the buffer. The output of the show command can be redirected to a text file. The resultant text file can be fed to the text2pcap utility or the

Ethereal public domain packet analyzer, which can then be translated to a cap file.

Format show capture packets



Mode

Default

Global Config

Enabled

Serviceability Packet Tracing Commands

These commands improve the capability of network engineers to diagnose conditions affecting their managed switch product.

Caution! The output of “debug” commands can be long and may adversely affect system performance.

debug arp

Use this command to enable ARP debug protocol messages.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug arp

Privileged EXEC no debug arp

Use this command to disable ARP debug protocol messages.

Format

Mode no debug arp

Privileged EXEC debug auto-voip

Use this command to enable Auto VOIP debug messages. Use the optional parameters to trace

H323, SCCP, or SIP packets respectively.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug auto-voip [H323|SCCP|SIP]

Privileged EXEC



no debug auto-voip

Use this command to disable Auto VOIP debug messages.

Format

Mode no debug auto-voip

Privileged EXEC debug clear

This command disables all previously enabled “debug” traces.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug clear

Privileged EXEC debug console

This command enables the display of “debug” trace output on the login session in which it is executed. Debug console display must be enabled in order to view any trace output. The output of debug trace commands will appear on all login sessions for which debug console has been enabled. The configuration of this command remains in effect for the life of the login session. The effect of this command is not persistent across resets.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug console

Privileged EXEC no debug console

This command disables the display of “debug” trace output on the login session in which it is executed.

Format

Mode no debug console

Privileged EXEC


debug dot1x packet

Use this command to enable dot1x packet debug trace.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug dot1x

Privileged EXEC


no debug dot1x packet

Use this command to disable dot1x packet debug trace.

Format

Mode no debug dot1x

Privileged EXEC debug igmpsnooping packet

This command enables tracing of IGMP Snooping packets received and transmitted by the switch.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug igmpsnooping packet

Privileged EXEC no debug igmpsnooping packet

This command disables tracing of IGMP Snooping packets.

Format

Mode no debug igmpsnooping packet

Privileged EXEC


6-64


debug igmpsnooping packet transmit

This command enables tracing of IGMP Snooping packets transmitted by the switch. Snooping should be enabled on the device and the interface in order to monitor packets for a particular interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug igmpsnooping packet transmit

Privileged EXEC

A sample output of the trace message is shown below.

<15> JAN 01 02:45:06 192.168.17.29-1 IGMPSNOOP[185429992]: igmp_snooping_debug.c(116) 908 % Pkt TX - Intf: 1/0/20(20), Vlan_Id:1 Src_Mac:

00:03:0e:00:00:00 Dest_Mac: 01:00:5e:00:00:01 Src_IP: 9.1.1.1 Dest_IP: 225.0.0.1

Type: V2_Membership_Report Group: 225.0.0.1

The following parameters are displayed in the trace message:

Parameter

TX

Intf

Src_Mac

Dest_Mac

Src_IP

Dest_IP

Type

Group

Definition

A packet transmitted by the device.

The interface that the packet went out on. Format used is unit/slot/port (internal interface number). Unit is always shown as 1 for interfaces on a non-stacking device.

Source MAC address of the packet.

Destination multicast MAC address of the packet.

The source IP address in the IP header in the packet.

The destination multicast IP address in the packet.

The type of IGMP packet. Type can be one of the following:

• Membership Query – IGMP Membership Query

• V1_Membership_Report – IGMP Version 1 Membership Report



• V2_Leave_Group – IGMP Version 2 Leave Group

Multicast group address in the IGMP header.



no debug igmpsnooping transmit

This command disables tracing of transmitted IGMP snooping packets.

Format

Mode no debug igmpsnooping transmit

Privileged EXEC debug igmpsnooping packet receive

This command enables tracing of IGMP Snooping packets received by the switch. Snooping should be enabled on the device and the interface in order to monitor packets for a particular interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug igmpsnooping packet receive

Privileged EXEC


<15> JAN 01 02:45:06 192.168.17.29-1 IGMPSNOOP[185429992]: igmp_snooping_debug.c(116) 908 % Pkt RX - Intf: 1/0/20(20), Vlan_Id:1 Src_Mac:

00:03:0e:00:00:10 Dest_Mac: 01:00:5e:00:00:05 Src_IP: 11.1.1.1 Dest_IP: 225.0.0.5

Type: Membership_Query Group: 225.0.0.5


Parameter

RX

Intf

Src_Mac

Dest_Mac

Src_IP

Dest_IP

Type

Definition

A packet received by the device.

The interface that the packet went out on. Format used is unit/slot/port (internal interface number). Unit is always shown as 1 for interfaces on a non-stacking device.


Destination multicast MAC address of the packet.

The source IP address in the ip header in the packet.

The destination multicast ip address in the packet.

The type of IGMP packet. Type can be one of the following:

• Membership_Query – IGMP Membership Query




• V2_Leave_Group – IGMP Version 2 Leave Group


Parameter

Group


Definition

Multicast group address in the IGMP header.

no debug igmpsnooping receive

This command disables tracing of received IGMP Snooping packets.

Format

Mode no debug igmpsnooping receive

Privileged EXEC debug ip acl

Use this command to enable debug of IP Protocol packets matching the ACL criteria.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ip acl <acl Number>

Privileged EXEC no debug ip acl

Use this command to disable debug of IP Protocol packets matching the ACL criteria.

Format

Mode no debug ip acl < acl Number >

Privileged EXEC debug ip dvmrp packet

Use this command to trace DVMRP packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received DVMRP packets and transmit traces only transmitted DVMRP packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all DVMRP packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ip dvmrp packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC


6-67


no debug ip dvmrp packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of DVMRP packet reception and transmission.

Format

Mode no debug ip dvmrp packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug ip igmp packet

Use this command to trace IGMP packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received

IGMP packets and transmit traces only transmitted IGMP packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all IGMP packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ip igmp packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ip igmp packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of IGMP packet reception and transmission.

Format

Mode no debug ip igmp packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug ip mcache packet

Use this command for tracing MDATA packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received data packets and transmit traces only transmitted data packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all data packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default disabled


Format

Mode


debug ip mcache packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ip mcache packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of MDATA packet reception and transmission.

Format

Mode no debug ip mcache packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug ip pimdm packet

Use this command to trace PIMDM packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received PIMDM packets and transmit traces only transmitted PIMDM packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMDM packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ip pimdm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ip pimdm packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of PIMDM packet reception and transmission.

Format

Mode no debug ip pimdm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC


6-69


debug ip pimsm packet

Use this command to trace PIMSM packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received PIMSM packets and transmit traces only transmitted PIMSM packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMSM packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ip pimsm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ip pimsm packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of PIMSM packet reception and transmission.

Format

Mode no debug ip pimsm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug ip vrrp

Use this command to enable VRRP debug protocol messages.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ip vrrp

Privileged EXEC no debug ip vrrp

Use this command to disable VRRP debug protocol messages.

Format

Mode no debug ip vrrp

Privileged EXEC



debug ipv6 mcache packet

Use this command for tracing MDATAv6 packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received data packets and transmit traces only transmitted data packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all data packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ipv6 mcache packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ipv6 mcache packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of MDATAv6 packet reception and transmission.

Format

Mode no debug ipv6 mcache packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug ipv6 mld packet

Use this command to trace MLDv6 packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received MLDv6 packets and transmit traces only transmitted MLDv6 packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all MLDv6 packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ipv6 mld packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ipv6 mld packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of MLDv6 packet reception and transmission.



Format

Mode no debug ipv6 mld packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug ipv6 pimdm packet

Use this command to trace PIMDMv6 packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received PIMDMv6 packets and transmit traces only transmitted PIMDMv6 packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMDMv6 packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ipv6 pimdm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ipv6 pimdm packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of PIMDMv6 packet reception and transmission. debug ipv6 pimsm packet

Use this command to trace PIMSMv6 packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received PIMSMv6 packets and transmit traces only transmitted PIMSMv6 packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMSMv6 packet traces are dumped. Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ipv6 pimsm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC no debug ipv6 pimsm packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of PIMSMv6 packet reception and transmission.



Format

Mode no debug ipv6 pimsm packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC debug lacp packet

This command enables tracing of LACP packets received and transmitted by the switch.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug lacp packet

Privileged EXEC


<15> JAN 01 14:04:51 10.254.24.31-1 DOT3AD[183697744]: dot3ad_debug.c(385) 58 %%

Pkt TX - Intf: 1/0/1(1), Type: LACP, Sys: 00:11:88:14:62:e1, State: 0x47, Key:

0x36 no debug lacp packet

This command disables tracing of LACP packets.

Format

Mode no debug lacp packet

Privileged EXEC debug mldsnooping packet

Use this command to trace MLD snooping packet reception and transmission. receive traces only received MLD snooping packets and transmit traces only transmitted MLD snooping packets.

When neither keyword is used in the command, then all MLD snooping packet traces are dumped.

Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug mldsnooping packet [receive|transmit]

Privileged EXEC



no debug mldsnooping packet

Use this command to disable debug tracing of MLD snooping packet reception and transmission.

debug ospf packet

This command enables tracing of OSPF packets received and transmitted by the switch.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ospf packet

Privileged EXEC

Sample outputs of the trace messages are shown below.

<15> JAN 02 11:03:31 10.50.50.1-2 OSPF[46300472]: ospf_debug.c(297) 25430 % Pkt

RX - Intf:2/0/48 Src

Ip:192.168.50.2 DestIp:224.0.0.5 AreaId:0.0.0.0 Type:HELLO NetMask:255.255.255.0

DesigRouter:0.0.0.0 Backup:0.0.0.0


TX - Intf:2/0/48 Src

Ip:10.50.50.1 DestIp:192.168.50.2 AreaId:0.0.0.0 Type:DB_DSCR Mtu:1500 Options:E

Flags: I/M/MS Seq:126166


RX - Intf:2/0/48 Src

Ip:192.168.50.2 DestIp:192.168.50.1 AreaId:0.0.0.0 Type:LS_REQ Length: 1500



Ip:10.50.50.1 DestIp:192.168.50.2 AreaId:0.0.0.0 Type:LS_UPD Length: 1500



Ip:10.50.50.1 DestIp:224.0.0.6 AreaId:0.0.0.0 Type:LS_ACK Length: 1500


Parameter

TX/RX

Definition

TX refers to a packet transmitted by the device. RX refers to packets received by the device.



Parameter

Intf

SrcIp

DestIp

AreaId

Type

Definition

The interface that the packet came in or went out on. Format used is unit/slot/port (internal interface number).

The source IP address in the IP header of the packet.

The destination IP address in the IP header of the packet.

The area ID in the OSPF header of the packet.

Could be one of the following:

HELLO – Hello packet

DB_DSCR – Database descriptor

LS_REQ – LS Request

LS_UPD – LS Update

LS_ACK – LS Acknowledge

The remaining fields in the trace are specific to the type of OSPF Packet.

HELLO packet field definitions:

Parameter Definition

Netmask The netmask in the hello packet.

DesignRouter Designated Router IP address.

Backup Backup router IP address.

DB_DSCR packet field definitions:

Field

MTU

Options

Flags

Definition

MTU

Options in the OSPF packet.

Could be one or more of the following:

• I – Init

• M – More

• MS – Master/Slave

Sequence Number of the DD packet.

Seq

LS_REQ packet field definitions.

Field

Length

Utility Commands

Definition

Length of packet v1.0, July 2009

6-75


LS_UPD packet field definitions.

Field

Length

Definition

Length of packet

LS_ACK packet field definitions.

Field

Length

Definition

Length of packet no debug ospf packet

This command disables tracing of OSPF packets.

Format

Mode no debug ospf packet

Privileged EXEC debug ospfv3 packet

Use this command to enable OSPFv3 packet debug trace.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ospfv3 packet

Privileged EXEC no debug ospfv3 packet

Use this command to disable tracing of OSPFv3 packets.

Format

Mode no debug ospfv3 packet

Privileged EXEC



debug ping packet

This command enables tracing of ICMP echo requests and responses. The command traces pings on the network port/ serviceport for switching packages. For routing packages, pings are traced on the routing ports as well.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug ping packet

Privileged EXEC


<15> JAN 01 00:21:22 192.168.17.29-1 SIM[181040176]: sim_debug.c(128) 20 % Pkt TX

- Intf: 1/0/1(1),

SRC_IP:10.50.50.2, DEST_IP:10.50.50.1, Type:ECHO_REQUEST

<15> JAN 01 00:21:22 192.168.17.29-1 SIM[182813968]: sim_debug.c(82) 21 % Pkt RX

- Intf: 1/0/1(1), S

RC_IP:10.50.50.1, DEST_IP:10.50.50.2, Type:ECHO_REPLY


Parameter

TX/RX

Intf

SRC_IP

DEST_IP

Type

Definition


The interface that the packet came in or went out on. Format used is unit/slot/port (internal interface number). Unit is always shown as 1 for interfaces on a non-stacking device.

The source IP address in the IP header in the packet.

The destination IP address in the IP header in the packet.

Type determines whether or not the ICMP message is a REQUEST or a RESPONSE.

no debug ping packet

This command disables tracing of ICMP echo requests and responses.

Format

Mode no debug ping packet

Privileged EXEC



debug rip packet

This command turns on tracing of RIP requests and responses. This command takes no options.

The output is directed to the log file.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug rip packet

Privileged EXEC


<15> JAN 01 00:35:15 192.168.17.29-1 RIP[181783160]: rip_map_debug.c(96) 775 %

Pkt RX on Intf: 1/0/1(1), Src_IP:43.1.1.1 Dest_IP:43.1.1.2

Rip_Version: RIPv2 Packet_Type:RIP_RESPONSE

ROUTE 1): Network: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Metric: 1




ROUTE 5): Network:42.0.0.0 Mask:255.0.0.0 Metric:1

Another 6 routes present in packet not displayed.


Parameter

TX/RX

Intf

Src_IP

Dest_IP

Rip_Version

Packet_Type

Routes

Number of routes not printed

Definition


The interface that the packet came in or went out on. Format used is unit/slot/port (internal interface number). Unit is always shown as 1 for interfaces on a non-stacking device.

The source IP address in the IP header of the packet.

The destination IP address in the IP header of the packet.

RIP version used <RIPv1 or RIPv2>.

Type of RIP packet. <RIP_REQUEST or RIP_RESPONSE>.

Up to 5 routes in the packet are displayed in the following format:

Network: <a.b.c.d> Mask <a.b.c.d> Next_Hop <a.b.c.d> Metric <a>

The next hop is only displayed if it is different from 0.0.0.0

.

For RIPv1 packets, Mask is always 0.0.0.0

.

Only the first five routes present in the packet are included in the trace. There is another notification of the number of additional routes present in the packet that were not included in the trace.



no debug rip packet

This command disables tracing of RIP requests and responses.

Format

Mode no debug rip packet

Privileged EXEC debug sflow packet

Use this command to enable sFlow debug packet trace.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug sflow packet

Privileged EXEC no debug sflow packet

Use this command to disable sFlow debug packet trace.

Format

Mode no debug sflow packet

Privileged EXEC debug spanning-tree bpdu

This command enables tracing of spanning tree BPDUs received and transmitted by the switch.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug spanning-tree bpdu

Privileged EXEC


6-79


no debug spanning-tree bpdu

This command disables tracing of spanning tree BPDUs.

Format

Mode no debug spanning-tree bpdu

Privileged EXEC debug spanning-tree bpdu receive

This command enables tracing of spanning tree BPDUs received by the switch. Spanning tree should be enabled on the device and on the interface in order to monitor packets for a particular interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug spanning-tree bpdu receive

Privileged EXEC


<15> JAN 01 01:02:04 192.168.17.29-1 DOT1S[191096896]: dot1s_debug.c(1249) 101 %

Pkt RX - Intf: 1/0/9(9), Source_Mac: 00:11:88:4e:c2:10 Version: 3, Root Mac:

00:11:88:4e:c2:00, Root Priority: 0x8000 Path Cost: 0


Parameter

RX

Intf

Source_Mac

Version

Root_Mac

Root_Priority

Path_Cost

Definition

A packet received by the device.

The interface that the packet came in on. Format used is unit/port/slot (internal interface number). Unit is always shown as 1 for interfaces on a non-stacking device.


Spanning tree protocol version (0-3). 0 refers to STP, 2 RSTP and 3 MSTP.

MAC address of the CIST root bridge.

Priority of the CIST root bridge. The value is between 0 and 61440. It is displayed in hex in multiples of 4096.

External root path cost component of the BPDU.



no debug spanning-tree bpdu receive

This command disables tracing of received spanning tree BPDUs.

Format

Mode no debug spanning-tree bpdu receive

Privileged EXEC debug spanning-tree bpdu transmit

This command enables tracing of spanning tree BPDUs transmitted by the switch. Spanning tree should be enabled on the device and on the interface in order to monitor packets on a particular interface.

Default

Format

Mode disabled debug spanning-tree bpdu transmit

Privileged EXEC


<15> JAN 01 01:02:04 192.168.17.29-1 DOT1S[191096896]: dot1s_debug.c(1249) 101 %

Pkt TX - Intf: 1/0/7(7), Source_Mac: 00:11:88:4e:c2:00 Version: 3, Root_Mac:

00:11:88:4e:c2:00, Root_Priority: 0x8000 Path_Cost: 0


Parameter

TX

Intf

Source_Mac

Version

Root_Mac

Root_Priority

Path_Cost

Definition

A packet transmitted by the device.

The interface that the packet went out on. Format used is unit/port/slot (internal interface number). Unit is always shown as 1 for interfaces on a non-stacking device.


Spanning tree protocol version (0-3). 0 refers to STP, 2 RSTP and 3 MSTP.

MAC address of the CIST root bridge.

Priority of the CIST root bridge. The value is between 0 and 61440. It is displayed in hex in multiples of 4096.

External root path cost component of the BPDU.



no debug spanning-tree bpdu transmit

This command disables tracing of transmitted spanning tree BPDUs.

Format

Mode no debug spanning-tree bpdu transmit

Privileged EXEC

Cable Test Command

The cable test feature enables you to determine the cable connection status on a selected port.

Note: The cable test feature is supported only for copper cable. It is not supported for optical fiber cable. If the port has an active link while the cable test is run, the link can go down for the duration of the test.

cablestatus

This command returns the status of the specified port.

Format

Mode

cablestatus <unit/slot/port>

Privileged EXEC

Field

Cable Status

Description

One of the following statuses is returned:

• Normal : The cable is working correctly.

• Open : The cable is disconnected or there is a faulty connector.

• Short : There is an electrical short in the cable.

• Cable Test Failed : The cable status could not be determined. The cable may in fact be working.



Field

Cable Length

Description

If this feature is supported by the PHY for the current link speed, the cable length is displayed as a range between the shortest estimated length and the longest estimated length. Note that if the link is down and a cable is attached to a 10/100 Ethernet adapter, then the cable status may display as Open or Short because some Ethernet adapters leave unused wire pairs unterminated or grounded. Unknown is displayed if the cable length could not be determined.

sFlow Commands

sFlow ® is the standard for monitoring high-speed switched and routed networks. sFlow technology is built into network equipment and gives complete visibility into network activity, enabling effective management and control of network resources. sflow receiver

Use this command to configure the sFlow collector parameters (owner string, receiver timeout, max datagram size, IP address, and port).

Format

Mode sflow receiver < rcvr_idx > owner < owner-string > timeout < rcvr_timeout > max datagram < size > ip/ipv6 < ip > port < port >

Global Config


Receiver Owner The identity string for the receiver, the entity making use of this sFlowRcvrTable entry. The range is 127 characters. The default is a null string. The empty string indicates that the entry is currently unclaimed and the receiver configuration is reset to the default values.

An entity wishing to claim an sFlowRcvrTable entry must ensure that the entry is unclaimed before trying to claim it. The entry is claimed by setting the owner string to a non-null value. The entry must be claimed before assigning a receiver to a sampler or poller.

Receiver

Timeout

The time, in seconds, remaining before the sampler or poller is released and stops sending samples to receiver. A management entity wanting to maintain control of the sampler is responsible for setting a new value before the old one expires. The allowed range is 0-4294967295 seconds. The default is zero (0).

Receiver Max

Datagram Size

The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. The management entity should set this value to avoid fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams.

The allowed range is 200 to 9116). The default is 1400.




Receiver IP The sFlow receiver IP address. If set to 0.0.0.0, no sFlow datagrams will be sent. The default is 0.0.0.0.

Receiver Port The destination Layer4 UDP port for sFlow datagrams. The range is 1-65535. The default is 6343.

no sflow receiver

Use this command to set the sFlow collector parameters back to the defaults.

Format

Mode no sflow receiver < indx > {ip < ip-address > | maxdatagram < size > | owner

< string > timeout < interval > | port < 14-port >}

Global Config sflow sampler

A data source configured to collect flow samples is called a poller. Use this command to configure a new sFlow sampler instance for this data source if < rcvr_idx > is valid.

Format

Mode sflow sampler {< rcvr-indx > | rate < sampling-rate > | maxheadersize

< size >}

Interface Config


Receiver Index The sFlow Receiver for this sFlow sampler to which flow samples are to be sent. A value of zero (0) means that no receiver is configured, no packets will be sampled. Only active receivers can be set. If a receiver expires, then all samplers associated with the receiver will also expire. Possible values are 1-8. The default is 0.

Maxheadersize The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from the sampler packet. The range is 20-256. The default is 128. When set to zero (0), all the sampler parameters are set to their corresponding default value.

Sampling Rate The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling from this source. A sampling rate of 1 counts all packets. A value of zero (0) disables sampling. A value of N means that out of N incoming packets, 1 packet will be sampled. The range is 1024-65536 and 0. The default is 0.



no sflow sampler

Use this command to reset the sFlow sampler instance to the default settings.

Format

Mode no sflow sampler {< rcvr-indx > | rate < sampling-rate > | maxheadersize

< size >}

Interface Config sflow poller

A data source configured to collect counter samples is called a poller. Use this command to enable a new sFlow poller instance for this data source if < rcvr_idx > is valid.

Format

Mode sflow poller {<rcvr-indx> | interval <poll-interval>}

Interface Config


Receiver Index Enter the sFlow Receiver associated with the sampler/poller. A value of zero (0) means that no receiver is configured. The range is 1-8. The default is 0.

Poll Interval Enter the sFlow instance polling interval. A poll interval of zero (0) disables counter sampling. When set to zero (0), all the poller parameters are set to their corresponding default value. The range is 0-86400. The default is 0. A value of N means once in N seconds a counter sample is generated.

no sflow poller

Use this command to reset the sFlow poller instance to the default settings.

Format

Mode no sflow poller {<rcvr-indx> | interval <poll-interval>}

Interface Config



show sflow agent

The sFlow agent collects time-based sampling of network interface statistics and flow-based samples. These are sent to the configured sFlow receivers. Use this command to display the sFlow agent information.

Format

Mode show sflow agent

Privileged EXEC

Field Description sFlow Version Uniquely identifies the version and implementation of this MIB. The version string must have the following structure: MIB Version; Organization; Software Revision where:

• MIB Version: ‘1.3’, the version of this MIB.

• Organization: Netgear.

• Revision: 1.0

IP Address The IP address associated with this agent.


(switch) #show sflow agent sFlow Version.................................. 1.3;Netgear;1.0

IP Address..................................... 10.131.12.66

show sflow pollers

Use this command to display the sFlow polling instances created on the switch. Use “-” for range.

Format

Mode show sflow pollers

Privileged EXEC


Poller Data

Source

The sFlowDataSource (slot/port) for this sFlow sampler. This agent will support Physical ports only.

Receiver Index The sFlowReceiver associated with this sFlow counter poller.




Poller Interval The number of seconds between successive samples of the counters associated with this data source. show sflow receivers

Use this command to display configuration information related to the sFlow receivers.

Format

Mode show sflow receivers [<index>]

Privileged EXEC


Receiver Index The sFlow Receiver associated with the sampler/poller.

Owner String The identity string for receiver, the entity making use of this sFlowRcvrTable entry.

Time Out The time (in seconds) remaining before the receiver is released and stops sending samples to sFlow receiver.

The maximum number of bytes that can be sent in a single sFlow datagram.

Max Datagram

Size

Port The destination Layer4 UDP port for sFlow datagrams.

IP Address

Datagram

Version

The sFlow receiver IP address.

Address Type The sFlow receiver IP address type. For an IPv4 address, the value is 1 and for an IPv6 address, the value is 2.

The sFlow protocol version to be used while sending samples to sFlow receiver.


(switch) #show sflow receivers 1

Receiver Index................................. 1

Owner String...................................

Time out....................................... 0

IP Address:.................................... 0.0.0.0

Address Type................................... 1

Port........................................... 6343

Datagram Version............................... 5

Maximum Datagram Size.......................... 1400



show sflow samplers

Use this command to display the sFlow sampling instances created on the switch.

Format

Mode show sflow samplers

Privileged EXEC


Sampler Data

Source

The sFlowDataSource (slot/port) for this sFlow sampler. This agent will support Physical ports only.

Receiver Index The sFlowReceiver configured for this sFlow sampler.

Packet Sampling

Rate

The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling from this source.

Max Header Size The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to form a flow sample.


6-88

Chapter 7

Management Commands

This chapter describes the management commands available in the managed switch CLI.

The Management Commands chapter contains the following sections:

• “Configuring the Switch Management CPU” on page 7-2 .

• “Console Port Access Commands” on page 7-8 .

• “Telnet Commands” on page 7-11 .

• “Secure Shell (SSH) Commands” on page 7-16 .

• “Management Security Commands” on page 7-19 .

• “Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) Commands” on page 7-20 .

• “Access Commands” on page 7-28 .

• “User Account Commands” on page 7-29 .

• “SNMP Commands” on page 7-40 .

• “RADIUS Commands” on page 7-52 .

• “TACACS+ Commands” on page 7-67 .

• “Configuration Scripting Commands” on page 7-71 .

• “Pre-login Banner and System Prompt Commands” on page 7-73 .





7-1 v1.0, July 2009


Configuring the Switch Management CPU

To manage the switch via the web GUI or telnet, an IP address needs to be assigned to the switch management CPU. Whereas there are CLI commands that can be used to do this, ezconfig simplifies the task. The tool is applicable to all NETGEAR 7000-series managed switches, and allows you to configure the following parameters:

1. The administrator’s user password and administrator-enable password

2. Management CPU IP address and network mask

3. System name and location information

The tool is interactive and uses questions to guide you through the steps required to perform its task. At the end of the session, it will ask you if you want to save the changed information. To see exactly what has been changed by ezconfig at the end of the session, use the show running-config command.

To perform any switch configuration other than the items listed above, use other CLI commands or the Web GUI.

ezconfig

This command sets the IP address, subnet mask and gateway of the device. The IP address and the gateway must be on the same subnet.

Format

Mode ezconfig

Privileged EXEC

Management Commands v1.0, July 2009

7-2


The following is an example of an ezconfig session.

NETGEAR EZ Configuration Utility

--------------------------------

Hello and Welcome!

This utility will walk you thru assigning the IP address for the switch management CPU. It will allow you to save the changes at the end. After the session, simply use the newly assigned IP address to access the Web

GUI using any public domain Web browser.

Admin password not defined. Do you want to change the password?

(Y/N/Q) y

Enter new password:********

Confirm new password:********

Password Changed!

The 'enable' password required for switch configuration via the command line interface is currently not configured. Do you wish to change it (Y/N/

Q)? y

Enter new password:********

Confirm new password:********

Password Changed!

Assigning an IP address to your switch management

Current IP Address Configuration

--------------------------------

IP address: 0.0.0.0

Subnet mask: 0.0.0.0

Gateway address: 0.0.0.0

Would you like to assign an IP address now (Y/N/Q)? y

IP Address: 10.10.10.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Gateway address: 10.10.10.10

Do you want to assign switch name and location information (Y/N/Q)? y

System Name: testunit1

System Location: testlab

System Contact: Bud Lightyear

Management Commands 7-3 v1.0, July 2009


There are changes detected, do you wish to save the changes permanently

(Y/N)? y

The configuration changes have been saved succesfully. Please enter 'show running-config' to see the final configuration.

Thanks for using EzConfig!

Network Interface Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure a logical interface for management access. To configure the management VLAN, see “network mgmt_vlan” on page 3-30 .

enable (Privileged EXEC access)

This command gives you access to the Privileged EXEC mode. From the Privileged EXEC mode, you can configure the network interface.

Format

Mode enable

User EXEC network parms

This command sets the IP address, subnet mask and gateway of the device. The IP address and the gateway must be on the same subnet.

Format

Mode network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>]

Privileged EXEC


7-4


network protocol

This command specifies the network configuration protocol to be used. If you modify this value, change is effective immediately. If you use the bootp parameter, the switch periodically sends requests to a BootP server until a response is received. If you use the dhcp parameter, the switch periodically sends requests to a DHCP server until a response is received. If you use the none parameter, you must configure the network information for the switch manually.

Default

Format

Mode none network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp}

Privileged EXEC network mac-address

This command sets locally administered MAC addresses. The following rules apply:

• Bit 6 of byte 0 (called the U/L bit) indicates whether the address is universally administered

(b'0') or locally administered (b'1').

• Bit 7 of byte 0 (called the I/G bit) indicates whether the destination address is an individual address (b'0') or a group address (b'1').

• The second character, of the twelve character macaddr, must be 2, 6, A or E.

A locally administered address must have bit 6 On (b'1') and bit 7 Off (b'0').

Format

Mode network mac-address <macaddr>

Privileged EXEC network mac-type

This command specifies whether the switch uses the burned in MAC address or the locallyadministered MAC address.

Default

Format

Mode burnedin network mac-type {local | burnedin}

Privileged EXEC



no network mac-type

This command resets the value of MAC address to its default.

Format

Mode no network mac-type

Privileged EXEC network javamode

This command specifies whether or not the switch should allow access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web interface. When access is enabled, the Java applet can be viewed from the

Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot view the Java applet.

Default

Format

Mode enabled network javamode

Privileged EXEC no network javamode

This command disallows access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot view the Java applet.

Format

Mode no network javamode

Privileged EXEC show network

This command displays configuration settings associated with the switch's network interface. The network interface is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch's front panel ports. The configuration parameters associated with the switch's network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed. The network interface is always considered to be up, whether or not any member ports are up; therefore, the show network command will always show “Interface Status” as “Up”.

Format

Modes show network

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



Term Definition

Interface Status The network interface status; it is always considered to be “up”.

IP Address

Subnet Mask

The IP address of the interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

The IP subnet mask for this interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

Default Gateway The default gateway for this IP interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

IPv6

Administrative

Mode

Whether enabled or disabled.

IPv6 Address/

Length

The IPv6 address and length.

The IPv6 default router address.

IPv6 Default

Router

Burned In MAC

Address

Locally

Administered

MAC Address

The burned in MAC address used for in-band connectivity.

MAC Address

Type

If desired, a locally administered MAC address can be configured for in-band connectivity.

To take effect, 'MAC Address Type' must be set to 'Locally Administered'. Enter the address as twelve hexadecimal digits (6 bytes) with a colon between each byte. Bit 1 of byte 0 must be set to a 1 and bit 0 to a 0, i.e. byte 0 should have the following mask 'xxxx xx10'. The MAC address used by this bridge when it must be referred to in a unique fashion. It is recommended that this be the numerically smallest MAC address of all ports that belong to this bridge. However it is only required to be unique. When concatenated with dot1dStpPriority a unique BridgeIdentifier is formed which is used in the Spanning

Tree Protocol.

The MAC address which should be used for in-band connectivity. The choices are the burned in or the Locally Administered address. The factory default is to use the burned in

MAC address.

The following shows example CLI display output for the network port.

(Netgear Switch) #show network

Interface Status............................... Always Up

IP Address..................................... 10.250.3.1

Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway................................ 10.250.3.3

IPv6 Administrative Mode....................... Enabled

IPv6 Address/Length is ........................ FE80::210:18FF:FE82:337/64

IPv6 Address/Length is ........................ 3099::1/64

IPv6 Address/Length is ........................ 3099::210:18FF:FE82:337/64

IPv6 Default Router is ........................ FE80::204:76FF:FE73:423A

Burned In MAC Address.......................... 00:10:18:82:03:37

Locally Administered MAC Address............... 00:00:00:00:00:00

MAC Address Type............................... Burned In

Network Configuration Protocol Current......... None



Management VLAN ID............................. 1

Web Mode....................................... Enable

Java Mode...................................... Enable

Console Port Access Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure the console port. You can use a serial cable to connect a management host directly to the console port of the switch.

configuration

This command gives you access to the Global Config mode. From the Global Config mode, you can configure a variety of system settings, including user accounts. From the Global Config mode, you can enter other command modes, including Line Config mode.

Format

Mode configuration

Privileged EXEC line

This command gives you access to the Line Config mode, which allows you to configure various

Telnet settings, ssh settings, and the console port.

Format

Mode line {console | telnet | ssh}

Global Config serial baudrate

This command specifies the communication rate of the terminal interface. The supported rates are

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200.

Default

Format

Mode

9600 serial baudrate {1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 |

115200}

Line Config



no serial baudrate

This command sets the communication rate of the terminal interface.

Format

Mode no serial baudrate

Line Config serial timeout

This command specifies the maximum connect time (in minutes) without console activity. A value of 0 indicates that a console can be connected indefinitely. The time range is 0 to 160.

Default

Format

Mode

5 serial timeout <0-160>

Line Config no serial timeout

This command sets the maximum connect time (in minutes) without console activity.

Format

Mode no serial timeout

Line Config login authentication

To specify login authentication method list for remote telnet or console, use the login authentication command in line configuration mode.

Format

Mode login authentication {default | list-name }

Line Config no login authentication

To return to the default specified by the login authentication command.

Format

Mode no login authentication {default | list-name }

Line Config


7-9


enable authentication

To specify authentication method list when the user accesses a higher privilege level in remote telnet or console, use the enable authentication command in line configuration mode..

Format

Mode enable authentication {default | list-name }

Line Config no enable authentication

To return to the default specified by the enable authentication command.

Format

Mode no enable authentication {default | list-name }

Line Config show serial

This command displays serial communication settings for the switch.

Format

Modes show serial

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Serial Port Login The time, in minutes, of inactivity on a Serial port connection, after which the Switch will

Timeout

(minutes) close the connection. Any numeric value between 0 and 160 is allowed, the factory default is 5. A value of 0 disables the timeout.

Baud Rate (bps) The default baud rate at which the serial port will try to connect. The available values are

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,57600, and 115200 baud. The factory default is

9600 baud.

The number of bits in a character. The number of bits is always 8. Character Size

(bits)

Flow Control

Stop Bits

Whether Hardware Flow-Control is enabled or disabled. Hardware Flow Control is always disabled.

The number of Stop bits per character. The number of Stop bits is always 1.

Parity Type The Parity Method used on the Serial Port. The Parity Method is always None.



Telnet Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure and view Telnet settings. You can use

Telnet to manage the device from a remote management host.

ip telnet server enable

Use this command to enable Telnet connections to the system and to enable the Telnet Server

Admin Mode. This command opens the Telnet listening port.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip telnet server enable

Privileged EXEC no ip telnet server enable

Use this command to disable Telnet access to the system and to disable the Telnet Server Admin

Mode. This command closes the Telnet listening port and disconnects all open Telnet sessions.

Format

Mode no ip telnet server enable

Privileged EXEC telnet

This command establishes a new outbound Telnet connection to a remote host. The host value must be a valid IP address or host name. Valid values for port should be a valid decimal integer in the range of 0 to 65535, where the default value is 23. If [debug] is used, the current Telnet options enabled is displayed. The optional line parameter sets the outbound Telnet operational mode as ‘linemode’ where, by default, the operational mode is ‘character mode’. The noecho option disables local echo.

Format

Modes telnet <ip-address|hostname> <port> [debug] [line] [noecho]

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC



transport input telnet

This command regulates new Telnet sessions. If enabled, new Telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available. An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends the session.

Note: If the Telnet Server Admin Mode is disabled, Telnet sessions cannot be established.

Use the ip telnet server enable command to enable Telnet Server

Admin Mode.

Default

Format

Mode enabled transport input telnet

Line Config no transport input telnet

Use this command to prevent new Telnet sessions from being established.

Format

Mode no transport input telnet

Line Config transport output telnet

This command regulates new outbound Telnet connections. If enabled, new outbound Telnet sessions can be established until the system reaches the maximum number of simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions allowed. An established session remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends it.

Default

Format

Mode enabled transport output telnet

Line Config


7-12


no transport output telnet

Use this command to prevent new outbound Telnet connection from being established.

Format

Mode no transport output telnet

Line Config session-limit

This command specifies the maximum number of simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions. A value of 0 indicates that no outbound Telnet session can be established.

Default

Format

Mode

5 session-limit <0-5>

Line Config no session-limit

This command sets the maximum number of simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no session-limit

Line Config session-timeout

This command sets the Telnet session timeout value.The timeout value unit of time is minutes.

Default

Format

Mode

5 session-timeout <1-160>

Line Config


7-13


no session-timeout

This command sets the Telnet session timeout value to the default. The timeout value unit of time is minutes.

Format

Mode no session-timeout

Line Config telnetcon maxsessions

This command specifies the maximum number of Telnet connection sessions that can be established. A value of 0 indicates that no Telnet connection can be established. The range is 0-5.

Default

Format

Mode

4 telnetcon maxsessions <0-4>

Privileged EXEC no telnetcon maxsessions

This command sets the maximum number of Telnet connection sessions that can be established to the default value.

Format

Mode no telnetcon maxsessions

Privileged EXEC telnetcon timeout

This command sets the Telnet connection session timeout value, in minutes. A session is active as long as the session has not been idle for the value set. The time is a decimal value from 1 to 160.

Note: When you change the timeout value, the new value is applied to all active and inactive sessions immediately. Any sessions that have been idle longer than the new timeout value are disconnected immediately.

Default

Format

Mode

5 telnetcon timeout <1-160>

Privileged EXEC


7-14


no telnetcon timeout

This command sets the Telnet connection session timeout value to the default.

Note: Changing the timeout value for active sessions does not become effective until the session is reaccessed. Also, any keystroke activates the new timeout duration.

Format

Mode no telnetcon timeout

Privileged EXEC show telnet

This command displays the current outbound Telnet settings. In other words, these settings apply to Telnet connections initiated from the switch to a remote system.

Format

Modes show telnet

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Outbound Telnet

Login Timeout

The number of minutes an outbound Telnet session is allowed to remain inactive before being logged off.

Maximum

Number of

Outbound Telnet

Sessions

The number of simultaneous outbound Telnet connections allowed.

Allow New

Outbound Telnet

Sessions

Indicates whether outbound Telnet sessions will be allowed.


7-15


show telnetcon

This command displays the current inbound Telnet settings. In other words, these settings apply to

Telnet connections initiated from a remote system to the switch.

Format

Modes show telnetcon

• Privileged EXEC

• User EXEC

Term Definition

Remote

Connection

Login Timeout

(minutes)

Maximum

Number of

Remote

Connection

Sessions

This object indicates the number of minutes a remote connection session is allowed to remain inactive before being logged off. May be specified as a number from 1 to 160. The factory default is 5.

This object indicates the number of simultaneous remote connection sessions allowed.

The factory default is 5.

Allow New Telnet

Sessions

New Telnet sessions will not be allowed when this field is set to no. The factory default value is yes.

Secure Shell (SSH) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure SSH access to the switch. Use SSH to access the switch from a remote management host.

Note: The system allows a maximum of 5 SSH sessions.

ip ssh

Use this command to enable SSH access to the system. (This command is the short form of the ip ssh server enable command.)

Default disabled



Format

Mode ip ssh

Privileged EXEC ip ssh protocol

This command is used to set or remove protocol levels (or versions) for SSH. Either SSH1 (1),

SSH2 (2), or both SSH 1 and SSH 2 (1 and 2) can be set.

Default

Format

Mode

1 and 2 ip ssh protocol [1] [2]

Privileged EXEC ip ssh server enable

This command enables the IP secure shell server.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip ssh server enable

Privileged EXEC no ip ssh server enable

This command disables the IP secure shell server.

Format

Mode no ip ssh server enable

Privileged EXEC sshcon maxsessions

This command specifies the maximum number of SSH connection sessions that can be established. A value of 0 indicates that no ssh connection can be established. The range is 0 to 5.

Default

Format

Mode

5 sshcon maxsessions <0-5>

Privileged EXEC



no sshcon maxsessions

This command sets the maximum number of allowed SSH connection sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no sshcon maxsessions

Privileged EXEC sshcon timeout

This command sets the SSH connection session timeout value, in minutes. A session is active as long as the session has been idle for the value set. The time is a decimal value from 1 to 160.

Changing the timeout value for active sessions does not become effective until the session is re accessed. Also, any keystroke activates the new timeout duration.

Default

Format

Mode

5 sshcon timeout <1-160>

Privileged EXEC no sshcon timeout

This command sets the SSH connection session timeout value, in minutes, to the default.

Changing the timeout value for active sessions does not become effective until the session is re accessed. Also, any keystroke activates the new timeout duration.

Format

Mode no sshcon timeout

Privileged EXEC show ip ssh

This command displays the ssh settings.

Format

Mode show ip ssh

Privileged EXEC



Term Definition

Administrative

Mode

This field indicates whether the administrative mode of SSH is enabled or disabled.

Protocol Level The protocol level may have the values of version 1, version 2 or both versions 1 and version 2.

SSH Sessions

Currently Active

The number of SSH sessions currently active.

The maximum number of SSH sessions allowed.

Max SSH

Sessions

Allowed

SSH Timeout The SSH timeout value in minutes.

Keys Present Indicates whether the SSH RSA and DSA key files are present on the device.

Key Generation in Progress

Indicates whether RSA or DSA key files generation is currently in progress.

Management Security Commands

This section describes commands you use to generate keys and certificates, which you can do in addition to loading them as before.

crypto certificate generate

Use this command to generate self-signed certificate for HTTPS. The generate RSA key for SSL has a length of 1024 bits. The resulting certificate is generated with a common name equal to the lowest IP address of the device and a duration of 365 days.

Format

Mode crypto certificate generate

Global Config no crypto certificate generate

Use this command to delete the HTTPS certificate files from the device, regardless of whether they are self-signed or downloaded from an outside source.

Format

Mode no crypto certificate generate

Global Config



crypto key generate rsa

Use this command to generate an RSA key pair for SSH. The new key files will overwrite any existing generated or downloaded RSA key files.

Format

Mode crypto key generate rsa

Global Config no crypto key generate rsa

Use this command to delete the RSA key files from the device.

Format

Mode no crypto key generate rsa

Global Config crypto key generate dsa

Use this command to generate a DSA key pair for SSH. The new key files will overwrite any existing generated or downloaded DSA key files.

Format

Mode crypto key generate dsa

Global Config no crypto key generate dsa

Use this command to delete the DSA key files from the device.

Format

Mode no crypto key generate dsa

Global Config

Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure HTTP and secure HTTP access to the switch. Access to the switch by using a Web browser is enabled by default. Everything you can view and configure by using the CLI is also available by using the Web.



ip http server

This command enables access to the switch through the Web interface. When access is enabled, the user can login to the switch from the Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot login to the switch's Web server. Disabling the Web interface takes effect immediately. All interfaces are affected.

Default

Format

Mode enabled ip http server

Privileged EXEC no ip http server

This command disables access to the switch through the Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot login to the switch's Web server.

Format

Mode no ip http server

Privileged EXEC ip http secure-server

This command is used to enable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP.

Default

Format

Mode disabled ip http secure-server

Privileged EXEC no ip http secure-server

This command is used to disable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP.

Format

Mode no ip http secure-server

Privileged EXEC


7-21


ip http java

This command enables the Web Java mode. The Java mode applies to both secure and un-secure

Web connections.

Default

Format

Mode

Enabled ip http java

Privileged EXEC no ip http java

This command disables the Web Java mode. The Java mode applies to both secure and un-secure

Web connections.

Format

Mode no ip http java

Privileged EXEC ip http session hard-timeout

This command configures the hard timeout for un-secure HTTP sessions in hours. Configuring this value to zero will give an infinite hard-timeout. When this timeout expires, the user will be forced to re-authenticate. This timer begins on initiation of the web session and is unaffected by the activity level of the connection.

Default

Format

Mode

24 ip http session hard-timeout <0-168>

Privileged EXEC no ip http session hard-timeout

This command restores the hard timeout for un-secure HTTP sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http session hard-timeout

Privileged EXEC



ip http authentication

This command specifies the authentication methods for http server users. The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line. For example If none specified as an authentication method after radius, no authentication is used if the radius server is down..

Format

Mode ip http authentication method1 [ method2 ...

]

Global ConfigC

Term

Local

Radius

Tacacs

None

Definition

Uses the local username database for authentication.

Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication.

Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication.

Uses no authentication. no ip http authentication

This command restores the authentication methods to the default.

Format

Mode no ip http authentication method1 [ method2 ...

]

Global Config ip http session maxsessions

This command limits the number of allowable un-secure HTTP sessions. Zero is the configurable minimum.

Default

Format

Mode

16 ip http session maxsessions <0-16>

Privileged EXEC


7-23


no ip http session maxsessions

This command restores the number of allowable un-secure HTTP sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http session maxsessions

Privileged EXEC ip http session soft-timeout

This command configures the soft timeout for un-secure HTTP sessions in minutes. Configuring this value to zero will give an infinite soft-timeout. When this timeout expires the user will be forced to re-authenticate. This timer begins on initiation of the Web session and is re-started with each access to the switch.

Default

Format

Mode

5 ip http session soft-timeout <0-60>

Privileged EXEC no ip http session soft-timeout

This command resets the soft timeout for un-secure HTTP sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http session soft-timeout

Privileged EXEC ip http secure-session maxsessions

This command limits the number of secure HTTP sessions. Zero is the configurable minimum.

Default

Format

Mode

16 ip http secure-session maxsessions <0-16>

Privileged EXEC


7-24


no ip http secure-session maxsessions

This command restores the number of allowable secure HTTP sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http secure-session maxsessions

Privileged EXEC ip http secure-session soft-timeout

This command configures the soft timeout for secure HTTP sessions in minutes. Configuring this value to zero will give an infinite soft-timeout. When this timeout expires, you are forced to reauthenticate. This timer begins on initiation of the Web session and is re-started with each access to the switch. The secure-session soft-timeout can not be set to zero (infinite).

Default

Format

Mode

5 ip http secure-session soft-timeout <1-60>

Privileged EXEC no ip http secure-session soft-timeout

This command restores the soft timeout for secure HTTP sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http secure-session soft-timeout

Privileged EXEC ip http secure-session hard-timeout

This command configures the hard timeout for secure HTTP sessions in hours. When this timeout expires, the user is forced to re-authenticate. This timer begins on initiation of the Web session and is unaffected by the activity level of the connection. The secure-session hard-timeout can not be set to zero (infinite).

Default

Format

Mode

24 ip http secure-session hard-timeout <1-168>

Privileged EXEC



no ip http secure-session hard-timeout

This command resets the hard timeout for secure HTTP sessions to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http secure-session hard-timeout

Privileged EXEC ip https authentication

This command specifies the authentication methods for http server users. The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line. If none is specified as an authentication method after radius , no authentication is used if the radius server is down..

Format

Mode ip https authentication method1 [ method2 ...

]

Global ConfigC

Term

Local

Radius

Tacacs

None

Definition




Uses no authentication. no ip https authentication

This command restores the authentication methods to the default for http server users.

Format

Mode no ip https authentication method1 [ method2 ...

]

Global Config ip http secure-port

This command is used to set the SSL port where port can be 1-65535 and the default is port 443.

Default 443



Format

Mode ip http secure-port <portid>

Privileged EXEC no ip http secure-port

This command is used to reset the SSL port to the default value.

Format

Mode no ip http secure-port

Privileged EXEC ip http secure-protocol

This command is used to set protocol levels (versions). The protocol level can be set to TLS1,

SSL3 or to both TLS1 and SSL3.

Default

Format

Mode

SSL3 and TLS1 ip http secure-protocol [SSL3] [TLS1]

Privileged EXEC show ip http

This command displays the http settings for the switch.

Format

Mode show ip http

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

HTTP Mode (Unsecure)

Java Mode

The unsecure HTTP server administrative mode.

The java applet administrative mode which applies to both secure and unsecure web connections.

Maximum Allowable HTTP

Sessions

The number of allowable un-secure http sessions.

HTTP Session Hard Timeout The hard timeout for un-secure http sessions in hours.

HTTP Session Soft Timeout

HTTP Mode (Secure)

Secure Port

The soft timeout for un-secure http sessions in minutes.

The secure HTTP server administrative mode.

The secure HTTP server port number.



Term Definition

Secure Protocol Level(s)

Certificate Generation in

Progress

The protocol level may have the values of SSL3, TSL1, or both SSL3 and

TSL1.

The number of allowable secure http sessions.

Maximum Allowable HTTPS

Sessions

HTTPS Session Hard Timeout The hard timeout for secure http sessions in hours.

HTTPS Session Soft Timeout The soft timeout for secure http sessions in minutes.

Certificate Present Indicates whether the secure-server certificate files are present on the device.

Indicates whether certificate generation is currently in progress.

Access Commands

Use the commands in this section to close remote connections or to view information about connections to the system.

disconnect

Use the disconnect command to close HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet or SSH sessions. Use all to close all active sessions, or use <session-id> to specify the session ID to close. To view the possible values for <session-id> , use the show loginsession command.

Format

Mode disconnect {<session_id> | all}

Privileged EXEC show loginsession

This command displays current Telnet and serial port connections to the switch.

Format

Mode show loginsession

Privileged EXEC

Term

ID

Definition

Login Session ID.


7-28


Term Definition

User Name

Connection

From

Idle Time

The name the user entered to log on to the system.

IP address of the remote client machine or EIA-232 for the serial port connection.

Time this session has been idle.

Session Time Total time this session has been connected.

Session Type Shows the type of session, which can be HTTP, HTTPS, telnet, serial, or SSH.

User Account Commands

This section describes the commands you use to add, manage, and delete system users. The 7000 series software has two default users: admin and guest. The admin user can view and configure system settings, and the guest user can view settings.

Note: You cannot delete the admin user. There is only one user allowed with read/write privileges. You can configure up to five read-only users on the system.

username

This command adds a username-based authentication system.

Format

Mode username <name> password <password> [level level ] [encrypted]

Global Config

Term

Name

Password level encrypted

Definition

The name of the user, up to 20 characters.

The password for the users 8-64 characters.

Specifies the user level. If not specified, the privilege level is 1. The value can be 1-15.

Encrypted password you enter, copied from another device configuration.



no usermane

This command removes a user account.

Format

Mode no username <username>

Global Config

Note: You cannot delete the “admin” user account.

username nopassword

This command removes the password from a user.

Format

Mode username <name> nopassword [level level ]

Global Config username <username> unlock

Use this command to unlock a locked user account. Only a user with read/write access can reactivate a locked user account.

Format

Mode username <username> unlock

Global Config username snmpv3 accessmode

This command specifies the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login user. The valid accessmode values are readonly or readwrite . The <username> is the login user name for which the specified access mode applies. The default is readwrite for the “admin” user and readonly for all other users. You must enter the <username> in the same case you used when you added the user. To see the case of the <username> , enter the show users command.

Defaults • admin - readwrite

• other - readonly


Format

Mode


username snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite}

Global Config no username snmpv3 accessmode

This command sets the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified user as readwrite for the

“admin” user and readonly for all other users. The <username> value is the user name for which the specified access mode will apply.

Format

Mode no username snmpv3 accessmode <username>

Global Config username snmpv3 authentication

This command specifies the authentication protocol to be used for the specified user. The valid authentication protocols are none , md5 or sha . If you specify md5 or sha , the login password is also used as the snmpv3 authentication password and therefore must be at least eight characters in length. The <username> is the user name associated with the authentication protocol. You must enter the <username> in the same case you used when you added the user. To see the case of the

<username> , enter the show users command.

Default

Format

Mode no authentication username snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha}

Global Config no username snmpv3 authentication

This command sets the authentication protocol to be used for the specified user to none . The

<username> is the user name for which the specified authentication protocol is used.

Format

Mode no username snmpv3 authentication <username>

Global Config


7-31


username snmpv3 encryption

This command specifies the encryption protocol used for the specified user. The valid encryption protocols are des or none.

If you select des , you can specify the required key on the command line. The encryption key must be 8 to 64 characters long. If you select the des protocol but do not provide a key, the user is prompted for the key. When you use the des protocol, the login password is also used as the snmpv3 encryption password, so it must be a minimum of eight characters. If you select none , you do not need to provide a key.

The <username> value is the login user name associated with the specified encryption. You must enter the <username> in the same case you used when you added the user. To see the case of the <username> , enter the show users command.

Default

Format

Mode no encryption username snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des[key]}

Global Config no username snmpv3 encryption

This command sets the encryption protocol to none . The <username> is the login user name for which the specified encryption protocol will be used.

Format

Mode no username snmpv3 encryption <username>

Global Config show users

This command displays the configured user names and their settings. This command is only available for users with Read/Write privileges. The SNMPv3 fields will only be displayed if

SNMP is available on the system.

Format

Mode show users

Privileged EXEC

Term

User Name

Definition

The name the user enters to login using the serial port, Telnet or Web.



Term Definition

Access Mode Shows whether the user is able to change parameters on the switch (Read/Write) or is only able to view them (Read Only). As a factory default, the “admin” user has Read/Write access and the “guest” has Read Only access. There can only be one Read/Write user and up to five Read Only users.

SNMPv3 Access

Mode

The SNMPv3 Access Mode. If the value is set to ReadWrite, the SNMPv3 user is able to set and retrieve parameters on the system. If the value is set to ReadOnly, the

SNMPv3 user is only able to retrieve parameter information. The SNMPv3 access mode may be different than the CLI and Web access mode.

The authentication protocol to be used for the specified login user.

SNMPv3

Authentication

SNMPv3

Encryption

The encryption protocol to be used for the specified login user.

show users accounts

This command displays the local user status with respect to user account lockout and password aging.

Format

Mode show users accounts

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

User Name The local user account’s user name.

Privilege The user’s privilege level (1-15).

Password aging The password aging time for the local users.

Lockout Status Indicates whether the user account is locked out (true or false).

Password

Expiration Date

The current password expiration date in date format.

show users long

This command is used to display the users full name.

Format

Mode show users long

Privileged EXEC



Term

User Name

Definition

The full name of the user.

show users login-history

This command is used to display the users who have logged in previously.

Format

Mode show users login-history [{user name}]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Login Time

Username

Protocol

Location

Definition

The time at which the user logged in.

The user name used to login.

The protocol that the user used to login.

The location of the user.

passwords min-length

Use this command to enforce a minimum password length for local users. The value also applies to the enable password. The valid range is 0-64.

Default

Format

Mode

8 passwords min-length <0-64>

Global Config no passwords min-length

Use this command to set the minimum password length to the default value.

Format

Mode no passwords min-length

Global Config


7-34


passwords history

Use this command to set the number of previous passwords that shall be stored for each user account. When a local user changes his or her password, the user will not be able to reuse any password stored in password history. This ensures that users don’t reuse their passwords often. The valid range is 0-10.

Default

Format

Mode

0 passwords history <0-10>

Global Config no passwords history

Use this command to set the password history to the default value.

Format

Mode no passwords history

Global Config passwords aging

Use this command to implement aging on passwords for local users. When a user’s password expires, the user will be prompted to change it before logging in again. The valid range is 1-365.

The default is 0, or no aging.

Default

Format

Mode

0 passwords aging <1-365>

Global Config no passwords aging

Use this command to set the password aging to the default value.

Format

Mode no passwords aging

Global Config



passwords lock-out

Use this command to strengthen the security of the switch by locking user accounts that have failed login due to wrong passwords. When a lockout count is configured, a user that is logged in must enter the correct password within that count. Otherwise the user will be locked out from further switch access. Only a user with read/write access can re-activate a locked user account.

Password lockout does not apply to logins from the serial console. The valid range is 1-5. The default is 0, or no lockout count enforced.

Default

Format

Mode

0 passwords lock-out <1-5>

Global Config no passwords lock-out

Use this command to set the password lock-out count to the default value.

Format

Mode no passwords lock-out

Global Config show passwords configuration

Use this command to display the configured password management settings.

Format

Mode show passwords configuration

Privileged EXEC

Term

Minimum Password

Length

Password History

Password Aging

Lockout Attempts

Definition

Minimum number of characters required when changing passwords.

Number of passwords to store for reuse prevention.

Length in days that a password is valid.

Number of failed password login attempts before lockout.


7-36


aaa authentication login

This command is used to set authentication at login. The default and optional list names that you create with the

aaa authentication login

command are used with the

login authentication

command. Create a list by entering the

aaa authentication login l ist-name method

command for a particular protocol, where

list-name

is any character string used to name this list. The

method

argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries, in the given sequence. The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify

none

as the final method in the command line. For example if

none

is specified as an authentication method after

radius

, no authentication is used if the radius server is down.

where:

Format

Mode aaa authentication login {default | list-name } method1 [ method2 ...]

Global Config

Default

Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user logs in.

list-name

Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when a user logs in. Up to 12 characters.

method1 [method2…]

At least one from the following table:

Keyword enable line local none radius tacacs

Description

Uses the enable password for authentication.

Uses the line password for authentication.


Uses no authentication.



Note:

The local user database is checked. This has the same effect as the following command:

aaa authentication login local



no aaa authenticaton login

This command is used to remove authentication at login. .

Format

Mode no aaa authentication login {default | list-name }

Global Config aaa authenticaton enable

.

This command is used to set authentication when the user access higher privilege level, use the

aaa authentication enable default

command in global configuration mode.

The default and optional list names that you create with the

aaa authentication enable

command are used with the

enable authentication

command.

Create a list by entering the

aaa authentication enable list-name method

command where

list-name

is any character string used to name this list. The

method

argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries, in the given sequence. The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify

none

as the final method in the command line. For example, if

none

is specified as an authentication method after

radius

, no authentication is used if the radius server is down. All

aaa authentication enable default

requests sent by the switch to a RADIUS or TACACS server include the username "

$enabx$

.", where

x

is the requested privilege level.

Format

Mode aaa authentication enable {default | list-name } method1 [ method2 ...]

Global Config

Default

Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user accesses a higher privilege level.

list-name

Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when a user accesses a higher privilege level. Up to 12 characters.



Keyword enable

Description

Uses the enable password for authentication.


Keyword line none radius tacacs


Description

Uses the line password for authentication.


Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication. Uses username

"$enabx$."where x is the privilege level.

Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication. Uses username "$enabx$." where x is the privilege level.

no aaa authentication enable

Note: If the default list is not set, only the enable password is checked. This has the same effect as the following command: aaa authentication enable default enable

On the console, the enable password is used if it exists. If no password is set, the process will succeed anyway. This has the same effect as the following command: aaa authentication enable default enable none

Use this command to remove the authentication method.

Format

Mode no aaa authentication enable {default | list-name } method1

[m ethod2 ...]

Global Config aaa authentication dot1x

This command is used to set authentication for dot1x users. The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries, in the given sequence. The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line. For example if none is specified as an authentication method after radius, no authentication is used if the radius server is down.

Format

Mode aaa authentication dot1x default method1 [ method2 ...]

Global Config





Keyword local none radius

Description



Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication. no aaa authentication dot1x

This command is used to remove the authentication at login.

Format

Mode no aaa authentication dot1x default

Global Config write memory

Use this command to save running configuration changes to NVRAM so that the changes you make will persist across a reboot. This command is the same as copy system:running config nvram:startup-config .

Format

Mode write memory

Privileged EXEC

SNMP Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) on the switch. You can configure the switch to act as an SNMP agent so that it can communicate with SNMP managers on your network.


7-40


snmp-server

This command sets the name and the physical location of the switch, and the organization responsible for the network. The range for <name> , <loc> and <con> is from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters.

Default

Format

Mode none snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>}

Global Config snmp-server community

This command adds (and names) a new SNMP community. A community <name> is a name associated with the switch and with a set of SNMP managers that manage it with a specified privileged level. The length of <name> can be up to 16 case-sensitive characters.

Note: Community names in the SNMP Community Table must be unique. When making multiple entries using the same community name, the first entry is kept and processed and all duplicate entries are ignored.

Default

Format

Mode

• Public and private, which you can rename.

• Default values for the remaining four community names are blank.

snmp-server community <name>

Global Config no snmp-server community

This command removes this community name from the table. The <name> is the community name to be deleted.

Format

Mode no snmp-server community <name>

Global Config


7-41


snmp-server community ipaddr

This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community. The address is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client IP mask value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device. A value of 0.0.0.0 allows access from any IP address. Otherwise, this value is ANDed with the mask to determine the range of allowed client IP addresses. The name is the applicable community name.

Default

Format

Mode

0.0.0.0

snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>

Global Config no snmp-server community ipaddr

This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community to 0.0.0.0. The name is the applicable community name.

Format

Mode no snmp-server community ipaddr <name>

Global Config snmp-server community ipmask

This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community. The address is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client IP address value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device. A value of 255.255.255.255 will allow access from only one station, and will use that machine's IP address for the client IP address. A value of 0.0.0.0 will allow access from any IP address. The name is the applicable community name.

Default

Format

Mode

0.0.0.0

snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>

Global Config


7-42


no snmp-server community ipmask

This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community to 0.0.0.0. The name is the applicable community name. The community name may be up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

Format

Mode no snmp-server community ipmask <name>

Global Config snmp-server community mode

This command activates an SNMP community. If a community is enabled, an SNMP manager associated with this community manages the switch according to its access right. If the community is disabled, no SNMP requests using this community are accepted. In this case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot manage the switch until the Status is changed back to

Enable.

Default

Format

Mode

• private and public communities - enabled

• other four - disabled snmp-server community mode <name>

Global Config no snmp-server community mode

This command deactivates an SNMP community. If the community is disabled, no SNMP requests using this community are accepted. In this case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot manage the switch until the Status is changed back to Enable.

Format

Mode no snmp-server community mode < name>

Global Config snmp-server community ro

This command restricts access to switch information. The access mode is read-only (also called public).

Format

Mode snmp-server community ro <name>

Global Config



snmp-server community rw

This command restricts access to switch information. The access mode is read/write (also called private).

Format

Mode snmp-server community rw <name>

Global Config snmp-server enable traps violation

This command enables the sending of new violation traps designating when a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received on a locked port.

Note: For other port security commands, see “Protected Ports Commands” on page 3-51 .

Default

Format

Mode disabled snmp-server enable traps violation

Interface Config no snmp-server enable traps violation

This command disables the sending of new violation traps.

Format

Mode no snmp-server enable traps violation

Interface Config snmp-server enable traps

This command enables the Authentication Flag.

Default

Format

Mode enabled snmp-server enable traps

Global Config



no snmp-server enable traps

This command disables the Authentication Flag.

Format

Mode no snmp-server enable traps

Global Config snmp-server enable traps linkmode

Note: This command may not be available on all platforms.

This command enables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch. When enabled, link traps are sent only if the Link Trap flag setting associated with the port is enabled. See “snmp trap linkstatus” on page 7-48

Default

Format

Mode enabled snmp-server enable traps linkmode

Global Config no snmp-server enable traps linkmode

This command disables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch.

Format

Mode no snmp-server enable traps linkmode

Global Config snmp-server enable traps multiusers

This command enables Multiple User traps. When the traps are enabled, a Multiple User Trap is sent when a user logs in to the terminal interface (EIA 232 or Telnet) and there is an existing terminal interface session.

Default

Format

Mode enabled snmp-server enable traps multiusers

Global Config



no snmp-server enable traps multiusers

This command disables Multiple User traps.

Format

Mode no snmp-server enable traps multiusers

Global Config snmp-server enable traps stpmode

This command enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.

Default

Format

Mode enabled snmp-server enable traps stpmode

Global Config no snmp-server enable traps stpmode

This command disables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.

Format

Mode no snmp-server enable traps stpmode

Global Config snmptrap

This command adds an SNMP trap receiver. The maximum length of <name> is 16 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters. The <snmpversion> is the version of SNMP. The version parameter options are snmpv1 or snmpv2. The SNMP trap address can be set using both an IPv4 address format as well as an IPv6 global address format.

The following shows an example of the CLI command.

(Netgear Switch)# snmptrap mytrap ip6addr 3099::2


7-46


Default

Format

Mode

Note: The <name> parameter does not need to be unique, however; the <name> and

<ipaddr> pair must be unique. Multiple entries can exist with the same <name> , as long as they are associated with a different <ipaddr> . The reverse scenario is also acceptable. The <name> is the community name used when sending the trap to the receiver, but the <name> is not directly associated with the SNMP

Community Table, See “snmp-server community” on page39.” snmpv2 snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> [snmpversion <snmpversion>]

Global Config no snmptrap

This command deletes trap receivers for a community.

Format

Mode no snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>

Global Config snmptrap snmpversion

This command modifies the SNMP version of a trap. The maximum length of <name> is 16 casesensitive alphanumeric characters. The <snmpversion> parameter options are snmpv1 or snmpv2.

Note: This command does not support a “no” form.

Default

Format

Mode snmpv2 snmptrap snmpversion <name> <ipaddr> <snmpversion>

Global Config


7-47


snmptrap ipaddr

This command assigns an IP address to a specified community name. The maximum length of name is 16 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters.

Note: IP addresses in the SNMP trap receiver table must be unique. If you make multiple entries using the same IP address, the first entry is retained and processed. All duplicate entries are ignored.

Format

Mode snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew>

Global Config snmptrap mode

This command activates or deactivates an SNMP trap. Enabled trap receivers are active (able to receive traps). Disabled trap receivers are inactive (not able to receive traps).

Format

Mode

snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>

Global Config no snmptrap mode

This command deactivates an SNMP trap. Disabled trap receivers are unable to receive traps.

Format

Mode no snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>

Global Config snmp trap link-status

This command enables link status traps by interface.

Note: This command is valid only when the Link Up/Down Flag is enabled. See “snmpserver enable traps linkmode” on page 7-45



Format

Mode snmp trap link-status

Interface Config no snmp trap link-status

This command disables link status traps by interface.

Note: This command is valid only when the Link Up/Down Flag is enabled.

Format

Mode no snmp trap link-status

Interface Config snmp trap link-status all

This command enables link status traps for all interfaces.


Format

Mode snmp trap link-status all

Global Config no snmp trap link-status all

This command disables link status traps for all interfaces.


Format

Mode no snmp trap link-status all

Global Config


7-49


show snmpcommunity

This command displays SNMP community information. Six communities are supported. You can add, change, or delete communities. The switch does not have to be reset for changes to take effect.

The SNMP agent of the switch complies with SNMP Versions 1, 2 or 3. For more information about the SNMP specification, see the SNMP RFCs. The SNMP agent sends traps through TCP/IP to an external SNMP manager based on the SNMP configuration (the trap receiver and other

SNMP community parameters).

Format

Mode show snmpcommunity

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

SNMP

Community

Name

The community string to which this entry grants access. A valid entry is a case-sensitive alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters. Each row of this table must contain a unique community name.

Client IP

Address

An IP address (or portion thereof) from which this device will accept SNMP packets with the associated community. The requesting entity's IP address is ANDed with the Subnet

Mask before being compared to the IP address. Note: If the Subnet Mask is set to 0.0.0.0, an IP address of 0.0.0.0 matches all IP addresses. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Client IP Mask A mask to be ANDed with the requesting entity's IP address before comparison with IP address. If the result matches with IP address then the address is an authenticated IP address. For example, if the IP address = 9.47.128.0 and the corresponding Subnet Mask

= 255.255.255.0 a range of incoming IP addresses would match, i.e. the incoming IP address could equal 9.47.128.0 - 9.47.128.255. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Access Mode

Status

The access level for this community string.

The status of this community access entry.

show snmptrap

This command displays SNMP trap receivers. Trap messages are sent across a network to an

SNMP Network Manager. These messages alert the manager to events occurring within the switch or on the network. Six trap receivers are simultaneously supported.

Format

Mode show snmptrap

Privileged EXEC



Term Definition

SNMP Trap

Name

The community string of the SNMP trap packet sent to the trap manager. The string is case sensitive and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

The IPv4 address to receive SNMP traps from this device. IP Address

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address to receive SNMP traps from this device.

SNMP Version SNMPv2

Status The receiver's status (enabled or disabled).


(Netgear Switch)#show snmptrap

Community Name IpAddress IPv6 Address Snmp Version Mode show trapflags

This command displays trap conditions. The command’s display shows all the enabled OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 trapflags. Configure which traps the switch should generate by enabling or disabling the trap condition. If a trap condition is enabled and the condition is detected, the SNMP agent on the switch sends the trap to all enabled trap receivers. You do not have to reset the switch to implement the changes. Cold and warm start traps are always generated and cannot be disabled.

Format

Mode show trapflags

Privileged EXEC

Term

Authentication

Flag

Link Up/Down

Flag

Multiple Users

Flag

Spanning Tree

Flag

ACL Traps

Definition

Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled. Indicates whether authentication failure traps will be sent.

Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled. Indicates whether link status traps will be sent.

Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled. Indicates whether a trap will be sent when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time

(either through Telnet or the serial port).

Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is enabled. Indicates whether spanning tree traps are sent.

May be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled. Indicates whether ACL traps are sent.



Term Definition

DVMRP Traps Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled. Indicates whether DVMRP traps are sent.

OSPFv2 Traps Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled. Indicates whether OSPF traps are sent. If any of the OSPF trap flags are not enabled, then the command displays disabled . Otherwise, the command shows all the enabled OSPF traps’ information.

OSPFv3 Traps Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled. Indicates whether OSPF traps are sent. If any of the OSPFv3 trap flags are not enabled, then the command displays disabled . Otherwise, the command shows all the enabled OSPFv3 traps’ information.

PIM Traps Can be enabled or disabled. The factory default is disabled. Indicates whether PIM traps are sent.

RADIUS Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure the switch to use a Remote

Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server on your network for authentication and accounting.

authorization network radius

Use this command to enable the switch to accept VLAN assignment by the radius server.

Default

Format

Mode disable authorization network radius

Global Config no authorization network radius

Use this command to disable the switch to accept VLAN assignment by the radius server.

Format

Mode no authorization network radius

Global Config



radius accounting mode

This command is used to enable the RADIUS accounting function.

Default

Format

Mode disabled radius accounting mode

Global Config no radius accounting mode

This command is used to set the RADIUS accounting function to the default value - i.e. the

RADIUS accounting function is disabled.

Format

Mode no radius accounting mode

Global Config radius server attribute

This command specifies the RADIUS client to use the NAS-IP Address attribute in the RADIUS requests. If the specific IP address is configured while enabling this attribute, the RADIUS client uses that IP address while sending NAS-IP-Address attribute in RADIUS communication.

Format

Mode radius server attribute <4> [< ipaddr >]

Global Config

Term

4 ipaddr

Definition

NAS-IP-Address attribute to be used in RADIUS requests.

The IP address of the server.

no radius server attribute

The no version of this command disables the NAS-IP-Address attribute global parameter for

RADIUS client. When this parameter is disabled, the RADIUS client does not send the NAS-IP-

Address attribute in RADIUS requests.



Format

Mode no radius server attribute <4> [< ipaddr >]

Global Config

The following shows an example of the command.

(Switch) (Config) #radius server attribute 4 192.168.37.60

(Switch) (Config) #radius server attribute 4 radius server host

This command configures the IP address or DNS name to use for communicating with the

RADIUS server of a selected server type. While configuring the IP address or DNS name for the authenticating or accounting servers, you can also configure the port number and server name. If the authenticating and accounting servers are configured without a name, the command uses the

‘Default_RADIUS_Auth_Server’ and ‘Default_RADIUS_Acct_Server’ as the default names, respectively. The same name can be configured for more than one authenticating servers and the name should be unique for accounting servers. The RADIUS client allows the configuration of a maximum 32 authenticating and accounting servers.

If you use the <auth> parameter, the command configures the IP address or hostname to use to connect to a RADIUS authentication server. You can configure up to 3 servers per RADIUS client.

If the maximum number of configured servers is reached, the command fails until you remove one of the servers by issuing the “no” form of the command. If you use the optional <port> parameter, the command configures the UDP port number to use when connecting to the configured RADIUS server. The <port> number range is 1 - 65535, with 1812 being the default value.

Note: To re-configure a RADIUS authentication server to use the default UDP <port> , set the <port> parameter to 1812.

If you use the <acct> token, the command configures the IP address or hostname to use for the

RADIUS accounting server. You can only configure one accounting server. If an accounting server is currently configured, use the “no” form of the command to remove it from the configuration.

The IP address or hostname you specify must match that of a previously configured accounting server. If you use the optional <port> parameter, the command configures the UDP port to use



when connecting to the RADIUS accounting server. If a <port> is already configured for the accounting server, the new <port> replaces the previously configured <port> . The <port> must be a value in the range 0 - 65535, with 1813 being the default.

Note: To re-configure a RADIUS accounting server to use the default UDP <port> , set the <port> parameter to 1813.

Format

Mode radius server host { auth | acct } { <ipaddr|dnsname> } [name

<servername>] [port < 0-65535 >][server-type]

Global Config

Field ipaddr dnsname

0-65535 servername

Description


The DNS name of the server.

The port number to use to connect to the specified RADIUS server.

The alias name to identify the server.

no radius server host

The no version of this command deletes the configured server entry from the list of configured

RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS authenticating server being removed is the active server in the servers that are identified by the same server name, then the RADIUS client selects another server for making RADIUS transactions. If the 'auth' token is used, the previously configured RADIUS authentication server is removed from the configuration. Similarly, if the 'acct' token is used, the previously configured RADIUS accounting server is removed from the configuration. The

<ipaddr|dnsname> parameter must match the IP address or dns name of the previously configured RADIUS authentication / accounting server.

Format

Mode no radius server host {auth | acct} { <ipaddr|dnsname> }

Global Config

The following shows an example of the command.

(Switch) (Config) #radius server host acct 192.168.37.60

(Switch) (Config) #radius server host acct 192.168.37.60 port 1813



(Switch) (Config) #radius server host auth 192.168.37.60 name

Network1_RADIUS_Auth_Server port 1813

(Switch) (Config) #radius server host acct 192.168.37.60 name

Network2_RADIUS_Auth_Server

(Switch) (Config) #no radius server host acct 192.168.37.60

radius server key

This command configures the key to be used in RADIUS client communication with the specified server. Depending on whether the 'auth' or 'acct' token is used, the shared secret is configured for the RADIUS authentication or RADIUS accounting server. The IP address or hostname provided must match a previously configured server. When this command is executed, the secret is prompted.

Text-based configuration supports Radius server’s secrets in encrypted and non-encrypted format.

When you save the configuration, these secret keys are stored in encrypted format only. If you want to enter the key in encrypted format, enter the key along with the encrypted keyword. In the show running config command’s display, these secret keys are displayed in encrypted format. You cannot show these keys in plain text format.

Note: The secret must be an alphanumeric value not exceeding 16 characters.

Format

Mode radius server key { auth | acct } {< ipaddr|dnsname >} encrypted

< password >

Global Config

Field ipaddr dnsname password

Description



The password in encrypted format.


radius server key acct 10.240.4.10 encrypted <encrypt-string>


7-56


radius server msgauth

This command enables the message authenticator attribute to be used for the specified RADIUS

Authenticating server.

Format

Mode radius server msgauth <ipaddr|dnsname>

Global Config

Field ip addr dnsname

Description



no radius server msgauth

The no version of this command disables the message authenticator attribute to be used for the specified RADIUS Authenticating server.

Format

Mode no radius server msgauth <ipaddr|dnsname>

Global Config radius server primary

This command specifies a configured server that should be the primary server in the group of servers which have the same server name. Multiple primary servers can be configured for each number of servers that have the same name. When the RADIUS client has to perform transactions with an authenticating RADIUS server of specified name, the client uses the primary server that has the specified server name by default. If the RADIUS client fails to communicate with the primary server for any reason, the client uses the backup servers configured with the same server name. These backup servers are identified as the ‘Secondary’ type.

Format

Mode radius server primary {< ipaddr|dnsname >}

Global Config



Field ip addr dnsname

Description

The IP address of the RADIUS Authenticating server.


radius server retransmit

This command configures the global parameter for the RADIUS client that specifies the number of transmissions of the messages to be made before attempting the fall back server upon unsuccessful communication with the current RADIUS authenticating server. When the maximum number of retries are exhausted for the RADIUS accounting server and no response is received, the client does not communicate with any other server.

Default

Format

Mode

4 radius server retransmit <retries>

Global Config

Field retries

Description

The maximum number of transmission attempts in the range of 1 to 15.

no radius server retransmit

The no version of this command sets the value of this global parameter to the default value.

Format

Mode no radius server retransmit

Global Config radius server timeout

This command configures the global parameter for the RADIUS client that specifies the timeout value (in seconds) after which a request must be retransmitted to the RADIUS server if no response is received. The timeout value is an integer in the range of 1 to 30.



Default

Format

Mode

5 radius server timeout <seconds>

Global Config

Field retries

Description

Maximum number of transmission attempts in the range <1-30>.

no radius server timeout

The no version of this command sets the timeout global parameter to the default value.

Format

Mode no radius server timeout

Global Config show radius

This command displays the values configured for the global parameters of the RADIUS client.

Format

Mode show radius

Privileged EXEC

Term

Number of Configured

Authentication Servers

Number of Configured

Accounting Servers

Number of Named

Authentication Server

Groups

Number of Named

Accounting Server

Groups

Definition

The number of RADIUS Authentication servers that have been configured.

The number of RADIUS Accounting servers that have been configured.

The number of configured named RADIUS server groups.

The number of configured named RADIUS server groups.



Term Definition

Number of Retransmits The configured value of the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted.

Time Duration The configured timeout value, in seconds, for request re-transmissions.

RADIUS Accounting Mode A global parameter to indicate whether the accounting mode for all the servers is enabled or not.

RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode A global parameter to indicate whether the NAS-IP-Address attribute has been enabled to use in RADIUS requests.

RADIUS Attribute 4 Value A global parameter that specifies the IP address to be used in the NAS-IP-

Address attribute to be used in RADIUS requests.


(Switch)#show radius

Number of Configured Authentication Servers............. 32

Number of Configured Accounting Servers................. 32

Number of Named Authentication Server Groups............ 15

Number of Named Accounting Server Groups................ 3

Number of Retransmits................................... 4

Time Duration........................................... 10

RADIUS Accounting Mode.................................. Disable

RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode................................. Enable

RADIUS Attribute 4 Value ............................... 192.168.37.60

show radius servers

This command displays the summary and details of RADIUS authenticating servers configured for the RADIUS client.

Format

Mode show radius servers [ { <ipaddr | dnsname> | name [<servername> ] } ]

Privileged EXEC

Field ipaddr dnsname servername

Current

Description

The IP address of the authenticating server.

The DNS name of the authenticating server.


The ‘*’ symbol preceeding the server host address specifies that the server is currently active.




Host Address

Server Name

Port

RADIUS Attribute 4

Mode

RADIUS Attribute 4

Value

The IP address of the host.

The name of the authenticating server.

The port used for communication with the authenticating server.

Type Specifies whether this server is a primary or secondary type.

Current Host Address The IP address of the currently active authenticating server.

Secret Configured

Number of

Retransmits

Yes or No Boolean value that indicates whether this server is configured with a secret.

The configured value of the maximum number of times a request packet is retransmitted.

Message

Authenticator

A global parameter to indicate whether the Message Authenticator attribute is enabled or disabled.

Time Duration

RADIUS Accounting

Mode

The configured timeout value, in seconds, for request retransmissions.

A global parameter to indicate whether the accounting mode for all the servers is enabled or not.

A global parameter to indicate whether the NAS-IP-Address attribute has been enabled to use in RADIUS requests.

A global parameter that specifies the IP address to be used in NAS-IP-Address attribute used in RADIUS requests.


(Switch) #show radius servers

Cur Host Address Server Name Port Type rent

---- ------------------------ --------------------------------- ----- ----------

* 192.168.37.200 Network1_RADIUS_Server 1813 Primary

192.168.37.201 Network2_RADIUS_Server 1813 Secondary

192.168.37.202 Network3_RADIUS_Server 1813 Primary

192.168.37.203 Network4_RADIUS_Server 1813 Secondary

(Switch) #show radius servers name

Current Host Address Server Name Type

------------------------ --------------------------------- ----------

192.168.37.200 Network1_RADIUS_Server Secondary

192.168.37.201 Network2_RADIUS_Server Primary

192.168.37.202 Network3_RADIUS_Server Secondary

192.168.37.203 Network4_RADIUS_Server Primary

(Switch) #show radius servers name Default_RADIUS_Server



Server Name............................ Default_RADIUS_Server

Host Address........................... 192.168.37.58

Secret Configured...................... No

Message Authenticator ................. Enable

Number of Retransmits.................. 4

Time Duration.......................... 10

RADIUS Accounting Mode................. Disable

RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode................ Enable

RADIUS Attribute 4 Value .............. 192.168.37.60

(Switch) #show radius servers 192.168.37.58


Host Address........................... 192.168.37.58

Secret Configured...................... No

Message Authenticator ................. Enable

Number of Retransmits.................. 4

Time Duration.......................... 10


RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode................ Enable

RADIUS Attribute 4 Value .............. 192.168.37.60

show radius accounting

This command displays a summary of configured RADIUS accounting servers.

Format

Mode show radius accounting name [< servername >]

Privileged EXEC

Field servername


Mode

Description

An alias name to identify the server.

A global parameter to indicate whether the accounting mode for all the servers is enabled or not.

If you do not specify any parameters, then only the accounting mode and the RADIUS accounting server details are displayed.

Term

Host Address

Definition

The IP address of the host.



Term

Server Name

Port

Secret Configured

Definition

The name of the accounting server.

The port used for communication with the accounting server.

Yes or No Boolean value indicating whether this server is configured with a secret.


(Switch) #show radius accounting name

Host Address Server Name Port Secret

Configured

----------------------- --------------------------------- -------- -----------

192.168.37.200 Network1_RADIUS_Server 1813 Yes

192.168.37.201 Network2_RADIUS_Server 1813 No

192.168.37.202 Network3_RADIUS_Server 1813 Yes

192.168.37.203 Network4_RADIUS_Server 1813 No

(Switch) #show radius accounting name Default_RADIUS_Server


Host Address........................... 192.168.37.200


Port .................................. 1813

Secret Configured ..................... Yes show radius accounting statistics

This command displays a summary of statistics for the configured RADIUS accounting servers.

Format

Mode show radius accounting statistics {< ipaddr|dnsname > | name

< servername >}

Privileged EXEC

Term ipaddr dnsname servername

Definition





7-63


Term Definition


Server Name

The name of the accounting server.

Server Host Address The IP address of the host.

Round Trip Time The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent Accounting-

Response and the Accounting-Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server.

Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server. This number does not include retransmissions.

Retransmission

Responses

Malformed

Responses

The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server.

The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server.

The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting-Response packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses.

Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets containing invalid authenticators received from this accounting server.

Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response.

Timeouts

Unknown Types

The number of accounting timeouts to this server.

The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types, which were received from this server on the accounting port.

Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason.


(Switch) #show radius accounting statistics 192.168.37.200

RADIUS Accounting Server Name................. Default_RADIUS_Server

Host Address.................................. 192.168.37.200

Round Trip Time............................... 0.00

Requests...................................... 0

Retransmissions............................... 0

Responses..................................... 0

Malformed Responses........................... 0

Bad Authenticators............................ 0

Pending Requests.............................. 0

Timeouts...................................... 0

Unknown Types................................. 0

Packets Dropped............................... 0



(Switch) #show radius accounting statistics name Default_RADIUS_Server

RADIUS Accounting Server Name................. Default_RADIUS_Server

Host Address.................................. 192.168.37.200

Round Trip Time............................... 0.00

Requests...................................... 0

Retransmissions............................... 0

Responses..................................... 0

Malformed Responses........................... 0



Timeouts...................................... 0

Unknown Types................................. 0

Packets Dropped............................... 0 show radius statistics

This command displays the summary statistics of configured RADIUS Authenticating servers.

Format

Mode show radius statistics {< ipaddr|dnsname > | name < servername >}

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition ipaddr dnsname



servername The alias name to identify the server.

RADIUS Server Name The name of the authenticating server.

Server Host Address The IP address of the host.

Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to this server. This number does not include retransmissions.

Access

Retransmissions

Access Accepts

The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server.

The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.

Access Rejects

Access Challenges

The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.

The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server.



Term Definition

Malformed Access

Responses

Packets Dropped

The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.

Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or signature attributes received from this server.

Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response.

Timeouts

Unknown Types

The number of authentication timeouts to this server.

The number of packets of unknown type that were received from this server on the authentication port.

The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason.


(Switch) #show radius statistics 192.168.37.200

RADIUS Server Name............................ Default_RADIUS_Server

Server Host Address........................... 192.168.37.200

Access Requests............................... 0.00

Access Retransmissions........................ 0

Access Accepts................................ 0

Access Rejects................................ 0

Access Challenges............................. 0

Malformed Access Responses.................... 0



Timeouts...................................... 0

Unknown Types................................. 0

Packets Dropped............................... 0

(Switch) #show radius statistics name Default_RADIUS_Server

RADIUS Server Name............................ Default_RADIUS_Server

Server Host Address........................... 192.168.37.200

Access Requests............................... 0.00

Access Retransmissions........................ 0

Access Accepts................................ 0

Access Rejects................................ 0

Access Challenges............................. 0

Malformed Access Responses.................... 0





Timeouts...................................... 0

Unknown Types................................. 0

Packets Dropped............................... 0

TACACS+ Commands

TACACS+ provides access control for networked devices via one or more centralized servers.

Similar to RADIUS, this protocol simplifies authentication by making use of a single database that can be shared by many clients on a large network. TACACS+ is based on the TACACS protocol

(described in RFC1492) but additionally provides for separate authentication, authorization, and accounting services. The original protocol was UDP based with messages passed in clear text over the network; TACACS+ uses TCP to ensure reliable delivery and a shared key configured on the client and daemon server to encrypt all messages.

tacacs-server host

Use the tacacs-server host command in Global Configuration mode to configure a

TACACS+ server. This command enters into the TACACS+ configuration mode. The <ipaddress|hostname> parameter is the IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server. To specify multiple hosts, multiple tacacs-server host commands can be used.

Format

Mode tacacs-server host <ip-address|hostname>

Global Config no tacacs-server host

Use the no tacacs-server host command to delete the specified hostname or IP address.

The <ip-address|hostname> parameter is the IP address of the TACACS+ server.

Format

Mode no tacacs-server host <ip-address|hostname>

Global Config


7-67


tacacs-server key

Use the tacacs-server key command to set the authentication and encryption key for all

TACACS+ communications between the switch and the TACACS+ daemon. The <keystring> parameter has a range of 0 - 128 characters and specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

This key must match the key used on the TACACS+ daemon.

Text-based configuration supports TACACS server’s secrets in encrypted and non-encrypted format. When you save the configuration, these secret keys are stored in encrypted format only. If you want to enter the key in encrypted format, enter the key along with the encrypted keyword. In the show running config command’s display, these secret keys are displayed in encrypted format.

You cannot show these keys in plain text format.

Format

Mode tacacs-server key [< key-string> | encrypted <key-string>]

Global Config no tacacs-server key

Use the no tacacs-server key command to disable the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS+ communications between the switch and the TACACS+ daemon. The <keystring> parameter has a range of 0 - 128 characters This key must match the key used on the

TACACS+ daemon.

Format

Mode no tacacs-server key <key-string>

Global Config tacacs-server timeout

Use the tacacs-server timeout command to set the timeout value for communication with the TACACS+ servers. The <timeout> parameter has a range of 1-30 and is the timeout value in seconds.

Default

Format

Mode

5 tacacs-server timeout <timeout>

Global Config



no tacacs-server timeout

Use the no tacacs-server timeout command to restore the default timeout value for all

TACACS servers.

Format

Mode no tacacs-server timeout

Global Config key

Use the key command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server.

This key must match the key used on the TACACS daemon. The <key-string> parameter specifies the key name. For an empty string use “ ”. (Range: 0 - 128 characters).

Text-based configuration supports TACACS server’s secrets in encrypted and non-encrypted format. When you save the configuration, these secret keys are stored in encrypted format only. If you want to enter the key in encrypted format, enter the key along with the encrypted keyword. In the show running config command’s display, these secret keys are displayed in encrypted format.

You cannot show these keys in plain text format.

Format

Mode key [ <key-string> | encrypted <key-string>]

TACACS Config port

Use the port command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify a server port number. The server <port-number> range is 0 - 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

49 port <port-number>

TACACS Config


7-69


priority

Use the priority command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the order in which servers are used, where 0 (zero) is the highest priority. The <priority> parameter specifies the priority for servers. The highest priority is 0 (zero), and the range is 0 - 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

0 priority <priority>

TACACS Config timeout

Use the timeout command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the timeout value in seconds. If no timeout value is specified, the global value is used. The <timeout> parameter has a range of 1-30 and is the timeout value in seconds.

Format

Mode timeout <timeout>

TACACS Config show tacacs

Use the show tacacs command to display the configuration and statistics of a TACACS+ server.

Format

Mode show tacacs [<ip-address|hostname>]

Privileged EXEC

Term

Host Address

Port

TimeOut

Priority

Definition

The IP address or hostname of the configured TACACS+ server.

The configured TACACS+ server port number.

The timeout in seconds for establishing a TCP connection.

The preference order in which TACACS+ servers are contacted. If a server connection fails, the next highest priority server is contacted.


7-70


Configuration Scripting Commands

Configuration Scripting allows you to generate text-formatted script files representing the current configuration of a system. You can upload these configuration script files to a PC or UNIX system and edit them. Then, you can download the edited files to the system and apply the new configuration. You can apply configuration scripts to one or more switches with no or minor modifications.

Use the show running-config command (see “show running-config” on page 6-15 ) to capture the running configuration into a script. Use the copy command (see “copy” on page 6-31 ) to transfer the configuration script to or from the switch.

You should use scripts on systems with default configuration; however, you are not prevented from applying scripts on systems with non-default configurations.

Scripts must conform to the following rules:

• Script files are not distributed across the stack, and only live in the unit that is the master unit at the time of the file download.

• The file extension must be “.scr”.

• A maximum of ten scripts are allowed on the switch.

• The combined size of all script files on the switch shall not exceed 2048 KB.

• The maximum number of configuration file command lines is 2000.

You can type single-line annotations at the command prompt to use when you write test or configuration scripts to improve script readability. The exclamation point (!) character flags the beginning of a comment. The comment flag character can begin a word anywhere on the command line, and all input following this character is ignored. Any command line that begins with the “!” character is recognized as a comment line and ignored by the parser.

The following lines show an example of a script:

! Script file for displaying management access show telnet !Displays the information about remote connections

! Display information about direct connections show serial

! End of the script file!



Note: To specify a blank password for a user in the configuration script, you must specify it as a space within quotes. For example, to change the password for user jane from a blank password to hello , the script entry is as follows:

users passwd jane

" "

hello

hello script apply

This command applies the commands in the script to the switch. The <scriptname> parameter is the name of the script to apply.

Format

Mode script apply <scriptname>

Privileged EXEC script delete

This command deletes a specified script where the <scriptname> parameter is the name of the script to delete. The <all> option deletes all the scripts present on the switch.

Format

Mode script delete {<scriptname> | all}

Privileged EXEC script list

This command lists all scripts present on the switch as well as the remaining available space.

Format

Mode script list

Global Config

Term

Configuration Script

Size

Definition

Name of the script.

Privileged EXEC



script show

This command displays the contents of a script file, which is named <scriptname> .

Format

Mode script show <scriptname>

Privileged EXEC

Term Definition

Output Format line <number>: <line contents> script validate

This command validates a script file by parsing each line in the script file where <scriptname> is the name of the script to validate.The validate option is intended to be used as a tool for script development. Validation identifies potential problems. It might not identify all problems with a given script on any given device.

Format

Mode script validate <scriptname>

Privileged EXEC

Pre-login Banner and System Prompt Commands

This section describes the commands you use to configure the pre-login banner and the system prompt. The pre-login banner is the text that displays before you login at the User: prompt.

copy (pre-login banner)

The copy command includes the option to upload or download the CLI Banner to or from the switch. You can specify local URLs by using TFTP, Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem.

Note: < ip6address > is also a valid parameter for routing packages that support IPv6.


Default

Format


none copy <Code Sample Variable><tftp://<ipaddr>/<filepath>/

<filename>><Code Sample Variable> nvram:clibanner copy nvram:clibanner <Code Sample Variable><tftp://<ipaddr>/

<filepath>/<filename>><Code Sample Variable>

Privileged EXEC Mode set prompt

This command changes the name of the prompt. The length of name may be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Format

Mode set prompt <prompt_string>

Privileged EXEC


7-74

Chapter 8

Log Messages

This chapter lists common log messages, along with information regarding the cause of each message. There is no specific action that can be taken per message. When there is a problem being diagnosed, a set of these messages in the event log, along with an understanding of the system configuration and details of the problem will assist NETGEAR, Inc. in determining the root cause of such a problem.

Note: This chapter is not a complete list of all syslog messages.

The Log Messages chapter includes the following sections:

• “Core” on page 8-1

• “Utilities” on page 8-4

• “Management” on page 8-6

• “Switching” on page 8-10

• “QoS” on page 8-16

• “Routing/IPv6 Routing” on page 8-17

• “Multicast” on page 8-21

• “Stacking” on page 8-23

• “Technologies” on page 8-23

• “O/S Support” on page 8-26

Core

8-1 v1.0, July 2009


Table 8-1: BSP Log Messages

Component

BSP

BSP

Message

Event(0xaaaaaaaa)

Starting code...

Cause

Switch has restarted.

BSP initialization complete, starting 7000 series application.

Table 8-2: NIM Log Messages

Component

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

NIM

Message Cause

NIM: L7_ATTACH out of order for intIfNum(x) unit x slot x port x

Interface creation out of order

NIM: Failed to find interface at unit x slot x port x for event(x)

NIM: L7_DETACH out of order for intIfNum(x) unit x slot x port x

There is no mapping between the USP and

Interface number


NIM: L7_DELETE out of order for intIfNum(x) unit x slot x port x


NIM: event(x),intf(x),component(x), in wrong An event was issued to NIM during the phase wrong configuration phase (probably Phase

1, 2, or WMU)

Event was not propagated to the system NIM: Failed to notify users of interface change

NIM: failed to send message to NIM message Queue.

NIM: Failed to notify the components of

L7_CREATE event

NIM: Attempted event (x), on USP x.x.x before phase 3

NIM: incorrect phase for operation

NIM message queue full or non-existent

Interface not created

A component issued an interface event during the wrong initialization phase

NIM: Component(x) failed on event(x) for intIfNum(x)

NIM: Timeout event(x), intIfNum(x) remainingMask = “xxxx”

An API call was made during the wrong initialization phase

A component responded with a fail indication for an interface event

A component did not respond before the

NIM timeout occurred

Log Messages 8-2 v1.0, July 2009


Table 8-3: System Log Messages

Component

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

Message Cause

Configuration file Switch CLI.cfg size is 0

(zero) bytes could not separate

SYSAPI_CONFIG_FILENAME

The configuration file could not be read.

This message may occur on a system for which no configuration has ever been saved or for which configuration has been erased.

Building defaults for file <file name> version Configuration did not exist or could not be

<version num> read for the specified feature or file. Default configuration values will be used. The file name and version are indicated.

File <filename>: same version (version num) The configuration file which was loaded was but the sizes (<version size>-><expected version size) differ of a different size than expected for the version number. This message indicates the configuration file needed to be migrated to the version number appropriate for the code image. This message may appear after upgrading the code image to a more current release.

Migrating config file <filename> from version The configuration file identified was

<version num> to <version num> migrated from a previous version number.

Both the old and new version number are specified. This message may appear after upgrading the code image to a more current release.

Building Defaults

The configuration file could not be read.

This message may occur on a system for which no configuration has ever been saved or for which configuration has been erased.

sysapiCfgFileGet failed size = <expected size of file> version = <expected version>

Configuration did not exist or could not be read for the specified feature. Default configuration values will be used.

Configuration did not exist or could not be read for the specified feature. This message is usually followed by a message indicating that default configuration values will be used.



Utilities

Table 8-4: Trap Mgr Log Message

Component

Trap Mgr

Message

Link Up/Down: unit/slot/port

Cause

An interface changed link state.

Table 8-5: DHCP Filtering Log Messages

Component Message Cause

DHCP Filtering Unable to create r/w lock for DHCP Filtering Unable to create semaphore used for dhcp filtering configuration structure .

DHCP Filtering Failed to register with nv Store.

DHCP Filtering

DHCP Filtering

Failed to register with NIM

Error on call to sysapiCfgFileWrite file

Unable to register save and restore functions for configuration save

Unable to register with NIM for interface callback functions

Error on trying to save configuration .

Table 8-6: NVStore Log Messages

Component

NVStore

NVStore

NVStore

NVStore

Message Cause

Building defaults for file XXX A component’s configuration file does not exist or the file’s checksum is incorrect so the component’s default configuration file is built.

Error on call to osapiFsWrite routine on file

XXX

Either the file cannot be opened or the OS’s file I/O returned an error trying to write to the file.

File XXX corrupted from file system.

Checksum mismatch.

The calculated checksum of a component’s configuration file in the file system did not match the checksum of the file in memory.

Migrating config file XXX from version Y to Z A configuration file version mismatch was detected so a configuration file migration has started.



Table 8-7: RADIUS Log Messages

Component

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

RADIUS

Message Cause

RADIUS: Invalid data length - xxx

RADIUS: Failed to send the request

The RADIUS Client received an invalid message from the server.

A problem communicating with the RADIUS server.

RADIUS: Failed to send all of the request A problem communicating with the RADIUS server during transmit.

RADIUS: Could not get the Task Sync semaphore!

Resource issue with RADIUS Client service.

RADIUS: Buffer is too small for response processing

RADIUS: Could not allocate accounting requestInfo

RADIUS Client attempted to build a response larger than resources allow.


RADIUS: Could not allocate requestInfo

RADIUS: osapiSocketRecvFrom returned error

RADIUS: Accounting-Response failed to validate, id=xxx

RADIUS: User (xxx) needs to respond for challenge


Error while attempting to read data from the

RADIUS server.


An unexpected challenge was received for a configured user.

RADIUS: Could not allocate a buffer for the packet


RADIUS: Access-Challenge failed to validate, id=xxx

RADIUS: Failed to validate Message-

Authenticator, id=xxx



RADIUS: Access-Accpet failed to validate, id=xxx

RADIUS: Invalid packet length – xxx



RADIUS: Response is missing Message-

Authenticator, id=xxx

RADIUS: Server address doesn't match configured server


RADIUS Client received a server response from an unconfigured server.



Table 8-8: TACACS+ Log Messages

Component

TACACS+

TACACS+

TACACS+

TACACS+

TACACS+

TACACS+

Message Cause

TACACS+: authentication error, no server to TACACS+ request needed, but no servers contact are configured.

TACACS+: connection failed to server x.x.x.x

TACACS+: no key configured to encrypt packet for server x.x.x.x

TACACS+ request sent to server x.x.x.x but no response was received.

No key configured for the specified server.

TACACS+: received invalid packet type from Received packet type that is not supported.

server.

TACACS+: invalid major version in received packet.

Major version mismatch.

TACACS+: invalid minor version in received packet.

Minor version mismatch.

Table 8-9: LLDP Log Message

Component

LLDP

Message lldpTask(): invalid message type:xx. xxxxxx:xx

Cause

Unsupported LLDP packet received.

Table 8-10: SNTP Log Message

Component

SNTP

Message

SNTP: system clock synchronized on %s

UTC

Cause

Indicates that SNTP has successfully synchronized the time of the box with the server.

Management

Table 8-11: SNMP Log Message

Component

SNMP

Message

EDB Callback: Unit Join: x.

Cause

A new unit has joined the stack.



Table 8-12: EmWeb Log Messages

Component

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

EmWeb

Message Cause

EMWEB (Telnet): Max number of Telnet login sessions exceeded

EMWEB (SSH): Max number of SSH login sessions exceeded

Handle table overflow

A user attempted to connect via telnet when the maximum number of telnet sessions were already active.

A user attempted to connect via SSH when the maximum number of SSH sessions were already active.

All the available EmWeb connection handles are being used and the connection could not be made.

Socket accept failure for the specified connection type.

Socket receive failure.

ConnectionType EmWeb socket accept() failed: errno ewsNetHTTPReceive failure in

NetReceiveLoop() - closing connection.

EmWeb: connection allocation failed Memory allocation failure for the new connection.

Socket error on send.

EMWEB TransmitPending :

EWOULDBLOCK error sending data ewaNetHTTPEnd: internal error - handle not in Handle table

EmWeb handle index not valid.

ewsNetHTTPReceive:recvBufCnt exceeds

MAX_QUEUED_RECV_BUFS!

EmWeb accept: XXXX

The receive buffer limit has been reached.

Bad request or DoS attack.

Accept function for new SSH connection failed. XXXX indicates the error info.

Table 8-13: CLI_UTIL Log Messages

Component

CLI_UTIL

Message

Telnet Send Failed errno = 0x%x

CLI_UTIL osapiFsDir failed

Cause

Failed to send text string to the telnet client.

Failed to obtain the directory information from a volume's directory.



Table 8-14: WEB Log Messages

Component

WEB

WEB

WEB

WEB

WEB

WEB

Message

Max clients exceeded

Error on send to sockfd XXXX, closing connection

# (XXXX) Form Submission Failed. No

Action Taken.

Cause

This message is shown when the maximum allowed java client connections to the switch is exceeded.

Failed to send data to the java clients through the socket.

The form submission failed and no action is taken. XXXX indicates the file under consideration.

Unknown error returned while downloading file using TFTP from web interface ewaFormServe_file_download() - WEB

Unknown return code from tftp download result ewaFormServe_file_upload() - Unknown return code from tftp upload result

Web UI Screen with unspecified access attempted to be brought up

Unknown error returned while uploading file using TFTP from web interface.

Failed to get application-specific authorization handle provided to EmWeb/

Server by the application in ewsAuthRegister(). The specified web page will be served in read-only mode.

Table 8-15: CLI_WEB_MGR Log Messages


CLI_WEB_MGR File size is greater than 2K The banner file size is greater than 2K bytes.

CLI_WEB_MGR No. of rows greater than allowed maximum of XXXX

When the number of rows exceeds the maximum allowed rows

Table 8-16: SSHD Log Messages

Component

SSHD

SSHD

Message

SSHD: Unable to create the global (data) semaphore

SSHD: Msg Queue is full, event = XXXX

Cause

Failed to create semaphore for global data protection.

Failed to send the message to the SSHD message queue as message queue is full.

XXXX indicates the event to be sent



Table 8-16: SSHD Log Messages

Component

SSHD

Message

SSHD: Unknown UI event in message, event=XXXX

SSHD sshdApiCnfgrCommand: Failed calling sshdIssueCmd.

Cause

Failed to dispatch the UI event to the appropriate SSHD function as it’s an invalid event. XXXX indicates the event to be dispatched.

Failed to send the message to the SSHD message queue

Table 8-17: SSLT Log Messages

Component

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

SSLT

Message Cause

SSLT: Exceeded maximum, ssltConnectionTask

Exceeded maximum allowed SSLT connections.

SSLT: Error creating Secure server socket6 Failed to create secure server socket for

IPV6.

SSLT: Can't connect to unsecure server at

XXXX, result = YYYY, errno = ZZZZ

Failed to open connection to unsecure server. XXXX is the unsecure server socket address. YYYY is the result returned from connect function and ZZZZ is the error code.

SSLT: Msg Queue is full, event=XXXX Failed to send the received message to the

SSLT message queue as message queue is full. XXXX indicates the event to be sent.

SSLT: Unknown UI event in message, event=XXXX ssltApiCnfgrCommand: Failed calling ssltIssueCmd.

SSLT: Error loading certificate from file

XXXX

Failed to dispatch the received UI event to the appropriate SSLT function as it’s an invalid event. XXXX indicates the event to be dispatched.

Failed to send the message to the SSLT message queue.

Failed while loading the SSLcertificate from specified file. XXXX indicates the file from where the certificate is being read.

SSLT: Error loading private key from file Failed while loading private key for SSL connection.

Failed while setting cipher list.

SSLT: Error setting cipher list (no valid ciphers)

SSLT: Could not delete the SSL semaphores Failed to delete SSL semaphores during cleanup.of all resources associated with the

OpenSSL Locking semaphores.



Table 8-18: User_Manager Log Messages

Component

User_Manager

Message

User Login Failed for XXXX

User_Manager Access level for user XXXX could not be determined. Setting to READ_ONLY.

User_Manager Could not migrate config file XXXX from version YYYY to ZZZZ. Using defaults.

Cause

Failed to authenticate user login. XXXX indicates the username to be authenticated.

Invalid access level specified for the user.

The access level is set to READ_ONLY.

XXXX indicates the username.

Failed to migrate the config file. XXXX is the config file name. YYYY is the old version number and ZZZZ is the new version number.

Switching

Table 8-19: Protected Ports Log Messages


Protected Ports Protected Port: failed to save configuration This appears when the protected port configuration cannot be saved

Protected Ports protectedPortCnfgrInitPhase1Process:

Unable to create r/w lock for protectedPort

This appears when protectedPortCfgRWLock Fails

Protected Ports protectedPortCnfgrInitPhase2Process: This appears when nimRegisterIntfChange

Unable to register for VLAN change callback with VLAN fails

Protected Ports Cannot add intIfNum xxx to group yyy

Protected Ports unable to set protected port group

This appears when an interface could not be added to a particular group.

This appears when a dtl call fails to add interface mask at the driver level

Protected Ports Cannot delete intIfNum xxx from group yyy This appears when a dtl call to delete an interface from a group fails

Protected Ports Cannot update group YYY after deleting interface XXX

This message appears when an update group for a interface deletion fails

Protected Ports Received an interface change callback while not ready to receive it

This appears when an interface change call back has come before the protected port component is ready.



Table 8-20: IP Subnet VLANS Log Messages


IPsubnet vlans ERROR vlanIpSubnetSubnetValid :Invalid subnet

This occurs when an invalid pair of subnet and netmask has come from the CLI

IPsubnet vlans IP Subnet Vlans: failed to save configuration This message appears when save configuration of subnet vlans failed

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetCnfgrInitPhase1Process:

Unable to create r/w lock for vlanIpSubnet

This appears when a read/write lock creations fails

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetCnfgrInitPhase2Process: This appears when this component unable

Unable to register for VLAN change callback to register for vlan change notifications

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetCnfgrFiniPhase1Process: could not delete avl semaphore

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetDtlVlanCreate: Failed

This appears when a semaphore deletion of this component fails.

This appears when a dtl call fails to add an entry into the table

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetSubnetDeleteApply: Failed This appears when a dtl fails to delete an entry from the table

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetVlanChangeCallback: Failed to add an Entry

This appears when a dtl fails to add an entry for a vlan add notify event.

IPsubnet vlans vlanIpSubnetVlanChangeCallback: Failed to delete an Entry

This appears when a dtl fails to delete an entry for an vlan delete notify event.

Component

Mac based

VLANS

Mac based

VLANS

Mac based

VLANS

Mac based

VLANS

Mac based

VLANS

Mac based

VLANS

Mac based

VLANS

Table 8-21: Mac-based VLANs Log Messages

Message Cause

MAC VLANs: Failed to save configuration This message appears when save configuration of Mac vlans failed vlanMacCnfgrInitPhase1Process: Unable to create r/w lock for vlanMac

This appears when a read/write lock creations fails

Unable to register for VLAN change callback This appears when this component unable to register for vlan change notifications vlanMacCnfgrFiniPhase1Process: could not delete avl semaphore

This appears when a semaphore deletion of this component fails.

vlanMacAddApply: Failed to add an entry This appears when a dtl call fails to add an entry into the table vlanMacDeleteApply: Unable to delete an

Entry

This appears when a dtl fails to delete an entry from the table vlanMacVlanChangeCallback: Failed to add This appears when a dtl fails to add an entry an entry for a vlan add notify event.



Table 8-21: Mac-based VLANs Log Messages

Component

Mac based

VLANS

Message vlanMacVlanChangeCallback: Failed to delete an entry

Cause

This appears when a dtl fails to delete an entry for an vlan delete notify event.

Table 8-22: 802.1x Log Messages

Component

802.1X

802.1X

802.1X

802.1X

802.1X

802.1X

802.1X

802.1X

Message Cause function : Failed calling dot1xIssueCmd 802.1X message queue is full function: server function

EAP message not received from

: Out of System buffers

RADIUS server did not send required EAP message

802.1X cannot process/transmit message due to lack of internal buffers function : could not set state to <authorized/ unauthorized>, intf xxx dot1xApplyConfigData: Unable to <enable/ disable> dot1x in driver

DTL call failed setting authorization state of the port

DTL call failed enabling/disabling 802.1X

dot1xSendRespToServer: dot1xRadiusAccessRequestSend failed dot1xRadiusAcceptProcess: error calling radiusAccountingStart, ifIndex=xxx

Failed sending message to RADIUS server

Failed sending accounting start to RADIUS server function : failed sending terminate cause, intf Failed sending accounting stop to RADIUS xxx server

Table 8-23: IGMP Snooping Log Messages


IGMP Snooping function : osapiMessageSend failed

IGMP Snooping Failed to set global igmp snooping mode to xxx

Failed to set global IGMP Snooping mode due to message queue being full

IGMP Snooping

IGMP Snooping Failed to set igmp mrouter mode xxx for interface yyy

IGMP Snooping

Failed to set igmp snooping mode xxx for interface yyy

Failed to set igmp snooping mode xxx for vlan yyy

IGMP Snooping message queue is full

Failed to set interface IGMP Snooping mode due to message queue being full

Failed to set interface multicast router mode due to IGMP Snooping message queue being full

Failed to set VLAN IGM Snooping mode due to message queue being full



Table 8-23: IGMP Snooping Log Messages

Component Message

IGMP Snooping Failed to set igmp mrouter mode %d for interface xxx on Vlan yyy

IGMP Snooping snoopCnfgrInitPhase1Process: Error allocating small buffers

IGMP Snooping snoopCnfgrInitPhase1Process: Error allocating large buffers

Cause

Failed to set VLAN multicast router mode due to IGMP Snooping message queue being full

Could not allocate buffers for small IGMP packets

Could not allocate buffers for large IGMP packets

Table 8-24: GARP/GVRP/GMRP Log Messages

Component

GARP/GVRP/

GMRP

GARP/GVRP/

GMRP

GARP/GVRP/

GMRP

GARP/GVRP/

GMRP

GARP/GVRP/

GMRP

GARP/GVRP/

GMRP

Message Cause garpSpanState, garpIfStateChange, The garpQueue is full, logs specifics of the

GarpIssueCmd, garpDot1sChangeCallBack, message content like internal interface number, type of message etc.

garpApiCnfgrCommand, garpLeaveAllTimerCallback, garpTimerCallback: QUEUE SEND

FAILURE:

GarpSendPDU: QUEUE SEND FAILURE The garpPduQueue is full, logs specific of the GPDU, internal interface number, vlan id, buffer handle etc.

garpMapIntfIsConfigurable, gmrpMapIntfIsConfigurable: Error accessing

A default configuration does not exist for this interface. Typically a case when a new

GARP/GMRP config data for interface %d in interface is created and has no pregarpMapIntfIsConfigurable.

configuration.

garpTraceMsgQueueUsage: garpQueue usage has exceeded fifty/eighty/ninety percent

Traces the build up of message queue.

Helpful in determining the load on GARP.

gid_destroy_port: Error Removing port %d registration for vlan-mac %d -

%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X gmd_create_entry : GMRP failure adding

MFDB entry: vlan %d and address %s

Mismatch between the gmd (gmrp database) and MFDB.

MFDB table is full.

Table 8-25: 802.3ad Log Messages

Component

802.3ad

Message dot3adReceiveMachine: received default event %x

Cause

Received a LAG PDU and the RX state machine is ignoring this LAGPDU



Table 8-25: 802.3ad Log Messages

Component

802.3ad

Message Cause dot3adNimEventCompletionCallback, The event sent to NIM was not completed dot3adNimEventCreateCompletionCallback: successfully

DOT3AD: notification failed for event(%d), intf(%d), reason(%d)

Table 8-26: FDB Log Message

Component

FDB

Message Cause fdbSetAddressAgingTimeOut: Failure setting fid %d address aging timeout to %d

Unable to set the age time in the hardware

Table 8-27: Double VLAN Tag Log Message


Double Vlan Tag dvlantagIntfIsConfigurable: Error accessing dvlantag config data for interface %d

A default configuration does not exist for this interface. Typically a case when a new interface is created and has no preconfiguration.

Table 8-28: IPv6 Provisioning Log Message

Component

IPV6

Provisioning

Message Cause ipv6ProvIntfIsConfigurable: Error accessing

IPv6 Provisioning config data for interface

%d


Table 8-29: MFDB Log Message

Component

MFDB

Message Cause mfdbTreeEntryUpdate: entry does not exist Trying to update a non existing entry



Table 8-30: 802.1Q Log Messages

Component

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Message Cause dot1qIssueCmd: Unable to send message

%d to dot1qMsgQueue for vlan %d - %d msgs in queue dot1qMsgQueue is full.

dot1qVlanCreateProcess: Attempt to create This accommodates for reserved vlan ids. a vlan with an invalid vlan id %d ;

VLAN %d not in range, i.e. 4094 - x dot1qMapIntfIsConfigurable: Error accessing DOT1Q config data for interface %d in dot1qMapIntfIsConfigurable.


dot1qVlanDeleteProcess: Deleting the default VLAN dot1qVlanMemberSetModify, dot1qVlanTaggedMemberSetModify:

Dynamic entry %d can only be modified after it is converted to static

Typically encountered during clear Vlan and clear config

If this vlan is a learnt via GVRP then we cannot modify it’s member set via management.

Table 8-31: 802.1S Log Messages

Component

802.1S

802.1S

802.1S

Message Cause dot1sIssueCmd: Dot1s Msg Queue is full!!!!Event: %u, on interface: %u, for instance: %u dot1sStateMachineRxBpdu(): Rcvd BPDU

Discarded

The message Queue is full.

The current conditions, like port is not enabled or we are currently not finished processing another BPDU on the same interface, does not allow us to process this

BPDU dot1sBpduTransmit(): could not get a buffer Out of system buffers

Table 8-32: Port Mac Locking Log Message

Component

Port Mac

Locking

Message Cause pmlMapIntfIsConfigurable: Error accessing

PML config data for interface %d in pmlMapIntfIsConfigurable.




Table 8-33: Protocol-based VLANs Log Messages


Protocol Based

VLANs pbVlanCnfgrInitPhase2Process: Unable to register NIM callback

Protocol Based

VLANs pbVlanCnfgrInitPhase2Process: Unable to register pbVlan callback with vlans

Protocol Based

VLANs pbVlanCnfgrInitPhase2Process: Unable to register pbVlan callback with nvStore

Appears when nimRegisterIntfChange fails to register pbVlan for link state changes.

Appears when vlanRegisterForChange fails to register pbVlan for vlan changes.

Appears when nvStoreRegister fails to register save and restore functions for configuration save.

QoS

Table 8-34: ACL Log Messages

Component

ACL

ACL

ACL

ACL

Message Cause

Total number of ACL rules (x) exceeds max

(y) on intf i.

The combination of all ACLs applied to an interface has resulted in requiring more rules than the platform supports.

ACL name , rule x : This rule is not being logged

The ACL configuration has resulted in a requirement for more logging rules than the platform supports. The specified rule is functioning normally except for the logging action.

aclLogTask: error logging ACL rule trap for correlator number

The system was unable to send an SNMP trap for this ACL rule which contains a logging attribute.

IP ACL number : Forced truncation of one or While processing the saved configuration, more rules during config migration the system encountered an ACL with more rules than is supported by the current version. This may happen when code is updated to a version supporting fewer rules per ACL than the previous version.



Table 8-35: CoS Log Message

Component

COS

Message Cause cosCnfgrInitPhase3Process: Unable to apply saved config -- using factory defaults

The COS component was unable to apply the saved configuration and has initialized to the factory default settings.

Table 8-36: DiffServ Log Messages

Component

DiffServ

DiffServ

Message Cause diffserv.c 165: diffServRestore Failed to reset DiffServ. Recommend resetting device

While attempting to clear the running configuration an error was encountered in removing the current settings. This may lead to an inconsistent state in the system and resetting is advised.

Policy invalid for service intf: "policy name , intIfNum x , direction y

The DiffServ policy definition is not compatible with the capabilities of the interface specified. Check the platform release notes for information on configuration limitations.

Routing/IPv6 Routing

Table 8-37: DHCP Relay Log Messages

Component

DHCP relay

DHCP relay

DHCP relay

Message Cause

REQUEST hops field more than config value The DHCP relay agent has processed a

DHCP request whose HOPS field is larger than the maximum value allowed. The relay agent will not forward a message with a hop count greater than 4.

Request's seconds field less than the config The DHCP relay agent has processed a value DHCP request whose SECS field is larger than the configured minimum wait time allowed.

processDhcpPacket: invalid DHCP packet type: %u\n

The DHCP relay agent has processed an invalid DHCP packet. Such packets are discarded by the relay agent.



Table 8-38: OSPFv2 Log Messages

Component

OSPFv2

OSPFv2

OSPFv2

OSPFv2

OSPFv2

OSPFv2

Message Cause

Best route client deregistration failed for

OSPF Redist

OSPFv2 registers with the IPv4 routing table manager (“RTO”) to be notified of best route changes. There are cases where OSPFv2 deregisters more than once, causing the second deregistration to fail. The failure is harmless.

XX_Call() failure in _checkTimers for thread An OSPFv2 timer has fired but the message

0x869bcc0 queue that holds the event has filled up. This is normally a fatal error.

Warning: OSPF LSDB is 90% full (22648

LSAs).

The number of LSAs, 25165, in the OSPF

LSDB has exceeded the LSDB memory allocation.

OSPFv2 limits the number of Link State

Advertisements (LSAs) that can be stored in the link state database (LSDB). When the database becomes 90 or 95 percent full,

OSPFv2 logs this warning. The warning includes the current size of the database.

When the OSPFv2 LSDB becomes full,

OSPFv2 logs this message. OSPFv2 reoriginates its router LSAs with the metric of all non-stub links set to the maximum value to encourage other routers to not compute routes through the overloaded router.

Dropping the DD packet because of MTU mismatch

OSPFv2 ignored a Database Description packet whose MTU is greater than the IP

MTU on the interface where the DD was received.

LSA Checksum error in LsUpdate, dropping OSPFv2 ignored a received link state

LSID 1.2.3.4 checksum 0x1234.

advertisement (LSA) whose checksum was incorrect.


Component

OSPFv3

Message

Best route client deregistration failed for

OSPFv3 Redist

Cause

OSPFv3 registers with the IPv6 routing table manager (“RTO6”) to be notified of best route changes. There are cases where

OSPFv3 deregisters more than once, causing the second deregistration to fail.

The failure is harmless.




Component

OSPFv3

OSPFv3

OSPFv3

Message

Warning: OSPF LSDB is 90% full (15292

LSAs).

The number of LSAs, 16992, in the OSPF

LSDB has exceeded the LSDB memory allocation.

LSA Checksum error detected for LSID

1.2.3.4 checksum 0x34f5. OSPFv3

Database may be corrupted.

Cause

OSPFv3 limits the number of Link State

Advertisements (LSAs) that can be stored in the link state database (LSDB). When the database becomes 90 or 95 percent full,

OSPFv3 logs this warning. The warning includes the current size of the database.

When the OSPFv3 LSDB becomes full,

OSPFv3 logs this message. OSPFv3 reoriginates its router LSAs with the R-bit clear indicating that OSPFv3 is overloaded.

OSPFv3 periodically verifies the checksum of each LSA in memory. OSPFv3 logs this

Table 8-40: Routing Table Manager Log Messages

Component

Routing Table

Manager

Routing Table

Manager

Message Cause

RTO is full. Routing table contains 8000 best The routing table manager, also called routes, 8000 total routes.

“RTO,” stores a limited number of best routes, based on hardware capacity. When the routing table becomes full, RTO logs this alert. The count of total routes includes alternate routes, which are not installed in hardware.

RTO no longer full. Bad adds: 10. Routing table contains 7999 best routes, 7999 total routes.

When the number of best routes drops below full capacity, RTO logs this notice.

The number of bad adds may give an indication of the number of route adds that failed while RTO was full, but a full routing table is only one reason why this count is incremented.

Log Messages v1.0, July 2009

8-19


Table 8-41: VRRP Log Messages

Component

VRRP

VRRP

VRRP

Message

Changing priority to 255 for virtual router with VRID 1 on interface 1/0/1

Changing priority to 100 for virtual router with VRID 1 on interface 1/0/1 vrrpPacketValidate: Invalid TTL

Cause

When the router is configured with the address being used as the virtual router ID, the router’s priority is automatically set to the maximum value to ensure that the address owner becomes the VRRP master.

When the router is no longer the address owner, Switch CLI reverts the router’s priority to the default.

VRRP ignored an incoming message whose time to live (TTL) in the IP header was not

255.

Table 8-42: ARP Log Message

Component

ARP

Message Cause

ARP received mapping for IP address xxx to MAC address yyy. This IP address may be configured on two stations.

When we receive an ARP response with different MAC address from another station with the same IP address as ours. This might be a case of misconfiguration.

Table 8-43: RIP Log Message

Component

RIP

Message

RIP : discard response from xxx via unexpected interface

Cause

When RIP response is received with a source address not matching the incoming interface’s subnet.

Table 8-44: DHCP6 Log Message

Component

DHCP6

Message Cause relay_to_server: Cannot relay to relay server Relay is enabled but neither the outgoing intf xxx: not IPv6 enabled interface nor the server IP address is specified.



Multicast

Table 8-45: Cache Log Messages

Component

Cache

Cache

Message

Out of memory when creating entry.

Out of memory when creating cache.

Cause

When we run out of memory while creating a new cache (MFC) entry

When we run out of memory while creating the cache itself

Table 8-46: IGMP Log Messages

Component

IGMP

IGMP

IGMP

Message

Error creating IGMP pipe

Error opening IGMP pipe

Error creating IGMP data pipe

Error opening IGMP data pipe

Error getting memory for source record

IGMP Failed getting memory for new group

Cause

When we fail to create / open IGMP pipe for

Mcast control messages

When we fail to create / open IGMP data pipe for Mcast data messages

When we are unable to allocate memory for a source record in the received IGMP V3 report

When we are unable to allocate memory for a group record in the received IGMP V3/V2/

V1 report

Table 8-47: IGMP-Proxy Log Messages

Component

IGMP-Proxy

IGMP-Proxy

Message

Error getting memory for igmp host group record

Error getting memory for source record

Cause

When we are unable to allocate memory for the IGMP group record in the Host (Proxy) table

When we are unable to allocate memory for the IGMP source record in the Host (Proxy) table



Table 8-48: PIM-SM Log Messages

Component

PIM-SM

PIM-SM

PIM-SM

PIM-SM

PIM_SM

PIM-SM

Message Cause

PIM-SM not initialized

Unable to take xxx semaphore

This message arises when trying to activate pimsm interfaces or receiving pimsm packets when pimsm component is not initialized.

This message is logged when failed to acquire semaphore to access source list or group list or candidate Rp list or virtual interface list. The xxx specifies the list for which the access is denied.

Warning : Could not send packet type xxx

(pimsm packet type) on rtrIfNum add_kernel_cache : memory allocation failed this warning is logged when failed to send a pimsm control packet on the specified router interface.

This message is logged when there is insufficient memory to add an mroute entry into cache.

Config error. Trying to add static RP.

Dynamic RP with same ip addr exists

Router learns RP-group mapping through

Bootstrap messages received.This message pops when the static RP is configured which conflicts the mapping learnt dynamically through Bootstrap messages.

Inner xxx(source/group) address of register message is invalid

This log message appears when a register message is received with invalid inner ip source or group address.

Table 8-49: PIM-DM Log Messages

Component

PIM-DM

PIM-DM

PIM-DM

PIM-DM

Message Cause

Out of memory when creating xxx This message is logged when there is insufficient memory to accommodate a new neighbor/(S,G) Entry, Prune, Graft, Join etc.

Error entry->ll_xxx LL creation error This message is logged when the SLL creation is Failed.

pim_interface_set: Could not give taskSema This message is logged when Task synchronization Semaphore release fails.

Error initializing CACHE This message is logged when the PIM-DM

(S,G) entry Cache table initialization fails.



Table 8-49: PIM-DM Log Messages

Component

PIM-DM

Message

Error creating PIM-DM pipe

Cause

This message is logged when the PIM-DM

Pipe (that receives control messages) creation fails.

Table 8-50: DVMRP Log Messages

Component

DVMRP

DVMRP

DVMRP

DVMRP

DVMRP

Message Cause dvmrp_send_graft: failed getting memory for Failed to allocate memory while sending a graft graft dvmrp_register_neighbor: failed getting memory for nbr dvmrp_recv_prune: failed getting memory for prune

Failed to allocate memory while registering a neighbor

Failed to allocate memory while receiving a prune dvmrp_new_route: failed getting memory for Failed to get memory for a new route entry route dvmrp_prepare_routes: failed getting memory for dvmrp_ann_rt

Failed to get memory while announcing a new route entry

Stacking

Table 8-51: EDB Log Message

Component

EDB

Message

EDB Callback: Unit Join: <num>.

Technologies

Cause

Unit <num> has joined the stack.

Table 8-52: System General Error Messages

Component

OS

Message

Invalid USP unit = x, slot = x, port =x

Cause

A port was not able to be translated correctly during the receive.




Component

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

Message Cause

In hapiBroadSystemMacAddress call to

'bcm_l2_addr_add' - FAILED : x

Failed installing mirror action - rest of the policy applied successfully

Failed to add an L2 address to the MAC table. This should only happen when a hash collision occurs or the table is full.

A previously configured probe port is not being used in the policy. The release notes state that only a single probe port can be configured

Policy x does not contain rule x The rule was not added to the policy due to a discrepancy in the rule count for this specific policy . Additionally, the message can be displayed when an old rule is being modified, but the old rule is not in the policy

ERROR: policy x, tmpPolicy x, size x, data x x x x x x x x

An issue installing the policy due to a possible duplicate hash

ACL x not found in internal table

ACL internal table overflow

Attempting to delete a non-existent ACL

Attempting to add an ACL to a full table

In hapiBroadQosCosQueueConfig, Failed to configure minimum bandwidth. Available

Attempting to configure the bandwidth beyond it’s capabilities bandwidth x

USL: failed to put sync response on queue A response to a sync request was not enqueued. This could indicate that a previous sync request was received after it was timed out

USL: failed to sync ipmc table on unit=x usl_task_ipmc_msg_send(): failed to send with x

Either the transport failed or the message was dropped

Either the transport failed or the message was dropped

USL: No available entries in the STG table The Spanning Tree Group table is full in

USL

USL: failed to sync stg table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.

A synchronization retry will be issued

USL: A Trunk doesn't exist in USL

USL: A Trunk being created by bcmx already existed in USL

Attempting to modify a Trunk that doesn’t exist

Possible synchronization issue between the application, hardware, and sync layer

USL: A Trunk being destroyed doesn't exist in USL

Possible synchronization issue between the application, hardware, and sync layer.




Component

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

OS

Message Cause

USL: A Trunk being set doesn't exist in USL Possible synchronization issue between the application, hardware, and sync layer.

USL: failed to sync trunk table on unit=x

USL: Mcast entry not found on a join

Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


Possible synchronization issue between the application, hardware, and sync layer

USL: Mcast entry not found on a leave Possible synchronization issue between the application, hardware, and sync layer

USL: failed to sync dvlan data on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


USL: failed to sync policy table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


USL: failed to sync VLAN table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


Invalid LAG id x Possible synchronization issue between the

BCM driver and HAPI

Invalid uport calculated from the BCM uport bcmx_l2_addr->lport = x

Uport not valid from BCM driver.

Invalid USP calculated from the BCM uport\nbcmx_l2_addr->lport = x

Unable to insert route R/P

Unable to Insert host H

USP not able to be calculated from the learn event for BCM driver.

Route ‘R’ with prefix ‘P’ could not be inserted in the hardware route table. A retry will be issued.

Host ‘H’ could not be inserted in hardware host table. A retry will be issued.

USL: failed to sync L3 Intf table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


USL: failed to sync L3 Host table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


USL: failed to sync L3 Route table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.





Component

OS

OS

OS

Message Cause

USL: failed to sync initiator table on unit=x Could not synchronize unit x due to a transport failure or API issue on remote unit.


USL: failed to sync terminator table on unit=x



USL: failed to sync ip-multicast table on unit=x



O/S Support

Table 8-53: OSAPI Log Messages

Component

OSAPI

OSAPI

OSAPI

OSAPI

OSAPI

OSAPI

Message Cause ftruncate failed – File resides on a read-only file system.

ftruncate is called to correctly set the file’s size in the file system after a write. The file system is R/W so this msg indicates the file system may be corrupted.

ftruncate failed – File is open for reading only.

ftruncate is called to correctly set the file’s size in the file system after a write. The file is opened for R/W so this msg indicates the file system may be corrupted.

ftruncate failed – File descriptor refers to a file on which this operation is impossible.

ftruncate failed – Returned an unknown code in errno.

ftruncate is called to correctly set the file’s size in the file system after a write. This msg indicates the file system may be corrupted.

ftruncate is called to correctly set the file’s size in the file system after a write. This msg indicates the file system may be corrupted.

ping: bad host!

The address requested to ping can not be converted to an Internet address.

osapiTaskDelete: Failed for (XX) error YYY The requested task can not be deleted because: the requested deletion is called from an ISR, the task is already deleted, or the task ID is invalid.


Table 8-53: OSAPI Log Messages (continued)

Component

OSAPI

Message osapiCleanupIf: NetIPGet

OSAPI osapiCleanupIf: NetMaskGet

OSAPI

OSAPI osapiCleanupIf: NetIpDel osapiSemaTake failed


Cause

During the call to remove the interface from the route table, the attempt to get an ipv4 interface address from the stack failed.

During the call to remove the interface from the route table ,the attempt to get the ipv4 interface mask from the stack failed.

During the call to remove the interface from the route table, the attempt to delete the primary ipv4 address from the stack failed.

The requested semaphore can not be taken because: the call is made from an ISR or the semaphore ID is invalid.

Log Messages v1.0, July 2009

8-27


Chapter 9

Captive Portal Commands

The Captive Portal feature is a software implementation that blocks clients from accessing the network until user verification has been established. Verification can be configured to allow access for both guest and authenticated users. Authenticated users must be validated against a database of authorized Captive Portal users before access is granted.

The Authentication server supports both HTTP and HTTPS web connections. In addition, Captive

Portal can be configured to use an optional HTTP port (in support of HTTP Proxy networks). If configured, this additional port is then used exclusively by Captive Portal. Note that this optional port is in addition to the standard HTTP port 80 which is currently being used for all other web traffic.

Capitve Portal Global Commands

The commands in this section are related to Captive Portal Global configurations.

captive-portal

Use this command to enter the captive portal configuration mode.

Format

Mode captive-portal

Global Configuration mode enable

Use this command to globally enable captive portal.

Default

Format

Mode disabled enable

Captive Portal Configuration mode

Captive Portal Commands 9-1 v1.0, July 2009


no enable

Use this command to globally disable captive portal.

Default

Format

Mode disabled no enable

Captive Portal Configuration mode http port

Use this command to configure an additional HTTP port for captive portal to monitor. The valid range is from 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

80 http port <0-65535>

Captive Portal Configuration mode no http port

Use this command to reset the HTTP port to the default number 80.

Format

Mode no http port

Captive Portal Configuration mode https port

Use this command to configure an additional HTTPS port for captive portal to monitor. The valid range is from 0 to 65535.

Default

Format

Mode

443 https port <0-65535>




no https port

Use this command to reset the HTTPs port to the default HTTPS port 443.

Format

Mode no https port

Captive Portal Configuration mode authentication timeout

Use this command to configure the authentication timeout. If the user does not enter valid credentials within this time limit, the authentication page needs to be served again in order for the client to gain access to the network.

Default

Format

Mode

300 authentication timeout <60-600>

Captive Portal Configuration mode no authentication timeout

Use this command to reset the authentication timeout to the default.

Default

Format

Mode

300 no authentication timeout

Captive Portal Configuration mode show captive-portal

Use this command to display the status of the captive portal feature.

Format

Mode show captive-portal

Privileged EXEC mode

Captive Portal Commands v1.0, July 2009

9-3


Term Definition

Administrative

Mode

The administrative mode is enabled or disabled.

Operational Status The Operational status is enabled or disabled.

Disable Reason

CP IP Address

If the operational status is disabled. This field shows the reason why the operational is disabled.

It is the captive portal server IP address.

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal

Administrative Mode....................... Disabled

Operational Status........................ Disabled

Disable Reason............................ Administrator Disabled

CP IP Address................. 1.2.3.4

show captive-portal status

Use this command to report the status of all captive portal instances in the system.

Format

Mode show captive-portal status


Term Definition

Additional HTTP

Port

Additional HTTP

Secure Port

The additional HTTP port for captive portal to monitor. Captive portal only monitors port 80 by default.

The additional HTTPs port for captive portal to monitor. Captive portal only monitors port 443 by default.

Peer Switch Statistics Reporting Interval

Authentication

Timeout

The timeout for the authentication page to be served again.

Supported Captive The maximum number of captive portal instances supported by switch. It supports up

Portals to 10 instances.

Configured Captive The number of created captive portal instances.

Portals



Term Definition

Active Captive

Portals

The number of active captive portal instances.

System Supported

Users

The maximum number of user can be authenticated.

Local Supported

Users

The maximum number of local user can be created.

Authenticated

Users

The number of the authenticated users.

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal status

Additional HTTP Port........................... 0

Additional HTTP Secure Port.................... 0

Peer Switch Statistics Reporting Interval...... 120

Authentication Timeout......................... 300

Supported Captive Portals...................... 10

Configured Captive Portals..................... 1

Active Captive Portals......................... 0

System Supported Users......................... 1024

Local Supported Users.......................... 128

Authenticated Users............................ 0

Captive Portal Configuration Commands

The commands in this section are related to captive portal configurations.

configuration (Captive Portal)

Use this command to enter the captive portal instance mode. The captive portal configuration identified by CP ID 1 is the default CP configuration. The system supports a total of ten CP configurations.

Format

Mode configuration < 1-10 >




no configuration

Use this command to to delete a CP configuration. The default configuration cannot be deleted.

Format

Mode no configuration < 1-10 >

Captive Portal Configuration mode enable (Instance)

Use this command to enable a captive portal configuration.

Default

Format

Mode enable enable

Captive Portal Instance mode no enable

Use this command to disable a configuration.

Defaul

Format

Mode enable no enable

Captive Portal Instance mode name

Use this command to configure the name for a captive portal configuration. The cp-name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters in length.

Default

Format

Mode

Configuration 1 has the name “Default” by default. All other configurations

have no name by default.

name < cp-name>

Captive Portal Instance mode



no name

Use this command to remove a configuration name.

Format

Mode no name

Captive Portal Instance mode protocol

Use this command to configure the protocol mode for a captive portal configuration. The default protocol is http.

Default

Format

Mode http protocol { http | https }

Captive Portal Instance mode verification

Use this command to configure the verification mode for a captive portal configuration. User verification can be configured to allow access for guest users; users that do not have assigned user names and passwords. User verification can also be configured to allow access for authenticated users. Authenticated users are required to enter a valid user name and password that must first be validated against the local database or a RADIUS server. Network access is granted once user verification has been confirmed.

Default

Format

Mode guest verification { guest | local | radius }



9-7


group

Use this command to configure a group ID for this captive portal configuration. If a group number is configured, the user entry (Local or RADIUS) must be configured with the ame name and the group to authenticate to this captive portal instance. The group ID must be xist first. You can use the command “user group <1-10>” to create a group ID. The default group ID is 1 for a captive portal configuration.

Default

Format

Mode

1 group <1-10>

Captive Portal Instance mode no group

Use this command to reset the group number to the default.

Default

Format

Mode

1 no group <1-10>

Captive Portal Instance mode redirect (Captive Portal)

Use this command to enable the redirect mode for a captive portal configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to disable redirect mode.

Default

Format

Mode disable redirect

Captive Portal Instance mode no redirect

Use this command to disable redirect mode.



Format

Mode no redirect

Captive Portal Instance mode redirect-url

Use this command to configure the redirect URL for a captive portal configuration. The url is the

URL for redirection which can be up to 512 characters in length.

Format

Mode redirect-url url

Captive Portal Instance mode max-bandwidth-down

Use this command configures the maximum rate at which a client can receive data from the network. The rate is in bits per seconds. 0 indicates limit not enforced.

Default

Format

Mode

0 max-bandwidth-down <0-536870911>

Captive Portal Instance mode no max-bandwidth-down

Use this command to reset the maximum rate to the default.

Format

Mode no max-bandwidth-down

Captive Portal Instance mode max-bandwidth-up

Use this command to configure the maximum rate at which a client can send data into the network. The rate is in bits per seconds. 0 indicates limit not enforced.


9-9


Default

Format

Mode

0 max-bandwidth-up <0-536870911>

Captive Portal Instance mode no max-bandwidth-up

Use this command to reset the maximum rate to the default .

Format

Mode no max-bandwidth-up

Captive Portal Instance mode max-input-octets

Use this command to configure the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transmit.

After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. The number of octets is in bytes. 0 indicates limit not enforced.

Default

Format

Mode

0 max-input-octets <0-4294967295>

Captive Portal Instance mode no max-input-octets

Use this command to reset the limit to the default.

Format

Mode no max-input-octets



9-10


max-output-octets

Use this command to configure the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to receive.

After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. The number of octets is in bytes. 0 indicates limit not enforced Use the “no”.

Default

Format

Mode

0 max-output-octets <0-4294967295>

Captive Portal Instance mode no max-output-octets


Format

Mode no max-output-octets

Captive Portal Instance mode max-total-octets

Use this command to configure the maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transfer, i.e., the sum of octets transmitted and received. After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. The number of t otal octets is in bytes. 0 indicates limit not enforced. Use the

“no” form of this command to reset the limit to the default.

Default

Format

Mode

0 max-total-octets <0-4294967295>

Captive Portal Instance mode no max-total-octets


Default 0



Format

Mode max-total-octets <0-4294967295>

Captive Portal Instance mode session-timeout (Captive Portal)

Use this command to configure the session timeout for a captive portal configuration.

After this limit has been reached, the user will be disconnected. Timeout is time in seconds. 0 indicates timeout not enforced.

Default

Format

Mode

0 session-timeout <0-86400>

Captive Portal Instance mode no session-timeout

Use this command to reset the session timeout to the default.

Format

Mode session-timeout <0-86400>

Captive Portal Instance mode idle-timeout

Use this command to configure the idle timeout for a captive portal configuration. 0 indicates timeout not enforced. After an idle session has been reached this, the user will be disconnected .

Default

Format

Mode

0 idle-timeout <0-900>

Captive Portal Instance mode no idle-timeout

Use this command to reset the idle timeout to the default.


9-12


Format

Mode no idle-timeout

Captive Portal Instance mode locale

This command is not intended to be a user command. The administrator must use the WEB UI to create and customize captive portal web content. This command is primarily used by the show running-config command and process as it provides the ability to save and restore configurations using a text based format.

Default

Format

Mode

1 locale <1-5>

Captive Portal Instance mode no locale

This command is intended to delete a locale. The default locale cannot be deleted.

Format

Mode no locale <1-5>

Captive Portal Instance mode interface (Captive Portal)

Use this command to associate an interface with a captive portal configuration.

Format

Mode interface <unit/slot/port>

Captive Portal Instance Config mode no interface

Use this command to remove an association with a captive portal configuration.



Format

Mode no interface <unit/slot/port>

Captive Portal Instance Config mode block

Use this command to block all traffic for a captive portal configuration. The administrator can block access to a captive portal configuration. When an instance is blocked no client traffic is allowed through any interfaces associated with that captive portal configuration. Blocking a captive portal instance is a temporary command executed by the administrator and not saved in the configuration.

Default

Format

Mode no block block

Captive Portal Instance mode no block

Use this command to unblock traffic.

Format

Mode no block


Captive Portal Status Commands

This section describes commands that return captive portal status.

show captive-portal configuration

Use this command to display the operational status of each captive portal configuration.



Format

Mode show captive-portal configuration <1-10>


Term Definition

CP ID The captive portal ID

CP Name The captive portal instance name

Operational Status The operational status is enabled or disabled.

Disable Reason

Blocked Status

Authenticated

Users

If the operational status is disabled, this field shows the reason.

Blocked status shows if this captive portal instance block all traffic.

The authenticated users by this captive portal instance.

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal configuration 1

CP ID..................................... 1

CP Name................................... cp1


Disable Reason............................ Administrator Disabled

Blocked Status............................ Not Blocked

Authenticated Users....................... 0 show captive-portal configuration interface

Use this command to display information about all interfaces assigned to a captive portal configuration or about a specific interface assigned to a captive portal configuration. The < 1-10 > is the captive portal ID. If you do not specify an interface number, all the interfaces assigned to the captive portal configuration will be displayed.

Format

Mode show captive-portal configuration <1-10> interface [ <unit/slot/ port> ]




Term Definition

CP ID

CP Name

Interface

Interface

Description

The captive portal ID.

The captive portal name.

The interface associated with the CP ID

The interface description

Operational Status The operational status is enabled or disabled.

Disable Reason The reason if the operational status is disabled.

Block Status It shows this captive portal instance block all traffic or not.

If the interface is specified. The following term will be displayed.

Term

Authenticated users

Definition

The number of authenticated users associated with the CP ID.

Example

(Switch)#show captive-portal configuration 1 interface

CP ID..................................... 1

CP Name................................... cp1

Operational Block

Interface Interface Description Status Status

Unit:1Slot:0Port:1 Disabled Blocked

(Switch)#show captive-portal configuration 1 interface 1/0/1

CP ID..................................... 1

CP Name................................... cp1

Interface................................. 1/0/1

Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigab


Disable Reason............................ Interface Not Attached

Block Status.............................. Not Blocked

Authenticated Users....................... 0


9-16


show captive-portal configuration status

Use this command to display information about all configured captive portal configurations or about a specific captive portal configuration. The < 1-10 > is captive portal ID. If <1-10> is not entered, all the configurations are displayed.

Format

Mode show captive-portal configuration [ <1-10> ] status


Term Definition

CP ID

CP Name

Mode

Protocol Mode

The captive portal instance ID

The captive portal instance name

The operational mode is enabled or disabled.

The protocol mode is https or http.

Verification Mode The user verification mode has three modes: guest , local and radius. The default is guest mode.

If the interface is specified, the following terms are displayed.

Term Definition

Group Name The name of the group associated with this captive portal instance.

Redirect URL Mode The redirect mode for this captive portal instance

Redirect URL The redirect URL is up to 512 characters.

Session Timeout Logout once session timeout is reached (seconds).

Idle Timeout

Max Bandwidth

Down

Logout once idle timeout is reached (seconds).

Max Bandwidth Up Maximum client transmit rate (b/s). Limits the bandwidth at which the client can send data into the network.

Maximum client receive rate (b/s). Limits the bandwidth at which the client can receive data from the network.

Max Input Octets Maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transmit.After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected.

Max Output Octets Maximum number of octets the user is allowed to receive. After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected.

Max Total Octets Maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transfer (sumof octets transmitted and received). After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected.



Example

(switch)#show captive-portal configuration status

CP ID CP Name Mode Protocol Verification

----- ---------- -------- -------- ------------

1 cp1 Enable https Guest

2 cp2 Enable http Local

3 cp3 Disable https Guest

(switch)#show captive-portal configuration 1 status

CP ID.......................................... 1

CP Name........................................ cp1

Mode........................................... Enabled

Protocol Mode.................................. https

Verification Mode.............................. Guest

Group Name..................................... group123

Redirect URL Mode.............................. Enabled

Redirect URL................................... www.cnn.com

Session Timeout (seconds)...................... 86400

Idle Timeout (seconds)......................... 600

Max Bandwidth Up (bytes/sec)................... 0

Max Bandwidth Down (bytes/sec)................. 0

Max Input Octets (bytes)....................... 0

Max Output Octets (bytes)...................... 0

Max Total Octets (bytes)....................... 0 show captive-portal configuration locales

Use this command to display locales associated with a specific captive portal configuration.

<1-

10> is captive port ID.

Format

Mode show captive-portal configuration <1-10> locales


Example

(switch)#show captive-portal configuration 1 locales

Locale Code

---------------

En



show captive-portal trapflags

Use this command to display which captive portal traps are enabled.

Format

Mode show captive-portal trapflags


Example

(switch)#show captive-portal trapflags

Client Authentication Failure Traps............ Disable

Client Connection Traps........................ Disable

Client Database Full Traps..................... Disable

Client Disconnection Traps..................... Disable

Captive Portal Client Connection Commands

This section describes captive portal client connection commands.

show captive-portal client status

Use this command to display client connection details or a connection summary for connected captive portal users.

macaddr is Client MAC address. If no macaddr is entered, all the client status will be displayed.

Format

Mode show captive-portal client [ macaddr ] status


Term Definition

Client MAC

Address

The MAC address of the authenticated user

Client IP Address The IP address of the authenticated user

Protocol The protocol the user is using to access the network.

Verification

Session Time

The verification mode for this client.

The current session time since the client is authenticated.



If the macaddr is specified, the following terms are displayed.

Term

CP ID

CP Name

Interface

Interface

Description

User Name

Definition

The captive portal ID associated with the client

The captive portal name associated with the client

The interface on which the client authenticated.


The name of the client who is authenticated.

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal client status

Client MAC Address Client IP Address Protocol Verification Session

Time

----------------- ---------------- -------- ------------ -----

0002.BC00.1290 10.254.96.47 https Local 0d:00:01:20

0002.BC00.1291 10.254.96.48 https Local 0d:00:05:20

0002.BC00.1292 10.254.96.49 https Radius 0d:00:00:20

(switch) #show captive-portal client 0002.BC00.1290 status

Client MAC Address........................ 0002.BC00.1290

Client IP Address......................... 10.254.96.47

Protocol Mode............................. https

Verification Mode......................... Local

CP ID..................................... 1

CP Name................................... cp1

Interface................................. 1/0/1

Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit - Level

User Name................................. user123

Session Time.............................. 0d:00:00:13 show captive-portal client statistics

Use this command to display the statistics for a specific captive portal client. The macaddr is client MAC address.

Format

Mode show captive-portal client macaddr statistics




Term Definition

Client MAC address

The MAC address of the authenticated client

Bytes Received The number of bytes received from the client

Bytes Transmitted The number of bytes transmitted to the client

Packets Received The number of packets received from the client

Packets

Transmitted

The number of packets transmitted from the client

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal client 0102.0304.0506 statistics

Client MAC Address........................ 0002.bc00.1290

Bytes Received............................ 0

Bytes Transmitted......................... 0

Packets Received.......................... 0

Packets Transmitted....................... 0 show captive-portal interface client status

Use this command to display information about clients authenticated on all interfaces or a specific interface

Format

Mode show captive-portal interface [ <unit/slot/port>] client status


Term

Client Intf

Client Intf

Descripiton

MAC Address

IP Address

Definition

Interface on which the clients are authenticated.


The MAC address of the authenticated user.

The IP address of the authenticated user.

If the interface is specified, the following terms are displayed.

Term

CP ID

CP Name

Protocol

Definition

The ID of the captive portal associated with the client

The name of the captive portal associated with the client

The protocol the client is using


9-21


Term

Verification

Definition

The user verification mode

Example

(switch) #show captive-portal interface client status

Client Client

------ ----------------------------------- ----------------- -

--------------

1/0/1 Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit 0002.BC00.1290 10.254.96.47



(switch) #show captive-portal interface 1/0/1 client status

Interface................................. 1/0/1

Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit

Client Client

MAC Address IP Address CP ID CP Name Protocol Verification

----------------- --------------- ----- -------------- ------

-- -----------show captive-portal configuration client status

Use this command to display the clients authenticated to all captive portal configurations or a to specific configuration. <1-10> is the captive portal ID .

Format

Mode show captive-portal configuration [ < 1-10 > ] client status


Term Definition

CP ID

CP Name

The captive portal ID

The captive portal name

Client MAC

Address

The MAC address of the client associated with the captive portal instance.

Client IP Address The IP address of the client associated with the captive portal instance

Interface The interface on which the client is authenticated.



If the CP ID is specified, the following terms are displayed.

Term

Interface

Description

Definition

The description of the interace

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal configuration client status

CP ID CP Name Client MAC Address Client IP Address Interface

----- ------- ------------------ ----------------- ---------

1 cp1 0002.BC00.1290 10.254.96.47 1/0/1

2 cp2 0002.BC00.1292 10.254.96.49 1/0/3

3 cp3 0002.BC00.1293 10.254.96.50 1/0/4

(switch)#show captive-portal configuration 1 client status

CP ID..................................... 1

CP Name................................... cp1

Client Client

MAC Address IP Address Interface Interface Description

-------------- ------------- --------- ----------------------

0002.BC00.1290 10.254.96.47 1/0/1 Unit:1 Slot:0 Port:1 Gigabit

0002.BC00.1291 10.254.96.48 1/0/2 Unit:1 Slot:0 Port:2 Gigabit captive-portal client deauthenticate

Use this command to deauthenticate a specific captive portal client. The macaddr is the

Client MAC address.

Format

Mode captive-portal client deauthenticate macaddr


Captive Portal Interface Commands

The following section describes captive portal interface commands.

show captive-portal interface configuration status

Use this command to display the interface to configuration assignments for all captive portal configurations or for a specific configuration.

<1-10> is the captive portal ID.



Format

Mode show captive-portal interface configuration [ <1-10>] status


Term

CP ID

CP Name

Interface

Interface

Description

Type

Definition

The captive portal ID

The captive portal name

The interface associated with the CP ID.

The description of the interface

The type of the interface

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal interface configuration status

CP ID CP Name Interface Interface Description Type

(switch) #show captive-portal interface configuration 1 status

CP ID..................................... 1

CP Name................................... cp1

Interface Interface Description Type

--------- --------------------------------- --------

1/0/1 Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigabit Physical

Captive Portal Local User Commands

The following section describes captive portal local user commands.

user password

Use this command to create a local user or change the password for an existing user. The user-id is user ID in the range of 1-128. The password is the user passord in the range of 8-64 characters.

You can also enter encrypted password using the parameter encrypted.



Format

Mode user user-id password { password | encrypted enc-password }

Captive Portal Configuration mode no user

Use this command to delete a user from the local user database. If the user has an existing session, it is disconnected.

Format

Mode no user user-id <1-128>

Captive Portal Configuration mode user name

Use this command to modify the user name for a local captive portal user. <1-128> is the user ID and the name is the user name in the range of 1-32 characters. The local user must be exist before execute this command. You can create the local user using user password first.

Format

Mode user <1-128> name name

Captive Portal Configuration mode user group

Use this command to associate a group with a captive portal user. A user must be associated with at least one group so the last group cannot be dis-associated. <1-128> is the user ID and <1-10> is the group ID.

Default

Format

Mode

1 user < 1-128 > group < 1-10 >




no user group

Use this command to dis-associate a group and user.

Format

Mode no user <1-128> group <1-10>

Captive Portal Configuration mode user session-timeout

Use this command to set the session timeout value for a captive portal user. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the session timeout to the default. The range of session timeout is 0-86400.

0 indicates use global configuration.

t

Defaul

Format

Mode

0 user <1-128> session-timeout timeout

Captive Portal Configuration mode no user session-timeout

Use this command to reset the session timeout to the default.

Format

Mode no user <1-128> session-timeout

C aptive Portal Configuration mode user idle-timeout

Use this command to set the session idle timeout value for a captive portal user. <1-128> is the user ID. The range of idle timeout is 0-900 seconds. 0 indicates use global configuration.

Default

Format

Mode

0 user <1-128> idle-timeout timeout




no user idle-timeout

Use this command to reset the idle timeout to the default value.

Format

Mode no user <1-128> idle-timeout timeout

Captive Portal Configuration mode user max-bandwidth-down

Use this command to configure the bandwidth at which the client can receive data from the network. <1-128> is the user ID. The range of bps is <0-536870911> bps. 0 indicates use global configuration.

Default

Format

Mode

0 user < 1-128 > max-bandwidth-down bps

Captive Portal Configuration mode no user max-bandwidth-down


Format

Mode no user < 1-128 > max-bandwidth-down

Captive Portal Configuration mode user max-bandwidth-up

Use this command to configure the bandwidth at which the client can send data into the Network.

<1-128> is the user ID . The range of bps is <0-536870911> bps. 0 indicates use global configuration.

Default

Format

Mode

0 user < 1-128 > max-bandwidth-up bps




no user max-bandwidth-up


Format

Mode no user < 1-128 > max-bandwidth-up

Captive Portal Configuration mode user max-input-octets

Use this command to limit the number of octets the user is allowed to transmit. After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. < 1-128 > is the user ID. The range of octets is 0-

4294967295. 0 indicates to use the global limit.

Default

Format

Mode

0 user <1-128> max-input-octets octets

Captive Portal Configuration mode no user max-input-octets


Format

Mode no user <1-128> max-input-octets

Captive Portal Configuration mode user max-output-octets

Use this command to limit the number of octets the user is allowed to receive. After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. The < 1-128 > is the user ID. The range of the octets is

0 – 4294967295. 0 indicates to use the global limit.

Default

Format

Mode

0 user <1-128> max-output-octets octets




no user max-output-octets


Default

Format

Mode

0 no user <1-128> max-output-octets

Captive Portal Configuration mode user max-total-octets

Use this command to limit the number of bytes the user is allowed to transmit and receive. The maximum number of octets is the sum of octets transmitted and received. After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. <1-128> is the user ID. The range of octets is 0-

4294967295. 0 indicates to use the global limit .Use the “no” form of this command to reset the limit to the default.

Default

Format

Mode

0 user <1-128> max-total-octets octets

Captive Portal Configuration mode no user max-total-octets


Format

Mode no user <1-128> max-total-octets

Captive Portal Configuration mode show captive-portal user

Use this command to display all configured users or a specific user in the captive portal local user database.



Format

Mode show captive-portal user [ <1-128> ]


Term Definition

User ID The user ID

User Name

Idle Timeout

The user name

Session Timeout Logout once session timeout is reached (seconds). If the value is 0 then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Logout once idle timeout is reached (seconds). If the attribute is 0 then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Group ID The group ID associated with the user

Group Name The group name

If the user ID is specified, the following terms are displayed.

Term Definition

Password

Configured

If the password is configured.

Max Bandwidth Up

(bytes/sec)

Maximum client transmit rate(b/s). Limits the bandwidth at which the client can send data into the network. If the value is 0 then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Max Bandwidth

Down (bytes/sec)

Maximum client receive rate (b/s). Limits the bandwidth at which the client can receive data from the network. If the value is 0 or then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Max Input Octets

(bytes)

Maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transmit.After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. If the value is 0 then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Max Output Octets

(bytes)

Maximum number of octets the user is allowed to receive. After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. If the attribute is 0 then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Max Total Octets

(bytes)

Maximum number of octets the user is allowed to transfer (sum of octets transmitted and received). After this limit has been reached the user will be disconnected. If the value is 0 then use the value configured for the captive portal.

Example

(switch)#show captive-portal user



Session Idle

------- -------------- -------- -------- -------- -----------

1 user123 10 13 1 Default

2 user234 0 0 1 Default

(switch)#show captive-portal user 1

User ID........................................ 1

User Name...................................... user123

Password Configured............................ Yes

Session Timeout................................ 0

Idle Timeout................................... 0

Max Bandwidth Up (bytes/sec)................... 0

Max Bandwidth Down (bytes/sec)................. 0

Max Input Octets (bytes)....................... 0

Max Output Octets (bytes)...................... 0

Max Total Octets (bytes)....................... 0

Group ID Group Name

-------- --------------------------------

1 Default

2 group2 clear captive-portal users

Use this command to delete all captive portal user entries.

Format

Mode clear captive-portal users


Captive Portal User Group Commands

The following section describes captive portal user group commands.

user group (Create)

Use this command to create a user group. User group 1 is created by default and cannot be deleted.



Default

Format

Mode

1 user group <1-10>

Captive Portal Configuration mode no user group

Use this command to delete a user group. The default user group (1) cannot be deleted.

Format

Mode user group <1-10>

Captive Portal Configuration mode user group name

Use this command to configure a group name. <1-10> is the user group ID. The name can be a string up to 32 characters.

Format

Mode user group <1-10> name name

Captive Portal Configuration mode user group rename

Use this command to change a group's ID to a different group ID.

Format

Mode user group group-id rename new-group-id



9-32

Chapter 10

Command List

{deny | permit} (IP ACL) ...................................................................................................................................5-40

{deny | permit} (IPv6) .........................................................................................................................................5-45

{deny | permit} (MAC ACL) ............................................................................................................................5-34 aaa authentication dot1x .....................................................................................................................................7-39 aaa authentication login .......................................................................................................................................7-37 aaa authenticaton enable .....................................................................................................................................7-38 access-list .................................................................................................................................................................5-37 acl-trapflags .............................................................................................................................................................5-42 addport ......................................................................................................................................................................3-91 arp .................................................................................................................................................................................4-2 arp access-list ........................................................................................................................................................3-134 arp cachesize .............................................................................................................................................................4-3 arp dynamicrenew ...................................................................................................................................................4-3 arp purge .....................................................................................................................................................................4-4 arp resptime ...............................................................................................................................................................4-4 arp retries ....................................................................................................................................................................4-4 arp timeout .................................................................................................................................................................4-5 assign-queue ............................................................................................................................................................5-20 authentication timeout ...........................................................................................................................................9-3 authorization network radius .............................................................................................................................7-52 auto-negotiate ...........................................................................................................................................................3-3 auto-negotiate all .....................................................................................................................................................3-4 auto-voip ...................................................................................................................................................................5-49 auto-voip all ............................................................................................................................................................5-48 block ..........................................................................................................................................................................9-14 boot autoinstall auto-save .....................................................................................................................................6-3 boot autoinstall retry-count ..................................................................................................................................6-4 boot autoinstall start ...............................................................................................................................................6-3 boot autoinstall stop ................................................................................................................................................6-3 boot system ................................................................................................................................................................6-5 bootfile ......................................................................................................................................................................6-45 bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode ...............................................................................................................................4-25 bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount ...........................................................................................................................4-25 bootpdhcprelay minwaittime .............................................................................................................................4-26

Command List 10-1 v1.0, July 2009


bridge aging-time ................................................................................................................................................3-191 cablestatus ................................................................................................................................................................6-83 captive-portal client deauthenticate .................................................................................................................9-23 captive-portal ............................................................................................................................................................9-1 capture wrap ............................................................................................................................................................6-62 class ............................................................................................................................................................................5-21 class-map ..................................................................................................................................................................5-10 class-map rename ..................................................................................................................................................5-11 classofservice dot1p-mapping .............................................................................................................................5-2 classofservice ip-dscp-mapping ..........................................................................................................................5-2 classofservice trust ..................................................................................................................................................5-3 clear arp-cache ..........................................................................................................................................................4-5 clear arp-switch ........................................................................................................................................................4-6 clear captive-portal users ....................................................................................................................................9-31 clear config ..............................................................................................................................................................6-27 clear counters ..........................................................................................................................................................6-27 clear dot1x statistics .............................................................................................................................................3-63 clear host ..................................................................................................................................................................6-59 clear igmpsnooping ...............................................................................................................................................6-28 clear ip arp inspection statistics ......................................................................................................................3-137 clear ip dhcp binding ............................................................................................................................................6-51 clear ip dhcp conflict ............................................................................................................................................6-51 clear ip dhcp server statistics .............................................................................................................................6-51 clear ip dhcp snooping binding .......................................................................................................................3-128 clear ip dhcp snooping statistics .....................................................................................................................3-128 clear ip route all .....................................................................................................................................................4-13 clear isdp counters ...............................................................................................................................................3-195 clear isdp table ......................................................................................................................................................3-195 clear lldp remote-data ........................................................................................................................................3-162 clear lldp statistics ...............................................................................................................................................3-161 clear logging buffered ..........................................................................................................................................6-27 clear mac-addr-table .............................................................................................................................................6-27 clear pass ..................................................................................................................................................................6-28 clear port-channel ..................................................................................................................................................6-28 clear radius statistics .............................................................................................................................................3-63 clear traplog .............................................................................................................................................................6-28 clear vlan ..................................................................................................................................................................6-28 client-identifier .......................................................................................................................................................6-41 client-name ..............................................................................................................................................................6-42 clock timezone ........................................................................................................................................................6-37

10-2 Command List v1.0, July 2009


configuration .............................................................................................................................................................7-8 configuration (Captive Portal) ..............................................................................................................................9-5 conform-color .........................................................................................................................................................5-21 copy ............................................................................................................................................................................6-32 copy (pre-login banner) .......................................................................................................................................7-73 cos-queue min-bandwidth ....................................................................................................................................5-4 cos-queue strict ........................................................................................................................................................5-4 crypto certificate generate ..................................................................................................................................7-19 crypto key generate dsa .......................................................................................................................................7-20 crypto key generate rsa ........................................................................................................................................7-20 debug arp ..................................................................................................................................................................6-63 debug auto-voip .....................................................................................................................................................6-63 debug clear ...............................................................................................................................................................6-64 debug console .........................................................................................................................................................6-64 debug dot1x packet ...............................................................................................................................................6-65 debug igmpsnooping packet ..............................................................................................................................6-65 debug igmpsnooping packet receive ...............................................................................................................6-67 debug igmpsnooping packet transmit .............................................................................................................6-66 debug ip acl .............................................................................................................................................................6-68 debug ip dvmrp packet ........................................................................................................................................6-68 debug ip igmp packet ...........................................................................................................................................6-69 debug ip mcache packet ......................................................................................................................................6-69 debug ip pimdm packet .......................................................................................................................................6-70 debug ip pimsm packet ........................................................................................................................................6-71 debug ip vrrp ...........................................................................................................................................................6-71 debug ipv6 mcache packet .................................................................................................................................6-72 debug ipv6 mld packet .........................................................................................................................................6-72 debug ipv6 pimdm packet ..................................................................................................................................6-73 debug ipv6 pimsm packet ...................................................................................................................................6-73 debug isdp packet ................................................................................................................................................3-199 debug lacp packet ..................................................................................................................................................6-74 debug mldsnooping packet .................................................................................................................................6-74 debug ospf packet ..................................................................................................................................................6-75 debug ospfv3 packet .............................................................................................................................................6-77 debug ping packet .................................................................................................................................................6-78 debug rip packet .....................................................................................................................................................6-79 debug sflow packet ...............................................................................................................................................6-80 debug spanning-tree bpdu ..................................................................................................................................6-80 debug spanning-tree bpdu receive ...................................................................................................................6-81 debug spanning-tree bpdu transmit .................................................................................................................6-82



default-router ..........................................................................................................................................................6-42 delete ............................................................................................................................................................................6-4 deleteport (Global Config) .................................................................................................................................3-91 deleteport (Interface Config) .............................................................................................................................3-91 description ..................................................................................................................................................................3-4 diffserv ........................................................................................................................................................................5-9 disconnect ................................................................................................................................................................7-28 dns-server .................................................................................................................................................................6-43 domain-name ..........................................................................................................................................................6-46 dos-control all .......................................................................................................................................................3-180 dos-control firstfrag ............................................................................................................................................3-181 dos-control icmp ..................................................................................................................................................3-183 dos-control icmpfrag ..........................................................................................................................................3-189 dos-control icmpv4 .............................................................................................................................................3-188 dos-control icmpv6 .............................................................................................................................................3-189 dos-control l4port ................................................................................................................................................3-182 dos-control sipdip ................................................................................................................................................3-180 dos-control smacdmac .......................................................................................................................................3-183 dos-control tcpfinurgpsh ...................................................................................................................................3-187 dos-control tcpflag ..............................................................................................................................................3-182 dos-control tcpflagseq ........................................................................................................................................3-185 dos-control tcpfrag ..............................................................................................................................................3-181 dos-control tcpoffset ...........................................................................................................................................3-186 dos-control tcpport ..............................................................................................................................................3-184 dos-control tcpsyn ...............................................................................................................................................3-186 dos-control tcpsynfin ..........................................................................................................................................3-187 dos-control udpport .............................................................................................................................................3-184 dot1x guest-vlan .....................................................................................................................................................3-64 dot1x initialize ........................................................................................................................................................3-64 dot1x max-req .........................................................................................................................................................3-65 dot1x max-users .....................................................................................................................................................3-65 dot1x port-control ..................................................................................................................................................3-66 dot1x port-control all ...........................................................................................................................................3-66 dot1x re-authenticate ............................................................................................................................................3-67 dot1x re-authentication ........................................................................................................................................3-67 dot1x system-auth-control ..................................................................................................................................3-68 dot1x timeout ..........................................................................................................................................................3-68 dot1x unauthenticated-vlan ................................................................................................................................3-69 dot1x user .................................................................................................................................................................3-70 drop ............................................................................................................................................................................5-20



dvlan-tunnel ethertype .........................................................................................................................................3-45 enable (Privileged EXEC access) ......................................................................................................................7-4 enable authentication ............................................................................................................................................7-10 enable password .....................................................................................................................................................6-29 enable ...........................................................................................................................................................................9-1 enable (Instance) .......................................................................................................................................................9-6 encapsulation ..........................................................................................................................................................4-13 ezconfig ......................................................................................................................................................................7-2 filedescr ......................................................................................................................................................................6-5 group ............................................................................................................................................................................9-8 hardware-address ...................................................................................................................................................6-43 hashing-mode ........................................................................................................................................................3-106 host .............................................................................................................................................................................6-44 http port .......................................................................................................................................................................9-2 https port .....................................................................................................................................................................9-2 idle-timeout .............................................................................................................................................................9-12 interface ......................................................................................................................................................................3-2 interface (Captive Portal) .....................................................................................................................................9-13 interface lag ...............................................................................................................................................................3-3 interface range ..........................................................................................................................................................3-2 interface vlan .............................................................................................................................................................3-3 ip access-group .......................................................................................................................................................5-41 ip access-list ............................................................................................................................................................5-39 ip access-list rename .............................................................................................................................................5-40 ip address ....................................................................................................................................................................4-9 ip arp inspection filter ........................................................................................................................................3-133 ip arp inspection limit ........................................................................................................................................3-132 ip arp inspection trust .........................................................................................................................................3-132 ip arp inspection validate ..................................................................................................................................3-131 ip arp inspection vlan .........................................................................................................................................3-130 ip arp inspection vlan logging .........................................................................................................................3-131 ip dhcp bootp automatic ......................................................................................................................................6-50 ip dhcp conflict logging ......................................................................................................................................6-50 ip dhcp excluded-address ....................................................................................................................................6-48 ip dhcp ping packets .............................................................................................................................................6-49 ip dhcp pool .............................................................................................................................................................6-41 ip dhcp snooping ..................................................................................................................................................3-119 ip dhcp snooping binding .................................................................................................................................3-121 ip dhcp snooping database ................................................................................................................................3-120 ip dhcp snooping database write-delay ........................................................................................................3-121



ip dhcp snooping limit .......................................................................................................................................3-122 ip dhcp snooping log-invalid ...........................................................................................................................3-123 ip dhcp snooping trust ........................................................................................................................................3-123 ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address ...........................................................................................................3-120 ip dhcp snooping vlan ........................................................................................................................................3-119 ip domain list ..........................................................................................................................................................6-56 ip domain lookup ...................................................................................................................................................6-55 ip domain name ......................................................................................................................................................6-56 ip domain retry .......................................................................................................................................................6-58 ip domain timeout .................................................................................................................................................6-59 ip helper-address ....................................................................................................................................................4-28 ip helper-address (Global Config) ...................................................................................................................4-27 ip helper-address discard ....................................................................................................................................4-29 ip host ........................................................................................................................................................................6-57 ip http authentication ............................................................................................................................................7-23 ip http java ...............................................................................................................................................................7-22 ip http secure-port .................................................................................................................................................7-26 ip http secure-protocol .........................................................................................................................................7-27 ip http secure-server .............................................................................................................................................7-21 ip http secure-session hard-timeout .................................................................................................................7-25 ip http secure-session maxsessions ..................................................................................................................7-24 ip http secure-session soft-timeout ..................................................................................................................7-25 ip http server ...........................................................................................................................................................7-21 ip http session hard-timeout ...............................................................................................................................7-22 ip http session maxsessions ................................................................................................................................7-23 ip http session soft-timeout ................................................................................................................................7-24 ip https authentication ..........................................................................................................................................7-26 ip icmp echo-reply ................................................................................................................................................4-31 ip icmp error-interval ...........................................................................................................................................4-31 ip igmpsnooping unknown-multicast ...........................................................................................................3-144 ip irdp ........................................................................................................................................................................4-20 ip irdp address ........................................................................................................................................................4-21 ip irdp holdtime ......................................................................................................................................................4-21 ip irdp maxadvertinterval ....................................................................................................................................4-22 ip irdp minadvertinterval ....................................................................................................................................4-22 ip irdp preference ...................................................................................................................................................4-23 ip mtu .........................................................................................................................................................................4-12 ip name server ........................................................................................................................................................6-57 ip netdirbcast ...........................................................................................................................................................4-11 ip proxy-arp ...............................................................................................................................................................4-2



ip redirects ...............................................................................................................................................................4-30 ip route ........................................................................................................................................................................4-9 ip route default .......................................................................................................................................................4-10 ip route distance .....................................................................................................................................................4-11 ip routing ....................................................................................................................................................................4-8 ip ssh ..........................................................................................................................................................................7-16 ip ssh protocol ........................................................................................................................................................7-17 ip ssh server enable ...............................................................................................................................................7-17 ip telnet server enable ..........................................................................................................................................7-11 ip unreachables .......................................................................................................................................................4-30 ip verify binding ..................................................................................................................................................3-122 ip verify source .....................................................................................................................................................3-124 ipv6 access-list .......................................................................................................................................................5-44 ipv6 access-list rename ........................................................................................................................................5-45 ipv6 host ...................................................................................................................................................................6-58 ipv6 traffic-filter ....................................................................................................................................................5-46 isdp advertise-v2 ..................................................................................................................................................3-194 isdp enable .............................................................................................................................................................3-195 isdp holdtime .........................................................................................................................................................3-194 isdp run ...................................................................................................................................................................3-193 isdp timer ................................................................................................................................................................3-194 key ..............................................................................................................................................................................7-69 lacp actor admin .....................................................................................................................................................3-93 lacp actor admin key ............................................................................................................................................3-93 lacp actor admin state individual .....................................................................................................................3-94 lacp actor admin state longtimeout ..................................................................................................................3-94 lacp actor admin state passive ...........................................................................................................................3-95 lacp actor port priority .........................................................................................................................................3-96 lacp actor system priority ...................................................................................................................................3-96 lacp admin key .......................................................................................................................................................3-92 lacp collector max-delay .....................................................................................................................................3-92 lacp partner admin key ........................................................................................................................................3-97 lacp partner admin state individual .................................................................................................................3-97 lacp partner admin state longtimeout ..............................................................................................................3-98 lacp partner admin state passive .......................................................................................................................3-99 lacp partner port id ................................................................................................................................................3-99 lacp partner port priority ...................................................................................................................................3-100 lacp partner system id ........................................................................................................................................3-101 lacp partner system priority .............................................................................................................................3-101 lease ............................................................................................................................................................................6-44



line ................................................................................................................................................................................7-8 lldp med ..................................................................................................................................................................3-168 lldp med all ............................................................................................................................................................3-170 lldp med confignotification ..............................................................................................................................3-169 lldp med confignotification all ........................................................................................................................3-170 lldp med faststartrepeatcount ...........................................................................................................................3-171 lldp med transmit-tlv ..........................................................................................................................................3-169 lldp med transmit-tlv all ....................................................................................................................................3-171 lldp notification ....................................................................................................................................................3-160 lldp notification-interval ...................................................................................................................................3-161 lldp receive ............................................................................................................................................................3-158 lldp timers ..............................................................................................................................................................3-158 lldp transmit ..........................................................................................................................................................3-158 lldp transmit-mgmt .............................................................................................................................................3-160 lldp transmit-tlv ....................................................................................................................................................3-159 locale ..........................................................................................................................................................................9-13 logging buffered .....................................................................................................................................................6-18 logging buffered wrap ..........................................................................................................................................6-19 logging cli-command ...........................................................................................................................................6-19 logging console ......................................................................................................................................................6-20 logging host .............................................................................................................................................................6-20 logging host remove .............................................................................................................................................6-21 logging persistent ..................................................................................................................................................6-24 logging syslog .........................................................................................................................................................6-21 login authentication ................................................................................................................................................7-9 logout .........................................................................................................................................................................6-29 mac access-group ..................................................................................................................................................5-35 mac access-list extended .....................................................................................................................................5-33 mac access-list extended rename .....................................................................................................................5-33 macfilter ..................................................................................................................................................................3-114 macfilter adddest .................................................................................................................................................3-115 macfilter adddest all ...........................................................................................................................................3-116 macfilter addsrc ....................................................................................................................................................3-117 macfilter addsrc all ..............................................................................................................................................3-117 mark cos ...................................................................................................................................................................5-22 mark ip-precedence ...............................................................................................................................................5-23 match any .................................................................................................................................................................5-12 match class-map .....................................................................................................................................................5-12 match cos ..................................................................................................................................................................5-13 match destination-address mac .........................................................................................................................5-14



match dstip ...............................................................................................................................................................5-14 match dstip6 ............................................................................................................................................................5-15 match dstl4port .......................................................................................................................................................5-15 match ethertype ......................................................................................................................................................5-12 match ip dscp ..........................................................................................................................................................5-15 match ip precedence .............................................................................................................................................5-16 match ip tos .............................................................................................................................................................5-16 match ip6flowlbl ....................................................................................................................................................5-14 match protocol ........................................................................................................................................................5-17 match source-address mac ..................................................................................................................................5-18 match srcip ...............................................................................................................................................................5-18 match srcip6 ............................................................................................................................................................5-18 match srcl4port .......................................................................................................................................................5-18 max-bandwidth-down ............................................................................................................................................9-9 max-bandwidth-up ..................................................................................................................................................9-9 max-input-octets ....................................................................................................................................................9-10 max-output-octets ..................................................................................................................................................9-11 max-total-octets ......................................................................................................................................................9-11 member .......................................................................................................................................................................2-2 mirror .........................................................................................................................................................................5-20 mode dot1q-tunnel ................................................................................................................................................3-45 mode dvlan-tunnel ................................................................................................................................................3-46 monitor session ....................................................................................................................................................3-112 movemanagement ...................................................................................................................................................2-3 mtu ................................................................................................................................................................................3-5 name .............................................................................................................................................................................9-6 netbios-name-server .............................................................................................................................................6-46 netbios-node-type ..................................................................................................................................................6-47 network (DHCP Pool Config) ...........................................................................................................................6-45 network javamode ...................................................................................................................................................7-6 network mac-address ..............................................................................................................................................7-5 network mac-type ....................................................................................................................................................7-5 network mgmt_vlan ..............................................................................................................................................3-30 network parms ..........................................................................................................................................................7-4 network protocol ......................................................................................................................................................7-5 next-server ...............................................................................................................................................................6-47 no monitor ..............................................................................................................................................................3-113 option .........................................................................................................................................................................6-48 passwords aging .....................................................................................................................................................7-35 passwords history ..................................................................................................................................................7-35



passwords lock-out ...............................................................................................................................................7-36 passwords min-length ..........................................................................................................................................7-34 permit ip host mac host .....................................................................................................................................3-134 ping .............................................................................................................................................................................6-29 police-simple ...........................................................................................................................................................5-23 policy-map ...............................................................................................................................................................5-24 policy-map rename ...............................................................................................................................................5-25 port .............................................................................................................................................................................7-69 port lacpmode .......................................................................................................................................................3-103 port lacpmode enable all ...................................................................................................................................3-103 port lacptimeout (Global Config) ...................................................................................................................3-104 port lacptimeout (Interface Config) ..............................................................................................................3-104 port-channel .............................................................................................................................................................3-90 port-channel adminmode ..................................................................................................................................3-105 port-channel linktrap ..........................................................................................................................................3-105 port-channel load-balance ................................................................................................................................3-106 port-channel name ...............................................................................................................................................3-108 port-channel static ...............................................................................................................................................3-102 port-channel system priority ............................................................................................................................3-108 port-security ..........................................................................................................................................................3-154 port-security mac-address .................................................................................................................................3-155 port-security mac-address move .....................................................................................................................3-156 port-security max-dynamic ..............................................................................................................................3-154 port-security max-static .....................................................................................................................................3-155 priority .......................................................................................................................................................................7-70 private-group name ...............................................................................................................................................3-54 protocol group ........................................................................................................................................................3-37 protocol vlan group ...............................................................................................................................................3-38 protocol vlan group all .........................................................................................................................................3-39 protocol .......................................................................................................................................................................9-7 quit ..............................................................................................................................................................................6-31 radius accounting mode .......................................................................................................................................7-53 radius server attribute ...........................................................................................................................................7-53 radius server host ...................................................................................................................................................7-54 radius server key ....................................................................................................................................................7-56 radius server msgauth ..........................................................................................................................................7-57 radius server primary ...........................................................................................................................................7-57 radius server retransmit .......................................................................................................................................7-58 radius server timeout ............................................................................................................................................7-58 redirect ......................................................................................................................................................................5-21



redirect (Captive Portal) .........................................................................................................................................9-8 redirect-url .................................................................................................................................................................9-9 reload .........................................................................................................................................................................6-31 reload (Stack) ............................................................................................................................................................2-6 routing .........................................................................................................................................................................4-8 save .............................................................................................................................................................................6-31 script apply ..............................................................................................................................................................7-72 script delete ..............................................................................................................................................................7-72 script list ...................................................................................................................................................................7-72 script show ...............................................................................................................................................................7-73 script validate ..........................................................................................................................................................7-73 serial baudrate ...........................................................................................................................................................7-8 serial timeout .............................................................................................................................................................7-9 service dhcp .............................................................................................................................................................6-49 service-policy ..........................................................................................................................................................5-25 session-limit ............................................................................................................................................................7-13 session-timeout .......................................................................................................................................................7-13 session-timeout (Captive Portal) .......................................................................................................................9-12 set garp timer join ..................................................................................................................................................3-56 set garp timer leave ...............................................................................................................................................3-56 set garp timer leaveall ..........................................................................................................................................3-57 set gmrp adminmode ............................................................................................................................................3-60 set gmrp interfacemode .......................................................................................................................................3-61 set gvrp adminmode .............................................................................................................................................3-58 set gvrp interfacemode ........................................................................................................................................3-59 set igmp ...................................................................................................................................................................3-138 set igmp fast-leave ..............................................................................................................................................3-140 set igmp groupmembership-interval .............................................................................................................3-141 set igmp interfacemode .....................................................................................................................................3-140 set igmp maxresponse ........................................................................................................................................3-142 set igmp mcrtrexpiretime ..................................................................................................................................3-142 set igmp mrouter ..................................................................................................................................................3-143 set igmp mrouter interface ................................................................................................................................3-144 set igmp querier ....................................................................................................................................................3-148 set igmp querier election participate .............................................................................................................3-150 set igmp querier query-interval .......................................................................................................................3-149 set igmp querier timer expiry ..........................................................................................................................3-149 set igmp querier version ....................................................................................................................................3-150 set prompt .................................................................................................................................................................7-74 set slot disable ..........................................................................................................................................................2-4



set slot power ............................................................................................................................................................2-5 sflow poller ..............................................................................................................................................................6-86 sflow receiver .........................................................................................................................................................6-84 sflow sampler ..........................................................................................................................................................6-85 show access-lists ....................................................................................................................................................5-43 show arp .....................................................................................................................................................................4-6 show arp access-list ............................................................................................................................................3-138 show arp brief ...........................................................................................................................................................4-7 show arp switch ........................................................................................................................................................4-7 show arp switch ........................................................................................................................................................6-6 show authentication methods ............................................................................................................................3-71 show autoinstall .......................................................................................................................................................6-2 show auto-voip .......................................................................................................................................................5-49 show bootpdhcprelay ...........................................................................................................................................4-26 show bootvar .............................................................................................................................................................6-5 show captive-portal client statistics ................................................................................................................9-20 show captive-portal client status ......................................................................................................................9-19 show captive-portal configuration client status ...........................................................................................9-22 show captive-portal configuration interface .................................................................................................9-15 show captive-portal configuration locales ....................................................................................................9-18 show captive-portal configuration status .......................................................................................................9-17 show captive-portal configuration ...................................................................................................................9-14 show captive-portal interface client status ....................................................................................................9-21 show captive-portal interface configuration status ....................................................................................9-23 show captive-portal status ....................................................................................................................................9-4 show captive-portal trapflags ............................................................................................................................9-19 show captive-portal user .....................................................................................................................................9-29 show captive-portal .................................................................................................................................................9-3 show capture packets ...........................................................................................................................................6-62 show class-map ......................................................................................................................................................5-26 show classofservice dot1p-mapping .................................................................................................................5-5 show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping ..............................................................................................................5-6 show classofservice ip-precedence-mapping .................................................................................................5-6 show classofservice trust ......................................................................................................................................5-7 show clock ...............................................................................................................................................................6-40 show diffserv ...........................................................................................................................................................5-27 show diffserv service ...........................................................................................................................................5-30 show diffserv service brief .................................................................................................................................5-30 show dos-control .................................................................................................................................................3-190 show dot1q-tunnel .................................................................................................................................................3-46



show dot1x ...............................................................................................................................................................3-71 show dot1x clients .................................................................................................................................................3-75 show dot1x users ...................................................................................................................................................3-76 show dvlan-tunnel .................................................................................................................................................3-47 show eventlog ...........................................................................................................................................................6-7 show forwardingdb agetime ............................................................................................................................3-192 show garp .................................................................................................................................................................3-57 show gmrp configuration ....................................................................................................................................3-62 show gvrp configuration ...............................................................................................